CONTENTS

[**4.0** **INVENTORY 4-1**](#inventory)

[4.1 Water Systems 4-1](#water-systems)

[4.1.1 Model Changes for Water System
4-1](#model-changes-for-water-system)

[4.1.2 Modify Water System Page Flow
4-1](#modify-water-system-page-flow)

[4.1.3 Water Purchases/Wholesales 4-91](#water-purchaseswholesales)

[4.1.4 Add New Water System 4-118](#add-new-water-system)

[4.1.5 Add Basic Inventory Page Flow
4-124](#add-basic-inventory-page-flow)

[4.2 Water System Facilities 4-164](#water-system-facilities)

[4.2.1 Model Changes for Water System Facility
4-164](#model-changes-for-water-system-facility)

[4.2.2 Water System Facilities Page Flows
4-164](#water-system-facilities-page-flows)

[4.3 Processed Triggered by Changes to Inventory Information
4-376](#processed-triggered-by-changes-to-inventory-information)

[4.3.1 Federal Type Code Reclassification
4-376](#federal-type-code-reclassification)

[4.3.2 TCR Sample Schedule Evaluation
4-391](#tcr-sample-schedule-evaluation)

[4.3.3 Water System Information 4-399](#water-system-information)

**EXHIBITS**

[**Exhibit 4-1.** Inventory Menu Page 4-2](#__RefHeading___Toc139687324)

[**Exhibit 4-2.** Water System Search Page
4-3](#__RefHeading___Toc139687325)

[**Exhibit 4-3.** Water System Maintenance List
4-8](#__RefHeading___Toc139687326)

[**Exhibit 4-4.** Delete Water System 4-9](#__RefHeading___Toc139687327)

[**Exhibit 4-5.** Water System Modification
4-12](#__RefHeading___Toc139687328)

[**Exhibit 4-6.** Water System Maintenance
4-25](#__RefHeading___Toc139687329)

[**Exhibit 4-7.** Delete Water System Flow Rate
4-31](#__RefHeading___Toc139687330)

[**Exhibit 4-8.** Delete Water System Measure
4-33](#__RefHeading___Toc139687331)

[**Exhibit 4-9.** Delete Water System Indicator
4-34](#__RefHeading___Toc139687332)

[**Exhibit 4-10.** Water System Flow Rate Maintenance
4-37](#__RefHeading___Toc139687333)

[**Exhibit 4-11.** Water System Measure Maintenance
4-40](#__RefHeading___Toc139687334)

[**Exhibit 4-12.** Water System Indicator Maintenance
4-43](#__RefHeading___Toc139687335)

[**Exhibit 4-13.** Population Served Maintenance List
4-46](#__RefHeading___Toc139687336)

[**Exhibit 4-14.** Delete Annual Operating Period
4-47](#__RefHeading___Toc139687337)

[**Exhibit 4-15.** Annual Operating Period Maintenance
4-49](#__RefHeading___Toc139687338)

[**Exhibit 4-16.** Delete Population Served
4-52](#__RefHeading___Toc139687339)

[**Exhibit 4-17.** Population Served Maintenance
4-55](#__RefHeading___Toc139687340)

[**Exhibit 4-18.** Service Connection Maintenance List
4-58](#__RefHeading___Toc139687341)

[**Exhibit 4-19.** Delete Service Connection
4-59](#__RefHeading___Toc139687342)

[**Exhibit 4-20.** Service Connection Maintenance
4-61](#__RefHeading___Toc139687343)

[**Exhibit 4-21.** Water System Related POC Maintenance List
4-64](#__RefHeading___Toc139687344)

[**Exhibit 4-22.** Delete Point of Contact
4-66](#__RefHeading___Toc139687345)

[**Exhibit 4-23.** Water System Related POC Maintenance
4-69](#__RefHeading___Toc139687346)

[**Exhibit 4-24.** More POC Types 4-75](#__RefHeading___Toc139687347)

[**Exhibit 4-25.** Related Regulating Agency Maintenance List
4-77](#__RefHeading___Toc139687348)

[**Exhibit 4-26.** Delete Regulating Agency Association
4-78](#__RefHeading___Toc139687349)

[**Exhibit 4-27.** Related Regulating Agency Maintenance
4-80](#__RefHeading___Toc139687350)

[**Exhibit 4-28.** Related Geographic Area Maintenance List
4-83](#__RefHeading___Toc139687351)

[**Exhibit 4-29.** Delete Related Geographic Area Association
4-85](#__RefHeading___Toc139687352)

[**Exhibit 4-30.** Related Service Area Maintenance List
4-88](#__RefHeading___Toc139687353)

[**Exhibit 4-31.** Delete Related Service Area Association
4-90](#__RefHeading___Toc139687354)

[**Exhibit 4-32.** Obsolete Water Purchase Fields (Not Displayed)
4-92](#__RefHeading___Toc139687355)

[**Exhibit 4-33.** Water Purchases/Wholesales Maintenance List
4-93](#__RefHeading___Toc139687356)

[**Exhibit 4-34.** Delete Water Purchase
4-97](#__RefHeading___Toc139687357)

[**Exhibit 4-35.** Receiving Facility/Water Purchase Maintenance
4-102](#__RefHeading___Toc139687358)

[**Exhibit 4-36.** Add New Water System
4-118](#__RefHeading___Toc139687359)

[**Exhibit 4-37.** Search New Water System
4-125](#__RefHeading___Toc139687360)

[**Exhibit 4-38.** Add Basic Inventory
4-128](#__RefHeading___Toc139687361)

[**Exhibit 4-39.** Contact Types Dialog Box
4-139](#__RefHeading___Toc139687362)

[**Exhibit 4-40.** Water System Facility Basic Information
4-142](#__RefHeading___Toc139687363)

[**Exhibit 4-41.** Water System Facility Maintenance List
4-165](#__RefHeading___Toc139687364)

[**Exhibit 4-42.** Delete Water System Facility
4-168](#__RefHeading___Toc139687365)

[**Exhibit 4-43.** Water System Facility Modification
4-171](#__RefHeading___Toc139687366)

[**Exhibit 4-44.** Delete WSF Annual Operating Period
4-178](#__RefHeading___Toc139687367)

[**Exhibit 4-45.** Value for the WSF State Asgn ID
4-180](#__RefHeading___Toc139687368)

[**Exhibit 4-46.** WSF Annual Operating Period Maintenance
4-184](#__RefHeading___Toc139687369)

[**Exhibit 4-47.** Water System Facility Sampling Point Maintenance List
4-189](#__RefHeading___Toc139687370)

[**Exhibit 4-48.** Delete Sampling Point
4-192](#__RefHeading___Toc139687371)

[**Exhibit 4-49.** Sampling Point Maintenance
4-195](#__RefHeading___Toc139687372)

[**Exhibit 4-49a.** Sampling Point Designation Maintenance
4-202](#__RefHeading___Toc139687373)

[**Exhibit 4-50.** River Reach Information
4-204](#__RefHeading___Toc139687374)

[**Exhibit 4-51.** Storage Facility Maintenance
4-206](#__RefHeading___Toc139687375)

[**Exhibit 4-52.** Delete Flow Rate 4-211](#__RefHeading___Toc139687376)

[**Exhibit 4-53.** Delete WSF Measures
4-212](#__RefHeading___Toc139687377)

[**Exhibit 4-54.** Delete WSF Indicators
4-214](#__RefHeading___Toc139687378)

[**Exhibit 4-55.** Well Detail Maintenance
4-216](#__RefHeading___Toc139687379)

[**Exhibit 4-56.** Delete Well Casing
4-222](#__RefHeading___Toc139687380)

[**Exhibit 4-57.** Delete Well Screen
4-224](#__RefHeading___Toc139687381)

[**Exhibit 4-58.** Well Casing Maintenance
4-229](#__RefHeading___Toc139687382)

[**Exhibit 4-59.** Well Screen Maintenance
4-232](#__RefHeading___Toc139687383)

[**Exhibit 4-60.** Assign Well Screen ID
4-233](#__RefHeading___Toc139687384)

[**Exhibit 4-61.** Other Water System Facility Maintenance
4-238](#__RefHeading___Toc139687385)

[**Exhibit 4-62.** Water System Facility Flow Rate Maintenance
4-245](#__RefHeading___Toc139687386)

[**Exhibit 4-63.** Water System Facility Measures Maintenance
4-248](#__RefHeading___Toc139687387)

[**Exhibit 4-64.** Water System Facility Indicator Maintenance
4-251](#__RefHeading___Toc139687388)

[**Exhibit 4-65.** Water System Facility Security Maintenance List
4-254](#__RefHeading___Toc139687389)

[**Exhibit 4-66.** Delete Security Status Record
4-256](#__RefHeading___Toc139687390)

[**Exhibit 4-67.** Water System Facility Security Maintenance
4-258](#__RefHeading___Toc139687391)

[**Exhibit 4-68.** Water System Facility Flows Maintenance List
4-262](#__RefHeading___Toc139687392)

[**Exhibit 4-69.** Delete WSF Flow 4-264](#__RefHeading___Toc139687393)

[**Exhibit 4-70.** Water System Facility Flows Maintenance
4-266](#__RefHeading___Toc139687394)

[**Exhibit 4-71.** Water System Facility Related POC Maintenance List
4-271](#__RefHeading___Toc139687395)

[**Exhibit 4-72.** Delete Point of Contact
4-273](#__RefHeading___Toc139687396)

[**Exhibit 4-73.** Water System Facility Related POC Maintenance
4-276](#__RefHeading___Toc139687397)

[**Exhibit 4-74.** More POC Types 4-283](#__RefHeading___Toc139687398)

[**Exhibit 4-75.** Water System Facility Locational Data Maintenance
4-287](#__RefHeading___Toc139687399)

[**Exhibit 4-76.** Locational Data Info Delete Confirm
4-305](#__RefHeading___Toc139687400)

[**Exhibit 4-77.** Cadastral Info Delete Confirm
4-306](#__RefHeading___Toc139687401)

[**Exhibit 4-78.** Sampling Point Maintenance List
4-307](#__RefHeading___Toc139687402)

[**Exhibit 4-79.** Delete Sampling Point
4-309](#__RefHeading___Toc139687403)

[**Exhibit 4-80.** Treatment Plant Maintenance
4-313](#__RefHeading___Toc139687404)

[**Exhibit 4-81.** Delete Treatment Unit
4-320](#__RefHeading___Toc139687405)

[**Exhibit 4-82.** Delete Treatment Unit Flow
4-322](#__RefHeading___Toc139687406)

[**Exhibit 4-83.** Treatment Unit Flow Maintenance
4-324](#__RefHeading___Toc139687407)

[**Exhibit 4-84.** Microbial Removal Maintenance
4-328](#__RefHeading___Toc139687408)

[**Exhibit 4-85.** Delete Analyte Removal/Inactivation
4-336](#__RefHeading___Toc139687409)

[**Exhibit 4-86.** TP Analyte Removal/Inactivation Maintenance
4-338](#__RefHeading___Toc139687410)

[**Exhibit 4-87.** Treatment Unit Maintenance
4-344](#__RefHeading___Toc139687411)

[**Exhibit 4-88.** Delete Treatment Unit Flow Rate
4-347](#__RefHeading___Toc139687412)

[**Exhibit 4-89.** Delete Treatment Unit Measure
4-349](#__RefHeading___Toc139687413)

[**Exhibit 4-90.** Delete Treatment Unit Indicator
4-350](#__RefHeading___Toc139687414)

[**Exhibit 4-91.** Treatment Unit Flow Rate Maintenance
4-353](#__RefHeading___Toc139687415)

[**Exhibit 4-92.** Treatment Unit Measure Maintenance
4-356](#__RefHeading___Toc139687416)

[**Exhibit 4-93.** Treatment Unit Indicator Maintenance
4-359](#__RefHeading___Toc139687417)

[**Exhibit 4-94.** Unit Treatment Objective/Process Association
Maintenance List 4-362](#__RefHeading___Toc139687418)

[**Exhibit 4-95.** Delete Unit-Treatment Objective/Process Association
4-365](#__RefHeading___Toc139687419)

[**Exhibit 4-96.** Unit Treatment Objective/Process Association
Maintenance 4-366](#__RefHeading___Toc139687420)

[**Exhibit 4-97.** Primary Confirm Dialog Box
4-368](#__RefHeading___Toc139687421)

[**Exhibit 4-98.** Delete Treatment Objective/Process Associated Analyte
4-370](#__RefHeading___Toc139687422)

[**Exhibit 4-99.** Analyte Unit Treatment Objective/Process Maintenance
4-372](#__RefHeading___Toc139687423)

[**Exhibit 4-100.** Treatment Unit Selection List
4-375](#__RefHeading___Toc139687424)

[**Exhibit 4-101.** Water System Type Maintenance
4-388](#__RefHeading___Toc139687425)

[**Exhibit 4-102.** Water System State Type
4-389](#__RefHeading___Toc139687426)

[**Exhibit 4-103.** Water System Type Selection
4-390](#__RefHeading___Toc139687427)

[**Exhibit 4-104.** TCR Sample Schedule Modification
4-392](#__RefHeading___Toc139687428)

[**Exhibit 4-105.** Water System Information
4-400](#__RefHeading___Toc139687429)

This page is intentionally left blank.

# INVENTORY

The *Inventory* component is the part of SDWIS/STATE that allows the
establishment and maintenance of water systems, water system facilities,
and information related to these entities.

## Water Systems

This section describes the pages used to maintain water systems, their
relationships, and all supporting inventory objects except water system
facilities, which are documented in Section 4.2.

### Model Changes for Water System

No Model changes are intended for this release.

### Modify Water System Page Flow

From the *SDWIS/STATE Home Page Inventory* menu item (Exhibit 4-1), the
following three options are presented:

Modify Water System.

Add New Water System.

Add Basic Inventory.

  ---------------------------------------------------- ----------------------------------------------------
  ![](media/image1.png){width="1.5986111111111112in"   ![](media/image2.png){width="3.9993055555555554in"
  height="4.1194444444444445in"}                       height="2.3354166666666667in"}

  ---------------------------------------------------- ----------------------------------------------------

[]{#__RefHeading___Toc139687324 .anchor}**Exhibit 4-1.** Inventory Menu
Page

#### Water System Search

When the user clicks on the Modify Water System menu item, the Water
System Search page (Exhibit 4-2) will be presented where the user can
enter criteria to search for a particular water system.

The user's current Water System Group or Regulating Agency will be used
as the implied search criteria in all searches for Water System records
unless otherwise noted in the design of the invoking page. This means
that the software will retrieve only water systems linked to the user's
current Water System Group or Regulating Agency. If an exact Water
System No. or Water System Name is entered, the software will validate
that it belongs to the user's current Water System Group or Regulating
Agency.

  ---------------------------------------------------- ----------------------------------------------------
  ![](media/image1.png){width="1.5986111111111112in"   ![](media/image3.png){width="3.8784722222222223in"
  height="4.1194444444444445in"}                       height="2.704861111111111in"}

  ---------------------------------------------------- ----------------------------------------------------

[]{#__RefHeading___Toc139687325 .anchor}**Exhibit 4-2.** Water System
Search Page

Only one entry field may be valued at a time in the Water System Group
box. If the Water System No. or Name fields are valued, they are
mutually exclusive and disable the Filter Group box entry fields. If
there is no entry in either the Water System No. or Name fields, one or
more of the fields in the Field Criteria Group box may be valued.

[Protected Field:]{.underline}

*WS Group Used*

*or*

*Regulating Agency Used*

Will display the user's current designation of either Water System Group
followed by the name of the water system group or Regulating Agency Used
followed by the name of the regulating agency.

[Entry Fields:]{.underline}

[Water System Group Box:]{.underline}

*Water System No*. Will be used to match the number of the water system.
Water System No. will consist of two fields, the first will be
pre-filled with the two-character state code which the user will be able
to change, followed by a second field for entry of all or part of the
seven alphanumeric characters that make up the desired water system's
number (for example: **NE** 1234567). A complete number or partial entry
will be used to search. **Note:** The user will have to click in the
first field to change it.

> If an exact match is found using the Water System No., the Water
> System Modification page will be presented, unless the Water System is
> new, (i.e., D_NEW_WS_FLAG is set to "Y"); in this case, the user will
> be presented the Add Basic Inventory page.
>
> If an exact match is not found, the software will present the Water
> System Maintenance List page in single-select mode. The resulting
> Water System Maintenance List page will display the closest match to
> the number that was entered at the top and sorted by Water System No.
> Once a selection is made from the Water System Maintenance List, the
> Water System Modification page will be presented unless the Water
> System is new, (i.e., D_NEW_WS_FLAG is set to "Y"); in this case, the
> user will be presented the Add Basic Inventory page.
>
> Valuing the Water System No. field will disable entry for all other
> fields on the Water System Search page. Removing the entry will enable
> entry in the other fields.

Water System No. will be an optional field.

*Water System*

*Name* Will be used to start an equal to or greater than search in the
database on the Name field of the water system. A partial value can be
provided here.

> If the user enters the wildcard (\*) to start the Water System Name,
> (e.g., \*city), the LIKE function will be enabled and search for all
> Water Systems names containing the value (city) that followed the \*.
> The software will NOT support a search where the wildcard is in
> different locations for the search, (i.e., \*city\*, or city\*).
>
> If an exact match is found using the Water System Name, the Water
> System Modification page will be presented, unless the Water System is
> new (i.e., D_NEW_WS_FLAG is set to "Y"). In this case, the user will
> be presented the Add Basic Inventory page.
>
> If an exact match is not found, the software will present the Water
> System Maintenance List page, in single-select mode. The resulting
> Water System Maintenance List page will display the closest match to
> the name that was entered at the top and sorted by Water System Name.
> Once a selection is made from the Water System Maintenance List, the
> Water System Modification page will be presented unless the Water
> System is new (i.e., D_NEW_WS_FLAG is set to "Y"). In this case, the
> user will be presented the Add Basic Inventory page.
>
> Valuing the Name field will disable entry for all other fields on the
> Water System Search page. Removing the entry will enable entry in the
> other fields.

Name will be an optional field.

[Filter Criteria Group Box:]{.underline}

If the Water System No. or Name fields are not valued, the user may
value one or more of the fields in the Filter Criteria Group box to
narrow the number of water systems displayed on the Water System
Maintenance List page resulting from the search.

[Entry Fields:]{.underline}

*Activity Status* The Activity Status field can be used to display only
water systems with the activity type indicated in this field. The
selections available via the dropdown list will be:

> **Value Description**

All Types (Default)

A Active

I Inactive

P Proposed

*Federal Type* The Federal Type field can be used to display only water
systems with the federal water system type indicated in this field. The
selections available via the dropdown list will be:

**Value Description**

All Types (Default)

C Community

NTNC Non-Community Non-Transient

NC Non-Community Transient

NP Non-Public

NC + NTNC

C + NTNC

C + NC

C + NTNC + NC

[Buttons:]{.underline}

**Search** The actions described above for the Water System No. and
Water System Name fields will occur when the search button is selected.
If the user values fields in the Filter Criteria Group box, pressing
this button will invoke the Water System Maintenance List in
single-select only mode, based on the specified search criteria entered.
If the user has not entered any filter criteria, the resulting Water
System Maintenance List page will display all water systems associated
to the users current Water System Group or Regulating Agency. The
following are filtering permutations that will be available on this
search page:

Water System No. only (Water System Maintenance List page will default
sort by ascending Water System No.)

Water System Name only (Water System Maintenance List page will default
sort by alpha ascending Water System Name)

Activity Status only (Water System Maintenance List page will default
sort by alpha ascending Water System Name)

Federal Type only (Water System Maintenance List page will default sort
by alpha ascending Water System Name)

Activity Status + Federal Type only (Water System Maintenance List page
will default sort by alpha ascending Water System Name)

**Clear** Will clear all entries except the two-character state code and
the cursor moves to the second field of Water System No. **Note:** The
user will have to click in the first field to change it.

**Cancel** Will close the page.

**Help** Will invoke online Help for this page.

[Tab Sequence:]{.underline}

Water System No., (seven digit number field), Name, Activity Status,
Federal Type, **Search**, **Clear**, **Cancel**, **Help**.

#### 4.1.2.2 Water System Maintenance List {#water-system-maintenance-list .unnumbered}

The Water System Maintenance List page (Exhibit 4-3) will display a list
of water systems filtered by the search criteria provided. This page
will also serve as a Selection List page in single- or multi-select
mode, depending from which page the maintenance list was invoked.

Only water systems associated to the user's current Water System Group
or Regulating Agency will be displayed unless the design of the invoking
page states otherwise. Water Systems that have an activity status of
Deleted (D) or exist only for historical purposes
(D_History_Indicator_Code = \"H\") will not be displayed.

One thousand (1000) Water Systems are presented without subsequent user
action. More results can be viewed by using the **View/Next** menu item.
A Water System may be selected in the list box by highlighting it.

[Protected Fields:]{.underline}

*WS Group Used or*

*Regulating Agency*

*Used* Will display the users current designation of either Water System
Group followed by the name of the water system group or Regulating
Agency Used followed by the name of the regulating agency.

> **Note:** This field will be blank with no label if invoked as a
> selection list and user's current water system group or government
> agency is not used as part of the search criteria.

*Number of rows*

*resulting from search*

*criteria entered:* The value in this protected field will show the
number of water systems that met the search criteria.

*Number of rows*

*Displayed*: The value in this protected field will indicate the number
of water systems available for viewing in the list box via the vertical
scroll bar. The list will be display the first 1000 water systems that
met the search criteria. If the user chooses to view more water systems,
this will be allowed via the **View/Next**, **View/Previous** menu items
discussed later in this section.

*Number*

*of rows*

*selected:* If the Water System Maintenance List page was invoked as a
multi-select mode Selection page, this will display how many rows (Water
Systems) have been selected.

[List Columns:]{.underline}

Activity Status, Water System No., Name, Federal Primary Source, Federal
Type, State Type, Population.

[Default Sort Order:]{.underline}

If Water System Maintenance List page is invoked with no search
criteria, the default sort order will be by Water System name,
ascending. If maintenance list page is invoked with search criteria,
sort order will be dependent on the type of criteria provided. Details
on the changes in sort order are documented with the Water System Search
page.

[Menu Items:]{.underline}

**File**

*Exit* Will return the user to the invoking page.

**Edit** If the Water System Maintenance List was invoked for selection
of a Water System, the menu options **Edit/Add**, **Edit/Change**, and
**Edit/Delete** will be disabled. In the selection list flow, only the
**Edit/Select** and **Edit/Deselect** options will be available.

  ---------------------------------------------------- ----------------------------------------------------
  ![](media/image1.png){width="1.5986111111111112in"   ![](media/image4.png){width="3.9229166666666666in"
  height="4.1194444444444445in"}                       height="2.98125in"}

  ---------------------------------------------------- ----------------------------------------------------

[]{#__RefHeading___Toc139687326 .anchor}**Exhibit 4-3.** Water System
Maintenance List

> *Add* Will present the Add Water System page. This option will be
> available even if a row is selected on the list.
>
> *Change* Will present the Water System Modification page unless the
> water system is new (i.e., D_NEW_WS_FLAG is set to "Y"). If the water
> system highlighted is new, the user will be presented with the Add
> Basic Inventory page

This option will be available only when a row is selected in the list.

> A double-click in the list box will react as if a single-click
> highlight and this menu item was selected.

*Delete* Will present the Delete Water System dialog box (Exhibit 4-4),
requiring selection of **OK** or **Cancel**.

> This option will be available only when a row is selected in the list.

![](media/image5.png){width="5.936805555555556in"
height="2.7909722222222224in"}

[]{#__RefHeading___Toc139687327 .anchor}**Exhibit 4-4.** Delete Water
System

> [Delete Water System Buttons:]{.underline}

**OK** Will set the Activity_Status_Code to Deleted (D) and the
D_History_Indicator_Code to Historical (H) for the selected water system
in the WATER_SYSTEM table and update the D_Last_Update_Timestamp and
d_userid_code. A Water_System_History row will be created with the
before image of the selected water system. The tinwsys_d_last updt_ts
will be set to the water system's d_last_update_timestamp and the
tinwsys_d_userid_code will be set to the water system's d_userid_code
prior to these values being updated. The d_last_update_timestamp and
d_userid_code for both the water system and water system history rows
will be set to the current timestamp and User ID.

> All information related to the selected water system will be left
> intact in the database.
>
> The Water System Maintenance List will be represented, but the deleted
> Water System will no longer be displayed.

**Cancel** Will return the user to the Water System Maintenance List
page with no action taken on the selected water system.

*Select* Will return user to the previous page (from which the Water
System Maintenance list was invoked), with the Water System information
from the selected row populated on the invoking page.

This option will be available only if the Water System Maintenance List
page was invoked as a Selection page and only when one or more rows is
selected in the list.

**View**

> *Filter by* This option will open the standard filter parameter dialog
> box described in Chapter 1, allowing the user to filter out some of
> the records displayed on the list page by specifying a specific value
> for the filtering fields. Only rows that match the filtering criteria
> value will be displayed in the list.

**Note:** The number of rows displayed on the maintenance list page will
change to show the count of records resulting from the filter. Using
**View/Filter by** will enable **View/Refresh**.

> [Filter by Options:]{.underline}

Activity Status, Federal Primary Source, Federal Type, State Type,
Population.

*Next* If more than 1000 water systems have been found in the database
resulting from the search criteria provided, the next group of 1000 will
be loaded into the list box when the **View/Next** menu item is
selected.

> This option will be available only if more rows are available for
> display. Selecting this menu item will enable the **View/Previous**
> menu item.

*Previous* If more than 1000 water systems were found and the user has
requested to view the next 1000 via the **View/Next** menu item, the
**View/Previous** menu item will re-populate the list box with prior
group of 1000.

Once the initial 1000 water systems are displayed, the **View/Previous**
menu item will be disabled.

> *Refresh* Selecting **View/Refresh** will retrieve the unfiltered list
> (original search criteria).

*Search* Will present the Water System Search page (*prior search
criteria will still be present*). The user will be able to change or
enter new search criteria. This option will be useful if too many or too
few rows resulted from a previous search request.

> *Sort* Selecting this option will open the standard sort dialog box
> described in Chapter 1, allowing the user to modify the order of the
> displayed water systems. Three levels of sort will be supported.
>
> [Sort Order Selections:]{.underline}

Activity Status, Water System No., Name, Federal Primary Source, Federal
Type, State Type, Population.

**Help** Will invoke online Help for this page.

#### 4.1.2.3 Water System Modification {#water-system-modification .unnumbered}

The Water System Modification page (Exhibit 4-5) is described below.
This page will be accessible from the *SDWIS/STATE Home Page Inventory*
main menu via the Water System Search page and is a combination of the
SDWIS/STATE 8.0 Water System Modification 10-button window and the Water
System Maintenance window. The Water System Modification page contains
areas representing each of the primary topics available to document
characteristics of a water system.

[Protected Fields:]{.underline}

No., Federal Type, Federal Primary Source, Total Calculated Daily
Population, Record updated by, Record created by.

  -----------------------------------------------------------------------
  ![](media/image6.png){width="6.804861111111111in"
  height="8.370833333333334in"}

  -----------------------------------------------------------------------

[]{#__RefHeading___Toc139687328 .anchor}**Exhibit 4-5.** Water System
Modification

[Basic Information Group Box Entry Fields:]{.underline}

\[*Water System*\]

*Name* The name of the water system. Can be the formal, legal, or common
name used most generally to refer to the system.

> Name will be a mandatory field.

*Alternate*

*State No.* An account number used within selected state programs to
uniquely identify the water system. This number usually differs from the
Water System No. used by SDWIS/STATE and EPA to track water system
information. It may be associated by a state or county agency for the
purpose of tracking other regulatory requirements (e.g., food service
establishments, schools, hotels). This field has been expanded to accept
15 alphanumeric characters.

> Alternate State No. will be an optional field.

*Local Name* The common name, secondary name, or alias for the water
system.

> Local Name will be an optional field.

*Operating*

*Category* This entry is typically used by the state to maintain
information concerning operator licensing requirements, operator type
requirements, or treatment plant classification.

> Operating Category will be an optional field.

*Owner Type* Indicates the type of ownership. Permitted values include
the following:

**Value Description**

> L Local (Default)
>
> F Federal Govt
>
> M Mixed (public/private)
>
> N Native American
>
> P Private
>
> S State Govt
>
> \<Spaces\>
>
> Owner Type will be an optional field.

*Activity*

*Status* Will display the current activity status for the water system.
The selections available via the dropdown list will be:

> **Value Description**

A Active

I Inactive

P Proposed

> When the status is changed, (i.e., the original value of the field is
> Active and the user changes the field to Inactive), the status date
> will be set to current date and the following advisory message will be
> presented when the user tabs off the field: **As a result of status
> change, Status Date has been set to current date.** Once the user
> presses **OK** on the advisory message the user will be returned to
> the Water System Modification page. (R0033:A.4.1.2.3.a, B.4.1.2.3.a)
>
> Activity Status will be a mandatory field.

\[*Activity*\]

*Status Date* The date on which the water system became proposed,
active, or inactive.

> Status Date will be a mandatory field. It cannot be after the current
> date. It will be set to current date in change mode when the status
> field is modified. (B.4.1.2.3.b)

*Status*

*Reason Code* A System Administration-controlled code of the reason a
water system has the status indicated. This may be used to indicate why
a water system has been inactivated but also may be used to indicate why
it is active or proposed. The selections will be those available in the
TINPVALS table with Code name = "WSACTRSN."

> Status Reason Code will be an optional field.

*\[Activity\]*

*Status Reason* Provides space to enter a textual explanation of why a
water system is in the current status.

> Status Reason will be an optional field.

*State*

*Type* Will display the State PWS Type for the water system. May be
changed by the user. The selections available via the dropdown list will
be retrieved from the TINPVALS table where code_name = "STPWSTYPCD."

> State PWS Type will be an optional field.

*State Primary*

*Source* Will display the State classification of the primary water
source for the water system. The selections available via the dropdown
list will be:

**Value Description**

\<Spaces\> (Default)

GW Groundwater

GWP Groundwater Purchased

GU Groundwater UDI Surface Water

GUP Groundwater UDI Surface Water Purchased

SW Surface Water

SWP Surface Water Purchased

State Source Type will be an optional field.

*Number of Days*

*per Year Serving*

*at least 25* The number of days designated by the user that the water
system provides water.

If the user changes the field to spaces, the following advisory message
will be invoked when the user tabs off the field: **Field value is null
and will not be used for determining Federal PWS Type.** Once the user
presses **OK** on the advisory message the user will be returned to the
Water System Modification page.

The complete rules for determining the classification are described in
the Water System Classification section.

Number of Days per Year Serving at least 25 will be an optional field.

[Water System Basic Information Group Box Button:]{.underline}

**Modify** Will present the Water System Maintenance page, discussed in
Section 4.1.2.4.

> **Note:** If the user has already made changes on the Water System
> Modification page, pressing this button will perform all edit checks
> and update the WATER_SYSTEM record with the changes. Pressing this
> button will not present the Water System Classification pages.

[List Boxes:]{.underline}

*Population Served* Population Served will display the list of existing
population served counts by type and dates. New population served counts
can be added or existing counts modified on pages launched from this
list. The list box will display three rows of data and there will be a
statement underneath the list box indicating how many rows are displayed
from the number available (e.g., "3 of 25 rows displayed").

The population served rows are used to determine the Total Calculated
Daily Population field which is displayed in this list box. The value is
not calculated until the **OK** button is clicked. Population served
counts affect the federal water system classification type. Changing
population information sets in motion recalculation of the Federal water
system type and recalculation of Total Coliform Rule sample schedules.
The results of these recalculations may trigger the software to invoke
the Water System Classification and the TCR Schedule Modification page
when the user saves the information for changes to this page.

> [Population Served Columns:]{.underline}
>
> Begin MM/DD
>
> End MM/DD
>
> Effective Begin Date
>
> Effective End Date
>
> Type
>
> [Population Served Default Sort:]{.underline}
>
> Effective End date, descending and Population Type, ascending.
>
> [Population Served Buttons:]{.underline}
>
> **Expand** Pressing the **Expand** button will present the Population
> Served Maintenance List discussed in Section 4.1.2.5.
>
> **Modify** Pressing the **Modify** button will present the Annual
> Operating Period Maintenance page discussed in Section 4.1.2.6.
>
> This button will only be enabled when a row has been selected in the
> list box.

*Service Connection* Service Connection will display types and number of
service connections for the water system. New service connections can be
added or existing connections can be modified on pages launched from
this list.

> The list box will display three rows of data and there will be a
> statement underneath the list box indicating how many rows are
> displayed from the number available, (e.g., "3 of 25 rows displayed").

Changing service connection information sets in motion recalculation of
the Federal water system type and recalculation of Total Coliform Rule
sample schedules. The results of these recalculations may trigger the
software to invoke the Water System Classification and the TCR Schedule
Modification page when the user saves the information for changes to
this page.

> [Service Connection Protected Field:]{.underline}
>
> *Total Number of Connections* The software will display the aggregate
> number of Service Connections for the water system.
>
> [Service Connection Columns:]{.underline}
>
> Connection Type
>
> Meter Type
>
> Meter Size
>
> No. of Connections
>
> [Service Connection Default Sort:]{.underline}
>
> Connection Type, ascending.
>
> [Service Connection Buttons:]{.underline}
>
> **Expand** Pressing the **Expand** button will present the Service
> Connection Maintenance List discussed in Section 4.1.2.8.
>
> **Modify** Pressing the **Modify** button will present the Service
> Connection Maintenance page discussed in Section 4.1.2.9.
>
> This button will only be enabled when a row has been selected in the
> list box.

*Related*

*Points of Contact* Related POCs will display all legal entities
associated to the Water System. New POCS can be added or existing POCs
can be modified on pages launched from this list.

> The list box will display five rows of data and there will be a
> statement underneath the list box indicating how many rows are
> displayed from the number available (e.g., "5 of 25 rows displayed").
>
> [Related Points of Contact Columns:]{.underline}

Contact Type

Contact Name

Status

Mail Stop

Organization

> [Related Points of Contact Default Sort:]{.underline}
>
> Activity Status, ascending; Contact Type, ascending.
>
> [Related Points of Contact Buttons:]{.underline}
>
> **Expand** Pressing the **Expand** button will present the Related
> Point of Contact Maintenance List discussed in Section 4.1.2.10.
>
> **Modify** Pressing the **Modify** button will present Related Point
> of Contact Maintenance page discussed in Section 4.1.2.11.
>
> This button will only be enabled when a row has been selected in the
> list box.

*Water System*

*Facility* Water System Facility (WSF) will list all water system
facilities for the selected water system. New facilities can be added or
existing facilities can be modified on pages launched from this list.

> The list box will display ten rows of data and there will be a
> statement underneath the list box indicating how many rows are
> displayed from the number available (e.g., "10 of 50 rows displayed").
>
> [WSF Columns:]{.underline}
>
> State Asgn ID
>
> Facility Name
>
> Type
>
> Activity Status
>
> Availability
>
> Source Indicator
>
> [WSF Default Sort:]{.underline}
>
> Activity Status, ascending; Source Indicator, descending;
> Availability, descending; State Asgnd ID, ascending.
>
> [WSF Buttons:]{.underline}
>
> **Expand** Pressing the **Expand** button will present the Water
> System Facility Maintenance List discussed in Section 4.2.
>
> **Modify** Pressing the **Modify** button will present Water System
> Facility Maintenance page discussed in Section 4.2.
>
> This button will only be enabled when a row has been selected in the
> list box.

*Comments* Comments will be a free form, character text field to further
document information about the water system.

> Comments will be an optional field.

[Buttons:]{.underline}

**Violation** Will present the Violation Maintenance List page, filtered
to display violations for the current water system sorted by Violation
Period Begin Date, date descending, Violation Type ascending, and Water
System Facility State Asgn ID ascending.

**Samples** Will present the Sample/Sample Summary search page with the
current water system name entered in all the Water System Name fields.

**TCR Sample**

**Schedule** Will present the TCR Sample Schedule Maintenance List page
filtered to display TCR schedules for the current water system. The list
will be presented with the default sort order as specified in Chapter 7.

**Non-TCR Sample**

**Schedule** Will present the Non-TCR Sample Schedule Maintenance List
page filtered to display Non-TCR schedules for this water system. The
list will be presented with the default sort order as specified in
Chapter 7.

**Compliance**

**Schedule** Will present the Compliance Schedule Maintenance List page
filtered to display Compliance schedules for the current water system.
The list will be presented with the default sort order as specified in
Chapter 6.

**PN Schedule** Will present the Public Notification Schedule
Maintenance List page filtered to display Public Notification (PN)
schedules for the current water system. The list will be presented with
the default sort order as specified in Chapter 6.

**Print**

**WS Details** Will present a page with the Water System Modification
page reformatted in a printer-friendly format. The page can then be
spooled to print.

**Flow** Will present the Water System Facility (WSF) Flows Maintenance
List page discussed in Section 4.2.

**Related Regulating**

**Agency** Will present the Related Regulating Agency Maintenance List
discussed in Section 4.1.2.12.

**Related Geographic**

**Area** Will present the Related Geographic Area Maintenance List page
discussed in Section 4.1.2.14.

**Related Service**

**Area** Will present the Related Service Area Maintenance List page
discussed in Section 4.1.2.16.

**Sampling Point** Will present the Sampling Point Maintenance List
discussed in Section 4.2.

**Purchases/**

**Wholesales** Will present the Water Purchases/Wholesales List page
discussed in Section 4.1.3.

**Site Visit** Will present the Site Visit Maintenance List page,
discussed in Chapter 8, filtered to display Site Visits for the current
water system. The list will be presented with the default sort order as
specified in Chapter 8.

**OK** All field edits mentioned will be performed.

> If Water System name is not valued, the following error message will
> be presented: **Water System Name cannot be blank.**
>
> If Activity Status is not valued, the following error message will be
> presented: **Activity Status cannot be blank.**
>
> If Activity Status Date is blank or after the current date, one of the
> following error messages will be invoked: **Status Date cannot be
> blank** or **Status Date cannot be after today's date.**
>
> If the Number of Days per Year Serving at least 25 contains a value
> that is not numeric, the error message will be **Number of Days may
> only be a valid number or spaces.** If the number is greater than 365
> the error message will be **Number of days cannot exceed 365.**
>
> When successful, the WATER_SYSTEM record will be modified. The
> d_last_update_timestamp and d_userid_code will be set to current
> values.
>
> If any of the fields listed below have been changed, a Water System
> History record will also be created with a before image of the water
> system including d_last_update_timestamp moved to
> tinwsys_d_last_updt_ts and d_userid_code moved to tinwsys_d_userid_cd
> with the following attributes:
>
> Activity_Status_Code
>
> Activity_Status_Date
>
> Activity_Reason_Text
>
> Activity_Reason_Code
>
> Name
>
> Owner_Type_Code
>
> Fed_Primary_Source_Code
>
> D_History_Indicator_Code
>
> D_PWS_Federal_Type_Code
>
> D_Population_Count
>
> Days_Serving_count
>
> The d_last_update_timestamp and d_userid_code of both the Water System
> and Water System History record will be set to the current values. If
> the Days Serving field displays spaces the field will be set to NULL.
> The d_new_ws_flag will be set to "N."

**Note:** Certain modifications to the water system set in motion
recalculation of derived fields stored on the water system record. The
following processes will always be performed on the **OK** button:

1.  Calculation of Storage Capacity
    (TINWSYS:d_total_storage_capacity_measure)

2.  Determination of Federal Primary source
    (TINWSYS:d_fed_primary_source_code)

3.  Determination of Federal Type Code (TINWSYS:d_pws_federal_type_code)

4.  Evaluation of changes to TCR Sample Schedules

If the results of these recalculations warrant changes to the Federal
water system type, the software will invoke the Water System
Classification page. If the results of these recalculations warrant
changes to the Total Coliform Sample Schedules, the software will invoke
the TCR Schedule Modification page where users may then evaluate the
proposed schedule change and either accept it or not, thereby completing
processing of this water system.

After all modifications have been processed, the user will be returned
to the requesting page.

**Cancel** If no changes have been made, will close the Water System
Modification page.

> If changes have been made, the standard Cancel Confirm dialog box
> discussed in Chapter 1 will be presented requiring selection of
> **Yes**, **No**, or **Cancel**.

**Help** Will invoke online Help for this page.

[Tab Sequence:]{.underline}

Name, Alternate State No., Local Name, Operating Category, Owner Type,
Activity Status, Status Date, Status Reason Code, Status Reason, State
Type, State Primary Source, Days Serving Count, \[Basic Information\]
**Modify**, \[Population Served\] **Scroll buttons**, \[Population
Served\] **Expand**, \[Population Served\] **Modify**, \[Service
Connection\] **Scroll buttons,** \[Service Connection\] **Expand**,
\[Service Connection\] **Modify**, \[Related Points of Contact\]
**Scroll buttons,** \[Related Points of Contact\] **Expand**, \[Related
Points of Contact\] **Modify**, \[Water System Facility\] **Scroll
buttons,** \[Water System Facility\] **Expand**, \[Water System
Facility\] **Modify**, Comments, **OK**, **Cancel**, **Help,** **Flow**,
**Related Regulating Agency**, **Related Geographic Area**, **Related
Service Area**, **Sampling Point**, **Purchases/Wholesales**, **Site
Visit**, **Violation**, **Samples**, **TCR Sample Schedules**, **Non TCR
Sample Schedules**, **Compliance Schedule**, **PN Schedule**, **Print WS
Details**.

#### 4.1.2.4 Water System Maintenance {#water-system-maintenance .unnumbered}

The Water System Maintenance page (Exhibit 4-6) will be accessible via
the **Modify** button in the Water System Basic Information box on the
Water System Modification page. This page is a combination of the
SDWIS/STATE 8.0 Water System Maintenance window and new fields for
SSWR1. When the page is presented, the fields will be populated with the
information from the water system displayed on the Water System
Modification page. This page also displays the data from three new
tables, Water System Flow Rates, Water System Measures and Water System
Indicators.

[Protected Fields:]{.underline}

Water System No., Federal Type, Federal Primary Source, Total Calculated
Daily Population, Principal City Served, Principal County Served,
Calculated Total Storage Cap. in Gals (from Facility data), Total
Calculated Daily Population.

[Entry Fields:]{.underline}

\[*Water System*\]

*Name* The name of the water system. Can be the formal, legal, or common
name used most generally to refer to the system.

> Name will be a mandatory field.

*Alternate State*

*No.* An account number used within selected state programs to uniquely
identify the water system. This number usually differs from the Water
System No. used by SDWIS/STATE and EPA to track water system
information. It may be associated by a state or county agency for the
purpose of tracking other regulatory requirements (e.g., food service
establishments, schools, hotels). This field has been expanded to accept
15 alphanumeric characters.

Alternate State No. will be an optional field.

*Local Name* The common name, secondary name, or alias for the water
system.

Local Name will be an optional field.

*State*

*Type* State Type will be an optional field. The selections available
via the dropdown list will be retrieved from the TINPVALS table with
code_name = "STPWSTYPCD."

State Type will be an optional field.

*State Primary*

*Source* The selections available via the dropdown list will be:

> **Value Description**
>
> \<Spaces\> (Default)
>
> GW Groundwater
>
> GWP Groundwater Purchased
>
> GU Groundwater UDI Surface Water
>
> GUP Groundwater UDI Surface Water Purchased
>
> SW Surface Water
>
> SWP Surface Water Purchased
>
> State Primary Source will be an optional field.

*\[Activity\]*

*Status* The selections available via the dropdown list will be:

**Value Description**

> A Active
>
> I Inactive
>
> P Proposed
>
> When the status is modified in change mode, (i.e., the original value
> of the field is Active and the user changes the field to Inactive),
> the status date will be set to current date and the following advisory
> message will be presented when the user tabs off the field: **As a
> result of status change, Status Date has been set to current date.**
> Once the user presses **OK** on the advisory message the user will be
> returned to the Water System Maintenance page. (R0033:A.4.1.2.4.a,
> B.4.1.2.4.a)

Status will be a mandatory field.

*Status*

*Reason Code* A System Administration-controlled code of the reason a
water system has the status indicated. This may be used to indicate why
a water system has been inactivated but also may be used to indicate why
it is active or proposed. The selections will be those available in the
TINPVALS table with Code name = "WSACTRSN."

> Status Reason Code will be an optional field.

*Historical* This checkbox indicates that the water system exists in the
database for historical purposes and will be enabled for change only if
already "checked" (valued) when the maintenance page is invoked. The
user may "uncheck" the box; otherwise this checkbox is disabled. If the
user chooses to delete the water system, the user must use the Water
System Maintenance List page **Edit/Delete** menu option.

  -----------------------------------------------------------------------
  ![](media/image7.png){width="6.9in" height="8.746527777777779in"}

  -----------------------------------------------------------------------

[]{#__RefHeading___Toc139687329 .anchor}**Exhibit 4-6.** Water System
Maintenance

\[*Activity Status*\]

*Date* The date on which the water system became proposed, active, or
inactive. In change mode, the field will be set to current date when the
status field is changed. It can be modified by the user. (B.4.1.2.4.b)

> Date will be a mandatory field. It cannot be after the current date.

\[*Activity*\]

*Status Reason* Provides space to enter a textual explanation of why a
water system is in the current status.

> Status Reason will be an optional field.

*Operating Category* Used by the state to maintain information
concerning operator licensing requirements, operator type requirements,
or treatment plant classification.

> Operating Category will be an optional field.

*Owner Type* Indicates the type of ownership. Permitted values include
the following:

> **Value Description**
>
> L Local (Default)
>
> F Federal Govt
>
> M Mixed (public/private)
>
> N Native American
>
> P Private
>
> S State Govt
>
> \<Spaces\>
>
> Owner Type will be an optional field.

*Extra Date 1* The use of this field will be controlled by the user.
This field date will value the "LAST_SNTY_SRV_DT" (Last Sanitary Survey
Date with no Defects) field written to the TINWSYS table. The system
administrator will be able to retrieve (and modify) the label for this
field from the TINPVALS table with the code name = "TINWSXDT1." This
field will be defaulted to spaces.

> Extra Date 1 will be an optional field.

*Extra Indicator 1* The use of this field will be controlled by the
user. This field will value the "D_DSNFCT_GW_IND_CD" (Disinfected
Groundwater Indicator) field written to the TINWSYS table. The system
administrator will be able to retrieve (and modify) the label for this
field from the TINPVALS table with the code name = "TINWSXIN1."
Permitted values include the following:

**Value Description**

\<Spaces\> (Default)

Y Yes

N No

> Extra Indicator 1 will be an optional field.

*Extra Date 2* The use of this field will be controlled by the user.
This date will value the "D_LAST_TCR_VIO_DT" (Last TCR Violation Date)
field written to the TINWSYS table. The system administrator will be
able to retrieve (and modify) the label for this field from the TINPVALS
table with the code name = "TINWSXDT2." This field will be defaulted to
spaces.

> Extra Date 2 will be an optional field.

*Extra Indicator 2* The use of this field will be controlled by the
user. This field will value the "D_SW_OR_GUDI_FILTER_INDCTOR_CODE"
(Surface Water or Groundwater UDI Filtered Indicator) field written to
the TINWSYS table. The system administrator will be able to retrieve
(and modify) the label for this field from the TINPVALS table with the
code name = "TINWSXIN2." Permitted values include the following:

**Value Description**

\<Spaces\> (Default)

Y Yes

N No

> Extra Indicator 2 will be an optional field.

*All GW Protected?* The use of this field will be controlled by the
user. This field will value the "D_PRT_GW_SR_IND_CD" (All Groundwater
Protected indicator) field written to the TINWSYS table. The system
administrator will be able to retrieve (and modify) the label for this
field from the TINPVALS table with the code name = "TINWSXIN3."
Permitted values include the following:

**Value Description**

\<Spaces\> (Default)

Y Yes

N No

> All GW Protected? will be an optional field.

*Comments* Comments will be an optional field.

*Number of Days*

*per Year Serving*

*at least 25*

*(Only needed if*

*different than*

*(AOP(s))* Field to enter number of days per year that the water system
serves at least 25 persons. If entered, this value will be used by
SDWIS/STATE to determine the classification for the water system rather
than the number of days indicated by the system's annual operating
period. That is to say, if this is valued with less than 60, the system
will be determined to be a non-public system regardless of any other
inventory information. This should only be used for a water system that
is not open every day during its annual operating period (like a church
for example). If this is not valued, SDWIS/STATE will use the number of
days indicated by the annual operating period when determining the type
of water system.

> This field will be defaulted to null, displayed as spaces, if no value
> is entered. This field must be entered manually.
>
> The field cannot contain a numeric value greater than 365.
>
> If the user changes the field to spaces, the following advisory
> message will be invoked when the user tabs off the field: **Field
> value is null and will not be used for determining Federal PWS Type.**
> Once the user presses **OK** on the advisory message the user will be
> returned to the Water System Maintenance page.

The complete rules for determining the classification are described in
the Water System Classification section.

> Number of Days per Year Serving at least 25 will be an optional field.
>
> [Source Water Percentages Group Box:]{.underline}
>
> The Source Water Percentages Group Box enables the user to enter the
> percentage of purchased and non‑purchased water in each source
> category. Percentage totals for a water system must equal 100 percent;
> there are very few additional edit checks in this area. SDWIS/STATE
> will not check information about Water System Facilities or Water
> Purchases to see if they are consistent with the entries made here.
>
> For a water system that does not purchase water, the user enters the
> percentage of each source type in the non‑purchased fields. For
> example: 20% groundwater, 40% groundwater under the direct influence
> (UDI) of surface water, and 40% surface water, with the purchased
> field left as zero.
>
> If the system purchases water, the user enters the percentage of each
> source type in the purchased fields. For example: 0% groundwater, 0%
> groundwater UDI, and 100% surface water.
>
> [Source Water Percentages Protected Field:]{.underline}
>
> Total The total of all six percentage fields. The software will
> calculate this value by totaling the values in the Source Water
> Percentage entry fields.
>
> [Source Water Percentages Entry Fields:]{.underline}
>
> \[*Groundwater*
>
> *Percent*\]
>
> *Non-Purchased* The percentage of groundwater not purchased.
>
> Groundwater Non-Purchased Percent will be an optional field. If
> supplied, the value must be a numeric between 0 and 100. If value
> supplied is not within these parameters, when the user tabs off the
> field the following error message will be presented: **Value entered
> is not in list/range of Permitted values.**
>
> \[*Groundwater*
>
> *Percent*\]
>
> *Purchased* The percentage of groundwater purchased.
>
> Groundwater Percent Purchased will be an optional field. If supplied,
> the value must be a numeric between 0 and 100. If value supplied is
> not within these parameters, when the user tabs off the field the
> following error message will be presented: **Value entered is not in
> list/range of Permitted values.**
>
> \[*Groundwater*
>
> *UDI Percent*\]
>
> *Non-Purchased* The percentage of groundwater under the influence of
> surface water not purchased.
>
> Groundwater UDI Percent Non-Purchased will be an optional field. If
> supplied, the value must be a numeric between 0 and 100. If value
> supplied is not within these parameters, when the user tabs off the
> field the following error message will be presented: **Value entered
> is not in list/range of Permitted values.**
>
> \[*Groundwater UDI*
>
> *Percent*\] *Purchased* The percentage of groundwater under the
> influence of surface water purchased.
>
> Groundwater UDI Percent Purchased will be an optional field. If
> supplied, the value must be a numeric between 0 and 100. If value
> supplied is not within these parameters, when the user tabs off the
> field the following error message will be presented: **Value entered
> is not in list/range of Permitted values.**
>
> \[*Surface Water*
>
> *Percent*\]
>
> *Non-Purchased* The percentage of surface water not purchased.
>
> Surface Water Percent Non-Purchased will be an optional field. If
> supplied, the value must be a numeric between 0 and 100. If value
> supplied is not within these parameters, when the user tabs off the
> field the following error message will be presented: **Value entered
> is not in list/range of Permitted values.**
>
> \[*Surface Water*
>
> *Percent*\] *Purchased* The percentage of surface water purchased.
>
> Surface Water Percent Purchased will be an optional field. If
> supplied, the value must be a numeric between 0 and 100. If value
> supplied is not within these parameters, when the user tabs off the
> field the following error message will be presented: **Value entered
> is not in list/range of Permitted values.**

[Flow Rates List Box:]{.underline}

Will display the Flow Rates for the Water System retrieved from the
WS_FLOW_RATE table associated to the displayed Water System. The list
box will display four rows of data, will display up to 50 rows of data
via the vertical scroll bar and there will be a statement underneath the
list box indicating how many rows are displayed from the number
available.

[Flow Rates List Columns:]{.underline}

Type, Qty, UOM.

[Flow Rates Default Sort:]{.underline}

Type, ascending.

[Flow Rates Buttons:]{.underline}

**Add** Will present the WS Flow Rate Maintenance page in *Add* mode.

> This item will be enabled regardless of a Flow Rate selection having
> been made in the list area.

**Change** Will present the WS Flow Rate Maintenance page in *Change*
mode.

> A double-click in the list box will react as if a single-click
> highlight and this button was selected.
>
> This button will be enabled only when a Flow Rate selection has been
> made in the list area.

**Delete** Will present the Delete Water System Flow Rate confirmation
dialog box (Exhibit 4-7).

This item will be enabled only when a Flow Rate selection has been made
in the list area.

![](media/image8.png){width="3.9791666666666665in" height="2.9375in"}

[]{#__RefHeading___Toc139687330 .anchor}**Exhibit 4-7.** Delete Water
System Flow Rate

[Measures List Box]{.underline}

Will contain a scrollable list of Measures for the Water System
retrieved from the WS_MEASURES table associated to the displayed Water
System. The list box will display four rows of data, will display up to
50 rows of data via the vertical scroll bar and there will be a
statement underneath the list box indicating how many rows are displayed
from the number available.

[Measures List Columns:]{.underline}

Type, Qty, UOM.

[Measures Default Sort:]{.underline}

Type, ascending.

[Measures Buttons:]{.underline}

**Add** Will present the WS Measures Maintenance page in *Add* mode.

This item will be enabled regardless of a Measure selection having been
made in the list area.

**Change** Will present the WS Measure Maintenance page in *Change*
mode.

> A double-click in the list box will react as if a single-click
> highlight and this button was selected.

This item will be enabled only when a Measure selection has been made in
the list area.

**Delete** Will present the Delete Water System Measure confirmation
dialog box (Exhibit 4-8).

This item will be enabled only when a Measure selection has been made in
the list area.

![](media/image9.png){width="3.96875in" height="2.9166666666666665in"}

[]{#__RefHeading___Toc139687331 .anchor}**Exhibit 4-8.** Delete Water
System Measure

[Indicators List Box:]{.underline}

Will contain a scrollable list of Indicators for the Water System
retrieved from the WS_INDICATORS table associated to the displayed Water
System. The list box will display four rows of data, will display up to
50 rows of data via the vertical scroll bar and there will be a
statement underneath the list box indicating how many rows are displayed
from the number available.

[Indicators List Columns:]{.underline}

Type, Value, Date

[Indicators Default Sort:]{.underline}

Type, ascending.

[Indicators Buttons:]{.underline}

**Add** Will present the WS Indicators Maintenance page in *Add* mode.

> This item will be enabled regardless of an Indicator selection having
> been made in the list area.

**Change** Will present the WS Indicator Maintenance page in *Change*
mode.

> A double-click in the list box will react as if a single-click
> highlight and this button was selected.
>
> This item will be enabled only when an Indicator selection has been
> made in the list area.

**Delete** Will present the Delete Water System Indicator confirmation
dialog box (Exhibit 4-9).

This item will be enabled only when an Indicator selection has been made
in the list area.

![](media/image10.png){width="4.135416666666667in" height="2.8125in"}

[]{#__RefHeading___Toc139687332 .anchor}**Exhibit 4-9.** Delete Water
System Indicator

[Buttons:]{.underline}

**OK** All field edits as described above will be conducted.

> If Water System Name is blank, the following error message will be
> presented: **Water System Name cannot be blank.**
>
> If Activity Status is not valued, the following error message will be
> presented: **Activity Status cannot be blank.**
>
> If Activity Status Date is blank or after the current date one of the
> following error messages will be invoked: **Status Date cannot be
> blank** or **Status Date cannot be after today's date.**
>
> If the Number of Days per Year Serving at least 25 is valued greater
> than 365, the following error message will be presented: **Number of
> Days cannot exceed 365.** If the value contains an alpha character
> other than spaces, the error message will be **Number of Days may only
> be a valid number or spaces.**
>
> If any fields have been valued in the Source Water Percentages box,
> SDWIS/STATE will ensure that the total percentage is equal to 100; if
> it is not, the following error message will be presented:
> **Percentages must total up to 100.**
>
> When successful, the WATER_SYSTEM record will be modified. The
> d_last_update_timestamp and d_userid_code will be set to current
> values. If the Days Serving field was changed from a numeric to blank,
> the field should be reset to NULL. The d_new_ws_flag will be set to
> "N." The page will close and the Water System Modification page will
> be presented.
>
> If any of the fields listed below have been changed, a
> WATER_SYSTEM_HISTORY record will also be created with a before image
> of the water system. The water system's d_last_update_timestamp will
> be moved to the water system history's tinwsys_d_last_updt_ts and the
> water system's d_userid_code will be moved to the water system
> history's tinwsys_d_userid_cd prior to the water system update.
>
> Activity_Status_Code
>
> Activity_Status_Date
>
> Activity_Reason_Text
>
> Activity_Reason_Code
>
> Name
>
> Owner_Type_Code
>
> Fed_Primary_Source_Code
>
> D_History_Indicator_Code
>
> D_PWS_Federal_Type_Code
>
> D_Population_Count
>
> Days_Serving_count

**Cancel** If no changes have been made to the enterable fields, the
page will close and the Water System Modification page will be
represented.

> If changes have been made, the standard Cancel Confirmation dialog box
> will be presented, requiring selection of **Yes**, **No**, or
> **Cancel**.

**Help** Will invoke online Help for this page.

[Tab Sequence:]{.underline}

Name, Alternate State No., Local Name, State Type, State Primary Source,
Status, Status Reason Code, Historical?, Date, Status Reason, Operating
Category, Owner Type, Extra Date 1, Extra Indicator 1, Extra Date 2,
Extra Indicator 2, All GW Protected?, Comments, Number of Days per Year
Serving at least 25, \[Groundwater Percent\] Non-Purchased,
\[Groundwater Percent\] Purchased, \[Groundwater UDI Percent\]
Non-Purchased, \[Groundwater UDI Percent\] Purchased, \[Surface Water
Percent\] Non-Purchased, \[Surface Water Percent\] Purchased, Flow Rates
list box, \[Flow Rates\] **Add Change, Delete,** Measures list box,
\[Measures\] **Add Change, Delete,** Indicators list box, \[Indicators\]
**Add Change, Delete, OK**, **Cancel**, **Help**.

##### 4.1.2.4.1 Water System Flow Rate Maintenance {#water-system-flow-rate-maintenance .unnumbered}

Water System Flow Rate Maintenance page (Exhibit 4-10) is described
below. This page will allow the user to add or modify a flow rate for
the Water System. The user will access this page via the **Add** or
**Change** buttons on the Water System Maintenance page located with the
Flow Rates List box. Users will be presented this page in either *Add*
or *Change* mode - the title of the page will display *Add* or *Change*
for clarity. In *Add* mode, the user will value the fields. In *Change*
mode, the fields will be populated with the information from the
selected row. In *Change* mode, some fields will be modifiable; others
will be protected from change. See description below for details.

[Protected Fields:]{.underline}

Record updated

By/on The User ID and the timestamp from the last time the record was
updated.

Record created

By/on The initial User ID and timestamp when the record was initially
added to the database.

[Water System Group Box:]{.underline}

\[Water System\] No., Name, Federal Type, State Type, Federal Primary
Source.

  -----------------------------------------------------------------------
  ![](media/image11.png){width="7.3493055555555555in" height="4.65in"}

  -----------------------------------------------------------------------

[]{#__RefHeading___Toc139687333 .anchor}**Exhibit 4-10.** Water System
Flow Rate Maintenance

[Entry Fields]{.underline}:

Note that the tab order is left to right, top to bottom, and includes
all input fields and buttons unless otherwise noted.

*Type* A type code describing the Flow Rate. The permitted values
available in the dropdown list are retrieved from the permitted values
table where code_name="WSFLORTYP".

> Flow Rate Type will be a mandatory field. It will be protected from
> modification in change mode.

*Quantity* The numeric quantification of the Flow Rate.

> Flow Rate Quantity will be an optional field.

*UOM* The unit of measure for the Flow Rate Quantity. Permitted values
available in the dropdown are:

> **Value Description**
>
> GAL Gallons
>
> GPD Gallons per Day
>
> GPM Gallons per Min
>
> MGL Million Gallons
>
> MGD Million Gallons per Day
>
> MGM Million Gallons per Min
>
> GPMPF Gallons per Minute Per Foot
>
> MGDPF2 Million Gallons per Day Per Square Feet
>
> LBPF2 Pounds (LB) per Square Feet
>
> RPM Revolutions per Minute
>
> LBPMG Pounds (LB) per Million Gallons
>
> ACF Acre Feet
>
> Flow Rate UOM will be an optional field unless the Quantity contains a
> value.

[Buttons:]{.underline}

**OK** If Flow Rate Type is not valued, the following error message will
be presented: **Flow Rate Type may not be left blank.**

If a Quantity is provided, the UOM may not be left blank. If it is the
error message will be **UOM is required with provided Quantity.**

*Duplicate Check* If the Water System already has a Flow Rate with a
matching Type value, the following error message will be presented:
**Flow Rate of this type already exists for this Water System.**

Add Mode Will create a WS_FLOW_RATE record associated to the Water
System. The water system's d_last_inventory_update_timestamp will be
updated with the current value. If the water system's d_new_ws_flag =
'Y', it will be reset to 'N'.

> The page will close and return to the invoking maintenance page.

Change Mode Will update the existing WS_FLOW_RATE record. The water
system's d_last_inventory_update_timestamp will be updated with the
current value. If the water system's d_new_ws_flag = 'Y', it will be
reset to 'N'.

> The page will close and return to the invoking maintenance page.

**Cancel** If changes have been made the standard cancel confirmation
dialog will be presented. If no changes were made the page will close
and return to the invoking page.

**Help** Will invoke online help for this page.

##### 4.1.2.4.2 Water System Measure Maintenance {#water-system-measure-maintenance .unnumbered}

The Water System Measures Maintenance page (Exhibit 4-11) is described
below. This page will allow the user to add or modify a measure for the
Water System. The user will access this page via the **Add** or
**Change** buttons on the Water System Maintenance page located with the
Measures List box. Users will be presented this page in either *Add* or
*Change* mode - the title of the page will display *Add* or *Change* for
clarity. In *Add* mode, the user will value the fields. In *Change*
mode, the fields will be populated with the information from the
selected row. In *Change* mode, some fields will be modifiable; others
will be protected from change. See description below for details.

[Protected Fields:]{.underline}

Record updated

By/on The User ID and the timestamp from the last time the record was
updated.

Record created

By/on The initial User ID and timestamp when the record was initially
added to the database.

[Water System Group Box:]{.underline}

\[Water System\] No., Name, Federal Type, State Type, Federal Primary
Source.

  -----------------------------------------------------------------------
  ![](media/image12.png){width="7.347916666666666in"
  height="4.627083333333333in"}

  -----------------------------------------------------------------------

[]{#__RefHeading___Toc139687334 .anchor}**Exhibit 4-11.** Water System
Measure Maintenance

[Entry Fields:]{.underline}

Note that the tab order is left to right, top to bottom, and includes
all input fields and buttons unless otherwise noted.

*Type* A type code describing the Measure. The permitted values
available in the dropdown list are retrieved from the permitted values
table where code_name='WSMSRTYP".

> Water System Measure Type will be a mandatory field. It will be
> protected from modification in change mode.

*Quantity* The numeric quantification of the Measure.

Water System Measure Quantity will be an optional field.

*UOM* The unit of measure for the Measure quantity. Permitted values
available in the dropdown are:

> **Value Description**
>
> IN Inches
>
> FT Feet
>
> YD Yards
>
> MIL Miles
>
> CC Cubic Centimeters
>
> CFT Cubic Feet
>
> GAL Gallons
>
> ACF Acre Feet
>
> HRS Hours
>
> MIN Minutes
>
> SEC Seconds
>
> MML Mg\*Min/L
>
> Water System Measure Quantity UOM will be an optional field.

[Buttons:]{.underline}

**OK** If Water System Measure Type is not valued, the following error
message will be presented: **Measure Type may not be left blank.**

> If a Quantity is provided, the UOM may not be left blank. If it is the
> error message will be **UOM is required with provided Quantity.**

*Duplicate Check* If the Water System already has a WS_MEASURE with a
matching Type value, the following error message will be presented:
**Measure of this type already exists for this Water System.**

*Add Mode* Will create a WS_MEASURE record associated to the Water
System. The water system's d_last_inventory_update_timestamp will be
updated with the current value. If the water system's d_new_ws_flag =
'Y', it will be reset to 'N'.

> The page will close and return to the invoking maintenance page.

*Change*

Mode Will update the existing WS_MEASURE record. The water system's
d_last_inventory_update_timestamp will be updated with the current
value. If the water system's d_new_ws_flag = 'Y', it will be reset to
'N'.

> The page will close and return to the invoking maintenance page.

**Cancel** If changes have been made the standard cancel confirmation
dialog will be presented. If no changes were made the page will close
and return to the invoking page.

**Help** Will invoke online help for this page.

##### 4.1.2.4.3 Water System Indicator Maintenance {#water-system-indicator-maintenance .unnumbered}

Exhibit 4-12 depicts the Water System Indicator Maintenance page. This
page will allow the user to add or modify an indicator for the Water
System. The user will access this page via the **Add** or **Change**
buttons on the Water System Maintenance page positioned with the
Indicators List box. Users will be presented this page in either *Add*
or *Change* mode - the title of the page will display *Add* or *Change*
for clarity. In *Add* mode, the user will value the fields. In *Change*
mode, the fields will be populated with the information from the
selected row. In *Change* mode, some fields will be modifiable; others
will be protected from change. See description below for details.

[Protected Fields:]{.underline}

Record updated

By/on The User ID and the timestamp from the last time the record was
updated.

Record created

By/on The initial User ID and timestamp when the record was initially
added to the database.

[Water System Group Box:]{.underline}

\[Water System\] No., Name, Federal Type, State Type, Federal Primary
Source.

  -----------------------------------------------------------------------
  ![](media/image13.png){width="7.344444444444444in"
  height="4.8597222222222225in"}

  -----------------------------------------------------------------------

[]{#__RefHeading___Toc139687335 .anchor}**Exhibit 4-12.** Water System
Indicator Maintenance

[Entry Fields:]{.underline}

Note that the tab order is left to right, top to bottom, and includes
all input fields and buttons unless otherwise noted.

*Type* A type code describing the Indicator. The permitted values
available in the dropdown list are retrieved from the permitted values
table where code_name="WSINDTYP".

> Water System Indicator Type will be a mandatory field. It will be
> protected from modification in *Change* mode.

*Value* The value of the Indicator. Permitted values available in the
dropdown are:

> **Value Description**

YES

> NO
>
> UNK Unknown
>
> AVBL Available
>
> NOABL Not Available
>
> POOR
>
> AVG Average
>
> SUPR Superior
>
> PRFCT Perfect
>
> ADQTE Adequate
>
> INSFT Insufficient
>
> Water System Indicator Value will be an optional field.

*Date* The date associated to the indicator.

> Date will be an optional field.

[Buttons:]{.underline}

**OK** If Water System Indicator Type is not valued, the following error
message will be presented: **Indicator Type may not be left blank**.

> If neither Water System Indicator Value nor Water System Indicator
> Date is valued, the following error message will be presented:
> **Indicator requires either a Value or a Date.**

*Duplicate Check* If the Water System already has a WS_INDICATOR with a
matching Type value, the error message will be Indicator of this type
already exists for this Water System.

Add Mode Will create a WS_INDICATOR record associated to the Water
System. The water system's d_last_inventory_update_timestamp will be
updated with the current value. If the water system's d_new_ws_flag =
'Y', it will be reset to 'N'.

The page will close and return to the invoking maintenance page.

Change

Mode Will update the existing WS_INDICATOR record. The water system's
d_last_inventory_update_timestamp will be updated with the current
value. If the water system's d_new_ws_flag = 'Y', it will be reset to
'N'.

The page will close and return to the invoking maintenance page.

**Cancel** If changes have been made the standard cancel confirmation
dialog will be presented. If no changes were made the page will close
and return to the invoking page.

**Help** Will invoke online help for this page.

#### 4.1.2.5 Population Served Maintenance List {#population-served-maintenance-list .unnumbered}

The Population Served statistics for a water system are recorded by type
of population within a given span of time. The time period is known as
the Annual Operating Period (AOP) and is defined by month and
day-of-month boundaries. It is assumed that these periods are repeated
throughout the years.

Population Served counts affect the water system's federal
classification type.

The Population Served Maintenance List (Exhibit 4-13) will display the
existing population served counts by type and AOP. New population served
counts can be added or existing counts modified on pages launched from
this list. A maximum of 1000 records can be added and maintained per
water system. That is to say, this design assumes that there will never
be more than 1000 records per water system.

[Protected Fields:]{.underline}

[Water System Group Box:]{.underline}

No., Name, Federal Type, State Type, Federal Primary Source.

[Annual Operating Period List Box:]{.underline}

Number of rows displayed.

[Annual Operating Period Columns:]{.underline}

Begin MM, \[Begin\] DD, End MM, \[End\] DD, Effective Begin Date,
Effective End Date, \[Population\] Type, Estimated Count.

The AOP may be selected from the list to modify the population served.

The list will be sorted Effective end date, descending; \[Population\]
Type, ascending.

  -----------------------------------------------------------------------
  ![](media/image14.png){width="7.34375in" height="4.363888888888889in"}

  -----------------------------------------------------------------------

[]{#__RefHeading___Toc139687336 .anchor}**Exhibit 4-13.** Population
Served Maintenance List

[Menu Items:]{.underline}

**File**

> *Exit* Will close the Population Served Maintenance List page and
> return user to Water System Modification page.

**Edit**

> *Add* Will present the Annual Operating Period Maintenance page.

This button will be enabled regardless of a selection having been made
in the list area.

> *Change* Will present the Annual Operating Period Maintenance page.
>
> A double-click on a list box item will also present the Annual
> Operating Period Maintenance page.
>
> This option will be available only if a row in the Annual Operating
> Period list is selected.
>
> *Delete* This option will be available only if a row in the Annual
> Operating Period list box is selected. Will present the Delete Annual
> Operating Period dialog box (Exhibit 4-14), requiring selection of
> **OK** or **Cancel**.

![](media/image15.png){width="3.6145833333333335in" height="3.25in"}

[]{#__RefHeading___Toc139687337 .anchor}**Exhibit 4-14.** Delete Annual
Operating Period

> [Delete Annual Operating Period Buttons:]{.underline}
>
> **OK** Will remove the Annual Operation Period and its Population
> Served from the database, close the confirmation dialog box, and
> return the user to the Population Served Maintenance List page. The
> Annual Operating Period list box will be displayed without the deleted
> AOP. The attribute D_POPULATION_COUNT will be updated when the federal
> classification is re-evaluated.
>
> **Cancel** Will close the Delete Annual Operating Period dialog box
> and return the user to the Population Served Maintenance List page.

**Help** Will invoke online Help for this page.

[Buttons]{.underline}:

**Menu Items** Will present the standard menu items dialog box.

**Scroll Buttons** Will scroll the list box in the direction of the
arrow displayed on the button.

#### 4.1.2.6 Annual Operating Period Maintenance {#annual-operating-period-maintenance .unnumbered}

Annual Operating Period Maintenance (Exhibit 4-15) will allow the user
to add or change an AOP and add, change, or delete a related population.

Some water systems serve seasonal populations; some serve only
year‑round populations, and others serve mixed populations and AOPs. It
is important to accurately enter the population and AOP information,
since this data is part of the water system classification and TCR
monitoring requirements.

AOPs have a starting month and day (Start MM/DD) and an ending month and
day (End MM/DD) and are effective for a number of years. For example, a
water system notifies the state on January 1, 1991, that its water
system operates seasonally from January 15 to March 15. Two years later,
the water system notifies the state that the water system no longer
operates during that seasonal period. The Effective Begin date for the
January 15‑March 15 period would be January 1, 1991, and the Effective
End date would be December 31, 1992. AOPs may overlap. Users can have
only one population of any one type for a given operating period;
however, the user can have multiple population types for any given
operating period.

When the population for a water system changes, the user will have two
options for making the change in SDWIS/STATE. The user can either simply
change the population served value without changing the AOP, or the user
can close out the existing AOP (and its related population(s) and create
a new AOP with a new population served.

  -----------------------------------------------------------------------
  ![](media/image16.png){width="7.347916666666666in"
  height="4.772916666666666in"}

  -----------------------------------------------------------------------

[]{#__RefHeading___Toc139687338 .anchor}**Exhibit 4-15.** Annual
Operating Period Maintenance

The advantage of the second approach is that the user will be able to
keep track of population changes over time. However, the user must be
careful to close out the existing AOP on the day before the new AOP is
opened. If one AOP is closed and another AOP is opened on the same day,
the software will add the population of the two AOPs together. For
example, if the population in the AOP closed today was 5,000 and the
population in the AOP opened today is 5,100, the software will add both
populations and read a population of 10,100 in the new AOP.

Leaving the old AOP Effective End Date and the new AOP Effective Begin
Date the same date may result in the generation of an erroneous TCR
sample schedule.

[Protected Fields:]{.underline}

[Water System Group Box:]{.underline}

No., Name, Federal Type, State Type, Federal Primary Source.

Record updated by, Record created by.

[Entry Fields:]{.underline}

*Begin Month and Day* The Begin Month is the numeric representation of
the month in which the water system's season of operation commences. It
must be a valid number between 1 and 12. If a valid number is not used,
when the user tabs off the field, the following error message will be
presented: **Begin Month is invalid.**

> The Begin Day is the numeric day within the Begin Month that the water
> system's season of operation commences. It must be a valid number
> between 1 and 31, but not to exceed the number of days for the begin
> month. If a valid number is not used, when the user tabs off the
> field, the following error message will be presented: **Begin Day is
> invalid.**
>
> Begin Month and Day will be mandatory fields.

*End Month and Day* The End Month is the numeric representation of the
month in which the water system's season of operation ends. Along with
the End Day, it will represent the last day of operation. It must be a
valid number between 1 and 12. If a valid number is not used, when the
user tabs off the field, the following error message will be presented:
**End Month is invalid.**

> The End Day is the numeric day within the End Month that the water
> system's season of operation ends. It must be a valid number between 1
> and 31, but not to exceed the number of days for the end month. If a
> valid number is not used, when the user tabs off the field, the
> following error message will be presented: **End Day is invalid.**
>
> End Month and Day will be mandatory fields.
>
> If the Begin Month and End Month are the same and the begin day is
> greater than the end day, the advisory will be **Months are the same
> but the End Day is earlier than Begin Day.**

*Effective Begin Date* The calendar month, day, and year when the water
system's season of operation begins.

> The begin date cannot be after the effective end date. It may not be
> in the future.
>
> Effective Begin Date will be a mandatory field and will default to the
> current date.

*Effective End Date* The ending calendar month, day, and year when the
water system's season of operation is no longer applicable. As long as
it is blank, the seasonal period of operation will continue year after
year.

> The end date cannot be prior to the effective begin date. It may not
> be in the future.
>
> Effective End Date will be an optional field.

[Population Served List Box:]{.underline}

*Type* A list of the type of population served during this AOP. The
population types and counts are critical in determining the water
system's monitoring requirements and federal classification type. The
types represent the following:

> R -- Residential
>
> NT -- Non-Transient
>
> T -- Transient
>
> W -- Wholesale

*Estimated Count* The estimated average daily population for a given
type of population served. Estimated count will be displayed with
commas.

> Estimated Count will be a mandatory field.

[Buttons:]{.underline}

**Add Pop** Will present the Population Served Maintenance page where
new population served counts can be added.

This button will be enabled regardless of a selection having been made
in the list box.

**Change Pop** Will present the Population Served Maintenance page with
the selected item displayed. The population type or estimated count may
be changed. The population type cannot be changed to a type that may
already exist for the water system.

> This button will be enabled only if a row is highlighted in the
> Population Served List box.

**Delete Pop** Will present the Delete Population Served dialog box
(Exhibit 4-16) requiring the selection of **OK** or **Cancel**.

> This button will be enabled only if a row is highlighted in the
> Population Served List box.

![](media/image17.png){width="3.1145833333333335in"
height="2.4791666666666665in"}

[]{#__RefHeading___Toc139687339 .anchor}**Exhibit 4-16.** Delete
Population Served

> [Delete Population Served Buttons:]{.underline}
>
> **OK** Will delete the Population Served from the database and return
> the user to the Annual Operating Period Maintenance page with the
> deleted population served removed from the list. If this is the last
> population for the AOP, the request to delete the population will be
> denied. The following error message will be presented: **Last
> Population Served cannot be deleted, must delete Annual Operating
> Period.**
>
> **Cancel** Will abort the delete request and return the user to the
> Annual Operating Period Maintenance page.

**OK** All field edits mentioned will be performed.

> If Begin Month, Begin Day, End Month, or End Day are blank, the
> following error message will be presented: **Begin** **Day and Month
> and End Day and Month must not be blank.**
>
> If Begin Month has a value of (1,3,5,7,8,10,12) and the Begin Day is
> less than 1 or greater than 31, the error message will be **Begin Day
> is invalid.**
>
> If Begin Month has a value of (4,6,9,11) and the Begin Day is less
> than 1 or greater than 30, the error message will be **Begin Day is
> invalid.**
>
> If Begin Month has a value of 2 and the Begin Day is less than 1 or
> greater than 28, the error message will be **Begin Day is invalid.**
>
> If End Month contains a value less than 1 or greater than 12, the
> error message will be **End Month is invalid.**
>
> If End Month has a value of (1,3,5,7,8,10,12) and the End Day is less
> than 1 or greater than 31, the error message will be **End Day is
> invalid.**
>
> If End Month has a value of (4,6,9,11) and the End Day is less than 1
> or greater than 30, the error message will be **End Day is invalid.**
>
> If End Month has a value of 2 and the End Day is less than 1 or
> greater than 28, the error message will be **End Day is invalid.**
>
> If Effective Begin Date is valued after Effective End Date, the
> following error message will be presented: **Effective Begin Date must
> be before Effective End Date.**
>
> Effective Begin Date may not be in the future. If it is, the following
> error message will be presented: **Effective Begin Date must not be
> after today's date.**
>
> If Effective Begin Date is not valued, the following error message
> will be presented: **Effective Begin Date must be valued.**
>
> Effective End Date cannot be prior to the Effective Begin Date. If it
> is, the following error message will be presented: **Effective Begin
> Date must be before Effective End Date.**
>
> Effective End Date may not be in the future. If it is, the following
> error message will be presented: **Effective End Date must not be
> after today's date.**
>
> Only one population type may be established per Annual Operating
> Period, per water system. The Uniqueness check for a Water System's
> Annual Operating Period is on the combination of BEGIN_DAY,
> BEGIN_MONTH, END_DAY, END_MONTH, and EFFECTIVE_BEGIN_DATE. If a
> duplicate found, the following error message will be presented:
> **Duplicate Annual Operating Period found**.

*Add Mode* If no population served information is present, the error
message will be **Annual Operating Period must have at least one
Population Served.**

A new Annual Operating Period will be created on the population served
maintenance page when the first population served row is added. This
will keep an AOP from being created with no population served data.

The d_last_update_timestamp, and d_userid_code of the Water System will
not be updated. The d_last_inventory_update_timestamp will be set to
current timestamp. If the d_new_ws_flag = "Y," it will be set to "N."

*Change Mode* Will update the Annual Operating Period with the
d_last_update_timestamp, and d_userid_code set to current values. If no
end_date was provided it will be set to NULL.

The d_last_update_timestamp, and d_userid_code of the Water System will
not be updated. The d_last_inventory_update_timestamp will be set to
current timestamp.

When successful, will close the Annual Operating Period Maintenance page
and return the user to the previous page.

**Cancel** If changes have been made, the standard Cancel Confirm dialog
box will be presented. If no changes have been made, the Annual
Operating Period Maintenance page will close and return the user to the
previous page.

**Help** Will invoke online Help for this page.

[Tab Sequence:]{.underline}

Begin Month, Begin Day, Effective Begin Date, End Month, End Day,
Effective End Date, Population Served List box, **Add Pop**, **Change
Pop**, **Delete Pop**, **OK**, **Cancel**, **Help**.

#### 4.1.2.7 Population Served Maintenance {#population-served-maintenance .unnumbered}

The Population Served Maintenance page (Exhibit 4-17) is described
below. Users will be presented this page in either *Add* or *Change*
mode - the title of the page will display *Add* or *Change* for clarity.
In *Add* mode, the user will value the fields. In *Change* mode, the
fields will be populated with the information from the selected row, but
the user will be able to modify the information.

[Protected Fields:]{.underline}

[Water System Group Box:]{.underline}

Water System No., Name, Federal Type, State Type, Federal Primary
Source.

[Annual Operating Period Group Box:]{.underline}

**Start** MM/DD, End MM/DD, Effective Begin Date, Effective End Date.

Record updated by, Record created by.

  -----------------------------------------------------------------------
  ![](media/image18.png){width="7.344444444444444in" height="4.75in"}

  -----------------------------------------------------------------------

[]{#__RefHeading___Toc139687340 .anchor}**Exhibit 4-17.** Population
Served Maintenance

[Entry Fields:]{.underline}

*Population Type* Will display the type of population served. The
selections available via the dropdown list will be:

**Value Description**

> NT Non‑Transient
>
> R Residential
>
> T Transient
>
> W Wholesale
>
> The population type must be unique for the annual operating period. In
> *Change* mode it can be modified but cannot duplicate another existing
> population served from the same annual operating period.
>
> Population Type will be a mandatory field.

*Estimated Count* Will display the estimated average daily population
for a given type of population served. Permitted values will range from
0 to 50,000,000. Values outside of this range will receive the error
message **Value entered is not in list/range of permitted values.**

> Estimated Count will be a mandatory field.

[Buttons:]{.underline}

**OK** Pressing the **OK** button will perform the following edit
checks:

> If Population Type is not valued, the following error message will be
> presented: **Population Type must not be blank.**
>
> If Estimated Count is not valued, the following error message will be
> presented: **Population Estimate cannot be zero**.
>
> Population Type must be unique for the AOP; if it is not, the
> following error message will be presented: **Population Type must be
> unique for Annual Operating Period.**

*Add Mode* If this is the first population served for a new AOP, a new
Annual Operating Period will be created with the d_initial_timestamp,
d_last_updated_timestamp, d_initial_userid, and d_userid_code set to
current values. If no end_date is provided it will be set to NULL.

Will create a POPULATION_SERVED and relate it to the
ANNUAL_OPERATING_PERIOD. The d_last_update_timestamp,
d_initial_timestamp, d_userid_code and d_initial_userid will be set to
current values. The tinpopsv_is_number will be set to the
entity_internal_system_number from the TINEISN table where table_name is
"TINPOPSV."

The page will close and return to the Annual Operating Period
Maintenance page in change-mode, even if it was in add-mode prior to
entering the Population Served Maintenance page.

*Change Mode* Will update the POPULATION_SERVED record with the new type
and estimated count. The d_last_update_timestamp and d_userid_code will
be updated with current values.

> The d_last_update_timestamp, and d_userid_code of the Water System
> will not be updated in either mode. The water system's
> d_last_inventory_update_timestamp will be set to current timestamp.
> The water system's d_population_count will be recalculated when the
> federal type is evaluated. If the water system's d_new_ws_flag = "Y,"
> it will be set to "N."
>
> The Population Served Maintenance page will close and any changes will
> be reflected on the Annual Operation Period Maintenance page.

**Cancel** If changes have been made, the standard Cancel Confirm dialog
box will be presented. If no changes have been made, will close the
Population Served Maintenance page.

**Help** Will invoke online Help for this page.

[Tab Sequence:]{.underline}

Population Type, Estimated Count, **OK**, **Cancel**, **Help**.

#### 4.1.2.8 Service Connection Maintenance List {#service-connection-maintenance-list .unnumbered}

The Service Connection Maintenance List (Exhibit 4-18) will display the
service connections for the water system. A maximum of 1000 records can
be added and maintained per water system. That is to say, this design
assumes that there will never be more than 1000 records per water
system.

  -----------------------------------------------------------------------
  ![](media/image19.png){width="7.347916666666666in"
  height="5.011111111111111in"}

  -----------------------------------------------------------------------

[]{#__RefHeading___Toc139687341 .anchor}**Exhibit 4-18.** Service
Connection Maintenance List

[Protected Fields:]{.underline}

No., Name, Federal Type, State Type, Federal Primary Source, Number of
rows displayed.

[List Columns:]{.underline}

Service Connection Type, Meter Type, Meter Size, Number of Connections.

[Default Sort Order:]{.underline}

Ascending Service Connection Type.

[Menu Items:]{.underline}

**File**

*Exit* Will close the page and return the user to the Water System
Modification page.

**Edit**

*Add* Will present the Service Connection Maintenance page in *Add* mode
where a new connection can be defined.

This option will be available regardless of a selection having been made
in the list box.

*Change* Will present the Service Connection Maintenance page in
*Change* mode where connections can be modified.

> This item will only be available if a service connection is selected
> in the list area. A double-click on a list box row will react like
> **Edit/Change**.
>
> *Delete* Will present the Delete Service Connection dialog box
> (Exhibit 4-19), requiring selection of **OK** or **Cancel**.

![](media/image20.png){width="5.21875in" height="2.6458333333333335in"}

[]{#__RefHeading___Toc139687342 .anchor}**Exhibit 4-19.** Delete Service
Connection

[Delete Service Connection Buttons:]{.underline}

**OK** Will delete the SERVICE_CONNECTION_CATEGORY. The confirmation
page will close and will return the user to the Service Connection
Maintenance List with this service connection removed from the list.

> **Cancel** Will abort the delete request and return the user to the
> Service Connection Maintenance List with no modification.

**Help** Will invoke online Help for this page.

[Buttons:]{.underline}

**Menu Items** Will present the standard menu items dialog box.

**Scroll Buttons** Will scroll the list box in the direction of the
arrow displayed on the button.

#### 4.1.2.9 Service Connection Maintenance {#service-connection-maintenance .unnumbered}

Service Connection Maintenance (Exhibit 4-20) will allow the user to
maintain service connection information. If the page is invoked via the
**Edit/Change** menu options, the fields will be valued with the data
from the selected Service Connection.

Changing service connection information sets in motion recalculation of
the Federal water system type and recalculation of Total Coliform Rule
sample schedules. The results of these recalculations may trigger the
software to invoke the Water System Classification and the TCR Schedule
Modification page when the user saves the information for changes to
this page.

In a change from Release 8.0, the uniqueness has been changed to include
Meter Type and Meter Size to allow users to record the number of metered
and unmetered connections.

  -----------------------------------------------------------------------
  ![](media/image21.png){width="7.345138888888889in"
  height="4.6618055555555555in"}

  -----------------------------------------------------------------------

[]{#__RefHeading___Toc139687343 .anchor}**Exhibit 4-20.** Service
Connection Maintenance

[Protected Fields:]{.underline}

[Water System Group Box:]{.underline}

No., Name, Federal Type, State Type, Federal Primary Source.

Record updated by, Record created by.

[Entry Fields:]{.underline}

\[*Service Connection*\]

*Type* The type of service connection. Permitted values will be:

**Value Description**

> CB Combined (Default)
>
> RS Residential
>
> AG Agricultural
>
> CM Commercial
>
> IN Industrial
>
> PP Power Production
>
> Type will be a mandatory field

*Number of*

*Service*

*Connection*s The number of connections serviced by this type. This
field must be entered manually.

Number of Service Connections will be a mandatory field.

*Meter Type* The permitted values for Meter Type will be:

**Value Description**

> UN Unknown (Default)
>
> UM Unmetered
>
> ME Metered
>
> MU Metered and Unmetered
>
> Meter Type will be a mandatory field.

*Meter Size* The size of a commercial meter in inches. This field must
be entered manually.

> Meter Size will be an optional field.

[Buttons:]{.underline}

**OK** Will validate that the required fields are present. Uniqueness
check for Service Connections is the combination of all three fields --
Service Connection Type, Meter Type and Meter Size. If a duplicate is
found, the following error message will be presented: **A duplicate
Service Connection was found for this water system**.

> If a value is not supplied for Service Connection Type, the following
> error message will be presented: **Service Connection Type must not be
> blank.**
>
> If Number of Service Connections is not valued, the following error
> message will be presented: **Number of Service Connections cannot be
> blank.**
>
> If a value is not supplied for Meter Type, the following error message
> will be presented: **Meter Type must not be blank.**

*Add Mode* In *Add* mode, a Service_Connection_Category row will be
created and the d_initial_timestamp, d_last_update_timestamp,
d_initial_userid and d_userid_code attributes will be set to current
values. If the water system's d_new_ws_flag = "Y," it will be set to
"N." The page will close and when the user is returned to the invoking
page, the new service connection will be displayed in the list box.

*Change Mode* In *Change* mode, a Service_Connection_Category row will
be updated and the d_last_update_timestamp and d_userid_code attributes
will be updated. The page will close and when the user is returned to
the invoking page, the new service connection will be displayed in the
list box.

> The d_last_update_timestamp, and d_userid_code of the Water System
> will not be updated in either mode. The
> d_last_inventory_update_timestamp on the water system will be set to
> current timestamp.

**Cancel** If no changes have been made to any of the four entry fields,
the page will be closed and the user is returned to the invoking page,
with no modifications in the list box.

> If changes have been made to the Service Connection information, the
> standard Cancel Confirm dialog box will be presented.

**Help** Will invoke online Help for this page.

[Tab Sequence:]{.underline}

Type, Number of Service Connections, Meter Type, Meter Size, **OK**,
**Cancel**, **Help**.

#### 4.1.2.10 Water System Related POC Maintenance List {#water-system-related-poc-maintenance-list .unnumbered}

The Water System Related POC Maintenance List (Exhibit 4-21) displays
all legal entities associated to the Water System. This page is invoked
from the **Expand** button on the Water System Modification page. The
user may use this list to maintain POCs for a water system.

  -----------------------------------------------------------------------
  ![](media/image22.png){width="7.347916666666666in"
  height="4.438194444444444in"}

  -----------------------------------------------------------------------

[]{#__RefHeading___Toc139687344 .anchor}**Exhibit 4-21.** Water System
Related POC Maintenance List

Two hundred (200) POCs are presented without subsequent user action.
More results can be viewed by using the **View/Next** menu item. A POC
may be selected in the list box by highlighting it.

[Protected Fields:]{.underline}

No., Name, Federal Type, State Type, Federal Primary Source, Number of
rows resulting from the search criteria used, Number of rows displayed.

[List Columns:]{.underline}

POC Type, Contact Name, \[Contact\] Status, \[Status\] Begin Date,
\[Status\] End Date, Organization, Mailstop, FedRep ID.

[Default Sort Order:]{.underline}

Activity Status, ascending; POC Type, ascending, Contact Name,
ascending, End Date, descending.

[Menu Items:]{.underline}

**File**

> *Exit* Will close the page and return the user to the invoking page.

**Edit**

> *Add* Will display the Legal Entity Search page where criteria may be
> entered to retrieve a list of Legal Entities. Upon pressing the
> **Search** button, the Legal Entity Maintenance List page will be
> presented in single-select mode for selection of a legal entity to use
> as a POC. The *Select* menu item will be made available on the Legal
> Entity Maintenance page after a selection is highlighted in the list
> box.
>
> Once a legal entity has been selected, the Related Point of Contact
> Maintenance page will be presented. If the selected legal entity has
> already been designated as a POC for the Water System and any of those
> associations are still active, they will be displayed on the Related
> Point of Contact Maintenance page.

This item will be enabled regardless of a selection having been made in
the list box.

> *Change* Will display the Related Point of Contact Maintenance page
> where the details about the contact can be viewed and all contact
> types between the legal entity and water system maintained.
>
> This option will be available only when a contact is selected in the
> list.

*Delete* Will present the Delete Point of Contact dialog box (Exhibit
4--22) requiring selection of either the **OK** or **Cancel** button.

> This option will be available only when a contact is selected in the
> list.

![](media/image23.png){width="5.645833333333333in" height="2.9375in"}

[]{#__RefHeading___Toc139687345 .anchor}**Exhibit 4-22.** Delete Point
of Contact

> [Delete Point of Contact Buttons:]{.underline}

**OK** Will remove the association linking the legal entity to the water
system for the selected contact type. (via the
WATER_SYS_LEGAL_ENTITY_CONTACT table).

**Cancel** Will cancel the delete request and return the user to the
Related Point of Contact Maintenance List. The association will still
exist in the database.

**View**

> *Filter by* This option will open the standard filter parameter dialog
> box described in Chapter 1, allowing the user to filter which POCs to
> be displayed on the Related Point of Contact Maintenance List page.
> Using the **View/Filter by** menu item will enable the
> **View/Refresh** menu item.
>
> [Filter by Options:]{.underline}

POC Type, Contact Name, \[Contact\] Status, \[Status\] Begin Date,
\[Status\] End Date, Organization, Mailstop, FedRep ID.

> *Next* If more than 200 contacts are associated to the water system,
> the **View/Next** menu option will be enabled. Selecting this option
> will retrieve the next 200 contacts associated to the water system.
>
> This option will be disabled when the last POC associated to the water
> system has been presented in the list box area.
>
> Selecting this button will enable the **View/Previous** menu option.
>
> *Previous* If more than 200 contacts are associated to the water
> system and the user selects the **View/Next** menu option, the
> **View/Previous** menu option will be enabled. The **View/Previous**
> menu item will re-populate the list box with prior group of 200.
>
> Once the initial 200 POCs are displayed, the **View/Previous** menu
> item will be disabled.
>
> *Refresh* Selecting **View/Refresh** will retrieve the unfiltered list
> (before filtering).
>
> *Sort* Selecting this option will open the standard sort dialog box
> described in Chapter 1, allowing the user to modify the order of the
> displayed POCs for the water system. Three levels of sort will be
> supported.
>
> [Sort Order Selections:]{.underline}

POC Type, Contact Name, \[Contact\] Status, \[Status\] Begin Date,
\[Status\] End Date, Organization, Mailstop, FedRep ID.

**Help** Will invoke online Help for this page.

[Buttons]{.underline}:

**Menu Items** Will present the standard menu items dialog box.

**Scroll Buttons** Will scroll the list box in the direction of the
arrow displayed on the button.

#### 4.1.2.11 Water System Related POC Maintenance {#water-system-related-poc-maintenance .unnumbered}

The Water System Related POC Maintenance page (Exhibit 4-23) will be
invoked from the Water System Related POC Maintenance List or the Point
of Contact Assignments List. (R0059:A.4.1.2.11.a) From an **Edit/Add**
selection on the maintenance list, the page flow will be via Legal
Entity Search and Legal Entity Maintenance List where a selection will
be made and brought forward into this page.

Prior to display, the selected legal entity will be used to search all
existing associations via the WATER_SYS_LEGAL_ENTITY_CONTACT. Any
contacts in active status (active_ind_cd = "A") will be presented on the
page. The Select Type will be marked and protected, Active indicator set
and both radio buttons unprotected, Begin Date populated and
unprotected, End date set to null and protected.

[Protected Fields:]{.underline}

[Water System Group Box:]{.underline}

No., Name, Federal Type, State Type, Federal Primary Source.

[\[Legal Entity Identity\] Group Box:]{.underline}

Salutation The salutation or greeting for the contact.

Contact Name The contact's first and last name.

Alias Name The alias, common name, or acronym for the contact.

Prof Qual The professional qualification of the contact.

Job Title The professional job title of the contact.

Organization Identifies the contact's organization.

Legal Entity

Type The contact's legal entity type, IN (individual), CM (company), NP
(Non-Profit), etc.

  ----------------------------------------------------- ----------------------------------------------------
  ![](media/image24.png){width="1.9944444444444445in"   ![](media/image25.png){width="5.997222222222222in"
  height="6.633333333333334in"}                         height="6.929166666666666in"}

  ----------------------------------------------------- ----------------------------------------------------

[]{#__RefHeading___Toc139687346 .anchor}**Exhibit 4-23.** Water System
Related POC Maintenance

GA

Type If the Legal Entity type is GA (Government Agency), this field will
display the "Type" of Government Agency, (i.e., State, Town, City,
County, etc.).

ID No. The Legal Entity's identification number. May be provided by an
external source such as employer or Internal Revenue Service (IRS).

FedRep ID The concatenation of the Legal Entity's internal system number
and State Code.

[Address Group Box:]{.underline}

Address Line One, Address Line Two, City, State, Zip, County,
International Postal Code.

[Phone Numbers Group Box:]{.underline}

Purpose Indicates for what purpose the phone number could be used.

Phone

Number The phone number including area code.

Extension The office extension of the phone number.

[Electronic Addresses Group Box:]{.underline}

> Purpose The purpose of the electronic address indicates for what
> purpose the address could be used.
>
> Address The electronic address for the contact.

[Entry Fields:]{.underline}

*Select* This will be a checkbox to indicate POC Type selection.

> Marking the Select Type with a check will indicate that the legal
> entity is being designated as a new POC for the water system. When
> marked, the following actions will occur:

-   Active/Inactive radio buttons will become unprotected and Active
    will be set.

-   Begin Date will become unprotected and set to the current date.

-   End Date will remain protected and null.

> If the Select is unmarked, all fields on the row will be reset to null
> values and become protected.
>
> If the POC designation already exists and is displayed as active, the
> Select will be marked and protected from change. The Active/Inactive
> radio buttons will be unprotected.

*Type of POC* In addition to the *Select Type* checkboxes, these fields
indicate the type of contact the selected legal entity provides for the
water system. The first nine choices are displayed directly on the page
for the user, as they are choices delivered with the software. Listed
below are descriptions of the preset system choices.

[Displayed Contact Types:]{.underline}

**Value Description**

AC Administrative Contact; Contact who handles administrative matters.

> OW Owner; Owner of a water system.
>
> DO Designated OP In Charge; Person who serves as the principal
> operator for a water system (especially in the situation where a
> system has more than one operator.

OP Operator; Operator of the water system.

EC Emergency Contact - Person to contact in an emergency.

> SA Sampler; Contact responsible for collecting or otherwise dealing
> with sampling information.

FC Financial; Contact who handles financial matters.

LC Legal; Contact who handles legal matters.

PL Physical Location; Contact at the Physical Location.

> The next two choices allow the user to select the Type of POC using a
> dropdown list. The choices available on the dropdown list are
> controlled by the System Administrator and will be retrieved from the
> TINPVALS table name = "POCTYPE" and ownership_code = "ST." (The "HQ"
> rows will not be presented in the dropdown list.) If no choices are
> available, the field will display -- None
>
> For administrator-defined types, a selection will be required if the
> Select Type box is marked. This field will be protected from change on
> displayed, active contacts.

*Active/*

*Inactive* Radio buttons to indicate activity status of POC Type.

> When the Select is marked, the radio buttons are available for change.
> Active will automatically be set the Begin Date field set to the
> current date. Choosing Inactive will set the End Date field to current
> date and unprotect it. Resetting the status from inactive to active
> will set the end date to null and protect it.
>
> Active/Inactive is mandatory when the select type has been marked.

\[*Status*\]

*Begin Date* The begin date for the contact's status. This field will be
defaulted to the current date when the contact is added and is
modifiable. The date can be changed to a date prior to the current date.
Future dates are not allowed and the error message will be **Begin Date
cannot be in the future.** If the Begin Date is blank, error message
will be **Begin Date cannot be blank.**

\[*Status*\]

*End Date* The date on which the contact's status became inactive. This
field will be defaulted to the current date when the Inactive radio
button is selected. The date can be changed to a date prior to the
current date. Future dates are not allowed and the error message will be
**End Date cannot be in the future.** When valued, it must be after the
Begin Date or the error message will be **End Date cannot be prior to
Begin Date.** If the status is Inactive, the end date cannot be blank
and the error message will be **End Date cannot be blank.**

[Buttons:]{.underline}

**Email/**

**Url Launch** This button will open the Email/Web Launch page. The page
will display a list of all Electronic addresses for the Contact
displayed. See Chapter 1 for further discussion and description of this
functionality. This button will only be enabled when a selection is made
in the Electronic Address list box.

> **OK** The user must select at least one Contact Type for the Legal
> Entity. If no type is selected, the following error message will be
> presented: **A Contact Type selection is required for the First
> User-Controlled contact.** (The message will change to indicate which
> user-controlled contact type was not selected.)

Will perform the following edits for each checked Select sequentially on
both this page and the **MORE** page. In some cases, the field in error
may be on the **MORE** pages which will be opened to present the
erroneous field. After correcting the data, select Close to return to
the primary page and the select OK to continue processing.

Dates:

-   If Begin Date is blank, error message will be **Begin Date cannot be
    blank.**

-   If Begin Date is after the current date, the error message will be
    **Begin Date cannot be in the future.**

-   If Inactive is selected and End Date is blank, the error message
    will be **End Date cannot be blank.**

-   If End Date is after the current date, the error message will be
    **End Date cannot be in the future.**

-   If End Date has a value and is less than the Begin Date, the error
    message will be **End Date cannot be prior to Begin Date.**

-   If Active is selected and End Date has a value, it will be ignored
    and set to null.

-   If Active or Inactive has not been selected, the following error
    message will be presented: **Activity Status cannot be blank**.

*Duplicate Check* For each choice selected, a duplicate check will be
performed to ensure that the legal entity being associated to the water
system to perform the selected contact type does not already exist in an
active status. If a WATER_SYSTEM_LEGAL_ENTITY_CONTACT of the same type
exists for the supplied water system and legal entity with an
active_ind_cd = "A," the following error message will be presented:
**This type of Water System Point of Contact already exists.** Pressing
**OK** on this error message will close the dialog box and ignore the
request to add the contact of this type. Processing will have been
interrupted. The duplicate situation must be resolved and the **OK**
button pressed again to resume processing.

*Overlap Check* In addition to the duplicate check, an overlap check
will be applied. For each selection, an overlap check will ensure that
the legal entity being associated/updated to the water system does not
already exist with Begin and End Dates that overlap the new Begin and
End Dates. If a WATER_SYSTEM_LEGAL_ENTITY_CONTACT row exists for the
same water system and legal entity, with new begin dates equal to or
less than the existing end date AND new end date either null, or equal
to or greater than any existing begin date the following error message
will be presented: **An overlap exists with the new contact and an
existing contact.** For example, John Doe is associated to the water
system as an Inactive AC contact, Begin Status Date = 1/1/02 and End
Status Date = 1/31/02. If the user attempts to add John Doe as an AC
contact with Begin Status Date of 1/15/02, this begin date overlaps the
previous AC contact period and the error message will be invoked.
Pressing **OK** on this error message will close the dialog box and
interrupt the processing. The overlap situation must be resolved and the
**OK** button pressed again to resume processing.

> *Add Selected*
>
> *Contact* When editing is complete on a new selection, a
> Water_Sys_legal_Entity\_ CONTACT row will be added and associated to
> the Water System and the Legal Entity. The type_code will be set to
> the appropriate contact type, active_ind_cd will be set to the "A"
> when the Active radio button is selected and to "I" when the Inactive
> radio button is selected, the Begin Date to the Begin Date value, End
> Date to the value specified or null, d_last_update_timestamp and
> d_initial_timestamp to current timestamp, d_userid_code and
> d_initial_userid to current User ID, and the TINWSLEC_is_number to the
> next sequential number utilizing the TINEISN row for table name
> TINWSLEC.
>
> When successful the processing will commit changes to this selection,
> protect the select type and type of POC. If the selection was added as
> inactive, all fields for the selection will be protected. Processing
> will proceed to editing the next selection.

The d_last_update_timestamp, d_last_inventory_update_timestamp and
d_userid_code of the Water System will not be updated. If the water
system's d_new_ws_flag = "Y," it will be set to "N."

> *Change Selected*
>
> *Contact* When editing is complete on an existing selection, the
> WATER_SYSTEM_LEGAL_ENTITY_CONTACT row is updated with the new values
> for active_ind_cd, Begin Date, and End Date. The type cannot be
> changed. The d_last_update_timestamp and d_userid_code will be set to
> current values.
>
> The d_last_update_timestamp, d_last_inventory_update_timestamp and
> d_userid_code of the Water System will not be updated.
>
> When successful the processing will commit changes to this selection.
> If the selection was changed to inactive, all fields for the selection
> will be protected. Processing will proceed to editing the next
> selection.
>
> After all contact type additions and changes have been processed, the
> page will close and return to the Related Point of Contact Maintenance
> list page with a refreshed list of contacts.

**Cancel** If changes have been made, the standard Cancel Confirm dialog
box will be presented. If no changes are detected, the page will close
and return the user to the Related Point of Contact Maintenance List
page.

**Help** Will invoke online Help for this page.

**\<More\>** Will present the More POC Types page (Exhibit 4-24).

[Tab Sequence:]{.underline}

**Email/Url Launch,** Select, Active/Inactive, \[Status\] Begin Date,
\[Status\] End Date, **OK**, **Cancel**, **Help**, **\<More\>**.

![](media/image26.png){width="5.996527777777778in"
height="6.206944444444445in"}

[]{#__RefHeading___Toc139687347 .anchor}**Exhibit 4-24.** More POC Types

This page will function just as the primary page. The first 12 choices
displayed on the page are displayed directly on the page for the user,
as they are choices delivered with the software. Descriptions of the
preset system choices are listed below.

[Displayed Contact Types:]{.underline}

**Value Description**

> LE Lead Engineer; Contact who serves as lead engineer
>
> OT Other; Other contact type
>
> BI Bureau of Indian Affairs Representative
>
> HC Health Clinic Representative
>
> IE Indian Health Service Engineer
>
> IS Indian Health Service Sanitarian
>
> TC Tribal Chairman
>
> TE Tribal Environment Dept Representative
>
> TG Tribal Government Representative
>
> TH Tribal Health Dept Representative
>
> UN Utility Representative (Non-Tribal)
>
> UT Utility Representative (Tribal)

The next four choices allow the user to select the Type of POC using a
dropdown list. The choices available on the dropdown list are controlled
by the System Administrator and will be retrieved from the TINPVALS
table name = "POCTYPE" and ownership_code = "ST" (The "HQ" permitted
values rows will not be presented in the dropdown.)

[More POC Types Buttons:]{.underline}

**Close** Will close the page and return to the primary Water System
Related POC Maintenance page. No further editing or processing is done
until the OK button is presented on the primary page.

[Tab Sequence:]{.underline}

Select, Active/Inactive, \[Status\] Begin Date, \[Status\] End Date,
**Close**.

#### 4.1.2.12 Related Regulating Agency Maintenance List {#related-regulating-agency-maintenance-list .unnumbered}

The Related Regulating Agency Maintenance List (Exhibit 4-25) is
described below. The Related Regulating Agency Maintenance List will
display all Regulating Agency associations to the water system. A
maximum of 1000 records can be added and maintained per water system.
That is to say, this design assumes that there will never be more than
1000 records per water system.

[Protected Fields:]{.underline}

[Water System Group Box:]{.underline}

No., Name, Federal Type, State Type, Federal Primary Source, Number of
rows displayed.

[List Columns:]{.underline}

Regulating Agency Name, Activity Status.

  -----------------------------------------------------------------------
  ![](media/image27.png){width="7.3493055555555555in" height="4.8375in"}

  -----------------------------------------------------------------------

[]{#__RefHeading___Toc139687348 .anchor}**Exhibit 4-25.** Related
Regulating Agency Maintenance List

[Default Sort Order:]{.underline}

Activity Status (Active first); Name order, ascending.

[Menu Items:]{.underline}

**File**

*Exit* Will close the page and return to the Water System Modification
page.

**Edit**

> *Add* Will present the Legal Entity Maintenance List page (discussed
> in Chapter 2) in single-select mode where a regulating agency may be
> selected to associate to the water system. The Legal Entity
> Maintenance List will be filtered to display only legal entities of
> type government agency designated as a regulating agency.

The user will then flow to the Related Regulating Agency Maintenance
page in *Add* mode with the information for the selected legal entity
displayed.

**Note:** If the desired legal entity does not appear on the Legal
Entity Maintenance List page, the user will need to use the Legal Entity
Maintenance functions to verify that the desired legal entity has been
designated as a regulating agency.

> This option will be available even if a row is selected on the list.

*Change* Will present the Related Regulating Agency Maintenance page in
*Change* mode.

> This item will be available only if an agency is selected in the list
> area. A double-click on a list box row will react like the change
> item.

*Delete* If this Regulating Agency Association is the only active
regulating agency association, error message will be **At least one
active Regulating Agency Association must be maintained**. The user will
be return user to Regulating Agency Association Maintenance List page.

Will present the Delete Regulating Agency Association dialog box
(Exhibit 4-26) requiring selection of **OK** or **Cancel.**

![](media/image28.png){width="5.635416666666667in"
height="2.7291666666666665in"}

[]{#__RefHeading___Toc139687349 .anchor}**Exhibit 4-26.** Delete
Regulating Agency Association

[Delete Regulating Agency Association Buttons:]{.underline}

> **OK** Will delete the water system's regulating agency association.
> The confirmation page will close and return the user to the Related
> Regulating Agency Maintenance List with this regulating agency
> removed.
>
> **Cancel** Will abort the delete request and return the user to the
> Related Regulating Agency Maintenance List with no modification.

**Help** Will invoke online Help for this page.

[Buttons:]{.underline}

**Menu Items** Will present the standard menu items dialog box.

**Scroll Buttons** Will scroll the list box in the direction of the
arrow displayed on the button.

#### 4.1.2.13 Related Regulating Agency Maintenance {#related-regulating-agency-maintenance .unnumbered}

Exhibit 4-27 depicts the Related Regulating Agency Maintenance page.

[Protected Fields:]{.underline}

[Water System Group Box:]{.underline}

No., Name, Federal Type, State Type, Federal Primary Source.

  -----------------------------------------------------------------------
  ![](media/image29.png){width="7.343055555555556in"
  height="5.102083333333334in"}

  -----------------------------------------------------------------------

[]{#__RefHeading___Toc139687350 .anchor}**Exhibit 4-27.** Related
Regulating Agency Maintenance

[\[Regulating Agency Identification Information\]:]{.underline}

\[Regulating Agency\] Name, Alias Name, GA Type, EPA Region,
Administrative ID No., Address Line One, Address Line Two, City, State,
Zip

[Entry Fields:]{.underline}

> *Purpose* The reason the government agency regulates the water system.
> This will be a free-form field.
>
> Purpose will be an optional field.
>
> *Status* When valued, this attribute will set the status of the
> association. The values included on the dropdown list will be:
>
> **Value Description**

A Active

I Inactive

> *Establishment No*. Will identify the license number, certificate
> number, or other number (other than the drinking water program) used
> by a regulating program. This will be a free-form field.
>
> Establishment No. will be an optional field.

[Buttons:]{.underline}

**OK**

*Add Mode* Will determine if the government agency is already associated
to this water system. If it is, the following error message will be
presented: **A duplicate Regulating Agency Association was found.** The
page will close and the Related Regulating Agency Maintenance List page
will be redisplayed.

> When successful, a new Regulating_Agency_Association row will be
> created. The d_last_update_timestamp, d_initial_timestamp,
> d_initial_uerid\_ and d_userid_code will be set to current values.

The d_last_update_timestamp, and d_userid_code of the Water System will
not be updated. The d_last_inventory_update_timestamp on the water
system will be set to current timestamp. If the water system's
d_new_ws_flag = "Y," it will be set to "N."

> When complete, the Related Regulating Agency Maintenance List page
> will be redisplayed with the regulating agency listed in the list box
> area.

*Change Mode* If this Regulating Agency Association is the only active
regulating agency association will not commit change to inactive and
will invoke the following error message: **At least one active
Regulating Agency Association must be maintained.** Software will return
user to Regulating Agency Association Maintenance page.

Will update the Regulating_Agency_Association row with the changed
information. The d_last_update_timestamp and d_userid_code will be set
to current values.

The d_last_update_timestamp, and d_userid_code of the Water System will
not be updated. The d_last_inventory_update_timestamp on the water
system will be set to current timestamp.

When complete, the Related Regulating Agency Maintenance List page will
be redisplayed.

> **Cancel** If no changes have been made to the enterable fields, the
> page will close and return the user to the Related Regulating Agency
> Maintenance List.
>
> If changes have been made, the standard Cancel Confirm dialog box will
> be presented.
>
> **Help** Will invoke online Help for this page.

#### Related Geographic Area Maintenance List

The Related Geographic Area Maintenance List (Exhibit 4-28) will list
geographic areas related to a water system. A maximum of 1000 records
can be added and maintained per water system. That is to say, this
design assumes that there will never be more than 1000 records per water
system.

The user may add, change primary indication, change principal
indication, or delete the association of a related geographic area for a
water system. The first time a city is related to a water system as a
geographic area, the associated county will be displayed. The first time
a water system is associated to a geographic area type, SDWIS/STATE will
default the area as principal.

A geographic area is considered primary if a water system provides most
of its production to that area. More than one area of a given type may
be designated primary, e.g., when a system provides 50 percent of its
production to each of two cities.

Principal areas are the areas where the subject water system is
designated as the principal supplier of water to that geographical area.
Any geographic area may be indicated as principal and a geographic area
may be indicated as principal without being indicated as primary.

  -----------------------------------------------------------------------
  ![](media/image30.png){width="7.341666666666667in"
  height="4.3597222222222225in"}

  -----------------------------------------------------------------------

[]{#__RefHeading___Toc139687351 .anchor}**Exhibit 4-28.** Related
Geographic Area Maintenance List

[Protected Fields:]{.underline}

[Water System Group Box:]{.underline}

No., Name, Federal Type, State Type, Federal Primary Source, Number of
rows displayed.

[List Columns:]{.underline}

Related Geographic Area Name, FIPS Code, State Defined Code,
\[Geographic Area\] Type \[Code\], Primary \[Indicator\], Principal
\[Indicator\], Last Updated by, Last Update TS, Created By, and Created
TS.

[Menu Items:]{.underline}

**File**

*Exit* Will close the page and return the user to the Water System
Modification page.

**Edit**

*Add* Will invoke the Geographic Area Search page, discussed in Chapter
3. Criteria may be entered to narrow the resulting list of geographic
areas to associate to the water system. The Geographic Area Search page
will flow to the Geographic Area Maintenance List page, discussed in
Chapter 3, in multi-select mode. After selecting one or more geographic
areas, the user will be returned to the Related Geographic Area
Maintenance List. **Note:** If the user selected multiple geographic
areas, the selections will be processed sequentially.

> The following edit will be performed to ensure the association of the
> geographic area to the water system is valid. A
> WATER_SYSTEM_GEO_AREA_ASGMT cannot already exist between the water
> system and the selected GEOGRAPHIC_AREA. If an association already
> exists between the water system and the selected geographic area the
> duplicate will be ignored**.** The process will continue with the next
> selected service area. If not, a new WATER_SYSTEM_GEO_AREA_AGMT will
> be created associated to the Water System and the selected
> GEOGRAPHIC_AREA. The d_last_update_timestamp, d_initial_timestamp,
> d_userid_code and d_initial_userid will be set to current values. The
> external_system_number will be set to the external_system_number
> utilizing the TINEISN table where table_name equals "TINWSGAA."
>
> If the selected GEOGRAPHIC_AREA type_code is "CT" (city) and this is
> the first city relationship, the selection will be indicated as
> principal by setting the principal_indicator_code to "Y" and the
> primary_indicator_code to "N." The WATER_SYSTEM
> d_principal_city_served will be updated with the principal city name.
> If the selected city is contained within a county geographic area and
> no existing county relationship already exists for the water system,
> the software will create the county relationship
>
> If the selected type is a CN (county) and this is the first county
> relationship, the selection will be indicated as principal by setting
> the principal_indicator_code to "Y" and the primary_indicator_code to
> "N." The WATER_SYSTEM d_principal_county_name will be updated with the
> principal county name.
>
> All other geographic area relationships, including subsequent city and
> county types, will be added with primary and principal indicators set
> to \"N\" (No). All other geographic area relationships will not ALWAYS
> be added with primary and principal indicators set to 'N'. If it is
> the first relationship for a given type, it will also be marked as
> principal.
>
> The water system's d_last_update_timestamp and d_userid_code will not
> be updated. The d_last_inventory_update_timestamp on the water system
> will be set to current timestamp. If the d_new_ws_flag = "Y," it will
> be reset to "N."
>
> This item will be available even if a geographic area is selected in
> the list box.

*Change*

*Primary* Will change the highlighted geographic area's primary
indicator. If the highlighted area currently shows \"Y\" (Yes) the
indicator will toggle to \"N\" (No) and vice versa. Many geographic
areas may be marked as primary.

> The d_last_update_timestamp and d_userid_code will be set to current
> values.
>
> The d_last_update_timestamp, and d_userid_code of the Water System
> will not be updated. The d_last_inventory_update_timestamp on the
> water system will be set to current timestamp.
>
> This item will only be available if a geographic area is selected in
> the list box.
>
> *Delete* Will invoke the Delete Related Geographic Area dialog box
> (Exhibit 4-29) requiring selection of **OK** or **Cancel**.
>
> ![](media/image31.png){width="4.666666666666667in" height="2.5625in"}

[]{#__RefHeading___Toc139687352 .anchor}**Exhibit 4-29.** Delete Related
Geographic Area Association

[Delete Related Geographic Area Association Buttons:]{.underline}

> **OK** Will check if the related Geographic Area is type CN and if
> Principal Indicator is Y; if both are true, it updates the value in
> Water System d_Principal_County Served to spaces. Will check if the
> related Geographic Area is type CT and if Principal Indicator is Y; if
> both are true, it updates the value in Water System d_Principal_City
> Served to spaces. Will delete the association of the related
> geographic area to the water system. The confirmation page will close
> and return the user to the Related Geographic Area Maintenance List
> page with this geographic area removed from the list.

**Cancel** Will abort the delete request and return the user to the
Related Geographic Area Maintenance List page with no modification.

> *Make*
>
> *Principal* Will mark the highlighted geographic area as the principal
> area for the water system. The d_last_update_timestamp and
> d_userid_code will be set to current values. The previously principal
> area will be reset to \"N\" in the display. If the highlighted
> geographic area is already the designated principal, the following
> error message will be presented: **Geographic Area is already
> principal. Select another geographic area.**
>
> If the geographical area is a county or city, the geographic area name
> will be stored on the WATER_SYSTEM table and displayed on the Water
> System Maintenance page.
>
> The d_last_update_timestamp, and d_userid_code of the Water System
> will not be updated. The d_last_inventory_update_timestamp on the
> water system will be set to current timestamp.
>
> This item will be available only if a geographic area is selected in
> the list box.

**Help** Will invoke online Help for this page.

[Buttons]{.underline}:

**Menu Items** Will present the standard menu items dialog box.

**Scroll Buttons** Will scroll the list box in the direction of the
arrow displayed on the button.

[Default Sort Order:]{.underline}

Geographic Area Type, ascending, Geographic Area Name, alpha ascending.

#### 4.1.2.15 Related Service Area Maintenance List {#related-service-area-maintenance-list .unnumbered}

The Related Service Area Maintenance List (Exhibit 4-30) will allow the
user to associate service areas to a water system. A maximum of 1000
records can be added and maintained per water system. That is to say,
this design assumes that there will never be more than 1000 records per
water system.

Multiple service areas may be associated to a water system. One
federally owned service area should be selected as primary. The
residential service area, if it exists, will usually be the primary
area. Be aware that selection of the primary area will not automatically
affect the water system classification. If only one service area is
associated for a water system, that area automatically will be
designated as primary. If more than one service area is associated to
the water system the user must highlight the appropriate area and select
**Edit/Make Primary**.

[Protected Fields:]{.underline}

[Water System Group Box:]{.underline}

No., Name, Federal Type, State Type, Federal Primary Source, Number of
rows displayed.

[List Columns:]{.underline}

Federal/State Code Indicates whether the Service Area displayed is a
Federal controlled Service Area type (HQ), or a State controlled Service
Area Type (ST).

Service Area Name Will be the descriptive name given to the service area
when defined in the *System Administration* component.

  -----------------------------------------------------------------------
  ![](media/image32.png){width="7.346527777777778in"
  height="4.333333333333333in"}

  -----------------------------------------------------------------------

[]{#__RefHeading___Toc139687353 .anchor}**Exhibit 4-30.** Related
Service Area Maintenance List

\[Type\] Code Will be the type of the service area. The codes will be:

**Value Description**

NT Non‑Transient

O Other (e.g., water bottler)

R Residential

T Transient

Name Code Will be the abbreviated name given to the service area when
defined in the *System Administration* component.

Primary \[Indicator\] Will be the indicator of the primary service area
when valued with "Y."

Last Updated by, Last Update TS

[Menu Items:]{.underline}

**File**

*Exit* Will close the page and return the user to the Water System
Modification page.

**Edit**

*Add* Will invoke the Service Area List, in multi-select mode. After the
user has selected one or more service areas to associate to the water
system, the user will be returned to the Related Service Area
Maintenance List page. **Note:** If the user selects multiple service
areas, the selections will be processed sequentially. (A.4.1.2.15.b)

> The following edit will be performed to ensure the association of the
> service area to the water system is valid. If a
> WATER_SYSTEM_SERVICE_AREA_ASGMT already exists between the water
> system and the selected service area the duplicate will be
> ignored**.** The process will continue with the next selected service
> area.
>
> When successful a new WATER_SYSTEM_SERVICE_AREA_ASGMT will be created
> associating the water system with each selected service area. The
> d_last_update_timestamp, d_initial_timestamp, d_userid_code and
> d_initial_userid will be set to current values. The first service area
> associated to the water system will be defaulted to the primary
> service area by having the primary_indicator_code set to "Y." If this
> record is state owned the following advisory message will be invoked:
> **Primary Service Area should be federally owned for accurate
> reporting to EPA.** The external_system_number will be set to the
> external_system_number from the TINEISN table where table_name =
> "TINWSSAA."
>
> The water system's d_last_update_timestamp and d_userid_code will not
> be updated. If the d_new_ws_flag = "Y," it will be reset to "N." The
> d_last_inventory_update_timestamp will be set to current timestamp.
>
> This menu item will be available even if a service area is selected in
> the list box.

*Delete* Will invoke the Delete Related Service Area dialog box (Exhibit
4-31), requiring selection of **OK** or **Cancel**.

![](media/image33.png){width="5.229166666666667in"
height="2.4166666666666665in"}

[]{#__RefHeading___Toc139687354 .anchor}**Exhibit 4-31.** Delete Related
Service Area Association

[Delete Related Service Area Association Buttons:]{.underline}

**OK** If the service area is marked as primary, regardless if it is
federally or state-owned, invoke following advisory: "Accurate EPA
reporting requires one primary federally owned service area." The
service area will be deleted. The advisory will close and return the
user to the Related Service Area Maintenance List with this service area
removed from the list.

If the service area is not marked as primary, delete the
WATER_SYSTEM_SERVICE_AREA_ASGMT. The confirmation page will close and
return the user to the Related Service Area Maintenance List with this
service area removed from the list.

**Cancel** Will abort the delete request and return the user to the
Related Service Area Maintenance List with no modification.

*Make Primary* If the highlighted area is already marked primary the
following error message will be presented: Please choose a Service Area
that is not Primary. If the highlighted service area is federally owned
(ST Code = HQ), this menu option will make it the primary service area
for the water system. If the highlighted service area is state-owned,
the following advisory message will be invoked: **Primary Service Area
should be federally owned for accurate reporting to EPA.**

The WATER_SYSTEM_SERVICE_AREA_ASGMT for this water system with the
primary_indicator_code set to "Y" will be updated as follows:

-   D_last_update_timestamp set to current timestamp

```{=html}
<!-- -->
```
-   D_userid_code set to current User ID

-   Primary_indicator_code set to "N"

The selected Service Area will be updated as follows:

-   D_last_update_timestamp set to current timestamp

-   D_userid_code set to current User ID

-   Primary_indicator_code set to "Y"

This item will only be available if a service area is selected in the
list area.

**Help** Will invoke online Help for this page.

[Buttons:]{.underline}

**Menu Items** Will present the standard menu items dialog box.

**Scroll Buttons** Will scroll the list box in the direction of the
arrow displayed on the button.

[Default Sort Order:]{.underline}

The items will be listed with the primary service area first. Subsequent
service areas will be listed ascending name within ascending code.

### Water Purchases/Wholesales

With SDWIS/STATE Web Release 1.0, a user will be able to review and
modify purchases whether the user is maintaining the purchaser system or
the seller system. In addition, the water purchase maintenance list will
be expanded and the Seller Water System Search, Seller Water System
List, and Seller to Purchase Flow pages have been incorporated into the
Water Purchase Maintenance page. Further, a user will be able to
maintain a purchase from the same page used to maintain detailed
information about the "receiving facility." Receiving facility is that
name given to the water system facility connected to a purchase on the
receiving side. Two types of water system facilities can be receiving
facilities, consecutive connections (CC) and non-piped facilities (NP).

Several water purchase table fields, available in SDWIS/STATE 8.0, are
redundant of data elements in the receiving water system facility
record. They will no longer be displayed on the Water Purchase
Maintenance page, and the fields will be marked as obsolete in the
database. Exhibit 4-32 displays the fields that are redundant in the
Purchase table in the left two columns and displays the fields in Water
System Facility that contain the same information (that latter will be
retained).

  -------------- --------------------- --------------- -----------------------
  **Redundant                          **Fields in     
  Fields in                            Water System    
  the**                                Facility        
  **Purchase                           (TINWSF) and    
  Table                                Water System    
  (TINWPURC)**                         Facility        
                                       History         
                                       (TINWSFH) that  
                                       Have the Same   
                                       Information**   

  **Label**      **Field Name**        **Label**       **Field Name**

  Active Date    ACTIVE_DATE           Activity Date + ACTIVITY_DATE
                                       Activity Status +ACTIVITY_STATUS_CD in
                                                       both TINWSF and TINWSFH

  Inactive Date  INACTIVE_DATE         Activity Date + ACTIVITY_DATE
                                       Activity Status +ACTIVITY_STATUS_CD in
                                                       both TINWSF and TINWSFH

  Purchase       PURPOSE_TYPE_CODE     Availability    AVAILABILITY_CODE
  Purpose                                              

  Type of Water  WATER_TYPE_CODE       Water Type      WATER_TYPE_CODE

  Water Finish   WATER_FINISH_TP_CD    Seller          SELL_TREAT_IND_CD b)
                                       Treatment       

  Water Treated  TREATED_BY_SELLER     Seller          SELL_TREAT_IND_CD
  by Seller                            Treatment       
  -------------- --------------------- --------------- -----------------------

[]{#__RefHeading___Toc139687355 .anchor}**Exhibit 4-32.** Obsolete Water
Purchase Fields (Not Displayed)

A new data element in water system facility, Average Percent Total Water
Quantity, represents the percent of the total water supplied to the
water system that comes from the water system facility. This attribute
will be used to calculate the Estimated Population Served by Purchase
and will be displayed on the list and maintenance page.

####  Water Purchases/Wholesales Maintenance List

The Water Purchases/Wholesales Maintenance List (Exhibit 4-33) continues
to include the list of water systems from which the selected water
system purchases water and has been expanded to include a list of water
systems to which the selected water system sells water. A maximum of
1000 wholesale and purchase records can be added and maintained per
water system. That is to say, this design assumes that there will never
be more than 1000 wholesale and purchase records per water system.

  -----------------------------------------------------------------------
  ![](media/image34.png){width="7.347916666666666in"
  height="4.591666666666667in"}

  -----------------------------------------------------------------------

[]{#__RefHeading___Toc139687356 .anchor}**Exhibit 4-33.** Water
Purchases/Wholesales Maintenance List

[Purchase (Buys From) List Columns:]{.underline}

Seller WS Act. Status, Seller WS No., Seller WS Name, Seller WSF Act.
Status, Seller WSF State Asgn ID, Seller WSF Water Type, Pur. WSF Act.
Status, Pur. WSF Avl (Availability), Pur. WSF State Asgn ID, % of Water
Used by Pur.

[Wholesales (Sells To) List Columns:]{.underline}

Seller WSF Act. Status, Seller WSF Av l(Availability), Seller WSF State
Asgn ID, Pur. WS Act Status, Purchaser WS No., Purchaser WS Name, Pur.
WSF Act Status, Pur. WSF Avl (Availability), Pur. WSF State Asgn ID,
Pur. WSF Water Type, Pur. WS Derived Population, % of Water Used by Pur.

[List Fields]{.underline}:

The fields, which may appear in either list, are listed below in
alphabetical order:

*Pur\[chaser\] WS*

*\[Water System\]*

*Act\[ivity\] Status* The single-character activity status code of the
purchasing water system.

*Purchaser WS \[Water*

*System\] Name* The name of the purchasing water system, limited to the
first 15 characters.

*Purchaser WS \[Water*

*System\] No.* The purchasing Water System No.

*Pur\[chaser Receiving\] WSF*

*Act\[ivity\] Status* The single-character activity status code of the
receiving water system facility. Note that if the status of the WSF
(i.e., the consecutive connection or non-piped facility) is inactive, it
means the purchase is inactive.

*Pur\[chaser Receiving\]*

*WSF Avl\[ability\]* The single-character code representing the
availability of the receiving water system facility. This will be read
from the WSF associated to the purchase on the purchasing side.

*Pur\[chaser\]*

*WS Derived*

*Population* The derived population of the purchasing water system
(D_POPULATION_COUNT), which is stored in the water system record for the
purchasing system (the same field that is displayed on the Water System
Maintenance page with the label "Total Calculated Daily Population").

> Purchaser WS Derived Population and % of Water Used by Purchaser can
> be multiplied together to estimate the population served in the buyer
> system by the water supplied by this seller (e.g., 3,550 population x
> 35% 100).

*% of Water Used*

*by Pur\[chaser \]* The average percent of the water supplied by this
purchase compared to the total amount of water used by the receiving
water system. This percentage is read from the water system facility
associated to the purchase on the purchasing side using a new field in
the water system facility table.

> Purchaser WS Derived Population and % of Water Used by Purchaser can
> be multiplied together to estimate the population served in the buyer
> system by the water supplied by this seller (e.g., 3,550 population x
> 35% 100).

*Pur\[chaser Receiving\]*

*WSF State Asgn ID* The state associated identification code of the
receiving water system facility (WSF).

*Pur\[chaser Receiving\]*

*WSF Water Type* The two-digit code representing the type of water of
the receiving water system facility.

*Seller WS \[Water System\]*

*Act\[ivity\] Status* The single-character activity status code of the
selling water system.

*Seller WS \[Water*

*System\] Name* The name of the seller water system, limited to the
first 15 characters.

*Seller WS \[Water*

*System\] No.* The Water System No. of the seller.

*Seller \[Supplying\] WSF*

*Act\[ivity\] Status* The single-character activity status code of the
supplying water system facility.

*Seller \[Supplying\]*

*WSF Avl\[ability\]* The single-character code representing the
availability of the supplying water system facility.

*Seller \[Supplying\] WSF*

*State Asgn ID* The state associated identification code of the
supplying water system facility (WSF).

*Seller \[Supplying\]*

*WSF Water Type* The two-character code representing the type of water
of the supplying water system facility.

[Menu Items:]{.underline}

**File**

*Exit* Will close the page and return to the Water System Modification
page.

**Edit**

*Add/Purchase* Will invoke the Water System Purchase Maintenance page
with the current Water System No. and name listed in the Purchaser Water
System/Receiving Facility Information box as read-only.

*Add/*

*Wholesale* Will invoke the Water System Purchase Maintenance page with
the current Water System No. and name listed in the Seller Water
System/Supplying Facility Information box as read-only.

*Change/Purchase*

Will invoke the Water Purchase Maintenance page in *Change* mode.

> This item will only be available if a water purchase record is
> selected in the Purchases list box. A double-click on a list box row
> will react like the change item.

*Change/Wholesale*

Will invoke the Water Purchase Maintenance page in *Change* mode.

> This item will only be available if a water purchase record is
> selected in the Wholesales list area. A double-click on a list box row
> will react like the change item.

*Delete/Purchase*

Will invoke the Delete Water Purchase (Exhibit 4-34) confirmation dialog
box with the message, **Delete this Water Purchase? If this was a real
purchase and you only want to inactivate the purchase, change the status
of the receiving facility to inactive using the Modify button on the
Water Purchase Maintenance page. If you proceed with the deletion, the
activity status and date for the purchaser's WSF will be updated to
inactive and the current date respectively, requiring selection of OK or
Cancel.**

This item will only be available if a water purchase record is selected
in the Purchases list area.

*Delete/Wholesale*

Will invoke the Delete Water Purchase (Exhibit 4-34) confirmation dialog
box with the message: **Delete this Water Purchase? If this was a real
purchase and you only want to inactivate the purchase, change the status
of the receiving facility to inactive using the Modify button on the
Water Purchase Maintenance page. If you proceed with the deletion, the
activity status and date for the purchaser's WSF will be updated to
inactive and the current date respectively, requiring selection of OK or
Cancel.**

This item will only be available if a water purchase record is selected
in the Wholesaler list area.

![](media/image35.png){width="5.995833333333334in" height="2.81875in"}

[]{#__RefHeading___Toc139687357 .anchor}**Exhibit 4-34.** Delete Water
Purchase

> **OK** Will delete the water purchase record and update the
> d_last_inventory_update_ts of the purchase WATER_SYSTEM (so that the
> software will re-evaluate the water system's PWS Type, Primary Water
> Source, and TCR schedule. Before deleting the purchase, the software
> will update the WSF and WSF History tables for the associated
> purchaser's WSF as follows: it will create a History record of data
> prior to the change, it will update the Activity Status to I
> (inactive), the Status Date to the current date, the
> d_last_update_timestamp to the current timestamp and the d_userid_code
> to the current user. Note that if the purchaser's WSF has sample
> schedules associated, *CDS Setup* will close them as it would any
> WSF's schedules when inactivated. The confirmation page will close and
> return the user to the Water Purchases/Wholesales Maintenance List
> with this water purchase record removed from the appropriate list and
> The Number of Rows Displayed for the appropriate list will show the
> new count of the water purchase records.
>
> **Cancel** Will abort the delete request and return the user to the
> Water Purchases/Wholesales Maintenance List with no modification.

**View**

*Filter by*

*Purchases*

*List* Will open the standard filter page where a value may be entered
for Seller WS No., Seller WS Name, Seller WSF State Asgn ID, Seller WSF
Water Type, Pur. WSF Avl, Pur. WSF State Asgn ID. This value will be
used to display only water purchase records matching the filter criteria
in the Purchases (Buys From) list.

> Utilizing the Filter item will remove some water purchase records from
> the list box display. The Number of Rows Displayed for the Purchases
> (Buys From) list will show a count of the water purchase records
> resulting from the filter.

*Wholesales*

*List* Will open the standard filter page where a value may be entered
for Seller WSF Avl, Seller WSF State Asgn ID, Purchaser WS No.,
Purchaser WS Name, Pur. WSF Avl, Pur. WSF State Asgn ID. This value will
be used to display only water purchase records matching the filter
criteria in the Wholesales (Sells To) list.

> Utilizing the Filter item will remove some water purchase records from
> the list box display. The Number of Rows Displayed for the Wholesales
> (Sells To) list will show a count of the water purchase records
> resulting from the filter.

*Refresh*

*Purchases*

*List* Will display all water purchase records in the Purchases (Buys
From) list.

*Wholesales*

*List* Will display all water purchase records in the Sales (Sells To)
list.

*Both Lists* Will display all water purchase records in both the
Purchases (Buys From) and Wholesales (Sells To) lists.

*Sort*

*Purchases*

*List* Will invoke a standard sort page where the Purchase (Buys From)
list may be sorted by any combination of three from the following fields
Seller WS No., Seller WS Name, Seller WSF State Asgn ID, Seller WSF
Water Type, Pur. WSF Avl, Pur. WSF State Asgn ID, % of Water Used by
Pur.

*Wholesales*

*List* Will invoke a standard sort page where the Wholesales (Sells To)
list may be sorted by any combination of three from the following fields
Seller WSF Avl, Seller WSF State Asgn ID, Purchaser WS No., Purchaser WS
Name, Pur. WSF Avl (Availability), Pur. WSF State Asgn ID, Pur WS
Derived Population, % of Water Used by Pur.

**Help** Will invoke online Help for this page.

[Buttons]{.underline}:

**Menu Items** Will present the standard menu items dialog box.

**Scroll Buttons** Will scroll the list box in the direction of the
arrow displayed on the button.

[Purchases (Buy From) List Default Sort Order:]{.underline}

The water purchase records are sorted in ascending order by Seller WS
Act. Status, Seller WSF Act. Status, Seller WS No., Seller WSF State
Asgn ID.

[Wholesales (Sells To) List Default Sort Order:]{.underline}

The water purchase records for wholesales are sorted in ascending order
by Pur. WS Act. Status, Pur. WSF Act. Status, Purchaser WS No., Pur. WSF
State Asgn ID.

[Protected Fields:]{.underline}

*Number of rows*

*Displayed:* This value will be displayed for each list and will
indicate the number of water purchase records available for viewing in
that list box via the vertical scroll bar. Each list will be limited to
1000 water purchase records. This value can be reduced by utilizing the
View/Filter menu item.

####  Receiving Facility/Water Purchase Maintenance

The Receiving Facility/Water Purchase Maintenance page serves as both
the maintenance page for water purchases and for more information about
purchasing facilities. It is the only page where Seller Treatment can be
maintained. This page is accessible from two other pages, the Water
Purchases Maintenance List page and the Water System Facility
Modification page when the facility is either a consecutive connection
or non-piped source. As designed, if a user selects the wrong purchasing
system when creating a purchase record, that record will need to be
deleted and a new one created to change the purchasing system.

The Receiving Facility/Water Purchase Maintenance page (Exhibit 4-35) is
described below.

[Protected Fields:]{.underline}

If this page is invoked from the Edit/Add Purchase menu item or
Edit/Change from an item selected in the Purchases (Buys From) list or
the **More** button on the Water System Facility Modification page, the
following fields are protected:

*\[Purchasing Water*

*System\] No.* This field will display the Water System No. of the water
system selected on the Water Modification Page or the Water
Purchases/Wholesales Maintenance list when Edit/Add Purchases was
selected.

*\[Purchasing Water*

*System\] Name* This field will display the name of the water system
selected on the Water Modification Page or the Water
Purchases/Wholesales Maintenance list when Edit/Add Purchases was
selected.

.

> If this page is invoked from the Edit/Add Wholesales menu item or
> Edit/Change from an item selected in the Wholesales (Sells To) list on
> the Water Purchases/Wholesales Maintenance List Page the following
> fields are protected:

*\[Selling Water*

*System\] No.* This field will display the number of the water system
selected on the Water Modification Page or the Water
Purchases/Wholesales Maintenance list when Edit/Add Wholesales was
selected.

*\[Selling Water*

*System\] Name* This field will display the name of the water system
selected on the Water Modification Page or the Water
Purchases/Wholesales Maintenance list when Edit/Add Wholesales was
selected.

Regardless of how the page is invoked the following fields are
protected:

*\[Purchasing Water System\]*

*Activity Status* This field will display the single-digit activity
status code of the purchasing water system.

*\[Purchasing Water System\]*

*Status Date* This field will display the activity date of the
purchasing water system.

*\[Purchasing Water System\]*

*Federal Type* This field will display the four-character code for the
federal water system type of the purchasing water system.

*\[Purchasing Water System\]*

*State Type* This field will display the four-character code for the
state water system type of the purchasing water system.

*\[Purchasing Water System\]*

*Federal Primary*

*Source* This field will display the three-character code for the
Federal Primary Source type of the purchasing water system.

*\[Purchasing\]*

*State Primary Source* This field will display the three-character code
for the state source type of the purchasing water system.

*\[Receiving WSF\]*

*Name* This field will display the name of the receiving water system
facility.

*\[Receiving WSF\]*

*Water Type* This field will display the two-digit code representing the
water type of the receiving water system facility.

*\[Receiving WSF\]*

*Local Name* This field will display the common name, secondary name,
and/or alias for the water system facility.

*\[Receiving WSF\]*

*Activity Status* This field will display the single-digit activity
status code of the receiving water system facility.

*\[Receiving WSF\]*

*Status Reason Code* This field will display a code indicating more
information about the reason for the receiving facility's current
status. Status reason codes will be controlled by the system
administrator.

  -----------------------------------------------------------------------
  ![](media/image36.png){width="5.165277777777778in" height="8.50625in"}

  -----------------------------------------------------------------------

[]{#__RefHeading___Toc139687358 .anchor}**Exhibit 4-35.** Receiving
Facility/Water Purchase Maintenance

*\[Receiving WSF\]*

*Status Date* This field will display the activity status date of the
receiving water system facility.

*\[Receiving WSF\]*

*Status Reason Memo* This memo field will display any recorded
information about the current status of the receiving facility.

*Est. Pop. Served*

*by Purchase* The field provides an estimate of the population that is
supplied with this purchased water. It is calculated by multiplying the
Total Calculated Daily Population of the purchasing water system (from
the Water System Maintenance page) by the Avg. % Total Water Quantity
(from the Water System Facility Maintenance page) of the receiving water
system facility.

*Average % Total Water*

*Quantity* The average percent of total water quantity represented by
this purchase.

*\[Receiving WSF\]Source*

*Treatment Status* This field indicates the treatment status of the
purchased water after the purchasing water system has received it. The
codes will be:

**Value Description**

> \<Spaces\>
>
> N No Treatment

T Treated

*\[Receiving WSF\]*

*Availability* This field will display the one-character availability
code of the receiving water system facility.

*\[Selling Water System\]*

*Activity Status* This field will display the one-character activity
code of the selling water system.

*\[Selling Water System\]*

*Status Date* This field will display the activity date of the selling
water system.

*\[Selling Water System\]*

*Federal Type* This field will display the four-character code for the
federal water system type of the selling water system.

*\[Selling Water System\]*

*State Type* This field will display the four-character code for the
state water system type of the selling water system.

*\[Selling Water System\]*

*Federal Primary*

*Source* This field will display the three-character code for the
Federal Primary Source type of the selling water system.

*\[Selling Water System\]*

*State Primary*

*Source* This field will display the three-character code for the state
source type of the selling water system.

*\[Supplying*

*WSF\] Name* This field will display the name of the supplying water
system facility.

*\[Supplying WSF\]*

*Water Type* This field will display the two-character code representing
the water type of the supplying water system facility.

*\[Supplying*

*WSF\] Local Name* This field will display the local name of the
supplying water system facility.

*\[Supplying WSF\]*

*Activity Status* This field will display the one-character activity
status code of the supplying water system facility.

*\[Supplying WSF\]*

*Status Reason Code* This field will display a code indicating more
information about the reason for the supplying facility's current
status. Status reason codes will be controlled by the system
administrator.

*\[Supplying WSF\]*

*Status Date* This field will display the activity status date of the
supplying water system facility.

*\[Supplying WSF\]*

*Status Reason Memo* This memo field will display any recorded
information about the current status of the supplying facility.

*\[Supplying WSF\] Seller*

*Treatment* If the supplying WSF is a consecutive connection or
non-piped source, this field will display the permitted value for the
code indicating the treatment provided by the seller of water for the
supplying water system facility.

*\[Supplying WSF\]*

*Availability* This field will display the one-character availability
code of the supplying water system facility.

*[\[]{.underline}Supplying WSF\] Filtration*

*Status* This field will capture the filtration status for sources. This
information will be federally reported for non-emergency SW or GU source
water.

*Record updated*

*by* The User ID and the timestamp from the last time the water purchase
record was updated.

*Record created*

*by* The initial User ID and timestamp when the water purchaser record
was initially added to the database.

[Entry Fields:]{.underline}

[Purchasing Water System/Receiving WSF Information Box]{.underline}

*\[Purchasing Water*

*System\] No.* The Water System No. of the purchasing water sytem, which
consists of the two-character state code plus the seven-character number
field. The state code portion will default to the
state_identification_code in the SYSTEM_VARIABLE entity view.

> This field is required.
>
> If this page is invoked from the Edit/Add Purchase menu item or
> Edit/Change Purchase from an item selected in the Purchases (Buys
> From) list, this field is valued with the Water System No. of the
> current water system and is protected. If a user created a purchase
> using an incorrect purchasing water system, the user will have to
> delete the purchase record and start over. If, on the other hand, the
> purchasing water system has changed, the user should inactivate the
> purchasing WSF (thereby inactivating the purchase record), create a
> new purchasing WSF and a new purchase record.
>
> If this page is invoked from the Edit/Add Wholesale or Edit/Change
> Wholesale from an item selected in the Wholesales (Sells To) list,
> this field is available to entry.
>
> When tabbing off or clicking outside this field after supplying a
> value, the water system will be retrieved and the name displayed. If a
> new value is supplied, all fields in the receiving facility group box
> are reset to blank. If no value is supplied, the receiving WSF State
> Asgn ID and **Go To** button will become protected and all fields in
> the receiving facility group box are reset to blank.
>
> If the supplied value is invalid, the Water System Maintenance List
> will be presented with the number that most closely matches the value
> entered. This list will not be limited to the user's current
> regulatory agency or WS group.
>
> The receiving WSF State Asgn ID and **Go To** button will become
> protected and all fields in the receiving facility group box are reset
> to blank until a valid Water System has been supplied.

*\[Purchasing Water*

*System\] Name* The water system name of the purchasing water sytem.

> This field is required. If this page is invoked from the Edit/Add
> Purchase menu item or the **More** button on the Water System Facility
> Modification page, this field is valued with the water system name of
> the current water system and will be protected. It is also protected
> if invoked using Edit/Change Purchase from an item selected in the
> Purchases (Buys From) list.
>
> If this page is invoked from the Edit/Add Wholesale or Edit/Change
> Wholesale from an item selected in the Wholesales (Sells To) list,
> this field is available to entry.
>
> When tabbing off or clicking outside this field after supplying a
> value, the water system will be retrieved and the number and name
> displayed. If a new value is supplied, all fields in the Receiving WSF
> group box are reset to blank. If no value is supplied, the receiving
> WSF State Asgn ID and **Go To** button will become protected and all
> fields in the Receiving WSF group box are reset to blank.
>
> Standard 40-character Public Water System Name may be entered
> completely, partially, or left blank. If the user specifies a partial
> string in this field, display the closest matching water system at the
> top of the list. (Closest matching means a match with the Water System
> Name, sorted alphabetically, that starts with the same text string as
> supplied.)
>
> If the name entered is not found, the software will flow to the Water
> System Maintenance List in single-select mode and [not]{.underline} be
> limited to the user's current regulating agency or WS group. The user
> may then select a water system and continue.
>
> The receiving WSF State Asgn ID and **Go To** button will become
> protected and all fields in the Receiving WSF group box are reset to
> blank until a valid Purchasing Water System is provided.

*[Receiving WSF Information Box]{.underline}*

**Modify button** If this page is accessed from the Water Purchases
Maintenance List in *Change* mode, the **Modify** button will be
enabled, allowing the user to change other information about the
purchasing facility (e.g., activity status, status date) using the Water
System Facility Modification page. If this page is invoked from the
**More** button on the Water System Modification page or the Add
function on the Water Purchases Maintenance List page, the **Modify**
button is protected.

*State Asgn ID* The state associated identification code of the
receiving water system facility (WSF). This field is required.

> When tabbing off this field after supplying a value, the value will be
> retrieved and the \[Receiving\] WSF name displayed. Note that the
> ability to select a different Water System Facility from a page
> invoked by the **More** button on the Water System Facility
> Modification page (one of the two ways to access this page) is unique
> to this page and therefore allows a user to pick a different water
> system facility from a child page (typically a user must pick a
> different water system facility from a maintenance list page).
>
> If the supplied value is invalid, the error message will be **The WSF
> State Asgn ID entered does not belong to this water system.** If the
> supplied value is not a facility type of Consecutive Connection (CC)
> or Non-piped, Purchased (NP) the error message will be **Purchaser WSF
> is not a Consecutive Connection or Non-Piped, Purchased facility.**
>
> All other fields within the Receiving WSF group box are protected
> until a valid water system facility has been supplied. When a valid
> facility State Asgn ID is removed or changed to another value, all the
> fields within the Receiving WSF group box are reset to initial values.

*Seller Treatment* This field will display the permitted value
description for the code indicating whether the water provided by the
seller is treated or not and, if treated, whether filtration is used or
not. The permitted values are listed below and will be presented in a
standardized code-description format with the code preceding the
description in the dropdown. (R0037:A.4.1.3.2.a)

> **Value Description**
>
> \<Spaces\> (Default)
>
> F Treated by seller including filtration
>
> N Not Treated by Seller
>
> P Partially Treated by Seller
>
> T Treated by Seller without filtration.
>
> This information is considered core data for a receiving facility by
> EPA and so is marked with the "+" symbol. It is not, however,
> mandatory for SDWIS/STATE because it is possible that a user does not
> know this information when adding or maintaining the facility. If set
> to spaces, seller treatment will not be federally reported.

*FINDS No.* A 12-character field used to record the number associated by
the EPA Facility Index System (FINDS) to identify the facility.

This will be an optional field.

*Constructed Date* The date that the water system facility construction
was completed.

This will be an optional field.

*Non-Piped*

*Facility Type* A coded value which categorizes a non-piped facility.
This field is only appropriate for non-piped, purchased (NP) facilities.
The permitted values for this field are:

> BL Bulk
>
> BT Bottled
>
> RT Retail
>
> VN Vended
>
> \<\> Spaces (default)
>
> This will be an optional field.

*Physical Modification*

*Date* The date that the water system facility was significantly
modified. The modified date must not be a future date.

This will be an optional field.

*Directions* A 120-character field that allows the user to record the
directions to the water system facility.

This will be an optional field.

[SWAP Report Group Box Entry Fields:]{.underline}

*Status* User will be able to value this field to indicate status of the
Source Water Assessment Program (SWAP) Report. This program requires all
water systems to create an assessment of each untreated water source
(wells, intakes, springs, etc.). The selections available via the
dropdown list will be:

> **Value Description**
>
> \<Spaces\> (Default)
>
> Y Yes, completed.

N No, not completed.

> N/A Not required to be completed.
>
> REQ Requested
>
> REC Received
>
> UR Under Review
>
> DEN Denied
>
> DUE

SWAP Report Status will be an optional field.

*Status Date* Will allow the user to enter the current SWAP report
status date. Future dates will not be allowed.

> SWAP Report Status Date will be an optional field.

[Pumps Group Box Entry Fields:]{.underline}

*Pump Type* Will indicate the type of pump. The first seven choices
displayed in the dropdown list are the choices delivered with the
software. Any options after the first seven are state-defined choices
controlled by the System Administrator. All options (seven delivered
with the software and any state-defined options) will be retrieved from
the TINPVALS table with table_name of "PUMPTYPE." Listed below are
descriptions of the preset system choices. The selections available via
the dropdown list will be:

> **Value Description**
>
> \<Spaces\>
>
> CF Centrifugal
>
> HP Hand pump
>
> JT Jet
>
> PD Positive displacement
>
> SC Screw
>
> SU Submersible
>
> VT Vertical turbine
>
> Pump Type will be an optional field.

*Description* A free-form text field where the user may enter additional
information regarding the type of pump used at the Water System
Facility.

> Description will be an optional field.

[Flow Rates List Box]{.underline}

Will display the Flow Rates for the Consecutive Connection or Non-Piped
facility retrieved from the WSF_FLOW_RATE table associated to the
displayed Consecutive Connection or Non-Piped facility. The list box
will display four rows of data, will display up to 50 rows of data via
the vertical scroll bar and there will be a statement underneath the
list box indicating how many rows are displayed from the number
available. The list will be refreshed whenever the Receiving Facility
State Asgn ID is changed.

[Flow Rates List Columns:]{.underline}

Type, Qty, UOM.

[Flow Rates Default Sort:]{.underline}

Type, ascending.

[Flow Rates Buttons:]{.underline}

**Add** Will present the WSF Flow Rate Maintenance page in *Add* mode.

This item will be enabled regardless of a Flow Rate selection having
been made in the list area. It will be disabled until a valid Receiving
WSF State Asgn ID is provided.

**Change** Will present the WSF Flow Rate Maintenance page in *Change*
mode.

> A double-click in the list box will react as if a single-click
> highlight and this button was selected.
>
> This button will be enabled only when a Flow Rate selection has been
> made in the list area.

**Delete** Will present the Delete Flow Rate confirmation dialog box.

> This button will be enabled only when a Flow Rate selection has been
> made in the list area.

[Measures List Box]{.underline}

Will contain a scrollable list of Measures for the Consecutive
Connection or Non-Piped, purchased facility retrieved from the
WSF_MEASURES table associated to the displayed Consecutive Connection or
Non-Piped, Purchased facility. The list box will display four rows of
data, will display up to 50 rows of data via the vertical scroll bar and
there will be a statement underneath the list box indicating how many
rows are displayed from the number available. The list will be refreshed
whenever the Receiving Facility State Asgn ID is changed.

[Measures List Columns:]{.underline}

Type, Qty, UOM.

[Measures Default Sort:]{.underline}

Type, ascending.

[Measures Buttons:]{.underline}

**Add** Will present the WSF Measures Maintenance page in *Add* mode.

This item will be enabled regardless of a Measure selection having been
made in the list area. It will be disabled until a valid Receiving WSF
State Asgn ID is provided.

**Change** Will present the WSF Measure Maintenance page in *Change*
mode.

A double-click in the list box will react as if a single-click highlight
and this button was selected.

This item will be enabled only when a Measure selection has been made in
the list area.

**Delete** Will present the Delete Measures confirmation dialog box.

This item will be enabled only when a Measure selection has been made in
the list area.

[Indicators List Box]{.underline}

Will contain a scrollable list of Indicators for the Consecutive
Connection or Non-Piped facility retrieved from the WSF_INDICATORS table
associated to the displayed Consecutive Connection or Non-Piped
facility. The list box will display four rows of data, will display up
to 50 rows of data via the vertical scroll bar and there will be a
statement underneath the list box indicating how many rows are displayed
from the number available. The list will be refreshed whenever the
Receiving Facility State Asgn ID is changed.

[Indicators List Columns:]{.underline}

Type, Value, Date.

[Indicators Default Sort:]{.underline}

Type, ascending.

[Indicators Buttons:]{.underline}

**Add** Will present the WSF Indicators Maintenance page in *Add* mode.

> This item will be enabled regardless of an Indicator selection having
> been made in the list area. It will be disabled until a valid
> Receiving WSF State Asgn ID is provided.

**Change** Will present the WSF Indicator Maintenance page in *Change*
mode.

> A double-click in the list box will react as if a single-click
> highlight and this button was selected.
>
> This item will be enabled only when an Indicator selection has been
> made in the list area.

**Delete** Will present the Delete Indicator confirmation dialog box.

> This item will be enabled only when an Indicator selection has been
> made in the list area.

[Selling Water System/Supplying WSF Information Box]{.underline}

*\[Selling Water*

*System\] No.* The Water System No. of the selling water sytem, which
consists of the two-character state code plus the seven-character number
field. The state code portion will default to the
state_identification_code in the SYSTEM_VARIABLE entity view.

> This field is required. If this page is invoked from the Edit/Add
> Wholesale, Edit/Change Wholesale, or Edit/Change Purchase menu items,
> this field is valued with the Water System No. of the current water
> system and is protected. If a user created a purchase using an
> incorrect seller water system, the user will have to delete the
> purchase record and start over. If, on the other hand, the seller
> water system has changed, the user should inactivate the purchasing
> WSF (thereby inactivating the purchase record), create a new
> purchasing WSF and a new purchase record.
>
> If this page is invoked from the Edit/Add Purchase menu item, this
> field is available for entry.
>
> When tabbing off or clicking outside this field after supplying a
> value, the water system will be retrieved and the name displayed.
>
> If the supplied value is invalid, the Selling Water System Name and
> all fields in the Supplying WSF group box will be set to default
> values and protected. The Water System Maintenance List will be
> presented in single-select mode with the number that most closely
> matches the value entered. This list will not be limited to the user's
> current regulating agency or WS group.
>
> All values in the Supplying WSF Group Box will be reset to default
> values when the Selling Water System is changed to a different valid
> value. If the Selling Water System contains no value or an invalid
> value, all fields in the Supplying WSF Group Box will become protected
> until a valid Supplying Water System is provided.

*\[Selling Water*

*System\] Name* The water system name of the selling water sytem.

> This field is required. If this page is invoked from the Edit/Add
> Wholesale, Edit/Change Wholesale, or Edit/Change Purchase menu items
> from an item selected in the Wholesales (Sells To) list, this field is
> valued with the name of the current water system and is protected. If
> this page is invoked from the Edit/Add Purchase menu item, this field
> is available for entry.
>
> Standard 40-character Public Water System Name may be entered
> completely, partially, or left blank. If the user specifies a partial
> string in this field, display the closest matching water system at the
> top of the list. (Closest matching means a match with the Water System
> Name, sorted alphabetically, that starts with the same text string as
> supplied.)
>
> If a valid water system name is entered, the seller water number is
> populated.
>
> If the name entered is not found, the software will flow to the Water
> System Maintenance List in single-select mode that is not limited to
> the user's current regulating agency or WS group. The user may then
> select a water system and continue.
>
> All values in the Supplying WSF Group Box will be reset to default
> values when the Selling Water System is changed to a different valid
> value. If the Selling Water System contains no value or an invalid
> value, all fields in the Supplying WSF Group Box will become protected
> until a valid Supplying Water System is provided.

*\[Supplying WSF}*

*State Asgn ID* The state associated identification code of the
supplying water system facility (WSF). This field is optional.

> When tabbing off this field after supplying a value, the value will be
> retrieved and the \[Supplying\] WSF name displayed.
>
> All values in the Supplying WSF Group Box will be reset to default
> values when the Supplying WSF State Asgn ID is changed to a different
> valid value. If the Supplying WSF State Asgn ID contains no value or
> an invalid value, all fields in the Supplying WSF Group Box will
> become protected until a valid Supplying WSF State Asgn ID is
> provided.
>
> If the supplied value is invalid, the error message will be **The WSF
> State Asgn ID entered does not belong to this water system.**

[Tab Sequence:]{.underline}

Purchasing Water System No. \[second field only\], Purchasing Water
System **Go To** button, Purchasing Water System Name, Receiving WSF
State Asgn ID, Receiving WSF State Asgn ID **Go To** button, **Modify**
button**,** Seller Treatment, FINDS No, Constructed Date, Non-Piped
Facility Type, Physical Modification Date, Directions, SWAP Report
Status and Status Date, Pump Type and Description, Flow Rates list box
and **Add, Change, Delete,** buttons, Measures list box and **Add,
Change, Delete,** buttons, Indicators list box and **Add, Change,
Delete** buttons, Selling Water System No. \[second field only\],
Selling Water System **Go To** button, Selling Water System Name,
Supplying WSF State Asgn ID, Supplying WSF State Asgn ID **Go To**
button, **OK**, **Cancel**, **Help**.

[Buttons:]{.underline}

**\[Purchasing Water**

**System\] Go To** This button will present the Water System Search
page. Once a search is invoked, the software will flow to the Water
System Maintenance List in single-select mode without limitation to
water systems from the current WS group or regulating agency. Only the
Edit/Select menu will be enabled. Add/change will not be allowed for
security reasons.

> If the Water Purchase Maintenance page was invoked from the Edit/Add
> Purchases menu item or Edit/Change Purchases from an item selected in
> the Purchases (Buys From) list, the **Go To** button will be protected

**\[Receiving**

**WSF\] Go To** This button will present the Water System Facility
Maintenance List in single-select mode for the selected water system
listing only WSF of type "CC-consecutive connection" and "NP-non-piped,
purchased" Only the **Edit/Select** and **Edit/Add** menu items will be
enabled.

**\[Receiving**

**WSF\] Modify** This button will be disabled on Add and enabled on
Change. When selected, the software will flow to the Water System
Facility Modification page, which will display the information for the
receiving facility. When OK or Cancel is selected on the Water System
Facility Modification page, the software will flow back to the Water
Purchase Maintenance page displaying any changes made to the receiving
facility. Changes made on the Water System Facility Modification page
will take precedence over any values entered in the Receiving Facility
group box. Any value changes made in the group box will be discarded.

**\[Selling Water**

**System\] Go To** This button will present the Water System Search
page. Once a search is invoked, the software will flow to the Water
System Maintenance List in single-select mode without limitation to
water systems from the current WS group or regulating agency. Only the
Edit/Select menu will be enabled. Add/change will not be allowed for
security reasons.

> If the Water Purchase Maintenance page was invoked from the Edit/Add
> Wholesales menu item or Edit/Change Wholesale from an item selected in
> the Wholesales (Sells To) list, the **Go To** button is protected.

**\[Supplying**

**WSF\] Go To** This button will present the Water System Facility
Maintenance List in single-select mode for the selected water system.
Only the **Edit/Select** menu will be enabled (add/change will not be
allowed for security reasons).

> **OK** Please note that this page will impose the following edit
> checks but the primary responsibility for entering valid data will
> rest outside the application software.
>
> If Purchasing Water System is not supplied, the error message will be
> **Seller has been selected, must have Purchaser.**
>
> If supplied Selling Water System and Purchaser Water System are equal,
> the following error message will be presented: **System may not
> purchase water from itself, select another water system.**
>
> Receiving WSF must be supplied. If it is not, the following error
> message will be presented: **The receiving water system facility must
> be supplied for a purchase.**
>
> Selling Water System must be supplied unless the page has been invoked
> from the **More** button on the Water System Facility Modification
> page. When invoked from this page a purchase record will be added if
> the Selling Water System has been provided. If not provided, it is not
> mandatory and will not be added. If it is invoked from the Water
> Purchases Maintenance List and Selling Water System is not supplied,
> the following error message will be presented: **The seller of the
> water must be supplied for a purchase.**
>
> If a Supplying WSF is associated to the purchase record and the Water
> Type of the Supplying WSF is different than the Water Type of the
> Receiving WSF, the following advisory will be invoked: **The Water
> Type (e.g. GW) of the Receiving Facility is different than the Water
> Type of the Supplying Facility. After selecting OK if you wish to
> change the Water Type of the Receiving Facility proceed to the Water
> System Facility Modification page.**
>
> If Physical Modification Date contains a future date, the error
> message will be **Date may not be after today's date.**
>
> If SWAP Report Status Date contains a future date, the error message
> will be **Date may not be after today's date.**

*Duplicate Check*

> The duplicate check is on the combination of Purchasing Water System
> and Receiving WSF. A facility of type consecutive connection or
> non-piped, purchased may only purchase water from one water system. If
> this purchase relationship changes for the receiving facility, the old
> purchase record must be deleted. The Purchasing water system may
> purchase from multiple Selling water systems, but each receiving wsf
> must be a unique consecutive connection or non-piped, purchased
> facility type.

*Add Mode* A new Water_Purchase row will be created and associated to
the purchasing water system, purchasing WSF and the selling water
system. If a selling water system facility is provided, it will be
associated to the water supplier. The d_last_update_timestamp,
d_initial_timestamp, d_userid_code and d_initial_userid will be set to
current values.

The d_last_update_timestamp and d_userid_code will not be updated on
either water system or either water system facility record. The
d_last_inventory_update_ts of the purchaser water system will be set to
the current value. If the water system's d_new_ws_flag is set to "Y," it
will be reset to "N."

> When successful, the page will close and return the user to the Water
> Purchases/Wholesale Maintenance List with the previously selected sort
> and filters applied and the Number of Records Displayed field updated.
> The newly added record will be presented, if there is space available
> in the list, even if it would not meet any previously specified sort
> and filter parameters. The list will not be refreshed from the
> database.

*Change Mode* The existing Water_Purchase will be modified with the new
information. If a different supplying water system facility is provided,
it will replace an existing supplying water system facility association
or create a new association. If the supplying water system facility was
removed the association will be deleted. The d_last_inventory_update_ts
of the purchaser WATER_SYSTEM will be set to current timestamp. The
d_last_update_timestamp and d_userid_code will not be updated on either
water system or either water system facility record.

If one or more of the enterable fields in the Receiving WSF group box
were changed, the Water System Facility will be updated with the new
values. The last_update_timestamp and last_update_userid will be set to
current values on the Receiving water system facility.

A change in the value of the seller treatment indicator or physical
modification date will create a snapshot of the before-image in the
water system facility history (TINWSFH) table.

> When successful, the page will close and return the user to the Water
> Purchases/Wholesale Maintenance List with the previously selected sort
> and filters applied.
>
> **Cancel** If no changes have been made to the enterable fields, the
> page will close and return the user to the Water Purchases/Wholesales
> Maintenance List page.

If changes have been made, the standard Cancel Confirm dialog box will
be invoked.

**Help** Will invoke online Help for this page.

**Scroll Buttons** Will scroll the list box in the direction of the
arrow displayed on the button.

### Add New Water System

The Add Water System page (Exhibit 4-36) will be accessible from the
*SDWIS/STATE Home Page* Inventory menu. This is a new quick-add page to
quickly add a Water System even if the user does not have complete
information about the system.

  ----------------------------------------------------- -----------------------------------------------------
  ![](media/image37.png){width="1.9229166666666666in"   ![](media/image38.png){width="3.8756944444444446in"
  height="5.2652777777777775in"}                        height="3.484722222222222in"}

  ----------------------------------------------------- -----------------------------------------------------

[]{#__RefHeading___Toc139687359 .anchor}**Exhibit 4-36.** Add New Water
System

[Protected Field:]{.underline}

*\[Contact* Organization, Mail Stop, Address Line One, Address Line Two,
City,

*Details\]* State, Zip, Country, International Postal Code.

*Primacy Regulating*

*Agency* Will display the primacy regulating agency name. The software
will default this value with the GOVERNMENT_AGENCY designated with
primacy_indicator_code = "Y."

[Entry Fields:]{.underline}

*Water System*

*No*. Used to create the unique number of the water system. Consists of
two fields; the first field will be pre-filled with the two-character
state code which the user will be able to change, followed by a second
field for entry of up to seven numbers. Example: NE 11234567. **Note:**
The user will have to click in the first field to change it.

> Water System No. will be a mandatory field and must be a unique value.

\[*Water System*\]

*Name* The name of the water system. Can be the formal, legal, or common
name most generally used to refer to the system.

> Name will be a mandatory field.

*Activity*

*Status* For entry of the current activity status for the water system.
The selections available via the dropdown list will be:

> **Value Description**

A Active (Default)

> I Inactive
>
> P Proposed
>
> Activity Status will be a mandatory field.

\[*Activity*\]

*Status Date* The date on which the water system became proposed,
active, or inactive.

> Status Date will be a mandatory field. The field will be default
> valued with the current date.

[Add Contact:]{.underline}

The fields under this heading will provide the capability to optionally
add a POC when adding a Water System.

[Add Contact Entry Fields:]{.underline}

*Contact*

*Type* This field indicates the type of contact the selected legal
entity provides for the water system. The field is default valued with
Administrative Contact, but the user will be able to change the type via
the dropdown list. The first 21 choices displayed in the dropdown list
are the choices delivered with the software. Any options after the first
21 are state-defined choices controlled by the System Administrator. All
options, (21 delivered with the software and any state defined options),
will be retrieved from the TINPVALS table name = "POCTYPE." Listed below
are descriptions of the preset system choices.

> [Displayed Point of Contact Types:]{.underline}
>
> **Value Description**

AC Administrative Contact; Contact who handles administrative matters.

OW Owner; Owner of a water system.

> DO Designated OP In Charge; Person who serves as the principal
> operator for a water system (especially in the situation where a
> system has more than one operator).
>
> OP Operator; Operator of the water system.
>
> EC Emergency Contact; Person to contact in an emergency.
>
> SA Sampler; Contact responsible for collecting or otherwise dealing
> with sampling information.
>
> FC Financial; Contact who handles financial matters.
>
> LC Legal; Contact who handles legal matters.
>
> PL Physical Location; Contact at the Physical Location.
>
> LE Lead Engineer; Contact who serves as lead engineer.
>
> OT Other; Other contact type.
>
> BI Bureau of Indian Affairs Representative.
>
> HC Health Clinic Representative.
>
> IE Indian Health Service Engineer.
>
> IS Indian Health S.2.1.bjervice Sanitarian.
>
> TC Tribal Chairman.
>
> TE Tribal Environment Dept Representative.
>
> TG Tribal Government Representative.
>
> TH Tribal Health Dept Representative.
>
> UN Utility Representative (Non-Tribal).
>
> UT Utility Representative (Tribal).

*Name* This field will display the legal entity's name. The user will be
able to select a legal entity to associate to the water system by
entering values in the fields and pressing the **Go To** button or
simply pressing the **Go To** button. Remember that names of individuals
are stored in the format "Last name, First name" in the Name field in
Legal Entity (e.g., Doe, John).

> If an exact match is found, the contact information fields will be
> populated and protected from change. If an exact match is not found,
> the Legal Entity Maintenance List page will be presented in
> single-select mode, sorted by name with the closest matching name
> listed first. Once a legal entity has been selected, it will be
> returned to the Add New Water System page with the contact information
> fields populated and protected from change.

[Add Contact Button:]{.underline}

**\[Add Contact\]**

**Go To** Pressing this button with values in the *First Name/Last Name*
fields will function as described above. Pressing this button with no
value in either the *First Name/Last Name* fields will present the Legal
Entity Search page where criteria can be entered. After the search is
completed, the Legal Entity Maintenance List page in single-select mode
will be invoked. The user will be able to select or create a legal
entity for the water system contact. After the Legal Entity is selected,
the user is returned to the Add New Water System page with the contact
information fields populated and protected from change. If the user
selects a name in error, the user may delete the contact name, and use
the **Go To** button to redisplay the Legal Entity Search page and
select the correct name. The user will be returned to the Add New Water
System page. All fields will redisplay with the changed information.

[Buttons:]{.underline}

**Add Another**

**WS** After the edit checks described for the **OK** button, (described
below), are applied, the water system record will be saved as described
for the **OK** button. All the fields will be cleared except those that
are defaulted (i.e. 1^st^ Water System No. field, Activity Status,
Status Date, Contact Type and Primacy Regulating Agency) and the cursor
will move to the second field of the Water System No field.

**Add Basic**

**Inventory** After the edit checks described for the **OK** button are
applied, the water system record will be saved as described for the
**OK** button. The software will flow to the Add Basic Inventory page
where the user can enter minimal data information for the just saved
water system.

**Add Extensive**

**Data** After the edit checks described for the **OK** button are
applied, the water system record will be saved as described for the
**OK** button. The software will flow to the Water System Modification
page where the user can enter as much information as desired about the
just saved water system. The d_new_ws_flag will be set to "N".

**OK** Before saving the water system, the following edit checks will be
applied:

(R0130:A.4.1.4.a)

> Water System No. will be a mandatory field and must be a unique value.
> If either of the Water System No. fields are left blank, the following
> error message will be presented: **Water System No. must not be
> blank.** If the concatenated Water System No. is not unique, the error
> message presented will be **Water System No. already exists.**
>
> If the State Code in the first Water System No. field does not exist
> in the TINPRT table with the attribute where_installed_indicator equal
> "1" or "2," the following error message will be presented: **The State
> CD in the Water System No. is invalid for this installation.**
>
> If the second field has anything other than a number (i.e., 0 -- 9),
> an alphabetic character (i.e., A -- Z), or has any embedded spaces
> (spaces at end are allowed) the following error message will be
> presented: **Spaces and special characters are not allowed in the
> Water System No.**
>
> If the second field of Water System No. is greater than seven
> characters the error message will be **Water System No. cannot exceed
> seven characters.**
>
> Water System Name will be a mandatory field. If it is not provided,
> the following error message will be presented: **Water System Name
> cannot be blank.**
>
> If the Activity Status is blank, error message will be **Activity
> Status cannot be blank.**
>
> If the Activity Status Date is blank, the following error message will
> be presented: **Status Date cannot be blank.**
>
> If the Activity Status Date is after the current date, the following
> error message will be presented: **Status Date cannot be after today's
> date.** (If the water system is expected to be active in the future,
> the user should enter it as a Proposed system.)
>
> A new WATER_SYSTEM record will be added if the above edit checks are
> passed. The D_History_Indicator_Code will be set to "C" (current), the
> d_initial_timestamp, d_last_inventory_update, and
> d_last_updated_timestamp will be set to the current date and time,
> both the d_initial_User ID and d_userid_code fields will be valued
> with the current User ID. The d_new_ws_flag will be set to "Y." The
> d_pws_federal_type_code will be set to 'NP' (non public).
>
> All other fields will be defaulted to spaces or zeros with the
> exception of the days_serving_count which will be set to NULL.
>
> In addition, a REGULATING_AGENCY_ASGMT will be created associating the
> new water system with the GOVERNMENT_AGENCY which has
> primacy_agency_indicator set to "Y." The following attributes will be
> set:

-   Active_indicator_code set to "A"

-   All other text fields to spaces.

-   D_initial_userid to current User ID

-   D_initial_timestamp to current timestamp

-   D_last_update_timestamp to current timestamp

-   D_userid_code to current User ID

-   TINRAA_is_number from TINEISN entity_internal_system_number where
    table name = "TINRAA."

-   External_system_number from TINEISN external_system_number where
    table_name = "TINRAA"

> If a contact was entered that is an existing LEGAL_ENTITY, a
> WATER_SYS_LEGAL_ENTITY_CONTACT will be created and associated to the
> LEGAL_ENTITY and the new WATER_SYSTEM. The following attributes will
> be set:

-   Active_indicator_code set to "A"

-   Begin_date set to current date

-   End_date set to null

-   Type_code set to the selected value.

-   D_initial_userid to current User ID

-   D_initial_timestamp to current timestamp

-   D_last_update_timestamp to current timestamp

-   D_userid_code to current User ID

-   TINWSLEC_is_number from TINEISN entity_internal_system_number where
    table name = "TINWSLEC."

-   External_system_number from TINEISN external_system_number where
    table_name = "TINWSLEC"

> When all processing is complete, the user will be returned to the
> *SDWIS/STATE Home Page*.

**Clear** All the fields will be cleared except those that are defaulted
(i.e. 1^st^ Water System No. field, Activity Status, Status Date,
Contact Type and Primacy Regulating Agency) and the cursor will move to
the second field of the Water System No field.

**Cancel** Will close the Add New Water System page; no information
entered will be

**(R0130:A.4.1.4.b)** saved and the user will be returned to the
*SDWIS/STATE Home Page*.

**Help** Will invoke online Help for this page.

[Tab Sequence:]{.underline}

Water System No., Name, Activity Status, Status Date, Contact Type,
\[Contact\] Name, Add Contact **Go To**, **Add Another WS**, **Add Basic
Inventory**, **Add Extensive Data**, **OK**, **Clear**, **Cancel**,
**Help**. (R0130:A.4.1.4.c)

### Add Basic Inventory Page Flow

When the user clicks on the Add Basic Inventory menu item from the
*SDWIS/STATE Home Page* they will be presented with the Search New Water
System page (Exhibit 4-37) where they can enter criteria to search for a
water system. Note that only water systems that have not already had
basic information added (i.e., D_NEW_WS_FLAG is set to "Y"), will be
displayed on the resulting Water System Maintenance List page for
selection.

  -----------------------------------------------------------------------
  ![](media/image39.png){width="7.346527777777778in"
  height="4.873611111111111in"}

  -----------------------------------------------------------------------

[]{#__RefHeading___Toc139687360 .anchor}**Exhibit 4-37.** Search New
Water System

#### 4.1.5.1 Search New Water System {#search-new-water-system .unnumbered}

The user's current Water System Group will not be used as the implied
search criteria in searches for New Water System records. This means
that the software will retrieve all water systems meeting the criteria
provided and that have a D_NEW_WS_FLAG is set to "Y." If an exact Water
System No. or Water System Name is entered, the Water System No. and
Water System Name fields are mutually exclusive; they cannot both be
valued.

[Entry Fields:]{.underline}

*Water System No*. Will be used to match the number of the water system.
Water System No. will consist of two fields, the first will be
pre-filled with the two-character state code which the user will be able
to change, followed by a second field for entry of all or part of the 7
alphanumeric characters that make up the desired water system's number
(for example: **NE** 1234567). A complete number or partial entry will
be used to search. **Note:** The user will have to click in the first
field to change it.

> If an exact match is found using the Water System No., the Add Basic
> Inventory page will be presented. If no exact match is found, the user
> will be presented with the Water System Maintenance List page filtered
> for new water systems, (i.e., D_NEW_WS_FLAG is set to "Y"), with the
> closest match to the number that was entered at the top and sorted by
> Water System No. From this list, a water system can be selected.

*Water System*

*Name* Will be used to start an equal to or greater than search in the
database on the Name field of the water system. A partial value can be
provided here.

> If the user enters the wildcard (\*) to start the Water System Name,
> (i.e., \*city), the LIKE function will be enabled and search for all
> Water Systems names containing the value (city) that followed the \*.
> The software will NOT support a search where the wildcard is in
> different locations for the search, (i.e., \*city\*, or city\*).
>
> If an exact match is found using the Water System Name, the Add Basic
> Inventory page will be presented. If no exact match is found, the user
> will be presented with the Water System Maintenance List page filtered
> for new water systems, (i.e., D_NEW_WS_FLAG is set to "Y"), with the
> closest match to the name that was entered at the top and sorted by
> Water System Name. From this list, a water system can be selected.

[Buttons:]{.underline}

**Search** The actions described above for the Water System No. and
Water System Name fields will occur when the search button is selected.

If no search criteria was entered the list of new water systems (those
with D_NEW_WS_FLAG = 'Y') will be presented on the Water System
Maintenance List page sorted by ascending Water System No.

If the state-code portion of the Water System No. is left blank but a
value is provided in the second portion, the error message will be **The
State Assigned Identification Code cannot be blank.**

Possible Search Permutations are:

By Water System No.

By Water System Name

List all new water systems

**Clear** Will clear all entries. The first part of the Water System No.
will be reset to the default value and the cursor moves to the second
part of the Water System No field. **Note:** The user will have to click
in the first field to change it.

**Cancel** Will close the Search New Water System page and the user will
be returned to the *SDWIS/STATE Home Page*.

**Help** Will invoke online Help for this page.

[Tab Sequence:]{.underline}

Water System No., Water System Name, **Search**, **Clear**, **Cancel**,
**Help**.

#### 4.1.5.2 Add Basic Inventory Page {#add-basic-inventory-page .unnumbered}

The Add Basic Inventory page (Exhibit 4-38) will be accessible from the
*SDWIS/STATE Home Page* via the Search New Water System Inventory menu
item or from the **Add Basic Inventory** button on the Add New Water
System page. This is a rapid entry page to capture the minimal data
information for a water system.

This page is accessible only while the water system is considered a new
water system with only the minimal data entered via the Add New Water
System page. When any additional information is added for the water
system, the new flag is set to 'N' and the Add Basic Inventory page will
no longer be an available option of supplementing the water system
information. Once the user presses the **OK** button, the software will
allow modifications to the water system via the Water System
Modification page. Users should only use this page when they have
information for at least the fields marked as mandatory (i.e., marked
with an asterisk) under Basic Information as these will be required to
save additions. The fields marked as mandatory (i.e., marked with \*)
under other headings are really conditionally mandatory in the sense
that they are required if the sectional checkbox is marked (e.g., Meter
Type is mandatory only if the Service Connection checkbox is "checked").

![](media/image40.png){width="5.30625in" height="8.750694444444445in"}

[]{#__RefHeading___Toc139687361 .anchor}**Exhibit 4-38.** Add Basic
Inventory

[Basic Information]{.underline}

[Protected Field:]{.underline}

\[Water System\] No. The Water System No. assigned when the water system
was added on the Add New Water System page.

*Record updated*

*by* The User ID and the timestamp from the last time the water system
record was updated.

*Record created*

*by* The initial User ID and timestamp when the water system record was
initially added to the database.

[Basic Information Entry Fields:]{.underline}

Users may enter the basic identifying information for the water system
in this section. Data entered in this section will be written to the
TINWSYS table.

*\[Water System\]*

*Name* The name of the water system. Can be the formal, legal, or common
name used most generally to refer to the system.

Name will be a mandatory field.

*Alternate*

*State No.* A number used by the primacy agency to secondarily identify
the water system. This number usually differs from the Water System No.
used by SDWIS/STATE and EPA to track water system information. It may be
associated by a state or county agency for the purpose of tracking other
regulatory requirements (e.g., food service establishments, schools,
hotels).

Alternate State No. will be an optional field.

*Local Name* The common name, secondary name, or alias for the water
system.

Local Name will be an optional field.

*Activity Status* For entry of the current activity status for the water
system. The selections available via the dropdown list will be:

> **Value Description**

A Active (Default)

I Inactive

P Proposed

When a status is changed (i.e., the original value of the field is
Active and the user changes the field to Inactive), the Status Date will
be set to the current date and the following advisory message will be
presented when the user tabs off the field: **As a result of status
change, Status Date has been set to current date.** **.** Once the user
presses **OK** on the advisory message the user will be returned to the
Add Basic Inventory page. (R0033:A.4.1.5.2.a, B.4.1.5.2.a)

Activity Status will be a mandatory field.

*\[Activity\]*

*Status Date* The date on which the water system became proposed,
active, or inactive. This field will be default valued with the current
date.

> Status Date will be a mandatory field and cannot be after the current
> date.

*Status Reason*

*Code* System Administration-controlled code of the reason a water
system has the status indicated. This may be used to indicate why a
water system has been inactivated but also may be used to indicate why
it is active or proposed. The selections will be those available in the
TINPVALS table with Code name = "WSACTRSN."

> Status Reason Code will be an optional field.

\[*Activity*\]

*Status Reason* Provides space to enter further explanation of why a
water system is in the current status.

> Status Reason will be an optional field.

*Memo* Memo is a free form, character text field to further document
information about the water system.

> Memo will be an optional field.

*Owner Type* Indicates the type of ownership. Permitted values include
the following:

> **Value Description**
>
> \<Spaces\>
>
> L Local (Default)
>
> F Federal Govt
>
> M Mixed (public/private)
>
> N Native American
>
> P Private
>
> S State Govt
>
> Owner Type will be an optional field.

*State Primary*

*Source* Displays the primary water source for the water system as
determined by the primacy agency. This is not calculated by SDWIS/STATE;
it must be set manually. The selections available via the dropdown list
will be:

> **Value Description**
>
> \<Spaces\> (Default)
>
> GW Groundwater
>
> GWP Groundwater Purchased
>
> GU Groundwater UDI Surface Water
>
> GUP Groundwater UDI Surface Water Purchased
>
> SW Surface water
>
> SWP Surface water Purchased
>
> State Primary Source will be an optional field.

*Number of Days*

*per Year Serving*

*at least 25*

*(Only needed if*

*different*

*than AOP(s))* Entry field to enter number of days per year that the
water system serves at least 25 persons. If entered, this value will be
used by SDWIS/STATE to determine the classification for the water system
rather than the number of days indicated by the system's annual
operating period. That is to say, if this is valued with less than 60,
the system will be determined to be a non-public system regardless of
any other inventory information. This should only be used for a water
system that is not open every day during its annual operating period
(like a church for example). If this is not valued, SDWIS/STATE will use
the number of days indicated by the annual operating period when
determining the type of water system.

> This field will be defaulted to null, displayed as spaces, if no value
> is entered. This field must be entered manually.
>
> The field cannot contain a numeric value greater than 365 or any
> non-numeric value.
>
> If user changes the field to spaces, the following advisory message
> will be invoked: **Field value is null and will not be used for
> determining Federal PWS Type** when the user tabs off the field. Once
> the user presses **OK** on the advisory message the user will be
> returned to the Add Basic Inventory page.

The complete rules for determining the classification are described in
the Water System Classification section.

> Number of Days per Year Serving at least 25 will be an optional field.

[Population Served]{.underline}

This section is for entry of one population type served for one
operating period. To enter additional population types for the water
system, users will need to use the Water System Modification page. The
data entered in this section will be written to the TINAOPRD and
TINPOPSV tables. If the user does not want to enter a population served,
the user will need to "uncheck" the Population Served Add checkbox. If
this box is "unchecked," the fields will become protected and processing
will ignore the section.

[Entry Fields:]{.underline}

*\[Population Served\]*

*Begin Month*

*/Day* The Begin Month is the numeric representation of the month in
which the population type's season of operation commences. It will be
defaulted to 1 (January) but may be changed by user. Month must be a
valid number between 1 and 12.

> The Begin Day is the numeric day within the Begin Month that the
> population type's season of operation commences. It will be defaulted
> to 1 but may be changed. It must be a valid number between 1 and 31,
> but not to exceed the number of days for the start month.
>
> Begin Month and Day will be mandatory fields if the Population Served
> Add box is "checked."

*\[Population Served\]*

*End Month*

*/Day* The End Month is the numeric representation of the month in which
the population type's season of operation ends. Along with the End Day
it will represent the last day of operation. It will be defaulted to 12
(December) but may be changed. Month must be a valid number between 1
and 12.

The End Day is the numeric day within the End Month that is the
population type's last day of seasonal operation. It will be defaulted
to 31 but may be changed. It must be a valid number between 1 and 31,
but not to exceed the number of days appropriate for the month indicated
in the End Month field.

> End Month and Day will be mandatory fields if the Population Served
> Add box is "checked."
>
> If the Begin Month and End Month are the same and the start day is
> greater than the end day, the advisory will be **Months are the same
> but the End Day is earlier than Begin Day.**

*Population*

*Type* Describes the type of population served. The selections available
via the dropdown list will be:

> **Value Description**
>
> \<Spaces\> (Default)
>
> Residential
>
> Non‑Transient
>
> Transient
>
> Wholesale
>
> Population Type will be a mandatory field if the Population Served Add
> box is "checked."

*Estimated*

*Count* The population served count for the type defined in the next
field. Permitted values range from 0 to 50,000,000.

> Estimated Count will be a mandatory field if the Population Served Add
> box is "checked."

*\[Population Served\]*

*Effective Begin*

*Date* The beginning calendar month, day, and year when the population
and its annual operating period went into effect. It will be defaulted
to the water system's \[Activity\] Status Date but may be changed by
user.

Effective Begin Date cannot be in the future. The begin date cannot be
earlier than the Water System's Activity Status Date.

> Effective Begin Date will be a mandatory field if the Population
> Served Add box is "checked."

[Service Connection]{.underline}

This section is for entry of a service connection defined for the water
system. This section will have a checkbox and two of the four fields for
Service Connection will be defaulted. Adding more Service Connections
will be allowed via the Water System Modification page. The data entered
in this section will be written to the TINSCC table. If the user does
not want to enter service connections, the user will need to "uncheck"
the Service Connection Add checkbox. If this box is "unchecked," the
fields will become protected and processing will ignore the section.

[Entry Fields:]{.underline}

\[*Service Connection*\]

*Type* The type of service connection. The selections available via the
dropdown list will be:

> **Value Description**
>
> RS Residential
>
> AG Agricultural
>
> CB Combined (default value)
>
> CM Commercial
>
> IN Industrial
>
> PP Power Production
>
> Type will be a mandatory field if the Service Connection Add box is
> "checked."

*No. of*

*Connections* The number of connections serviced by the type of
connection.

> No. of Connections will be a mandatory field if the Service Connection
> Add box is "checked."

*Meter Type* Displays the meter type. The selections available via the
dropdown list will be:

**Value Description**

> UN Unknown (Default)
>
> UM Metered
>
> ME Metered and Unmetered
>
> MU Unmetered
>
> Meter Type will be a mandatory field if the Service Connection Add box
> is "checked."

*Meter Size* The size of the meter(s) installed throughout the water
system in inches. This field must be entered manually.

> Meter Size will be an optional field.

[Geographic Area]{.underline}

This section is for entry of associations to the City and County in
which the water system supplies water. The data entered in this section
will be written to the TINWSGAA table.

[Geographic Area Entry Fields:]{.underline}

*City* This field is to display a city that receives water in part or in
whole from the water system. If the water system does not supply water
to buildings within a city's limits, the system should not be associated
to a city as a geographic area. The user will be able to select a city
by entering a value in the field and pressing the **Go To** button or
simply pressing the **Go To** button with no value entered in the field.
The user may enter a full or partial value for the city name.

> If an exact match is found, the field will be populated with the city
> name. If the selected city is contained within a county geographic
> area, no existing county relationship already exists for the water
> system, and the county name field is blank, the software will value
> the county name field. The user may change this entry. If an exact
> match is not found, the software will present the Geographic Area
> Maintenance List page, in single-select mode, filtered for Geographic
> Area Type 'City', with names matching or greater than the criteria
> supplied and only **Edit/Select** enabled. Once the user has selected
> a city, the user will be returned to the Add Basic Inventory page with
> the city field will be populated with the selected city name.
>
> If a user incorrectly selects a Geographical Area they may press the
> **Go To** button and select another one or space out the selected
> Geographic Area.
>
> City will be an optional field.

*County* This field is to display a county that receives water in part
or in whole from the water system. All water systems should be
associated to at least one county (or county equivalent). The user will
be able to select a county by entering a value in the field and pressing
the **Go To** button or simply pressing the **Go To** button with no
value entered in the field. The user may enter a full or partial value
for the county name.

> If an exact match is found, the field will be populated. If an exact
> match is not found, the software will present the Geographic Area
> Maintenance List page in single-select mode, filtered for Geographic
> Area Type "County" with names matching or greater than the criteria
> supplied and only **Edit/Select** enabled. Once the user has selected
> a county, the user will be returned to the Add Basic Inventory page
> with the county field populated with the selected county name.
>
> If a user incorrectly selects a Geographical Area they may press the
> **Go To** button and select another one or space out the selected
> Geographical Area.
>
> County will be an optional field.

[Geographic Area Buttons:]{.underline}

**\[City\] Go To** Pressing the **Go To** button will present the
Geographic Area Maintenance List page in single-select mode with all
cities in the database displayed

**\[County\]**

**Go To** Pressing the **Go To** button will present the Geographic Area
Maintenance List page in single-select mode with all counties in the
database displayed.

[Service Area]{.underline}

This section is for association of service areas to the water system.
The user will be able to select up to three service areas using this
page. Associating more than three service areas will be allowed via the
Water System Modification page. The data entered in this section will be
written to the TINWSSAA table.

One federally owned service area choice should be checked as the
"Primary" Service Area for complete reporting to EPA; however the
Primary Service Area may be federally or state owned (State CD= HQ or
two-character state code).

[Service Area List Columns:]{.underline}

*Federal/State Code* Indicates whether the Service Area displayed is a
Federal controlled Service Area type (HQ), or a State controlled Service
Area Type (two-character state code).

*Service Area Name* The user may view the service areas that have been
selected in the service area list box.

[Service Area Button:]{.underline}

**\[Service Area\]**

**Go To** Pressing the **Go To** button will present the Service Area
Maintenance List in multi-select mode, sorted by Service Area Name,
alpha ascending. After making selections, the user will be returned to
the Add Basic Inventory page where the selections will be displayed in
the list box. If more selections were made than there was available
space in the list box, extraneous selections will be ignored. If a
duplicate selection was made it will also be ignored. One service area
must be designated as "Primary" by highlighting a row in the list and
choosing the **Make Primary** button.

> Service Area will be an optional field. **Note:** Service Areas with
> State codes will not be sent to EPA.

**Make Primary** Pressing the **Make** **Primary** button will set the
primary indicator code for the service area highlighted in the list box
to "Y". If the highlighted row is already marked a primary, the error
message will be **Please choose a Service Area that is not Primary.** If
the highlighted service area is a state-owned service area, the advisory
message will be **Primary Service Area should be federally owned for
accurate reporting to EPA.** If another record is already marked as
primary it will be "unmarked."

The Make Primary button will on be enabled when a record is highlighted
in the list box.

**Remove** If the user selects a service area in error, the user may
highlight the record in the list box and then press the **Remove**
button. The Related Service Area will be removed from the list. If the
highlighted service area is the primary service area, the advisory
message will be **Accurate EPA reporting requires one primary federally
owned service area.**

The **Remove** button will only be enabled when a record is highlighted
in the list box.

[Related Points of Contact]{.underline}

This section is for entry of POCs to associate to the water system. Up
to five additional legal entities may be associated to the water system.
Associating more legal entities to the water system will be allowed via
the Water System Modification page. The data entered in this section
will be written to the TINWSLEC table.

[Related Points of Contact Protected Field:]{.underline}

*Name/Contact Type* If a legal entity is already associated to the water
system as a POC, (via the Add New Water System page), the legal entity
name and contact type will be displayed and protected from change.

[Related Points of Contact List Columns:]{.underline}

*Name* Displays the first 20 characters of the legal entity's name.

*Organization* Displays the Organization for the selected legal entity.

*Mail Stop* Displays the Mail Stop for the selected legal entity.

*Contact Types:* When a Point of Contact type has been specified a "Y"
appears in the corresponding column. If the Point of Contact type is not
selected an "N" appears.

Admin Contact Administrative Contact

Owner Owner

DO in charge Designated Operator in Charge

OP Operator

Sampler Sampler

FC Financial Contact

EC Emergency Contact

> **Value Description**
>
> AC Administrative Contact; Contact who handles administrative matters.
>
> OW Owner -- Owner of a water system.
>
> DO Designated OP In Charge; Person who serves as the principal
> operator for a water system (especially in the situation where a
> system has more than one operator.
>
> OP Operator; Operator of the water system.
>
> SA Sampler; Contact responsible for collecting or otherwise dealing
> with sampling information.
>
> FC Financial; Contact who handles financial matters.
>
> EC Emergency Contact; Person to contact in an emergency.
>
> If the user selects a name in error, the user will be able to "remove"
> the legal entity name. This will "uncheck" any contact type boxes
> selected for the deleted name.

[Related Points of Contact Buttons:]{.underline}

\[Related Points Of Contact\]

**Go To** Pressing the **Go To** button will present the Legal Entity
Search page where criteria can be entered to focus the resulting list
presented on the Legal Entity Maintenance List. The Legal Entity
Maintenance List page will be presented in multi-select mode sorted by
ascending name. All functions of the Legal Entity Search and Legal
Entity Maintenance List pages will be available to the user from here
(including **Edit/Add** so that, if a desired Legal Entity does not
exist, the record can be created). Once the user has selected a legal
entity(ies), the selection(s) will be returned to the Add Basic
Inventory page list area and the name field will be populated with the
first 20 characters of the legal entity's name. Duplicate Legal Entity
selections will be culled from the Related Points of Contact list area.
When the five available points of contact have been designated, all
other selections from the legal entity list will be ignored. A contact
type will be required for each row in the list area by using the
**Designate POC Type** button.

**Designate**

**POC Type** Pressing the **Designate POC Type** button presents the
Contact Types dialog box (Exhibit 4-39) where the user may set the POC
type code for the point of contact association. The **Designate POC
Type** button will only be enabled when a record is highlighted in the
list box.

> On the Contact Types dialog box users my select up to seven contact
> types for the POC Contact Association by pressing the checkbox. If a
> users wishes to remove a POC type they may "uncheck" the checkbox.
> When the highlighted POC is the original POC that was created with the
> new water system, the contact type associated with that original POC
> will be checked and protected.

![](media/image41.png){width="3.9479166666666665in"
height="4.354166666666667in"}

[]{#__RefHeading___Toc139687362 .anchor}**Exhibit 4-39.** Contact Types
Dialog Box

**Remove** If the user selects a point of contact in error, it may be
removed by highlighting the record in the list box and then pressing the
**Remove** button. The Related Point of Contact will be removed from the
list. The **Remove** button will only be enabled when a record is
highlighted in the list box.

Related POCs will be optional fields.

[Related Regulating Agency Name]{.underline}

This section is for association of regulating agencies to the water
system. The data entered in this section will be written to the TINRAA
table. Up to five additional regulating agencies may be associated to
the water system. Associating more than five additional regulating
agencies to the water system will be allowed via the Water System
Modification page.

[Related Regulating Agency Name Protected Field:]{.underline}

*Regulating*

*Agency* The Primacy Regulating Agency was associated when the user
added the water system via the Add New Water System page. The name of
this regulating agency will be displayed and protected from change.

[Related Regulating Agency Name List Column:]{.underline}

*Name* Displays the regulating agency name.

[Related Regulating Agency Buttons:]{.underline}

\[Related Regulating Agency\]

**Go To** Pressing the **Go To** button will present the Legal Entity
Maintenance List in multi-select mode, filtered for government agencies
that have been designated as a regulating agency. All functions of the
Legal Entity Search and Legal Entity Maintenance List pages will be
available to the user from here (including **Edit/Add** so that, if a
desired Legal Entity does not exist, the record can be created).
Selections will be returned to the list area on the Add Basic Inventory
page displaying the Legal Entity name field. If more regulating agencies
are selected on the Legal Entity Maintenance List than are empty on the
Add Basic Inventory page (i.e., User selects seven regulating agencies;
only five fields are empty on the Add Basic Inventory page), the
software will populate the fields with the first five regulating
agencies selected and ignore the other selections or duplicate
selections).

**Remove** Will remove the highlighted Regulating Agency from the list.
The **Remove** button will on be enabled when a record is highlighted in
the list box.

Related Regulating Agency Name will be an optional field.

[Water System Facility, Annual Operating Period, Sampling
Point]{.underline}

This section is for entry of minimal data information for Water System
Facilities (WSF) the WSF Annual Operating Periods (FAOP) and Sampling
Points. Up to five WSFs, their AOPs, and Sampling Points may be entered.
The data entered in this section will be written to the TINWSF, TINFAOP
and TSASMPPT tables.

[Water System Facility List Columns:]{.underline}

WSF State Asgn ID, Facility Name, WSF Type, WSF Status, WSF Status Date,
Water Type, Availability, Source Treatment Status, Seller Treatment,
Status Reason Code, Filtration Status, Begin MM, \[Begin\] DD, End MM,
\[End\] DD, Effective Begin Date, SP ID, Location, Type, Source Water
Type, SP Status, SP Status Date.

[Water System Facility Buttons:]{.underline}

**Add** When this button is pressed and the WSF List Box is not full,
the software will present the Water System Facility Basic Information
(Exhibit 4-40) page. If the WSF List Box is full the error message will
be **Only five WSFs may be added on the Add Basic Inventory.**

**Modify** Will present the Water System Facility Basic Information page
with the information about the highlighted water system facility.

> This button is only enabled if a record in the list box has been
> highlighted.

**Remove** Will remove the item from the list box. Nothing exists in the
database yet so no actual database deletes will occur.

This button is only enabled if a record in the list box has been
highlighted.

[Water System Facility Basic Information Page]{.underline}

This page is presented when the user presses either the Add or Modify
button in the WSF, FAOP, Sampling Point list box.

![](media/image42.png){width="5.999305555555556in"
height="6.341666666666667in"}

[]{#__RefHeading___Toc139687363 .anchor}**Exhibit 4-40.** Water System
Facility Basic Information

[Water System Facility Basic Information Entry Fields:]{.underline}

[Water System Facility]{.underline}

This section is to capture the basic information for the Water System
Facility. The data entered in this section will be written to the TINWSF
table.

Each WSF section will have default values entered and a checkbox. This
checkbox will be default valued to "checked."

*WSF Type* Use the dropdown list to select the type of water system
facility. The default will be "RS-Reservoir". The selections available
via the dropdown list will be retrieved from the TINPVALS table with
code_name = 'WSFTYPE'

> **Value Description**
>
> RS Reservoir (Default)
>
> CS Cistern
>
> CW Clear Well
>
> CH Common Headers
>
> CC Consecutive Connection
>
> DS Dist System/Zone
>
> IG Infiltration Gallery
>
> IN Intake
>
> NP Non‑Piped, Purchased
>
> NN Non-Piped, Non-Purchased
>
> OT Other
>
> PC Pressure Control
>
> PF Pump Facility
>
> RC Roof Catchment
>
> SS Sampling Station
>
> SP Spring
>
> ST Storage
>
> SI Surface Impoundment
>
> TN Transmission Main (Manifold)
>
> TP Treatment Plant
>
> WL Well
>
> WH Well Head
>
> \<Spaces\>
>
> WSF Type will be a mandatory field if the WSF box is "checked."
>
> The first active WSF Type of type CC or NP will be displayed in the
> Purchaser WSF State Asgn ID field in the Water Purchase section of
> this page.

*\[WSF\] State*

*Asgn ID* Displays the ID number assigned by the state to identify the
water system facility. This ID must be unique within the water system.

State Asgn ID will be a mandatory field if the WSF box is "checked

*\[WSF\] Name* The name of the facility.

Name will be a mandatory field if the WSF box is "checked." The Sampling
Point Location field will be populated with the same value entered here
if the Location field does not currently contain a value.

*\[WSF\] Water*

*Type* Use the dropdown list to select the water type for the WSF. The
selections available via the dropdown list will be:

> **Value Description**

\<Spaces\> Default

> GW Groundwater
>
> GU Groundwater UDI Surface
>
> SW Surface Water
>
> Water Type will be a mandatory field when the WSF Type is a source
> water. (i.e. Consecutive Connection (CC), Infiltration Gallery (IG),
> Intake (IN), Non‑Piped, Purchased (NP), Non-Piped, Non-Purchased (NN),
> Roof Catchment (RC), Reservoir (RS), Spring (SP) and Well (WL).

*\[WSF\]*

*Availability* Categorizes the circumstances under which a source of
water is used by a water system. It will be defaulted to Permanent, but
may be changed by the user. The selections available via the dropdown
list will be:

> **Value Description**
>
> P Permanent (Default)
>
> E Emergency

I Interim

> O Other

S Seasonal

> \<Spaces\>
>
> Availability will be an optional field. If a user selects "Emergency,"
> the software will "uncheck" the WSF AOP box and protect the Annual
> Operating fields from entry. If the availability is changed to
> something other than Emergency, the software will "check" the WSF AOP
> box and unprotect the entry fields.

*Source Treatment*

*Status* This field will display the status of treatment for this source
water. The user may also leave this field blank, indicating that the
user does not know if water from this source is treated. The selections
available via the dropdown list will be:

> **Value Description**
>
> \<spaces\> (Default)
>
> N No Treatment
>
> T Treated
>
> This field should be valued only for source type facilities. The
> following water system facility types will be considered to be sources
> of water: CC, IG, IN, NP, NN, RS, RC, SP, and WL.
>
> Source Treatment Status will be an optional field.

*Seller*

*Treatment* Indicates that the seller water system's source was treated.
This field should be valued only for water system facilities of type
Consecutive Connection (CC) or Non‑Piped (NP). The selections available
via the dropdown list will be:

> **Value Description**
>
> \<Spaces\> (Default)
>
> F Treated by seller including filtration
>
> N Not Treated by Seller
>
> P Partially Treated by Seller
>
> T Treated by Seller
>
> Seller Treatment Status will be a mandatory field for facilities of
> type CC or NP.

*WSF \[Activity\]*

*Status* Displays the current activity status for the WSF. This field
will be default valued with the water system's Activity Status, but may
be changed by the user. The selections available via the dropdown list
will be:

> **Value Description**
>
> A Active
>
> I Inactive
>
> P Proposed
>
> WSF Activity Status will be a mandatory field if the WSF box is
> "checked." If the user selects a status other than Active, the
> software will also change the Activity Status for the corresponding
> Sampling Point.

*\[WSF\] Status*

*Reason Code* A reason code for why the WSF is in the current status,
usually to explain why it may be inactive. The list of permitted values
will be retrieved from the TINPVALS table with Code name = "WSFACTRSN".

WSF Status Reason Code will be an optional field.

*WSF \[Activity\]*

*Status Date* The date on which the WSF became proposed, active, or
inactive. It is defaulted to the water system's \[Activity\] Status
Date, but may be changed by user.

WSF Activity Status Date will be a mandatory field if the WSF box is
"checked."

*Filtration Status*

The status of filtration. The list of permitted values will be retrieved
from the TINPVALS table with Code name = "WSFFLTSTAT".

Filtration Status will be an optional field.

[WSF Annual Operating Period]{.underline}

This section is to capture the information for the WSF's Annual
Operating Period (AOP). The data entered in this section will be written
to the TINFAOP table.

Each WSF AOP section will have default values entered and a checkbox.
This checkbox will be default valued to "checked" for all types of WSF
with non-Emergency availability, indicating the user plans to enter AOP
information for the WSF. If the availability of the WSF is set to
Emergency, the checkbox will be "unchecked." When the sectional checkbox
in "unchecked," the fields will become protected and processing will
ignore the section.

[WSF AOP Entry Fields:]{.underline}

*AOP Begin Month/*

*Day* Begin Month is the numeric representation of the month in which
the WSF's season of operation commences and will be defaulted to 1
(January). Month must be a valid number between 1 and 12.

> Begin Day is the numeric day within the Begin Month that the WSF's
> season of operation commences and will be defaulted to 1. Day must be
> a valid number between 1 and 31, but not to exceed the number of days
> appropriate for the month indicated in the Begin Month field.
>
> AOP Begin Month and Day will be mandatory if the WSF AOP checkbox is
> "checked."

*AOP End Month/*

*Day* The End Month is the numeric representation of the month in which
the WSF's season of operation ends and will be defaulted to 12
(December). Along with the End Day, it will represent the last day of
the seasonal operation. Month must be a valid number between 1 and 12.

> The End Day is the numeric day within the End Month that is the WSF's
> last day of seasonal operation and will be defaulted to 31. Day must
> be a valid number, between 1 and 31, but not to exceed the number of
> days appropriate for the month indicated in the End Month field.
>
> AOP End Month and Day will be mandatory if the WSF AOP checkbox is
> "checked."

If the Begin Month and End Month are the same and the start day is
greater than the end date, the advisory will be: **Months are the same
but the End Day is earlier than Begin Day.**

*\[WSF AOP\] Effective*

*Begin Date* The beginning calendar month, day, and year when the WSFs
season of operation goes into effect. It will be defaulted to the WSF's
\[Activity\] Status Date, but may be changed by user.

> The begin date cannot be in the future.
>
> Effective Begin Date will be mandatory if the WSF AOP checkbox is
> "checked."

[Sampling Point]{.underline}

This section is to capture the information for the WSF's Sampling
Points. The data entered in this section will be written to the TSASMPPT
table.

Each Sampling Point section will have default values entered and a
checkbox. The checkbox will be defaulted to "checked" as information for
the corresponding WSF is entered. If any box is "unchecked," the fields
will become protected and processing will ignore the section.

[Sampling Point Entry Fields:]{.underline}

*Sampling Point ID* The unique number identifying the WSF's sampling
point. The Sampling Point ID will be used in duplicate checking to
ensure this sampling point is unique within the selected WSF.

> Sampling Point ID will be a mandatory field if the Sampling Point box
> is "checked."

*\[Sampling Point\]*

*Location* A description of the address or other descriptive location of
a sampling point. The software will default value the Location field
with the first 40 characters of the WSF Name.

> **Note:** The software will store Location information exactly as it
> is displayed on the page, (i.e., If the WSF Name is 50 characters,
> only the first 40 characters will be saved to the database in the
> Location attribute).
>
> Location will be an optional field.

*Sampling Point*

*Type* The location or function type of the sampling point. The
selections available via the dropdown list will be:

**Value Description**

> EP Entry Point
>
> FC First Customer
>
> LD Lowest Disinfectant Residual
>
> MD Midpoint in the distribution system
>
> MR Point of Maximum Retention
>
> RW Raw Water Source
>
> SR Source Water Point
>
> DS Distribution System
>
> PC Process Control
>
> UP Unit Process Control
>
> WS Water System Facility Control
>
> Sampling Point Type will be an optional field.

*Source Water*

*Type* The type of water source based on whether treatment has taken
place. The selections available via the dropdown list will be:

**Value Description**

> F Finished
>
> R Raw
>
> This attribute should be valued only for source type facilities. The
> following water system facility types will be considered to be sources
> of water: CC, IG, IN, NP, NN, RS, RC, SP, and WL.

Source Type will be an optional field.

*SP (Sampling Point)*

*\[Activity\] Status* Displays the current activity status for the
sampling point. The status will be defaulted to the WSF Status but can
be changed by user. The selections available via the dropdown list will
be:

> **Value Description**
>
> A Active
>
> I Inactive
>
> P Proposed
>
> SP Activity Status will be a mandatory field, if the Sampling Point
> box is "checked."

*SP \[Activity\]*

*Status Date* The date on which the sampling point became proposed,
active, or inactive. It will be defaulted to the WSF \[Activity\] Status
Date, but may be changed by user.

SP Activity Status Date will be a mandatory field if the Sampling Point
box is "checked." It cannot be after the current date.

[Buttons:]{.underline}

**OK** All field edits as described above will be conducted. Additional
edits will include:

> If the Water System Facility sectional check box is not marked, no
> edits are performed on the Water System Facility, \[WSF\] Annual
> Operating Period, or Sampling Point. Otherwise:

-   If WSF Type is blank, the error message will be **WSF Type must not
    be left blank.**

```{=html}
<!-- -->
```
-   If State Asgn ID is blank, the error message will be **WSF State
    Asgn ID cannot be blank.**

-   If Name is blank, the error message will be **WSF Name cannot be
    blank.**

-   If the State Asgn ID is duplicated in any other WSF section on the
    page, the error message will be **Duplicate WSF State Asgn ID
    found.**

-   If the WSF Type is one of (CC, IN, IG, NP, NN, RC, RS, SP, WL), the
    Water Type must be selected. If not, the error message will be
    **Water Type cannot be blank for this Facility type.**

-   If the Source Treatment Status is selected, the WSF Type must be one
    of (CC, IN, IG, NP, NN, RC, RS, SP, WL) and if not, the error
    message will be **Source Treatment Status can only be valued for a
    source type facility.**

-   If Seller Treatment is not blank, the WSF Type must be one of (CC,
    NP) and if not, the error message will be **Seller Treatment
    Indicator is valid only for CC and NP facilities.**

-   If WSF Status is spaces, the error message will be **WSF Status
    cannot be blank.**

-   If WSF Status Date is blank, the error message will be **WSF Status
    Date cannot be blank.**

-   If WSF Status Date is a future date, the error message will be **WSF
    Status Date cannot be after today's date.**

> If the Annual Operating Period sectional check box is not marked, no
> edits are performed on the Annual Operating Period. Otherwise:

-   The WSF for this section must be provided. If not, the error message
    will be **WSF AOP requires entry of WSF fields.**

-   If Begin Month is blank, error message will be **Begin Day and Month
    and End Day and Month must not be blank.**

-   If Begin Day is blank, error message will be **Begin Day and Month
    and End Day and Month must not be blank.**

-   If End Month is blank, error message will be **Begin Day and Month
    and End Day and Month must not be blank.**

-   If End Day is blank, error message will **Begin Day and Month and
    End Day and Month must not be blank.**

-   If Begin Month has a value less than 1 or greater than 12 the error
    message will be **Value entered is not in list/range of Permitted
    values.**

-   If Begin Month has a value of (1, 3, 5, 7, 8, 10, 12) and the Begin
    Day is less than 1 or greater than 31, the error message will be
    **Value entered is not in list/range of Permitted values.**

-   If Begin Month has a value of (4, 6, 9, 11) and the Begin Day is
    less than 1 or greater than 30, the error message will be **Begin
    Day is invalid.**

-   If Begin Month has a value of 2 and the Begin Day is less than 1 or
    greater than 28, the error message will be **Begin Day is invalid.**

-   If End Month contains a value less than 1 or greater than 12, the
    error message will be **Value entered is not in list/range of
    Permitted values.**

-   If End Month has a value of (1, 3, 5, 7, 8, 10, 12) and the End Day
    is less than 1 or greater than 31, the error message will be **Value
    entered is not in list/range of Permitted values.**

-   If End Month has a value of (4, 6, 9, 11) and the End Day is less
    than 1 or greater than 30, the error message will be **End Day is
    invalid.**

-   If End Month has a value of 2 and the End Day is less than 1 or
    greater than 28, the error message will be **End Day is invalid.**

-   If Effective Begin Date is earlier than the Water System Facility's
    activity status date, the error message will be **WSF Effective
    Begin Date cannot be earlier than its status date.**

-   If Effective Begin Date is a future date, the error message will be
    **WSF Effective Begin Date cannot be after today's date.**

-   If Effective Begin Date is blank, the error message will be **WSF**
    **Effective Begin Date cannot be blank.**

> If the Sampling Point sectional check box is not marked, no edits are
> performed on the Sampling Point. Otherwise:

-   The WSF for this section must be provided. If not, the error message
    will be **Sampling Point requires entry of WSF fields.**

-   If Sampling Point ID is blank, the error message will be **Sampling
    Point ID must not be blank.**

-   SP Status is required and if blank, the error message will be **SP
    Status cannot be blank.**

-   If SP Status Date is earlier than the Water System Facility's
    activity status date, the error message will be **SP Status Date
    cannot be earlier than WSF Status Date.**

-   If SP Status Date is a future date, the error message will be **SP
    Status Date cannot be after today's date.**

-   If SP Status Date is blank, the error message will be **SP Status
    Date cannot be blank.**

**Cancel** Will close the Water System Facility Basic Information page
and the user will be returned to the Add Basic Inventory page.

**Help** Will invoke online Help for this page.

[Facility Flow]{.underline}

This section displays up to five Facility Flows between the Water System
Facilities (WSF). The data displayed will be written to the TINWSFF
table.

The default display for each field will be the *\[WSF\] Name* and will
be based on the entry order of the WSFs in the Water System Facility
section: The tab (flow order) will be left to right, top to bottom. The
WSF entry #1 flows to WSF entry #2; WSF entry #2 flows to WSF entry #3;
WSF entry #3 flows to WSF entry #4; and WSF entry #4 flows to WSF entry
#5. The user may change entries.

[Facility Flows Entry Fields:]{.underline}

*Train ID* This will be a three-character alphanumeric field manually
entered by the user to identify a flow. For example, Train ID *T1* would
be the name for the 4 WSFs that are part of the same flow.

> Train ID will be an optional field.

*Sequence*

*ID* This will be a three-character alphanumeric field to identify the
flow of a particular Train. In the previous example Train ID *T1*
consisted of WSFa, WSFb, WSFc, WSFd. The sequence could be WSFa flows to
WSFb, WSFb flows to in WSFc, WSFc flows to WSFd. The Sequence ID for
WSFa would be 1, the sequence ID for WSFb would be 2, the sequence ID
for WSFc would be 3 and the sequence ID for WSFd would be 4.

Sequence ID will be an optional field.

In the listed example, the Train ID and Sequence ID would be saved to
the database in the Facility Flow Table (TINWSFF). The Train ID/Sequence
ID attributes would be populated with T1/01, T1/02, T1/03, and T1/04
respectively.

On the Add Basic Inventory page, the user will only be able name/create
one train with four WSFs. The user will need to use the Water Facility
Maintenance pages to create more than one Train or to sequence more than
four WSFs.

*From* Will display the "From" WSF State Assigned ID as specified above.
May be changed by user.

*To* Will display the "To" WSF State Assigned ID as specified above. May
be changed by user.

> Facility Flow will be optional fields.

[Water Purchase]{.underline}

This section is for entry of any Water Purchases. The information
entered will be written to the TINWPURC table.

[Water Purchase Entry Fields:]{.underline}

*Seller WS No.* Seller Water System No. will be displayed in two fields
and is used to match the number of the water system. The first field
will be pre-filled with the two-character state code (where change will
be allowed), followed by a second field for entry of the seven numbers
(or characters). Example: **NE** 1234567. A complete number will not be
required and will be used to start a match equal to or greater than the
value provided.

> If an exact match is found using the Water System No., the Seller WS
> No. field will be populated and the Seller Name will be displayed,
> protected from change. If an exact match is not found, the software
> will present the Water System Maintenance List page, in single-select
> mode. The resulting Water System Maintenance List page will display
> the closest match to the number that was entered at the top and sorted
> by Water System No. The implied search criteria of the users current
> Water System Group or Regulating agency will not be enforced.
>
> If the Seller WS No. is the same Water System No. at top of this page,
> the error message will be **System may not purchase water from itself,
> select another water system.**
>
> Seller WS No. will be an optional field. If a value is entered and
> then subsequently removed, the values in Seller WS Name, Seller WSF
> State Asgn ID and Seller WSF Name will also be removed. Seller WSF
> State Asgn ID and its associated **Go To** button will become
> disabled.

*Seller WSF*

*State Asgn ID* Enables the user to select a supplying facility when a
seller water system has been selected. If an invalid value is provided,
the Water System Facility Maintenance List page will be presented in
single-select mode, filtered to display only the WSFs associated to the
selling water system. After the Seller WSF is selected, it will be
returned to the Add Basic Inventory page and populated in the Seller
State Asgn ID field and the Seller WSF Name.

Seller WSF State Asgn ID will be an optional field. It will be enabled
when a valid Seller WS No. has been provided.

*Purchaser WSF*

*State Asgn ID* Enables the user to select a receiving facility when a
seller water system has been selected. This field will be default valued
with the State Asgn ID of the first active Consecutive Connection or
Non-Piped facility associated to the water system. The user may change
this value.

> Purchaser WSF State Asgn ID will be a mandatory field if the Seller WS
> No. field has been valued.

[Water Purchase Buttons:]{.underline}

**\[Seller WS No.\]**

**Go To** Pressing this button will present the Water System Search
page. The implied search criteria of the users current Water System
Group or Regulating agency will not be enforced when the search page is
invoked with this **Go To** button.

**\[Seller WSF State Asgn ID\]**

**Go To** Will present the Water System Facility Maintenance List page
in single-select mode, filtered to display only the WSFs associated to
the selling water system.

It will be enabled when a valid Seller WS No. has been provided.

[Buttons:]{.underline}

**OK** All field edits as described above will be conducted. Additional
edits will include:

> *For Water System Information:*

-   If name is left blank, the error message will be **Water System**
    **Name cannot be blank.**

-   If status is left blank, the error message will be **Activity Status
    cannot be blank.**

-   If status date is blank, the error message will be **Status Date
    cannot be blank.**

-   If status date is after the current date, the error message will be
    **Status Date cannot be after today's date.**

-   If Number of Days per Year Serving at least 25 has a value that is
    greater than 365, the error message will be **Number of Days cannot
    exceed 365.**

-   If Number of Days per Year Serving at least 25 has a value that is
    non-numeric, the error message will be **Number of Days may only be
    a valid number or spaces.**

> If the Population Served sectional check box is not marked, no edits
> are performed on the Population Served information. Otherwise:

-   If Begin Month is blank, error message will be **Begin Day and Month
    and End Day and Month must not be blank.**

-   If Begin Day is blank, error message will be **Begin Day and Month
    and End Day and Month must not be blank.**

-   If End Month is blank, error message will be **Begin Day and Month
    and End Day and Month must not be blank.**

-   If End Day is blank, error message will be **Begin Day and Month and
    End Day and Month must not be blank.**

-   If Begin Month contains a value less than 1 or greater than 12, the
    error message will be **Value entered is not in list/range of
    Permitted Values.**

-   If Begin Month has a value of (1,3,5,7,8,10,12) and the Begin Day is
    less than 1 or greater than 31, the error message will be **Value
    entered is not in list/range of Permitted Values.**

-   If Begin Month has a value of (4,6,9,11) and the Begin Day is less
    than 1 or greater than 30, the error message will be **Begin Day is
    invalid.**

-   If Begin Month has a value of 2 and the Begin Day is less than 1 or
    greater than 28, the error message will be **Begin Day is invalid.**

-   If End Month contains a value less than 1 or greater than 12, the
    error message will be **Value entered is not in list/range of
    Permitted Values.**

-   If End Month has a value of (1,3,5,7,8,10,12) and the End Day is
    less than 1 or greater than 31, the error message will be **Value
    entered is not in list/range of Permitted Values.**

-   If End Month has a value of (4,6,9,11) and the End Day is less than
    1 or greater than 30, the error message will be **End Day is
    invalid.**

-   If End Month has a value of 2 and the End Day is less than 1 or
    greater than 28, the error message will be **End Day is invalid.**

-   If Population Type is not selected, the error message will be
    **Population Type must not be blank.**

-   If Estimated Count is equal 0, the error message will be
    **Population** E**stimate cannot be zero.**

-   If Estimated Count is greater than 50 million, the error message
    will be **Value entered is not in list/range of permitted values.**

-   If Effective Begin Date is earlier than the Water System's activity
    status date, the error message will be **Water System Effective
    Begin Date cannot be earlier than its status date.**

-   If Effective Begin Date is a future date, the error message will be
    **Water System Effective Begin** **Date must not be after today's
    date.**

-   If Effective Begin Date is blank, the error message will be **Water
    System Effective Begin Date must be valued.**

> If the Service Connections sectional check box is not marked, no edits
> are performed on the Service Connection information. Otherwise:

-   If Type is blank, error message will be **Service Connection Type
    must not be blank.**

-   If no. of connections is zero, error message will be **Number of
    Service Connections cannot be blank.**

-   If Meter Type is blank, error message will be **Meter Type must not
    be blank.**

> *For Geographic Area:*
>
> *For Each Service Area where a value is supplied in the name*:

-   If no Primary Indicator is marked in the list, the error message
    will be **Primary Indicator required for one Service Area.**

> *For each Related Points of Contact where a value is supplied in the
> name:*

-   If no contact type is selected, the error message will be **At least
    one contact type must be selected for the POC.**

> If any WSF State Asgn IDs are provided in the Facility Flows Section:

-   All WSF State Asgn IDs entered in this section must be entered in
    the WSF entry sections on this page. If not, the error message will
    be **A WSF State Asgn ID in a Facility Flow field is invalid.**

-   A minimum of two WSF State Asgn IDs must be provided in consecutive
    entry fields. If not, the error message will be **Two Facilities are
    required to create a facility flow.**

-   The flow must be between two different WSF State Asgn IDs. If the
    two IDs are the same, the error message will be **Water System
    Facility cannot flow to itself.**

-   If a flow already exists with the same From WSF and To WSF the error
    message will be **Duplicate Water System Facility flow found.**

> *If a Seller WS No. is not provided, this section will be ignored. If
> a Seller WS No. is provided, the following edits will be performed:*

-   The Seller WS No. must be for an existing Water System and if not,
    the error message will be **Seller Water System No. is not valid.**

-   If Purchaser State Asgn ID is blank, the error message will be
    **Seller has been selected, must have Purchaser.**

-   If Purchaser State Asgn ID is not for a WSF State Asgn ID entered
    above on the page, the error message will be **Purchaser WSF State
    Asgn ID is not valid.**

-   If the Purchaser State Asgn ID is not for a facility of type CC or
    NP, the error message will be **Purchaser WSF is not a Consecutive
    Connection or Non-Piped, Purchased facility.**

When all edits are successfully processed, the following database
activities will be performed:

Update WATER_SYSTEM (TINWSYS):

-   Populate water system fields with provided values.

-   If Number of Days per Year Serving at least 25 is spaces set field
    to null.

-   Set d_last_update_timestamp to current timestamp.

-   Set d_last_inventory_update_timestamp to the current timestamp.

-   Set d_userid_code to current User ID.

-   Set d_initial_timestamp to current timestamp.

-   Set d_initial_userid to current User ID.

-   Set d_new_ws_flag to "N."

-   Set d_population_count to the Population Served estimated Count.

> If Population Served sectional checkbox is on:

-   Create ANNUAL_OPERATING_PERIOD (TINAOPRD).

> \- Populate the annual operating period fields with the provided
> values.
>
> \- Set the effective_end_date to null.
>
> \- Set the tinaoprd_is_number using the ENTITY_INTERNAL_SYSTEM_NUMBER
> is_number where table_name = "TINAOPRD."
>
> \- Set d_last_update_timestamp to current timestamp
>
> \- Set d_userid_code to current User ID.
>
> \- Set d_initial_timestamp to current timestamp
>
> \- Set d_initial_userid to current User ID.
>
> \- Associate it to the WATER_SYSTEM.
>
> \- DO NOT UPDATE THE WATER SYSTEM'S TIMESTAMPS and USERID AGAIN.

-   Create POPULATION_SERVED (TINPOPSV).

> \- Populate the population served fields with the provided values.
>
> \- Set the tinpopsv_is_number using the ENTITY_INTERNAL_SYSTEM_NUMBER
> is_number where table_name = "TINPOPSV."
>
> \- Set d_last_update_timestamp to current timestamp.
>
> \- Set d_userid_code to current User ID.
>
> \- Set d_initial_timestamp to current timestamp.
>
> \- Set d_initial_userid to current User ID.
>
> \- Associate it to the new ANNUAL_OPERATION_PERIOD"
>
> \- Do not update the water systems timestamps again.
>
> If Service Connection sectional checkbox is on:

-   Create SERVICE_CONNECTION_CATEGORY (TINSCC).

> \- Populate the service connection category fields with the provided
> values.
>
> \- Set the tinscc_is_number using the ENTITY_INTERNAL_SYSTEM_NUMBER
> is_number where table_name = "TINSCC."
>
> \- Set d_last_update_timestamp to current timestamp.
>
> \- Set d_userid_code to current User ID.
>
> \- Set d_initial_timestamp to current timestamp.
>
> \- Set d_initial_userid to current User ID.
>
> \- Associate it to the WATER_SYSTEM.
>
> \- Do not update the water system's timestamps and User ID again.
>
> If Geographic Area City was provided:

-   Create WATER_SYSTEM_GEO_AREA_ASGMT (TINWSGAA).

> \- Set the external_system_number using the
> ENTITY_INTERNAL_SYSTEM_NUMBER external_system_number where table_name
> = "TINWSGAA."
>
> \- Set primary_indicator_code to "N"
>
> \- Set principal_indicator_code to "Y"
>
> \- Set d_last_update_timestamp to current timestamp.
>
> \- Set d_userid_code to current User ID.
>
> \- Set d_initial_timestamp to current timestamp.
>
> \- Set d_initial_userid to current User ID.
>
> \- Update the WATER_SYSTEM d_principal_city_name with the
> GEOGRAPHIC_AREA name.
>
> \- Associate it to the WATER_SYSTEM.
>
> \- Associate it to the GEOGRAPHIC_AREA.
>
> \- Do not update the water system's timestamps and User ID again.
>
> If Geographic Area County was provided:

-   Create WATER_SYSTEM_GEO_AREA_ASGMT (TINWSGAA)

> \- Set the external_system_number using the
> ENTITY_INTERNAL_SYSTEM_NUMBER external_system_number where table_name
> = "TINWSGAA."
>
> \- Set primary_indicator_code to "N"
>
> \- Set principal_indicator_code to "Y"
>
> \- Set d_last_update_timestamp to current timestamp.
>
> \- Set d_userid_code to current User ID.
>
> \- Set d_initial_timestamp to current timestamp.
>
> \- Set d_initial_userid to current User ID.
>
> \- Associate it to the WATER_SYSTEM.
>
> \- Associate it to the GEOGRAPHIC_AREA.
>
> \- Update the WATER_SYSTEM d_principal_county_name with the
> GEOGRAPHIC_AREA name.
>
> \- Do not update the water system's timestamps and User ID again.
>
> If Geographic Area County was not provided, but Geographic Area City
> was provided, create a WATER_SYSTEM_GEO_AREA_ASGMT (TINWSGAA) as above
> and associated to the county in which the provided city exists. If the
> city is not designated in a county, no row is created.
>
> For each Service Area provided create a
> WATER_SYSTEM_SERVICE_AREA_ASGMT (TINWSSAA).

-   Set the external_system_number using the
    ENTITY_INTERNAL_SYSTEM_NUMBER external_system_number where
    table_name = "TINWSSAA."

-   If the primary indicator is marked for this row set the
    primary_indicator_code to "Y" otherwise set it to "N."

-   Set d_last_update_timestamp to current timestamp.

-   Set d_userid_code to current User ID.

-   Set d_initial_timestamp to current timestamp.

-   Set d_initial_userid to current User ID.

-   Associate it to the WATER_SYSTEM.

-   Associate it to the SERVICE_AREA.

-   Do not update the water system's timestamps and User ID again.

> For each POC name provided AND each contact type checked for that
> name, create a WATER_SYS_LEGAL_ENTITY_CONTACT (TINWSLEC).

-   Set the external_system_number using the
    ENTITY_INTERNAL_SYSTEM_NUMBER external_system_number where
    table_name = "TINWSLEC."

-   Set the tinwslec_is_number using the ENTITY_INTERNAL_SYSTEM_NUMBER
    entity_internal_system_number where table_name = "TINWSLEC."

-   Set the type_code to the value appropriate for the contact type
    checked:

> \- Admin Contact = "AC"
>
> \- Owner = "OW
>
> \- DO in charge = "DO"
>
> \- OP = "OP
>
> \- Sampler = "SA"
>
> \- FC = "FC"
>
> \- EC = "EC"

-   Set the active_indicator_code to "A."

-   Set the begin_date to current date.

-   Set the end_date to null.

-   Set d_last_update_timestamp to current timestamp.

-   Set d_userid_code to current User ID.

-   Set d_initial_timestamp to current timestamp.

-   Set d_initial_userid to current User ID.

-   Associate it to the WATER_SYSTEM.

-   Associate it to the LEGAL_ENTITY.

-   Do not update the water system's timestamps and User ID again.

> For each Related Regulating Agency name provided, create a
> REGULATING_AGENCY_ASGMT (TINRAA)

-   Set the external_system_number using the
    ENTITY_INTERNAL_SYSTEM_NUMBER external_system_number where
    table_name = "TINRAA."

-   Set the tinraa_is_number using the ENTITY_INTERNAL_SYSTEM_NUMBER
    entity_internal_system_number where table_name = "TINRAA."

-   Set the establishment_number to spaces.

-   Set the purpose_text to spaces.

-   Set the active_indicator_code to "A."

-   Set d_last_update_timestamp to current timestamp.

-   Set d_userid_code to current User ID.

-   Set d_initial_timestamp to current timestamp.

-   Set d_initial_userid to current User ID.

-   Associate it to the WATER_SYSTEM.

-   Associate it to the GOVERNMENT_AGENCY.

-   Do not update the water system's timestamps and User ID again.

> The following three activities will be performed on each of the five
> Water System Facility sections.
>
> If the Water System Facility sectional checkbox is on, create a
> WATER_SYSTEM_FACILITY (TINWSF):

-   Set the external_system_number using the
    ENTITY_INTERNAL_SYSTEM_NUMBER external_system_number where
    table_name = "TINWSF."

-   Set the tinwsf_is_number using the ENTITY_INTERNAL_SYSTEM_NUMBER
    entity_internal_system_number where table_name = "TINWSF."

-   Set the tinwsf_st_code to the tinws_st_code from the WATER_SYSTEM.

-   If the Water System Facility type code is one of the source types as
    indicated in the TINPVALS table code name = 'WSFSRCTYPE', the
    d_source_type_indicator will be set to 'Y'. If not, it will be set
    to 'N'.

-   Set d_last_update_timestamp to current timestamp.

-   Set d_userid_code to current User ID.

-   Set d_initial_timestamp to current timestamp.

-   Set d_initial_userid to current User ID.

-   Set water_type_code_date to activity_status_date.

-   Set filtration_status_date to activity_status_date.

-   Associate it to the WATER_SYSTEM.

-   Do not update the water system's timestamps and User ID again.

> If the WSF type is Storage Facility, create a STORAGE_FACILITY
> (TINSTRG):

-   Set the type_code to Unknown (UK).

-   Set all other fields to default values of spaces, zeros, or nulls.

-   Set d_last_update_timestamp to the current timestamp.

-   Set d_userid_code to the current User ID.

-   Associate to the new Water System Facility.

> If the \[WSF\] Annual Operating Period sectional checkbox is on,
> create a FACILITY_ANNUAL_OPERATING_PERIOD (TINFAOP):

-   Populate the facility annual operating period fields with the
    provided values.

-   Set the effective_end_date to null.

-   Set the tinfaop_is_number using the ENTITY_INTERNAL_SYSTEM_NUMBER
    is_number where table_name = "TINFAOP."

-   Set d_last_update_timestamp to current timestamp.

-   Set d_userid_code to current User ID.

-   Set d_initial_timestamp to current timestamp.

-   Set d_initial_userid to current User ID.

-   Associate it to the WATER_SYSTEM_FACILITY.

-   Do not update the water system's timestamp and User ID or the
    WATER_SYSTEM_FACILITY's timestamp and User ID again.

> If the Sampling Point sectional checkbox is on, create a
> SAMPLING_POINT (TSASMPPT):

-   Populate sampling point fields with the provided values.

-   Set the tsasmppt_is_number using the ENTITY_INTERNAL_SYSTEM_NUMBER
    is_number where table_name = "TSASMPPT."

-   Set d_last_update_timestamp to current timestamp.

-   Set d_userid_code to current User ID.

-   Set d_initial_timestamp to current timestamp.

-   Set d_initial_userid to current User ID.

-   Associate it to the WATER_SYSTEM_FACILITY.

-   Do not update the water system's timestamp and User ID or the
    WATER_SYSTEM_FACILITY's timestamp and User ID again.

For each Facility Flow WSF State Asgn ID pair, create a
WATER_SYS_FACILITY_FLOW (TINWSFF):

-   Set water_quantity_measure, water_quantity_measure_unit, and
    connection_type_code to spaces.

-   Set connection_date and disconnection_date to null.

-   Set d_last_update_timestamp to current timestamp.

-   Set d_userid_code to current User ID.

-   Set d_initial_timestamp to current timestamp.

-   Set d_initial_userid to current User ID.

-   Associate the SUPPLIED_BY relationship with the WSF State Asgn ID on
    the left.

-   Associate the DESTINED_FOR relationship with the WSF State Asgn ID
    on the right.

-   Do not update the water system's timestamp and User ID or the
    WATER_SYSTEM_FACILITY's timestamp and User ID again.

> If the Seller WS No. is provided, create a WATER_PURCHASE (TINWPURC):

-   Set the tinwpurc_is_number using the ENTITY_INTERNAL_SYSTEM_NUMBER
    entity_internal_system_number where table_name = "TINWPURC."

-   Set the d_last_update_timestamp to the current timestamp.

-   Set the d_userid_code to the current User ID.

-   Set d_initial_timestamp to current timestamp.

-   Set d_initial_userid to current User ID.

-   Associate the SUPPLIED_BY relationship to the Seller PWS No.

-   Associate the CONTRACTED_BY relationship to the new WATER_SYSTEM.

-   If the Seller WSF State Asgn ID was provided, associate the
    SUPPLIED_FROM relationship to the Seller WSF State Asgn ID.

-   Associate the SUPPLIED_TO relationship to the Purchaser WSF State
    Asgn ID.

-   Do not update the water system's timestamp and User ID or the
    WATER_SYSTEM_FACILITY's timestamp and User ID again.

> When successful, the following automated processes will occur:

-   The Federal Primary Source will be determined.

-   The Federal Classification will be determined and the Water System
    Type Maintenance page may be presented.

-   The water system will also be evaluated for its required TCR
    monitoring requirements and the TCR Sample Schedule Modifications
    page may be presented.

> After the user processes those pages, the system will return to either
> the Water System Maintenance List (if that was the invoking page for
> the Add Basic Inventory page) or to the *SDWIS/STATE Home Page* if Add
> Basic Inventory was invoked via the Add Water System page.

**Cancel** If no changes have been made, will close the Add Basic
Inventory page and the user will be returned to the previous page.

> If changes have been made, the standard Cancel Confirm dialog box will
> be presented. The user will be returned to the previous page.

**Help** Will invoke online Help for this page.

**Scroll Buttons** Will scroll the list box in the direction of the
arrow displayed on the button.

[Tab Sequence:]{.underline}

Name, Alternate State No., Local Name, Activity Status, Status Date,
Status Reason Code, Status Reason, Memo, Owner Type, State Primary
Source, Number of Days per Year Serving at least 25, Population Served
Add checkbox, \[Population Served\] Begin Month/Day, \[Population
Served\] End Month/Day, Population Type, \[Population Served\] Estimated
Count, \[Population Served\] Effective Begin Date, Service Connection
Add checkbox, \[Service Connection\] Type, No. of Connections, Meter
Type, Meter size, City, \[City\] **Go To**, County, \[County\] **Go
To**, Service Area **Go To**, \[Service Area List Box\] **Make Primary,
Remove**, \[Related Points of Contact\] **Go To** \[Related Points of
Contact List Box\] **Designate POC Types**, **Remove**, \[Related
Regulating Agency\] **Go To**, \[Related Regulating Agency Name List
Box\] **Remove**, \[Water System Facility List Box\] **Add**,
**Modify**, **Remove**, Page Left button, Page Right button, \[Facility
Flow\] Train ID, \[Facility Flow\] Seq ID, \[Facility Flow\] From,
\[Facility Flow\] To, (repeat Facility Flow sequence three more times),
Seller WS No. (two character state code), Seller WS No. (seven digit
field), Seller WS No. **Go To**, Seller WSF State Asgn ID, Seller WSF
State Asgn ID **Go To**, Purchaser WSF State Asgn ID, **OK**,
**Cancel**, **Help**.

[Navigation Tool:]{.underline}

Due to the size (length) of this page, in addition to the vertical
scroll bar, there will be two hyperlinks for movement on this page. The
first one will be in the upper right corner of the page labeled "[Bottom
of page]{.underline}," which the user can click on to move quickly to
the bottom without scrolling. The second will be in the lower right
corner of the page with the label "[Top of page]{.underline}," which the
user can click on to move quickly to the top without scrolling.

## Water System Facilities

### Model Changes for Water System Facility

**Changes to Water System Facility (TINWSF):**

-   Resize external_system_number from 5 to 18. (R0072:A.4.2.1.a)

**Changes to INTERNAL_SYSTEM_NUMBER (TINEISN):**

-   Resize external_system_number from 5 to 18. (R0072:A.4.2.1.b)

**Add new table Water System Facility Deletions (TINWSFDL):**
**(B.4.2.1.a)**

Description: This table holds the information about a physically deleted
water system facility so that SDWIS/FedRep can formulate the appropriate
transaction to update SDWIS/ODS.

-   PWS_NUMBER (text, 12, mandatory) The denormalized PWS number from
    the water system parent of the water system facility.

-   STATE_ASGN_IDENTIFICATION_CODE (text, 12, Mandatory)

-   DELETED_TIMESTAMP (timestamp, mandatory) The timestamp of when the
    WSF was deleted.

-   TYPE_CODE (text, 2, mandatory)

-   EXTERNAL_SYSTEM_NUMBER (Number, 19, Optional)

-   NAME (Text, 40, Optional)

-   ACTIVITY_STATUS_CODE (Text, 1, Opional)

-   ACTIVITY_DATE (Date, Optional)

-   SELLER_PWS_NUMBER (text, 12, optional) The PWS Number of the selling
    Water System. This field is required and populated for Treatment
    Plant WSF types.

-   SELLER_TREATMENT_INDICATOR_CODE (Text, 1, optional) This field is
    required and populated for Treatment Plant WSF types.

-   AVAILABILITY_CODE (Text, 1, Optional) This field is required and
    populated for Treatment Plant WSF types.

-   

-   WATER_TYPE_CODE (Text, 3, optional) This field is required and
    populated for Treatment Plant WSF types.

-   TREATMENT_STATUS_CODE (text, 1, optional) This field is required and
    populated for Treatment Plant WSF types.

-   REPORTED_FILTRATION_TEXT_VALUE (Text, 40, Optional) This field is
    required and populated for Treatment Plant WSF types. This field is
    populated with the tinpvals text value describing

Unique Identifier: PWS_NUMBER, STATE_ASGN_IDENTIFICATION_CODE,
DELETED_TIMESTAMP.

### Water System Facilities Page Flows

####  Water System Facility Maintenance List

The Water System Facility (WSF) Maintenance List page (Exhibit 4-41)
will display a list of water systems facilities for the selected water
system. This page will also serve as a Selection List page. This page
will be accessed via the **Expand** button on the Water System
Modification page and various **Go To** buttons on list and modification
pages.

One thousand (1000) WSFs are presented without subsequent user action.
More results can be viewed by using the **View/Next** menu item. A WSF
may be selected in the list box by highlighting it.

[Protected Fields:]{.underline}

*Number of rows*

*resulting from search*

*criteria entered:* The value in this protected field will show the
number of water system facilities that are associated to the selected
water system.

  -----------------------------------------------------------------------
  ![](media/image43.png){width="7.342361111111111in"
  height="4.7652777777777775in"}

  -----------------------------------------------------------------------

[]{#__RefHeading___Toc139687364 .anchor}**Exhibit 4-41.** Water System
Facility Maintenance List

*Number of rows*

*displayed*: The value in this protected field will indicate the number
of WSFs available for viewing in the list box via the vertical scroll
bar. The list will be display the first 1000 WSFs. If the user chooses
to view more water system facilities than are available via the vertical
scroll bar, this will be allowed via the **View/Next**,
**View/Previous** menu items discussed later in this section.

*Number of rows*

*Selected:* The number of rows selected in the list area when in
multi-selection mode.

[Water System Group Box:]{.underline}

\[Water System\] No., Name, Federal Type, State Type, Federal Primary
Source.

[List Columns:]{.underline}

WSF State Asgn ID, Facility Name, Type, Activity Status, Availability,
Federal ID No., Source Indicator.

[Default Sort Order:]{.underline}

Activity Status, ascending; Source Indicator, descending; Availability,
descending; WSF State Asgn ID, ascending.

[Menu Items:]{.underline}

**File**

*Exit* Will return the user to the invoking page.

**Edit**

*Add* Will present the Water System Facility Modification page, in *Add*
mode. The option for adding facilities will be available even if a WSF
has been selected in the list box area.

> *Change* Will present the Water System Facility Modification page in
> *Change* mode. This option will be available only when a WSF has been
> selected in the list.
>
> A double-click on a list box item will function as the menu item.
>
> *Delete* This option will be available only when a selection has been
> highlighted in the list box area.
>
> The following checks will be made prior to the deletion:
>
> If the Water System Facility selected for deletion is referenced by a
> Sample Schedule Group, the software will invoke the following error
> message: **This WSF is referenced by a Sample Schedule Group and
> cannot be deleted.**
>
> If the Water System Facility selected for deletion is referenced by a
> Sample Schedule, the software will invoke the following error message:
> **This WSF is referenced by a Sample Schedule and cannot be deleted.**
>
> If the Water System Facility selected for deletion is referenced by a
> Sampling Point, the software will invoke the following error message:
> **This WSF has Sampling Point(s) and cannot be deleted.**
>
> If the Water System Facility selected for deletion is referenced by a
> Violation, the software will invoke the following error message:
> **This WSF is referenced by a Violation and cannot be deleted.**
>
> If the Water System Facility selected for deletion is referenced by a
> Deficiency, the software will invoke the following error message:
> **This WSF is referenced by a Deficiency and cannot be deleted.**
>
> If the Water System Facility selected for deletion is referenced by a
> Sample Summary, the software will invoke the following error message:
> **This WSF is referenced by a Pb/Cu Sample Summary and cannot be
> deleted.**
>
> Message delete due to association being via a Sampling Point or FANL,
> which will catch the denial.
>
> If the Water System Facility selected for deletion is referenced by a
> Facility Analyte Level, the software will invoke the following error
> message: **This WSF is referenced by a Facility Analyte Level and
> cannot be deleted.**
>
> Pressing **OK** on any of the error messages will close the dialog box
> and ignore the request to delete the WSF. The Water System Facility
> delete conflict must be resolved before the user will be able to
> delete the WSF.

If no conflicts are present, the Delete Water System Facility
confirmation dialog box (Exhibit 4-42) requiring the selection of **OK**
or **Cancel**.

![](media/image44.png){width="5.354166666666667in"
height="3.5833333333333335in"}

[]{#__RefHeading___Toc139687365 .anchor}**Exhibit 4-42.** Delete Water
System Facility

[Delete Water System Facility Buttons:]{.underline}

**OK** Will request delete of the water system facility and update the
d_last_inventory_update_timestamp of the water system to the current
timestamp.

> When the edits are successful, the confirmation page will close and
> return the user to the Water System Facility Maintenance List with
> this water system facility removed from the list.
>
> The row for the selected WSF will be deleted in the TINWSF table.
> Additionally all rows associated to the WSF will be deleted in the
> following tables:
>
> Water System History
>
> Locational Detail
>
> Cadastral Legal Description
>
> Storage
>
> Well
>
> Well Screen
>
> Well Casing
>
> WSF Contact
>
> Treatment Plant
>
> Treatment Plant Association to Analyte Removal
>
> Plant Association to Objective/Process Pairing
>
> Plant/Pairing Association to Analyte
>
> Treatment Unit
>
> Treatment Association to Objective/Process Pairing
>
> Treatment/Pairing Association to Analyte
>
> WSF AOP
>
> A new row will be added to the Water System Facility Deletions
> (TINWSFDL) table: (B.4.2.2.1.a)
>
> For All WSF type codes, populate the pws_name,
> state_asgn_dentification_code, type_code, external_system_number,
> name, activity_status_code, activity_date with the corresponding
> values from the water system facility, and the deleted_timestamp with
> the current timestamp.
>
> For WSF type codes of 'TP' (treatment plant) additionally populate the
> seller_ows_number, seller_treatment_indiciator_code,
> availability_code, water_type_code and treatment_status_code from the
> water system facility Populate reported_filtration_text_value from
> TINPVALS where Code Table name = 'WSFFLTSTAT' an
>
> **Cancel** Will abort the delete request and return the user to the
> Water System Facility Maintenance List with no modification.
>
> *Deselect* Will remove all selection highlighting from the items in
> the list.
>
> *Select* This menu option will populate the field on the invoking page
> with the information for the WSF selected. This option will be enabled
> only if the WSF Maintenance List was invoked as a selection page and a
> row has been highlighted in the list box area.

**View**

> *Filter by* This option will open the standard filter parameter dialog
> box described in Chapter 1, allowing the user to filter out some of
> the records displayed on the list page by specifying a specific value
> for the filtering fields. Only rows that match the filtering criteria
> value will be displayed in the list.

**Note:** The number of rows displayed on the maintenance list page will
change to show the count of records resulting from the filter. Using
**View/Filter by** will enable **View/Refresh**.

> [Filter by Options:]{.underline}
>
> WSF State Asgn ID, Facility Name, Type, Activity Status, Availability,
> Federal ID No., and Source Indicator.
>
> *Next* If more than 1000 water system facilities exist for the water
> system, the next group of 1000 will be loaded into the list box when
> the **View/Next** menu item is selected.
>
> This option will be available only if more rows are available for
> display. Selecting this menu item will enable the **View/Previous**
> menu item.

*Previous* If more than 1000 water system facilities were found and the
user has requested to view the next 1000 via the **View/Next** menu
item, the **View/Previous** menu item will re-populate the list box with
prior group of 1000.

> Once the initial 1000 water system facilities are displayed, the
> **View/Previous** menu item will be disabled.
>
> *Refresh* Selecting **View/Refresh** will retrieve the unfiltered list
> (original search criteria).
>
> *Sort* Selecting this option will open the standard sort dialog box
> described in Chapter 1, allowing the user to modify the order of the
> displayed WSFs. Three levels of sort will be supported.
>
> [Sort Order Selections:]{.underline}

WSF State Asgn ID, Facility Name, Type, Activity Status, Availability,
Federal ID No., and Source Indicator.

**Help** Will invoke online Help for this page.

[Buttons]{.underline}:

**Menu Items** Will present the standard menu items dialog box.

**Scroll Buttons** Will scroll the list box in the direction of the
arrow displayed on the button.

####  Water System Facility Modification 

Exhibit 4-43 depicts the Water System Facility Modification page. This
page will be accessible via the **Edit/Add** or **Edit/Change** menu
items on the Water System Maintenance List page or the **Modify** button
on the Water System Modification page. Users will be presented this page
in either *Add* or *Change* mode -- the title of the page will display
*Add* or *Change* for clarity. In *Add* mode, the user will value the
fields. In *Change* mode, the fields will be populated with the
information from the selected row, but the information will be
modifiable. This page is a combination of the SDWIS/STATE 8.0 Well
Modification, Storage Modification, Treatment Plant Modification, and
the generic Water System Facility Modification windows. There will be a
new **More** button that will invoke a more detailed view of data
pertinent for the given facility type.

[Protected Fields:]{.underline}

Record updated by/on The User ID and the timestamp from the last time
the record was updated.

Record created by/on The initial User ID and timestamp when the record
was initially added to the database.

  ----------------------------------------------------- -----------------------------------------------------
  ![](media/image45.png){width="1.8756944444444446in"   ![](media/image46.png){width="5.232638888888889in"
  height="7.377777777777778in"}                         height="7.370138888888889in"}

  ----------------------------------------------------- -----------------------------------------------------

[]{#__RefHeading___Toc139687366 .anchor}**Exhibit 4-43.** Water System
Facility Modification

[Water System Group Box:]{.underline}

\[Water System\] No., Name, Federal Type, State Type, Federal Primary
Source.

[Water System Facility Basic Information Group Box:]{.underline}

Federal ID

No. The number generated by the software to uniquely identify the WSF.

No Locational

Data A message to inform whether or not there is Lat/Long or Cadastral
location data saved for the facility.

> In *Add* mode the message will be as displayed in the exhibit '**No
> Locational Data**'.
>
> In *Change* mode, the message displayed will be determined by presence
> or absence of records in the following Locational Detail and
> Cadastral/Legal Description tables.

  ---------------- --------------------- ---------------------------------
  Locational       **Cadastral Legal     **Message**
  Detail           Description**         

  Absent           Absent                **No Locational Data**

  Present          Absent                **Only Lat/Long Locational Data**

  Absent           Present               **Only Cadastral Locational
                                         Data**

  Present          Present               **Both Lat/Long and Cadastral
                                         Data**
  ---------------- --------------------- ---------------------------------

[Entry Fields:]{.underline}

Note that the tab order is left to right, top to bottom, and includes
all entry fields and buttons unless otherwise noted.

Note that *Data Origin* field, which was available in SDWIS/STATE 8.0,
has been removed.

[Water System Facility Basic Information Group Box:]{.underline}

*WSF State Asgn ID* The state-assigned number, which identifies the
water system facility. The State Asgn ID must be unique within the water
system.

> WSF State Asgn ID will be a mandatory field, but may be system
> generated if left blank when the user presses on the **OK** button in
> *Add* mode. In *Change* mode, the user will receive an error message,
> and must manually enter a State Asgn ID.

*Type* Use the dropdown list to select the type of water system
facility. The selections will be those available in the TINPVALS table
with Code name ="WSFTYPE."

> WSF Type will be a mandatory field.

*Name* The name of the water system facility.

> WSF Name will be a mandatory field.

*Local Name* The common name, secondary name, or alias for the water
system facility.

> Local Name will be an optional field.

*Average %*

*Total Water*

*Quantity* The percent entered represents the amount of water from a
purchase per year, divided by the total amount of water delivered by the
purchasing water system multiplied by 100. The value entered here for
consecutive connections and non-piped facilities will be displayed in
the purchase records on both the buyer and seller side so that a primacy
agency can estimate the total number of people served by a water system
that sells water.

> The value entered must be 100 or less and cannot be negative.
>
> Average % Total Water Quantity will be an optional field.

*Operator Category*

A 5-character text field that can be used by the state to maintain
information concerning operator licensing requirements, operator type
requirements, or treatment plant classification.

> Operator Category will be an optional field.

*Source Treatment Status*

This field will allow the user to capture the treatment status of the
water. This field should be valued only for source type facilities. This
information will be federally reported. Refer to TINPVALS code name =
WSFSRCTYPE for the list of source water system facilities. The
selections available via the dropdown list will be:

> **Value Description**
>
> \<Spaces\> (Default)
>
> N No Treatment
>
> T Treated
>
> Treatment Status will be an optional field.

*Availability* Will categorize the circumstances under which a source of
water is used by a water system. The selections available via the
dropdown list will be:

> **Value Description**
>
> P Permanent (Default)
>
> E Emergency
>
> I Interim
>
> O Other

S Seasonal

> \<Spaces\>
>
> WSF Availability will be an optional field. If a user values the
> Availability field with "Emergency," the software will disable the
> Facility Annual Operating Period **Add** and **Change** buttons. If
> Availability is changed to other than "Emergency," the software will
> enable the Facility Annual Operating Period **Add** and **Change**
> buttons. In *Change* mode, if availability is changed to "Emergency,"
> all existing Water System Facility AOP records will be automatically
> deleted with the **OK** button is selected.

[Activity Group Box:]{.underline}

*Status* Will categorize the most recent activity for the water system
facility. The selections available via the dropdown list will be:

> **Value Description**
>
> A Active (Default)
>
> I Inactive
>
> P Proposed
>
> WSF Activity Status will be a mandatory field.
>
> When the status is modified in change mode (i.e., the original value
> of the field is Active and the user changes the field to Inactive),
> the (status) date will be set to current date and the following
> advisory message will be presented when the user tabs off the field:
> **As a result of status change, Status Date has been set to current
> date. ** Once the user presses **OK** on the advisory message the user
> will be returned to the Water System Facility Modification page.
> (R0033:B.4.2.2.2.a)
>
> *Date* The date on which the facility became proposed, active, or
> inactive. In *Add* mode, this field will be defaulted to the current
> date, but will be modifiable. In change mode, it will automatically be
> changed to current date with then status field is changed. It can be
> modified by the user. (B.4.2.2.2.b)
>
> WSF Activity Status Date will be a mandatory field. It cannot be in
> the future.

*Status Reason* A System Administrator-controlled code of the reason a
water system facility has the status indicated. This may be used to
indicate why a water system facility has been inactivated but also may
be used to indicate why it is active or proposed. The selections will be
those available in the TINPVALS table with Code name = 'WSFACTRSN.'

> WSF Activity Status Reason will be an optional field.

*Comment* A free-form text field to capture an explanation of the Water
System Facility's current status.

> WSF Activity Status Comment will be an optional field.

[Water Type Group Box:]{.underline}

*Code* Will categorize the source water used by a water system. The
selections available via the dropdown list will be:

> **Value Description**
>
> \<Spaces\>
>
> GW Groundwater
>
> GU Groundwater under the direct influence (UDI) of Surface Water
>
> SW Surface Water
>
> For Wells, the software will default the value to GW, but will be
> modifiable.
>
> For Intake Facilities, the software will default the value to SW and
> protect the value from change.
>
> For Roof Catchment Facilities, the software will default the value to
> GW and protect the value from change.
>
> For Springs, the software will default the value to GU, but will be
> modifiable.
>
> For Reservoirs, the software will default the value to SW and protect
> from change.
>
> For Non-Piped, Non-Purchased, the software will default the value to
> SW but will be modifiable.
>
> Water Type Code will be a mandatory field for source WSF types and
> optional for all other WSF types. Refer to TINPVALS code name =
> WSFSRCTYPE for the list of source Water System Facilities.

*Date* The user will be able to enter the date the source water type was
determined.

> Water Type Code Date will be an optional field. It will be set to null
> if Water Type Code is blank.

[Filtration Status Group Box:]{.underline}

*Status* This field will capture the filtration status for sources. This
information will be federally reported for non-emergency SW or GU source
water. All options will be retrieved from the TINPVALS table with code
name = "WSFFLTSTAT

> **Value Description**
>
> \<Spaces\> (Default)
>
> MIF Must Install Filtration
>
> SAF Successfully Avoiding Filtration

Filtration Status will be an optional field.

*Date* This field will allow users to record the date the Filtration
Status was determined. This field should be valued only if Filtration
Status Code is valued. It may contain a future date. The date will be
set to null when Filtration Status is blank.

Filtration Status Date will be an optional field.

[Facility Annual Operating Period Group Box:]{.underline}

Facility Annual Operating Period will display the list of existing
Annual Operating Periods (AOP) sorted by date. New AOPs can be added,
deleted or existing AOPs modified on pages launched from this list. The
list box will display up to 50 rows of data via the vertical scroll bar.

[List Columns:]{.underline}

Start MM, \[Start\] DD, End MM, \[End\] DD, Effective Begin Date,
Effective End Date.

[Default Sort Order:]{.underline}

Effective Begin Date, Start Month, Start Day, descending.

[Facility Annual Operating Period Buttons:]{.underline}

**Add** Will present the WSF Annual Operating Period Maintenance page in
*Add* mode.

This option will be available, even if a row in the Facility Annual
Operating Period list is selected. This button will not be enabled if
Availability is set to 'Emergency'.

The software will process the **OK** logic before proceeding to the
Facility Annual Operating Period Maintenance page.

**Change** Will present the WSF Annual Operating Period Maintenance page
in *Change* mode.

This option will be available only when a row is selected in the list.

> A double-click in the list box will react as if a single-click
> highlight and this button was selected.

This option will not be enabled if Availability is set to 'Emergency'.

The software will process the **OK** logic before proceeding to the
Facility Annual Operating Period Maintenance page.

**Delete** Will present the Delete WSF Annual Operation Period
confirmation page (Exhibit 4-44) requiring a selection of **OK** or
**Cancel**. This button will be enabled only if a row in the Facility
Annual Operating Period list box is selected.

[Delete WSF Annual Operating Period Buttons:]{.underline}

**OK** Will remove the WSF Annual Operation Period from the database,
close the Delete WSF Annual Operating Period page, and return the user
to the Water System Facility Modification page. The Facility Annual
Operating Period list will no longer list the deleted AOP.

> **Cancel** Will close the confirmation page and return the user to the
> Water System Facility Modification page with no changes.

![](media/image47.png){width="6.0in" height="5.639583333333333in"}

[]{#__RefHeading___Toc139687367 .anchor}**Exhibit 4-44.** Delete WSF
Annual Operating Period

[Sampling Point Group Box:]{.underline}

Sampling Point will display the list of sampling points associated to
the WSF. New sampling points can be added, deleted, or existing sampling
points modified on the page launched from this list. The list box will
display up to 50 rows of data via the vertical scroll bar. There will be
a statement underneath the list box indicating how many rows are
displayed from the number available (e.g., "50 of 50 rows displayed").

[List Columns:]{.underline}

Sampling Point, Type, Location, Activity Status.

[Sampling Point Default Sort:]{.underline}

Activity Status, Sampling Point, ascending.

[Sampling Point Buttons:]{.underline}

**Change** Pressing the **Change** button will present the Sampling
Point Maintenance page. This button will be enabled only if a row is
selected (highlighted).

The sofrware will process the **OK** logic before proceeding to the
Sampling Point Maintenance page.

**Expand** Pressing the **Expand** button will present the Water System
Facility Sampling Point Maintenance List.

[Buttons:]{.underline}

**More\>\>** Will present the appropriate maintenance page for the
displayed Water System Facility. If the WSF Type = Well (WL), will
present the Well Detail Maintenance page. If the WSF Type = Treatment
Plant (TP), will present the Treatment Plant Detail Maintenance page. If
the WSF Type = Storage (ST), will present the Storage Detail Maintenance
page. If the WSF Type = Consecutive Connection (CC) or Non-Piped (NP),
will present the Receiving Water System Facility/Water Purchase page.
For all other WSF Types, will present the Other Water System Facility
Maintenance page.

This button will appear at the top of the page as well as at the bottom.
If a user wants to skip over the main facility page, they can do so
quickly. (R0053:A.4.2.2.2.a)

**Note:** Pressing this button will signal the software to perform the
same edits and processing as the **OK** button prior to presenting the
destination page.

**Related POCs** Will present the Water System Facility Related Points
of Contact Maintenance List page. (R0059:A.4.2.2.2.b)

> **Note:** Pressing this button will signal the software to perform the
> same edits and processing as the **OK** button prior to presenting the
> Points of Contact page.

**Facility Security**

Will present the Facility Security Maintenance List page.

> **Note:** Pressing this button will signal the software to perform the
> same edits and processing as the **OK** button prior to presenting the
> Facility Security page.

**Locational Info** Will present the WSF Locational Data Maintenance
page.

> **Note:** Pressing this button will signal the software to perform the
> same edits and processing as the **OK** button prior to presenting the
> Locational Data Maintenance page.

**River Reach Info** Will present the River Reach information page,
where River Reach information for the WSF can be added, modified, or
deleted.

**OK** All field edits mentioned will be performed.

> In *Add* mode, if the WSF State Asgn ID has not been valued, the
> following advisory message will be invoked: **The "WSF State Asgn ID\"
> cannot be blank.** (Exhibit 4-45).
>
> ![](media/image48.png){width="5.479166666666667in" height="2.34375in"}

[]{#__RefHeading___Toc139687368 .anchor}**Exhibit 4-45.** Value for the
WSF State Asgn ID

[Value for the WSF State Asgn ID Buttons:]{.underline}

> **OK** Pressing this button will signal the software to assign a
> system-generated value for WSF State Asgn ID. The advisory message
> will close and the software will generate a number from the
> two-character code for the WSF type code concatenated with the Entity
> INTERNAL_SYSTEM_NUMBER using the table name TINWSF. Once the software
> has generated a number, the user will be returned to the Water System
> Facility Modification page with the number displayed. The user will
> need to press the **OK** button on the Water System Facility
> Modification page to complete the *Assign ID* request.
>
> **Cancel** Pressing this button will return the user to Water System
> Facility Modification page where the user will be able to manually
> enter a value for WSF State Asgn ID.
>
> In *Change* mode, if the WSF State Asgn ID has not been valued, the
> message will be invoked as an Error message: **WSF State Asgn ID
> cannot be blank.** The user will need to manually enter a WSF State
> Asgn ID.
>
> If WSF State Asgn ID is not unique within the water system, the
> following error message will be presented: **Duplicate WSF State ID
> Number found.**
>
> If WSF Type is not valued, the following error message will be
> presented: **Type Code must not be blank.**
>
> If WSF Name is not valued, the following error message will be
> presented: **Water System Facility Name cannot be blank.**
>
> If the WSF Type is a source type facility (one that is defined in
> TINPVALS code name = WSFSRCTYPE), the Water Type must be selected. If
> not, the error message will be **Water Type Code cannot be blank for
> this Facility type.**

-   If the Source Indicator is "Yes," the water type code must be
    Surface Water (SW), Groundwater under the influence of surface water
    (GU), or Groundwater (GW). If it is not, the following error message
    will be presented: **Water Type code not valid for source type
    facility.**

-   If WSF Type is Infiltration Gallery (IG), water type code must be
    Surface Water (SW), Groundwater under the influence of surface water
    (GU), or Groundwater (GW). If it is not, the following error message
    will be presented: **Water Type code not valid for this Water System
    Facility type.**

-   If WSF Type is Well (WL), water type code must be either Groundwater
    (GW) or Groundwater under the influence of surface water (GU). If it
    is not, the following error message invoked: **Water Type code not
    valid for this Water System Facility type.**

-   If WSF Type is Roof Catchment (RC), water type code must be
    Groundwater (GW). If it is not, the following error message invoked:
    **Water Type code not valid for this Water System Facility type.**

> If a value is not supplied for WSF Activity Status Date or the date
> entered is after the current date, one of the following error messages
> will be invoked: **Activity Date must not be blank**, or **Date may
> not be after than today's date.**
>
> If Source Treatment Status is valued, the WSF Type must be a source
> type facility (one that is defined in TINPVALS code name =
> WSFSRCTYPE). If not, the following error message will be presented:
> **Treatment Status can only be valued for a source type facility.**
>
> If Filtration Status Date is valued and Filtration Status Code is not,
> the following error message will be presented: **Filtration Status
> Date not valid without Filtration Status Code.**

*Add Mode* When all edits are successfully processed, the following
database activities will be performed:

Will create a Water System Facility (TINWSF) record:

-   Set the external_system_number using the
    entity_internal_system_number external_system_number where
    table_name = "TINWSF."

-   Set the tinwsf_is_number using the entity_internal_system_number
    where table_name = "TINWSF."

-   If the Water System Facility type code is one of the source types as
    indicated in the TINPVALS table code name = 'WSFSRCTYPE', the
    d_source_type_indicator will be set to 'Y'. If not, it will be set
    to 'N'.

-   Set the tinwsf_st_code to the tinws_st_code from the water system.

-   Set d_last_update_timestamp to current timestamp.

-   Set d_initial_timestamp to the current timestamp.

-   Set d_initial_userid to the current User ID.

-   Set d_userid to current User ID.

-   Associate it to the water system.

If the WSF type is Storage Facility, create a Storage Facility (TINSTRG)
record:

-   Set the type_code to unknown (UK).

-   Set all other fields to default values of spaces, zeros, or nulls.

-   Set d_last_update_timestamp to the current timestamp.

-   Set d_initial_timestamp to the current timestamp.

-   Set d_initial_userid to the current User ID.

-   Set d_userid_code to the current User ID.

-   Associate to the new Water System Facility.

*Change Mode* Will update the Water System Facility and water system
rows with the modified information and new timestamps.

> When successful, the water system facility record will be modified.
> The d_last_update_timestamp and d_userid_code will be set to the
> current values. If any of the fields listed below have been changed, a
> water system facility history record (TINWSFH) will also be created
> with a before image of the water system facility including the
> d_last_update_timestamp moved to tinwsf_d_last_updt_ts and
> d_userid_code moved to tinwsf_d_userid_cd with the following
> attributes:
>
> Activity_Status_Code
>
> Activity_Status_Date
>
> Activity_Reason_Text
>
> Activity_Reason_Code
>
> Name
>
> State_Asgn_ID
>
> Water_Type_Code
>
> Water_Type_Code_Determination_Date
>
> Availability_Code
>
> Source_Treatment_Status
>
> Filtration_Status
>
> If Availability has been changed to "Emergency" all existing Water
> System Facility AOPs will be deleted.
>
> When completed, the page will close and the user will be returned to
> the invoking page.

**Cancel** If no changes have been made to the enterable fields, the
page will close and return the user to the Water System Facility
Maintenance List page.

> If changes have been made, the standard Cancel Confirm dialog box will
> be presented where a selection of **Yes**, **No**, or **Cancel** will
> be required.

**Help** Will invoke online Help for this page.

####  Model Changes for WSF Annual Operating Period

> No model changes are intended for this release.

####  Water System Facility Annual Operating Period Maintenance

WSF Annual Operating Period Maintenance (Exhibit 4-46) will allow users
to maintain information about the Annual Operating Periods (AOP) for a
WSF. The user will be able to add or change a WSF AOP.

[Protected Fields:]{.underline}

[Water System Group Box:]{.underline}

\[Water System\] No., Name, Federal Type, State Type, Federal Primary
Source.

[Water System Facility Group Box:]{.underline}

State Asgn ID, Type, Facility Name, Water Type, Local Name.

Record updated

By/on The User ID and the timestamp from the last time the record was
updated.

Record created

By/on The initial User ID and timestamp when the record was initially
added to the database.

![](media/image49.png){width="5.992361111111111in"
height="3.813888888888889in"}

[]{#__RefHeading___Toc139687369 .anchor}**Exhibit 4-46.** WSF Annual
Operating Period Maintenance

[Entry Fields:]{.underline}

Note that the tab order is left to right, top to bottom, and includes
all entry fields and buttons unless otherwise noted.

*Begin Month/Day* The Begin Month is the numeric representation of the
month in which the WSF's season of operation commences. It must be a
valid number between 1 and 12 and will be defaulted to 1, but the user
may change. If a valid number is not used, when the user tabs off the
field, the following error message will be presented: **Begin** **Month
is invalid.**

> The Begin Day is the numeric day within the Begin Month that the WSF's
> season of operation commences. It must be a valid number between 1 and
> 31, but not to exceed the number of days for the begin month. It will
> be defaulted to 1, but the user may change. If a valid number is not
> used, when the user tabs off the field, the following error message
> will be presented: **Begin** **Day is invalid.**
>
> Begin Month/Day will be mandatory fields.

*End Month/Day* The End Month is the numeric representation of the month
in which the WSF's season of operation ends. Along with the End Day, it
will represent the last day of operation. It must be a valid number
between 1 and 12 and will be defaulted to 12, but the user may change.
If a valid number is not used, when the user tabs off the field, the
following error message will be presented: **End Month is invalid.**

> The End Day is the numeric day within the End Month that the WSF's
> season of operation ends. It must be a valid number between 1 and 31,
> but not to exceed the number of days for the end month. It will be
> defaulted to 31, but the user may change. If a valid number is not
> used, when the user tabs off the field, the following error message
> will be presented: **End Day is invalid.**
>
> End Month/Day will be mandatory fields.

*Effective Begin Date* The calendar month, day, and year when the water
system's season of operation begins. The begin date cannot be after the
provided effective end date. It will be defaulted to the current date,
but will be modifiable.

> Effective Begin Date will be a mandatory field. The date may be in the
> future.

*Effective End Date* The ending calendar month, day, and year when the
water system's season of operation is no longer applicable. As long as
it is blank, the seasonal period of operation will continue year after
year. The end date cannot be prior to the effective begin date. The date
may be in the future.

> Effective End Date will be an optional field.

[Buttons:]{.underline}

**OK** All field edits mentioned will be performed.

> If Start Month, Start Day, End Month, or End Day are blank, the
> following error message will be presented: **Start Day and Month and
> End Day and Month must not be blank.**
>
> If Effective Begin Date is valued after Effective End Date, the
> following error message will be presented: **Effective Begin Date must
> be before Effective End Date.**
>
> If Effective Begin Date is not valued, the following error message
> will be presented: **Effective Begin Date must be valued.**
>
> *Duplicate*
>
> *Check* The duplicate check will look for an existing record with
> matching Start Month, Start Day, End Month, End Day and Effective
> Begin Date. If one if found, the following error message will be
> presented: Duplicate Water System Facility Annual Operating Period was
> found.
>
> *Add Mode* A new Facility Annual Operating Period will be created with
> the d_initial_timestamp, d_last_update_timestamp, d_initial_userid and
> d_userid_code set to the current values. If no end_date is provided it
> will be set to NULL.
>
> The Facility Annual Operating Period will be associated to the WSF.
> The water system facility's d_last_update_timestamp will be updated to
> the current timestamp. The page will close and return the user to the
> previous page with the new WSF AOP displayed in the list box.
>
> *Change Mode* Will update the WSF Facility Annual Operating Period
> with the d_last_update_timestamp and d_userid_code set to the current
> values. If no end_date was provided it will be set to NULL.

When successful, the WSF AOP will be updated in the database and
associated to the WSF. The water system facility's
d_last_update_timestamp will be updated to the current timestamp. The
page will close and return the user to the previous page with the
modified WSF AOP displayed in the list box.

**Cancel** Will close the WSF Annual Operating Period Maintenance page
and return the user to the Water System Facility Modification page
without saving any changes made to the AOP.

**Help** Will invoke online Help for this page.

####  Model Changes for Sampling Points

Add new entity Sampling Point Designation (TSASMPTD).
(R3019:A.4.2.2.5.a)

Description: A Sampling point may have several designations to indicate
certain characteristics about it. These designations can be
time-sensitive.

Attributes:

\*TSASMPTD_IS_Number (number, 7, mandatory) system generated as the next
highest number within a Sampling Point.

\*Type_Code (text, 10, mandatory) The Type of designation. Permitted
values will be retrieved from permitted values table where code name =
'SAMPTDESIG'

\*Effective_begin_date (date, optional) The effective begin date of the
designation.

\*Effective_end_date (date, optional) The last date of effectiveness for
the designation.

\*Description_text (text, 2000, optional, case sensitive, varchar) A
free-form text area.

\* d_initial_userid (text, 8, mandatory)

\* d_initial_timestamp (timestamp, mandatory)

\* d_last update_userid (text, 8, mandatory)

\* d_last update_timestamp (timestamp, mandatory)

Relationships:

> Each Sampling Point will sometimes (50%) have additional information
> recorded in one or more Sampling Point Designation (cascade).
>
> Each Sampling Point Designation always is additional information about
> one and only one Sampling Point (disassociation)

Identifier: TSASMPTD_IS_Number and relationship to Sampling Point.

-   New CODE table row for Sampling Point Designation. (R3019:4.2.2.5.b)

  -----------------------------------------------------------------------
  **Column Name**               **Value**
  ----------------------------- -----------------------------------------
  Code_Name                     SAMPTDESIG

  Cod_Characteristic            T

  Value_Length                  10

  Delete_Flag                   A

  Ownership_Code                ST

  D_Userid_Code                 SS2.0

  D_Last_Updt_Ts                1/1/2007

  Ref_Attribute_Name            TSASMPTD.type_code

  Description_of_Cod            The coded value for sampling point
                                designation
  -----------------------------------------------------------------------

-   New PERMITTED_VALUE table rows for SAMPTDESIG. (R3019:A.4.2.2.5.c)

  -----------------------------------------------------------------------
  **Column Name**               **Value**
  ----------------------------- -----------------------------------------
  Code_Name                     SAMPTDESIG

  Sequence_Number               *Incremented by +1 for each Text_Value
                                below.*

  Numeric_Value                 Null

  Date_Value                    Null

  Ref_Indicator                 Y

  Ownership_Code                ST

  D_Userid_Code                 SS2.0

  D_Last_Updt_Ts                1/1/2007
  -----------------------------------------------------------------------

Table of Text Values and Descriptions:

  ----------------------------- -----------------------------------------
  **Text_Value**                **Description**

  HIGH HAA                      High HAA

  HIGH TTHM                     High TTHM
  ----------------------------- -----------------------------------------

####  Water System Facility Sampling Point Maintenance List

The Water System Facility (WSF) Sampling Point Maintenance List (Exhibit
4-47) lists sampling point information. This page will be accessed via
the **Expand** button on the Water System Facility Modification page and
various **Go To** buttons on list and modification pages.

Five hundred (500) WSF Sampling Points will be presented without
subsequent user action. More results can be viewed by using the
**View/Next** menu item. A Sampling Point may be selected in the list
box by highlighting it.

  -------------------------------------- ----------------------------------------------------
  ![](media/image24.png){width="2.3in"   ![](media/image50.png){width="4.894444444444445in"
  height="6.6402777777777775in"}         height="3.8680555555555554in"}

  -------------------------------------- ----------------------------------------------------

[]{#__RefHeading___Toc139687370 .anchor}**Exhibit 4-47.** Water System
Facility Sampling Point Maintenance List

[Protected Fields:]{.underline}

*Number of rows*

*resulting from search*

*criteria entered:* The value in this protected field will show the
number of sampling points that are associated to the selected Water
System Facility.

*Number of rows*

*Displayed*: The value in this protected field will indicate the number
of sampling points available for viewing in the list box via the
vertical scroll bar. The list will be display the first 500 sampling
points. If the user chooses to view more sampling points than are
available via the vertical scroll bar, this will be allowed via the
**View/Next**, **View/Previous** menu items discussed later in this
section.

*Number of rows*

*selected:*

> The value in this protected field will indicate the number of sampling
> points selected in the viewing list box.

[Water System Group Box:]{.underline}

\[Water System\] No., Name, Federal Type, State Type, Federal Primary
Source.

[Water System Facility Group Box:]{.underline}

State Asgn ID, Type, Facility Name, Water Type, Local Name.

[List Columns:]{.underline}

Sampling Point, Type, Location, Activity Status, Source Water Type, LCR
Tier Level, LCR Tier Type.

[Default Sort Order:]{.underline}

Sampling Point, ascending.

[Menu Items:]{.underline}

**File**

> *Exit* Will close the page and return to the user to the invoking
> page.

**Edit**

*Add* Will present the Sampling Point Maintenance page in *Add* mode.

> This option will be available even if a row in the WSF Sampling Point
> Maintenance List box is selected.
>
> *Change* Will present the Sampling Point Maintenance page in *Change*
> mode.

This option will be available only if a row in the WSF Sampling Point
Maintenance List box is selected.

> A double-click on a list box row will react in the same way as
> **Edit/Change**.
>
> *Delete* This option will be available only if a row in the WSF
> Sampling Point Maintenance List box is selected.

The following edit checks will be made prior to the deletion:

-   If the Sampling Point is associated to a Waiver, the following error
    message will be presented: **This sampling point is associated with
    a Waiver and cannot be deleted.**

-   If the Sampling Point is associated to a Sample Summary, the
    following error message will be presented: **This sampling point is
    associated with a Sample Summary and cannot be deleted.**

-   If the Sampling Point is associated to a Violation, the following
    error message will be presented: **This sampling point is associated
    with a Violation and cannot be deleted.**

-   If the Sampling Point is associated to a Sample, the following error
    message will be presented: **This sampling point is associated with
    a Sample and cannot be deleted.**

-   If the Sampling Point is associated to a Sample Schedule
    Subschedule, the following error message will be presented: **This
    sampling point is associated with a Sample Schedule and cannot be
    deleted**

-   If the Sampling Point is associated to an MDBP Summary, the
    following error message will be presented: **This sampling point is
    associated with an MDBP Summary and cannot be deleted.**

-   If the Sampling Point is associated to a Sample Plan, the following
    error message will be presented: **This sampling point is associated
    with a Sample Plan and cannot be deleted.**

> Pressing **OK** on any of the error messages will close the dialog box
> and ignore the request to delete the Sampling Point. Processing will
> be interrupted. The Sampling Point association must be resolved before
> the user will be able to delete the Sampling Point.
>
> Once the edit checks have been successfully performed, the Delete
> Sampling Point confirmation dialog box (Exhibit 4-48) will be
> presented requiring the selection of **OK** or **Cancel**.
>
> ![](media/image51.png){width="5.996527777777778in"
> height="4.284027777777778in"}

[]{#__RefHeading___Toc139687371 .anchor}**Exhibit 4-48.** Delete
Sampling Point

> [Delete Sampling Point Buttons:]{.underline}
>
> **OK** Will delete the Sampling Point and sampling point history. The
> confirmation page will close and return the user to the WSF Sampling
> Point Maintenance List page with this sampling point removed from the
> list.
>
> **Cancel** Will abort the delete request and return the user to the
> WSF Sampling Point Maintenance List page with no modification.
>
> *Select* Will return user to the previous page (from which the WSF
> Sampling Point Maintenance List page was invoked), with the Sampling
> Point information from the selected row populated on the invoking
> page.

This option will be enabled only if the maintenance list was invoked as
a selection page and only when one or more rows is selected in the list
box.

**View**

> *Filter by* This option will open the standard filter parameter dialog
> box described in Chapter 1, allowing the user to filter out some of
> the records displayed on the list page by specifying a specific value
> for the filtering fields. Only rows that match the filtering criteria
> value will be displayed in the list.

**Note:** The number of rows displayed on the maintenance list page will
change to show the count of records resulting from the filter. Using
**View/Filter by** will enable **View/Refresh**.

> [Filter by Options:]{.underline}

Sampling Point, Sampling Point Type, \[Sampling Point\] Location,
Activity Status, Source Water Type, LCR Tier Level, and LCR Tier Type.

> *Next* The list box will list only 100 sampling points at a time. If
> more than 100 sampling points exist for the WSF, the next group of 100
> will be loaded into the list box when the **View/Next** menu item is
> selected.
>
> This option will be available only if more rows are available for
> display. Selecting this menu item will enable the **View/Previous**
> menu item.
>
> *Previous* If more than 100 sampling points were found and the user
> has requested to view the next 100 via the **View/Next** menu item,
> the **View/Previous** menu item will re-populate the list box with
> prior group of 100.
>
> Once the initial 100 sampling points are displayed, the
> **View/Previous** menu item will be disabled.
>
> *Refresh* Selecting **View/Refresh** will retrieve the unfiltered list
> (original search criteria).
>
> *Sort* Selecting this option will open the standard sort dialog box
> described in Chapter 1, allowing the user to modify the order of the
> displayed sampling points. Two levels of sort will be supported.
>
> [Sort Order Selections:]{.underline}

Sampling Point, \[Sampling Point\] Type, \[Sampling Point\] Location,
Activity Status, Source Water Type, LCR Tier Level, and LCR Tier Type.

**Help** Will invoke online Help for this page.

[Buttons]{.underline}:

**Menu Items** Will present the standard menu items dialog box.

**Scroll Buttons** Will scroll the list box in the direction of the
arrow displayed on the button.

####  Sampling Point Maintenance

The Sampling Point Maintenance page (Exhibit 4-49) can be invoked in
*Add* or *Change* mode from the WSF Sampling Point Maintenance List page
or the \[Water System\] Sampling Point Maintenance List page (the title
of the page will display *Add* or *Change* for clarity). This page will
allow the user to add or modify the information for one or more sampling
points. If the page is invoked in *Change* mode, the entry fields will
be pre-filled with values, which will be modifiable, unless noted
otherwise in the design.

**Note:** SDWIS/STATE will allow the user to change information about a
Sampling Point, even if it is linked to one or more samples.
*SDWIS/STATE allows this change without warning.* Before making a
significant change to an existing Sampling Point (such as changing the
Sampling Point, or Sampling Point Location), users should check with the
SDWIS/STATE Administrator.

[Protected Fields:]{.underline}

Record updated

By/on The User ID and the timestamp from the last time the record was
updated.

Record created

By/on The initial User ID and timestamp when the record was initially
added to the database.

[Water System Group Box:]{.underline}

\[Water System\] No., Name, Federal Type, State Type, Federal Primary
Source.

[Water System Facility Group Box:]{.underline}

State Asgn ID, Type, Facility Name, Water Type, Local Name.

[Entry Fields:]{.underline}

Note that the tab order is left to right, top to bottom, and includes
all entry fields and buttons unless otherwise noted.

Note that *Data Origin* field, which was available in SDWIS/STATE 8.0,
has been removed.

  ----------------------------------------------------- ----------------------------------------------------
  ![](media/image52.png){width="1.7847222222222223in"   ![](media/image53.png){width="3.995833333333333in"
  height="3.9819444444444443in"}                        height="3.8986111111111112in"}

  ----------------------------------------------------- ----------------------------------------------------

[]{#__RefHeading___Toc139687372 .anchor}**Exhibit 4-49.** Sampling Point
Maintenance

*Sampling Point* The unique code identifying a WSF sampling point.

The Sampling Point ID will be used in duplicate checking to ensure this
sampling point is unique within the selected WSF.

> Sampling Point will be a mandatory field.

*Location* A description of the address or other descriptive location of
a sampling point.

> In *Add mode* the software will default value the Location field with
> the first 40 characters of the WSF Name.
>
> Sampling Point Location will be an optional field.

*Note 1, Note 2,*

*Note 3* The three text fields, Note 1, Note 2, and Note 3 can be used
however desired. For example, the user may store an address, including
city, state, and zip code. One, two, or all three fields could be used
for this purpose. Another example of a possible use would be to record
the unique code of a sampling point that replaced the current Sampling
Point. The Note 1, Note 2, and Note 3 fields will each have a field
length of 40 characters.

> Note 1, Note 2, and Note 3 will be optional fields.

*Sampling Point*

*Type* The location or function type of the sampling point. The
selections available via the dropdown list will be:

> **Value Description**
>
> \<Spaces\> (Default)
>
> EP Entry Point
>
> FC First Customer
>
> LD Lowest Disinfectant Residual
>
> MD Midpoint in the distribution system
>
> MR Point of Maximum Retention
>
> RW Raw Water Source
>
> SR Source Water Point
>
> DS Distribution System
>
> PC Process Control
>
> UP Unit Process Control
>
> WS Water System Facility Control

Sampling Point Type will be an optional field.

*Source Water Type* The type of water source based on whether treatment
has taken place. The selections available via the dropdown list will be:

> **Value Description**

\<Spaces\> (Default)

> F Finished
>
> R Raw
>
> Source Water Type will be an optional field.

*Process Phase* Indicates the location the sample is drawn with respect
to treatment processes such as after (drawn after all treatment), before
(prior to any treatment), and during (drawn within the treatment
processes). The selections available via the dropdown list will be:

> **Value Description**
>
> \<Spaces\> (Default)
>
> A After
>
> B Before
>
> D During

Process Phase will be an optional field.

*Represents Distribution*

*System* Checkbox, that when checked, will indicate that the sampling
point is considered representative of the water quality throughout the
distribution system.

Represents Distribution System will be an optional field.

*Post Disinfection* Checkbox, that when checked, will indicate that the
sample was collected after a Disinfection process was applied.

Post Disinfection will be an optional field.

*UCMR*

*Sampling Point* This field is intended to enable a primacy agency to
record the UCMR Sampling Point that has been reported to EPA's SDWARS
database under the Unregulated Contaminant Monitoring Rule (UCMR).

> UCMR Sampling Point will be an optional field.

[Activity Status Group Box Entry Fields:]{.underline}

*Status* The current status of the sampling point. In *Add* mode, the
status will be defaulted to the WSF Status but can be changed. The
selections available via the dropdown list will be:

> **Value Description**

A Active

> I Inactive
>
> P Proposed

Activity Status will be a mandatory field.

> In change mode when the status is changed, the Status Date will be set
> to the current date and the following advisory will be presented: **As
> a result of status change, Status Date has been set to current
> date. ** Once the user presses **OK** on the advisory message the user
> will be returned to the Sampling Point Maintenance page. (B.4.2.2.7.a)

*Status Date* The date on which the current status went into effect
(i.e., proposed, active, or inactive). It will be defaulted to the
current date, but may be changed. In change mode, when the status is
changed the status date will be set to current date. The user can then
modify the value. (B.4.2.2.7.b)

> Activity Status Date will be a mandatory field. It cannot be after the
> current date.

*Comments* A free-form text field for explanation of why a sampling
point is in the current status.

Comments will be an optional field.

[Lead and Copper Group Box Entry Fields:]{.underline}

*Tier Level* The lead and copper rules establish three tier levels for
sampling sites. This field will allow the user to indicate the Lead and
Copper Tier level for the sampling point. The selections available, via
the dropdown list, will be:

> **Value Description**
>
> \<Spaces\> (Default)

Tier 1 For community water systems: Single Family\>1982: Single‑family
(or multiple-family under certain conditions) residence containing
copper pipe and lead solder installed after 1982 or lead pipes or are
served by a lead service line.

> For NTNC: Buildings containing copper pipe and lead solder installed
> after 1982 or lead pipe or are served by a lead service line.

Tier 2 For community water systems: Buildings\>1982: Buildings
(including multi‑family residences) containing copper pipe and lead
solder installed after 1982 or lead pipe or are served by a lead service
line.

For NTNC: Buildings containing copper pipe and lead solder installed
before 1983.

Tier 3 For community water systems: Single Family\<1983: Single‑family
residence containing copper pipe and lead solder installed before 1983.

> Non Tier Site does not satisfy any of the tier levels.
>
> Lead and Copper Tier Level will be an optional field.

*Tier Type* More than one type of building and plumbing combination can
qualify a site for a given tier level under the Lead and Copper Rule
(e.g., single family residence with copper plumbing and lead solder
installed after 1982 or a single family residence with lead pipe both
qualify as tier level one sites). This field specifies which of these
combinations qualified the given site for the tier level.  The
selections available via the dropdown list will be:

> **Value Description**
>
> \<Spaces\> (Default)
>
> CU\<83S Single family structure that contains copper pipes with lead
> solder installed before 1983.
>
> CU\>82S Single family structure that contains copper pipes with lead
> solder installed after 1982.
>
> LSLS Single family structure served by a lead service line.
>
> PbPS Single family structure containing lead pipes.
>
> NonTS Single family structure, non-tier.
>
> Cu\>82M Multiple family structure that contains copper pipes with lead
> solder installed after 1982.
>
> LSLM Multiple family structure served by a single lead line.
>
> PbPM Multiple family structure containing lead pipes.

NonTM Multiple family structure, non-tier.

> Cu\<83B Non-residential structure that contains copper pipes with lead
> solder installed before 1983. (B is for building)
>
> Cu\>82B Non-residential structure that contains copper pipes with lead
> solder installed after 1982.
>
> LSLB Non-residential structure served by a lead service line.
>
> PbPB Non-residential structure containing lead pipes.
>
> NonTB Non-residential structure, non-tier.

Lead and Copper Tier Type will be an optional field.

[Additional Designations List Box:]{.underline} (R3019:A.4.2.2.7.a)

Will list the Sampling Point Designations for this Sampling Point. (List
area defined at 100 rows.)

List Columns: Type, Begin Date, End Date.

Default Sort Order: Type ascending, begin date descending.

[Buttons:]{.underline}

\[Additional Designations\]

**Add** Will first process the Sampling Point Maintenance page as if the
**OK** button has been selected and then will present the Sampling Point
Designation Maintenance Page in add-mode. (R3019:A.4.2.2.7.b)

\[Additional Designations\]

**Change** Will first process the Sampling Point Maintenance page as if
the **OK** button has been selected and then will present the Sampling
Point Designation Maintenance Page in change-mode. Will remain disabled
until a row has been highlighted in the list area. (R3019:A.4.2.2.7.c)

\[Additional Designations\]

**Delete** Will present the delete confirmation prior to deleting the
Sampling Point Designation. When **OK** confirms the delete, the row
will be deleted. Will remain disabled until a row has been highlighted
in the list area. (R3019:A.4.2.2.7.d)

**OK** All field edits mentioned will be performed.

> If Sampling Point \[ID\] is not valued, the following error message
> will be presented: **Sampling Point must not be blank.**
>
> If Activity Status is not valued, the following error message will be
> presented: **Activity Status must not be blank.**

If Activity Status Date is not valued or is a future date, one of the
two following error messages will be invoked: **Activity Date must not
be blank.** or **Activity Date may not be after today's date.**

*Duplicate Check* The duplicate criteria for a sampling point is an
existing record with the sample sampling point identification code for
the same Water System Facility. If one is found, error message will be
presented: **This sampling point already exists for this WSF.** The
cursor will be in the Sampling Point field when the software returns the
user to the Sampling Point Maintenance page.

*Add mode* When all edits are successfully processed, the following
database activities will be performed:

> A sampling point record (TSASSMPT) will be created and associated to
> the water system facility. The d_initial_timestamp,
> d_last_update_timestamp, d_initial_userid and d_userid_code set to the
> current values.
>
> The page will close and return the user to the invoking page.

*Change Mode* The sampling point record will be modified if values have
been changed.

> The d_last_update_timestamp, and d_userid_code set to the current
> values.

A sampling point history record (TSASPHIS) of the current record will
also be created with a before image of the sampling point if any of the
following fields have changed value:

Sampling Point

> Sampling Point Location
>
> Sampling Point Type
>
> Activity Status
>
> Activity Status Date
>
> Activity Status Reason
>
> Lead & Copper Tier Level
>
> Lead & Copper Tier Type
>
> The page will close and return the user to the invoking page.

**Cancel** If no changes have been made to the enterable fields, the
page will close and return the user to the invoking page.

> If changes have been made, the standard Cancel Confirm dialog box will
> be presented.

**Help** Will invoke online Help for this page.

##### Sampling Point Designation Maintenance (R3019:A.4.2.2.7.1.a)

This page (Exhibit 4-49a) will maintain the Sampling Point Designations
from the Sampling Point Maintenance page.

  -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------
  ![](media/image52.png){width="1.7847222222222223in"
  height="3.9819444444444443in"}![](media/image54.png){width="3.9972222222222222in"
  height="3.7069444444444444in"}

  -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------

**Exhibit 4-49a.** Sampling Point Designation Maintenance

[Protected Fields:]{.underline}

Record updated

By/on The User ID and the timestamp from the last time the record was
updated.

Record created

By/on The initial User ID and timestamp when the record was initially
added to the database.

[Water System Group Box:]{.underline}

\[Water System\] No., Name, Federal Type, State Type, Federal Primary
Source.

[Water System Facility Group Box:]{.underline}

State Asgn ID, Type, Facility Name, Water Type, Local Name.

[Sampling Point Group Box:]{.underline}

Sampling Point Sampling Point ID, Location.

[Entry Fields:]{.underline}

*Type Code* The Type Code describing the designation. The list of
permitted values from the drop down will be retrieved from the TINPVAL
table with code_name of "SAMPTDESIG'.

Type Code will be a required field. This field will be protected in
change-mode.

*Effective Begin Date* The first date that the Sampling Point has this
designation.

Effective Begin Date will be an optional field. Future dates are
allowed.

*Effective End Date* The last date that the Sampling Point has this
designation.

Effective End Date will be an optional field.

If both begin date and end date are specified, the end date must be
after the begin date or the error message will be **End Date must be
after Begin Date.**

*Description* A scrollable free-form text area to record a detailed
description.

[Buttons]{.underline}

**OK** Will enforce the edits listed above.

*Add mode* Will create the Sampling Point Designation and associate it
to the Sampling Point. Will return to the Sampling Point Maintenance
page with this row displayed in the list area.

*Change mode* Will update the Sampling Point Designation and return to
the Sampling Point Maintenance page with this row updated in the list
area.

*Duplicate/Overlap*

*Check* If a sampling point already has a Sampling Point Designation
with the same Type Code value, the Effective Begin and End dates will be
used to ensure there is no overlap. Since the dates are optional, the
absence of both dates will result in the Type Code determining duplicity
and the record will be rejected with the message **A Designation of this
Type Code already exists for this Sampling Point.** If one or both dates
exist and there is a date overlap, the error message will be **A
Designation of same type overlaps dates** **for this Sampling Pt.**

**Cancel** Will discard any changes and return to the Sampling Point
Maintenance

> page.

**Help** Will present the online Help for this page.

####  River Reach Information

The River Reach Information page (Exhibit 4-50) is described below. This
page will be presented via the **River Reach Info** button on the Water
System Facility Modification page.

![](media/image55.png){width="5.553472222222222in"
height="2.5416666666666665in"}

[]{#__RefHeading___Toc139687374 .anchor}**Exhibit 4-50.** River Reach
Information

[River Reach Entry Fields:]{.underline}

Note that the tab order is left to right, top to bottom, and includes
all entry fields and buttons unless otherwise noted.

*USGS Hydrologic*

*Unit Code* A manual entry field, which will identify the U.S.
Geological Survey (USGS) Hydrologic Unit Code. The format is RRPPAACC,
where:

> RR A U.S. Resources Council (WRC) region.
>
> PP A WRC planning subregion.
>
> AA An 'n' accounting unit of the National Water Data Network.
>
> CC A cataloging unit of the USGS Catalog of Information on Water data.
>
> USGS Hydrologic Unit Code will be an optional field.

*STORET Extension*

*Hydro Unit Code* A manual entry field, which will identify the U.S. EPA
STORET system\'s Hydrologic Unit Code extension (format: SSS).
Acceptable river reach codes are defined by the U.S. EPA's STORET office
for use in their Water Quality System Reach File.

> STORET Extension Hydro Unit Code will be an optional field.

*Water Body Name* Will indicate the name of the river, stream, or body
of water for the river reach.

> Water Body Name will be an optional field.
>
> *On River Reach* A checkbox to indicate whether a source of water used
> by a water system is on a defined river reach. Checking this box,
> indicates "On," which implies that a surface source intake is located
> on a defined river reach; unchecked indicates "Off," which implies
> that the source of water is not located on a defined river reach, but
> is instead located within the area drained by the river reach. This
> checkbox will be default valued "Off" (unchecked).
>
> *River Reach Miles* If a surface source intake is on the river reach,
> the number of river reach miles defines an exact physical location of
> the intake. Reach miles are measured from the downstream end of the
> river reach.
>
> River Reach Miles will be an optional field.

[Buttons:]{.underline}

**OK** The software will retain entered values and return the user to
the Water System Facility Modification page. No database activity will
occur until the **OK** button is pressed on the Water System Facility
Modification page.

**Cancel** Will close the page and return the user to the Water System
Facility Modification page without retaining any values entered or
modified on the River Reach Information page.

**Help** Will invoke online Help for this page.

####  Model Changes Storage Facility

No Model changes are intended for this release.

#### Storage Facility Maintenance 

The Storage Facility Maintenance page (Exhibit 4-51) will allow the user
to add, delete, review, and update detailed information for a specific
storage facility. The user will flow to this page via the **More\>\>**
button on the Water System Facility Modification page when WFS type = ST
(Storage). If the storage facility exists in the database, entry fields
with existing data will be pre-filled, but will be modifiable.

  ----------------------------------------------------- -----------------------------------------------------
  ![](media/image45.png){width="1.5638888888888889in"   ![](media/image56.png){width="3.8048611111111112in"
  height="6.378472222222222in"}                         height="6.373611111111111in"}

  ----------------------------------------------------- -----------------------------------------------------

[]{#__RefHeading___Toc139687375 .anchor}**Exhibit 4-51.** Storage
Facility Maintenance

[Protected Fields:]{.underline}

Record updated

By/on The User ID and the timestamp from the last time the record was
updated.

Record created

By/on The initial User ID and timestamp when the record was initially
added to the database.

[Water System Group Box:]{.underline}

\[Water System\] No., Name, Federal Type, State Type, Federal Primary
Source.

[Water System Facility Group Box:]{.underline}

State Asgn ID, Facility Name, Water Type, Local Name.

[Water System Facility Group Box Entry Fields:]{.underline}

> Note that the tab order is left to right, top to bottom, and includes
> all entry fields and buttons unless otherwise noted.
>
> *FINDS No.* The number used by the EPA Facility Index System (FINDS)
> to identify the facility.
>
> FINDS No. will be an optional field.

*Constructed Date* The date the storage facility construction was
completed.

> Constructed Date will be an optional field. It may contain a future
> date.

*Physical Modification*

*Date* The user may value this field to indicate when physical changes
were made to the storage facility. A new record will be created in the
Water System Facility History table to save any changes to the storage
facility data when the user presses the **OK** button. Subsequent
changes to this field will trigger creation of another history record.

> Physical Modification Date will be an optional field. The date cannot
> be in the future. If it is, the following error message will be
> presented when the user tabs off the field: **Date may not be after
> today's date.**

*Directions* A free-form text field to provide directions or further
information about the storage facility.

> Directions will be an optional field.

[Pumps Group Box Entry Fields:]{.underline}

*Pump Type* Will indicate the type of pump. The first seven choices
displayed in the dropdown list are the choices delivered with the
software. Any options after the first seven are state-defined choices
controlled by the System Administrator. All options (seven delivered
with the software and any state-defined options) will be retrieved from
the TINPVALS table with code_name of "PUMPTYPE." Listed below are
descriptions of the preset system choices. The selections available via
the dropdown list will be:

> **Value Description**
>
> \<Spaces\>
>
> CF Centrifugal
>
> HP Hand pump
>
> JT Jet
>
> PD Positive displacement
>
> SC Screw
>
> SU Submersible
>
> VT Vertical turbine
>
> Pump Type will be an optional field.

*Description* A free-form text field where the user may enter additional
information regarding the type of pump used at the storage facility.

> Description will be an optional field.

[Storage Information Group Box Entry Fields:]{.underline}

*Storage Type* Will indicate the type of storage facility. The first
seven choices displayed in the dropdown list are the choices delivered
with the software. Any options after the first seven are state-defined
choices controlled by the System Administrator. All options (seven
delivered with the software and any state-defined options) will be
retrieved from the TINPVALS code name = "STORGTYPE." Listed below are
descriptions of the preset system choices:

> **Value Description**
>
> BL Bladder
>
> EL Elevated
>
> GR Ground
>
> HD Hydro pneumatic
>
> RS Reservoir
>
> ST Standpipe
>
> UN Underground
>
> UK Unknown
>
> Storage Type will be a mandatory field.

*Construction*

*Material* Will indicate the principal material used to construct the
water storage facility. The first nine choices displayed in the dropdown
list are the choices delivered with the software. Any options after the
first nine are state-defined choices controlled by the System
Administrator. All options (nine delivered with the software and any
state-defined options) will be retrieved from the TINPVALS code name =
"STGCONSMAT." Listed below are descriptions of the preset system
choices.

> **Value Description**
>
> \<Spaces\>
>
> AC Asbestos cement
>
> AS Asphalt
>
> CC Concrete
>
> CP Copper
>
> ER Earth
>
> FG Fiberglass
>
> PL Plastic
>
> ST Steel
>
> WD Wood
>
> Construction Material will be an optional field.

*Coating Type* Will indicate the type of coating applied to the interior
of a storage facility. The first eight choices displayed in the dropdown
list are the choices delivered with the software. Any options after the
first eight are state-defined choices controlled by the System
Administrator. All options (eight delivered with the software and any
state-defined options) will be retrieved from the TINPVALS code name =
"STGCOATTYP." Listed below are descriptions of the preset system
choices.

> **Value Description**
>
> \<Spaces\>
>
> AP Approved paint
>
> ER Epoxy resin
>
> FG Fiberglass
>
> GS Glass-lined steel
>
> GR Greased
>
> NP Not approved paint
>
> PL Plastic
>
> UN Unlined
>
> Coating Type will be an optional field.

*Comments* A free-form text field to enter comments about the storage
facility. May be used to indicate the principal current use of the
storage facility or the original purpose for its construction if the
storage facility is not currently in use.

[Flow Rates List Box]{.underline}

Will display the Flow Rates for the Storage Facility retrieved from the
WSF_FLOW_RATE table associated to the displayed Storage Facility. The
list box will display four rows of data, will display up to 50 rows of
data via the vertical scroll bar and there will be a statement
underneath the list box indicating how many rows are displayed from the
number available, up to 50.

[Flow Rates List Columns:]{.underline}

Type, Qty, UOM

[Flow Rates Default Sort:]{.underline}

Type, ascending.

[Flow Rates Buttons:]{.underline}

**Add** Will present the WSF Flow Rate Maintenance page in *Add* mode.

> This item will be enabled regardless of a Flow Rate selection having
> been made in the list area.

**Change** Will present the WSF Flow Rate Maintenance page in *Change*
mode.

> A double-click in the list box will react as if a single-click
> highlight and this button was selected.
>
> This button will be enabled only when a Flow Rate selection has been
> made in the list area.

**Delete** Will present the Delete Flow Rate confirmation dialog box,
Exhibit 4-52.

> This button will be enabled only when a Flow Rate selection has been
> made in the list area.

![](media/image57.png){width="4.123611111111111in"
height="3.3444444444444446in"}

[]{#__RefHeading___Toc139687376 .anchor}**Exhibit 4-52.** Delete Flow
Rate

> [Delete Flow Rate Buttons:]{.underline}
>
> **OK** Will delete the flow rate. The confirmation page will close and
> return the user to the Well Detail Facility Modification page with
> this flow rate removed from the Flow Rates list.
>
> **Cancel** Will abort the delete request and return the user to the
> Water System Facility Modification page with no modifications to the
> Flow Rates list.

[Measures List Box:]{.underline}

Will contain a scrollable list of Measures for the Storage Facility
retrieved from the WSF_MEASURES table associated to the displayed
Storage Facility. The list box will display four rows of data, will
display up to 50 rows of data via the vertical scroll bar and there will
be a statement underneath the list box indicating how many rows are
displayed from the number available.

[Measures List Columns:]{.underline}

Type, Qty, UOM

[Measures Default Sort:]{.underline}

Type, ascending.

[Measures Buttons:]{.underline}

**Add** Will present the WSF Measures Maintenance page in *Add* mode.

This item will be enabled regardless of a Measure selection having been
made in the list area.

**Change** Will present the WSF Measure Maintenance page in *Change*
mode.

> A double-click in the list box will react as if a single-click
> highlight and this button was selected.

This item will be enabled only when a Measure selection has been made in
the list area.

**Delete** Will present the Delete Measures confirmation dialog box,
Exhibit 4-53.

This item will be enabled only when a Measure selection has been made in
the list area.

![](media/image58.png){width="4.747916666666667in"
height="3.4229166666666666in"}

[]{#__RefHeading___Toc139687377 .anchor}**Exhibit 4-53.** Delete WSF
Measures

> [Delete Measures Buttons:]{.underline}
>
> **OK** Will delete the measure. The confirmation page will close and
> return the user to the Storage Facility Modification page with this
> measure removed from the Measures List box.
>
> **Cancel** Will abort the delete request and return the user to the
> Storage Facility Modification page with no modifications to the
> Measures List box.

[Indicators List Box]{.underline}:

Will contain a scrollable list of Indicators for the Storage Facility
retrieved from the WSF_INDICATORS table associated to the displayed
Storage Facility. The list box will display four rows of data, will
display up to 50 rows of data via the vertical scroll bar and there will
be a statement underneath the list box indicating how many rows are
displayed from the number available.

[Indicators List Columns:]{.underline}

Type, Value, Date.

[Indicators Default Sort:]{.underline}

Type, ascending.

[Indicators Buttons:]{.underline}

**Add** Will present the WSF Indicators Maintenance page in *Add* mode.

> This item will be enabled regardless of an Indicator selection having
> been made in the list area.

**Change** Will present the WSF Indicator Maintenance page in *Change*
mode.

> A double-click in the list box will react as if a single-click
> highlight and this button was selected.
>
> This item will be enabled only when an Indicator selection has been
> made in the list area.

**Delete** Will present the Delete Indicator confirmation dialog box
(Exhibit 4-54).

> This item will be enabled only when an Indicator selection has been
> made in the list area.
>
> [Delete Indicators Buttons:]{.underline}
>
> **OK** Will delete the indicator and update the water system facility.
> The confirmation page will close and return the user to the Storage
> Facility Modification page with this indicator removed from the
> Indicators List box.
>
> **Cancel** Will abort the delete request and return the user to the
> Storage Facility Modification page with no modifications to the
> Indicators List box.

![](media/image59.png){width="4.752083333333333in"
height="3.1840277777777777in"}

[]{#__RefHeading___Toc139687378 .anchor}**Exhibit 4-54.** Delete WSF
Indicators

[Buttons:]{.underline}

**OK** When edits are successful, the software will modify the Storage
table with the entered/modified values.

The page will close and return the user to the Water System Facility
Modification page.

**Cancel** If no changes have been made to the enterable fields, the
page will close and return the user to the Water System Facility
Modification page. If changes have been made, the standard Cancel
Confirm dialog box will be presented.

> **Note:** If the user added, modified, or deleted data via the Water
> System Facility Flow Rates, Measures, or Indicators Maintenance pages,
> using the **Cancel** button on this page will not reverse those
> changes.

**Help** Will invoke online Help for this page.

#### Model Changes for Wells

No Model changes are intended for this release.

#### Well Detail Maintenance

The Well Detail Maintenance page (Exhibit 4-55) is described below. The
Well Detail Maintenance page will allow the user to add, delete, review,
and update detailed information for a specific well. The user will flow
to this page via the **More\>\>** button on the Water System Facility
Modification page when WFS type = WL (Well). If the well exists in the
database, entry fields with existing data will be pre-filled, but will
be modifiable.

[Protected Fields:]{.underline}

Record updated

By/on The User ID and the timestamp from the last time the record was
updated.

Record created

By/on The initial User ID and timestamp when the record was initially
added to the database.

[Water System Group Box:]{.underline}

\[Water System\] No., Name, Federal Type, State Type, Federal Primary
Source.

[Water System Facility Group Box:]{.underline}

State Asgn ID, Facility Name, Water Type, Local Name.

  ----------------------------------------------------- -----------------------------------------------------
  ![](media/image45.png){width="1.7486111111111111in"   ![](media/image60.png){width="4.365277777777778in"
  height="8.25in"}                                      height="8.231944444444444in"}

  ----------------------------------------------------- -----------------------------------------------------

[]{#__RefHeading___Toc139687379 .anchor}**Exhibit 4-55.** Well Detail
Maintenance

[Water System Facility Group Box Entry Fields:]{.underline}

> Note that the tab order is left to right, top to bottom, and includes
> all entry fields and buttons unless otherwise noted.
>
> *FINDS No.* The number used by the EPA Facility Index System (FINDS)
> to identify the facility.
>
> FINDS No. will be an optional field.

*Constructed Date* The date the Well construction was completed.

> Constructed Date will be an optional field. It may contain a future
> date.

*Physical Modification*

*Date* The user may value this field to indicate when physical changes
were made to the Well. A new record will be created in the Water System
Facility History table to save any changes to the Well data when the
user presses the **OK** button. Subsequent changes to this field will
trigger creation of another history record.

> Physical Modification Date will be an optional field. The date cannot
> be in the future. If it is, the following error message will be
> presented when the user tabs off the field: **Date may not be after
> today's date.**

*Directions* A free-form text field to provide directions or further
information about the Well.

> Directions will be an optional field.

[SWAP Report Group Box Entry Fields:]{.underline}

*Status* User will be able to value this field to indicate status of the
Source Water Assessment Program (SWAP) Report. This program requires all
water systems to create an assessment of each untreated water source
(wells, intakes, springs, etc.). The selections available via the
dropdown list will be:

> **Value Description**
>
> \<Spaces\> (Default)
>
> Y Yes, completed.

N No, not completed.

> N/A Not required to be completed.
>
> REQ Requested
>
> REC Received
>
> UR Under Review
>
> DEN Denied
>
> DUE

SWAP Report Status will be an optional field.

*Status Date* Will allow the user to enter the current SWAP report
status date. Future dates will not be allowed.

> SWAP Report Status Date will be an optional field.

[Well Information Group Box Entry Fields:]{.underline}

*Well ID* A number assigned to a well by the state drinking water
program, water resources department, or other responsible organization.
The number provides a means of uniquely identifying each well and also
provides a means of linking all data associated with each well. For
example, if there are multiple casings in a single borehole, frequently
used for monitoring groundwater at different depths, each well casing
should have its own identification number.

A variety of conventions exist for uniquely identifying wells. Most
states have developed their own well identification systems. Data
providers may report numbers using these existing systems or in any
format they feel is most appropriate for their circumstances. The only
requirements for data reporting are that the identification number must
be associated with a particular known well, must be unique, and must
incorporate EPA\'s Facility Index System (FINDS) number if the well is
part of a facility regulated by EPA.

> Well ID will be an optional field.

*Driller Name* The user will be able to value this field by either
manually valuing the field or using the **Go To** button.

> If the user uses the presses the **Go To** button with no value in the
> Driller Name field, the Legal Entity Maintenance List page will be
> presented, in single-select mode sorted by name. The value for
> Driller_Name may be any type of Legal Entity, so when the Legal Entity
> Maintenance list is presented, it will not be filtered by type. If the
> user presses the **Go To** button with a partial value in the Driller
> Name field, the software will present the Legal Entity Maintenance
> List page in single-select mode, sorted by name with the closest
> matching name listed first. Once a legal entity has been selected, the
> user will be returned to the Well Detail Maintenance page with the
> Driller Name field populated.
>
> If Driller Name is provided via the **Go To** button or with the user
> manually entering a name, the software will check to see if the
> driller name provided is a valid legal entity. If the name provided is
> a valid LEGAL_ENTITY, an association will be made between Legal Entity
> and Well. If not, the software will populate the field Driller_Name in
> TINWELL with the name.
>
> The WELL Driller_name field and association to the LEGAL_ENTITY are
> mutually exclusive meaning only one situation can be valued at a given
> point in time. On display of the Well, the Driller Name field will be
> retrieved from the Driller_Name column on WELL if it contains a value.
> If it does not contain a value, the driller association between a WELL
> and LEGAL_ENTITY will be checked. If one exists, the name will be
> presented from the LEGAL_ENTITY name field. This mutual exclusivity
> will be maintained when the Driller Name is changed or removed in
> change-mode.
>
> Driller Name will be an optional field.

*Drilling Method* Will indicate the type of drilling method. Any options
after the first seven choices are state-defined choices controlled by
the System Administrator. All options, (seven delivered with the
software and any state defined options), will be retrieved from TINPVALS
code name = "WLDRILMETH." Listed below are descriptions of the preset
system choices.

> **Value Description**
>
> \<Spaces\>
>
> DR Drilled
>
> HG Horizontal gallery
>
> OE Open end
>
> OH Open hole
>
> OT Other
>
> SP Sand point
>
> WL Walled
>
> Drilling Method will be an optional field.

*Well Cap* A free-form text field where the user may enter the type of
material used (such as concrete slab) to cover or seal the well.

> Well Cap will be an optional field.

Inches Above Grade

The number of inches

that the Well Cap sits

above the grade. Inches Above Grade will be an optional field.

*Observation Date* The date on which the depth of the water level was
determined.

> Water Level Observation Date will be an optional field.

[Pumps Group Box Entry Fields:]{.underline}

*Pump Type* Will indicate the type of pump. The first seven choices
displayed in the dropdown list are the choices delivered with the
software. Any options after the first seven are state-defined choices
controlled by the System Administrator. All options (seven delivered
with the software and any state-defined options) will be retrieved from
the TINPVALS table with table_name of "PUMPTYPE." Listed below are
descriptions of the preset system choices. The selections available via
the dropdown list will be:

> **Value Description**
>
> \<Spaces\>
>
> CF Centrifugal
>
> HP Hand pump
>
> JT Jet
>
> PD Positive displacement
>
> SC Screw
>
> SU Submersible
>
> VT Vertical turbine
>
> Pump Type will be an optional field.

*Description* A free-form text field where the user may enter additional
information regarding the type of pump used at the well.

> Description will be an optional field.

[Casings List Box:]{.underline}

Casings will display the list of existing casings for the well in
single-select mode. Casings can be added, deleted, or information for
existing casings can be modified on the page launched from this list.
The list box will display all existing casings for the well, up to 50
rows. If more than three well casings exist, the vertical scroll bar
will be enabled.

[List Columns:]{.underline}

Casing ID, Type, Diameter, Top Measure, Top Measure Unit, Top Measure
Relativity, Bottom Depth Measure, Bottom Depth Measure Unit.

[Default Sort Order:]{.underline}

Relativity, Top Measure, Casing Type, ascending.

[Casings Buttons:]{.underline}

**Add** Will present the Well Casing Maintenance page, where details of
the well casing can be added. This option will be enabled regardless of
a selection in the list box.

> **Note:** Pressing this button will signal the software to perform the
> same edits and processing as the **OK** button prior to presenting the
> destination page.

**Change** Will present the Well Casing Maintenance page where details
of the well casings can modified.

A double-click in the list box will react as if a single-click highlight
and this button was selected.

> This button will be enabled only when a Well Casing selection has been
> made in the list area.

**Delete** Will present the Well Casing Delete dialog box (Exhibit 4-56)
requiring selection of **OK** or **Cancel**. This button will be enabled
only if a row in the Well Casing list box is selected.

> [Delete Well Casing Buttons:]{.underline}
>
> **OK** Will delete the well casing and the last_update_timestamp and
> d_userid_code of the Well Casing will be updated to the current
> values. The user will be returned to the Well Detail Maintenance page.
> The deleted Well Casing will not display in the list box.
>
> **Cancel** Will abort the delete request and return the user to the
> Well Detail Maintenance page with no modifications to the Well Casing
> list.

![](media/image61.png){width="5.824305555555555in"
height="3.897222222222222in"}

[]{#__RefHeading___Toc139687380 .anchor}**Exhibit 4-56.** Delete Well
Casing

[Screens List Box:]{.underline}

Screens will display the list of existing screens for the well, sorted
by Screen ID, in single-select mode. Well Screens can be added, deleted,
or information for existing screens can be modified on the page launched
from this list. The list box will display all existing well screens (up
to 50). If more than six well screens exist, the vertical scroll bar
will be enabled.

[List Columns:]{.underline}

Screen ID, Screen Type, Aquifer Type, Confinement Ind., Depth to Top,
USGS Aquifer Name.

[Default Sort Order:]{.underline}

Screen ID, ascending.

[Screens Buttons:]{.underline}

**Add** Will present the Well Screen Maintenance page, where details of
the well screens can be added. This option will be enabled regardless of
a selection in the list box.

> **Note:** Pressing this button will signal the software to perform the
> same edits and processing as the **OK** button prior to presenting the
> destination page.

**Change** Will present the Well Screen Maintenance page, where details
of the well screens can be modified.

> A double-click in the list box will react as if a single-click
> highlight and this button was selected.
>
> This button will be enabled only when a Well Screen selection has been
> made in the list area.

**Delete** Will present the Delete Well Screen dialog box (Exhibit
4-57), requiring selection of **OK** or **Cancel**. This button will be
enabled only if a row in the Well Screen list box is selected.

> [Delete Well Screen Buttons:]{.underline}
>
> **OK** Will delete the screen. The confirmation page will close and
> return the user to the Well Detail Facility Modification page with
> this screen removed from the Well Screen list.
>
> **Cancel** Will abort the delete request and return the user to the
> Water System Facility Modification page with no modifications to the
> Well Screen list.

![](media/image62.png){width="5.995138888888889in" height="5.45in"}

[]{#__RefHeading___Toc139687381 .anchor}**Exhibit 4-57.** Delete Well
Screen

[Flow Rates List Box]{.underline}

Will display the Flow Rates for the Well retrieved from the
WSF_FLOW_RATE table associated to the displayed Well. The list box will
display four rows of data, will display up to 50 rows of data via the
vertical scroll bar.

[Flow Rates List Columns:]{.underline}

Type, Qty, UOM.

[Flow Rates Default Sort:]{.underline}

Type, ascending.

[Flow Rates Buttons:]{.underline}

**Add** Will present the WSF Flow Rate Maintenance page in *Add* mode.

> This item will be enabled regardless of a Flow Rate selection having
> been made in the list area.

**Change** Will present the WSF Flow Rate Maintenance page in *Change*
mode.

> A double-click in the list box will react as if a single-click
> highlight and this button was selected.
>
> This button will be enabled only when a Flow Rate selection has been
> made in the list area.

**Delete** Will present the Delete Flow Rate confirmation dialog box.

> This button will be enabled only when a Flow Rate selection has been
> made in the list area.

[Measures List Box]{.underline}:

Will contain a scrollable list of Measures for the Well retrieved from
the WSF_MEASURES table associated to the displayed Well. The list box
will display four rows of data, will display up to 50 rows of data via
the vertical scroll bar.

[Measures List Columns:]{.underline}

Type, Qty, UOM.

[Measures Default Sort:]{.underline}

Type, ascending.

[Measures Buttons:]{.underline}

**Add** Will present the WSF Measures Maintenance page in *Add* mode.

This item will be enabled regardless of a Measure selection having been
made in the list area.

**Change** Will present the WSF Measure Maintenance page in *Change*
mode.

A double-click in the list box will react as if a single-click highlight
and this button was selected.

This item will be enabled only when a Measure selection has been made in
the list area.

**Delete** Will present the Delete Measures confirmation dialog box.

This item will be enabled only when a Measure selection has been made in
the list area.

[Indicators List Box]{.underline}:

Will contain a scrollable list of Indicators for the Well retrieved from
the WSF_INDICATORS table associated to the displayed Well. The list box
will display four rows of data, will display up to 50 rows of data via
the vertical scroll

[Indicators List Columns:]{.underline}

Type, Value, Date.

[Indicators Default Sort:]{.underline}

Type, ascending.

[Indicators Buttons:]{.underline}

**Add** Will present the WSF Indicators Maintenance page in *Add* mode.

> This item will be enabled regardless of an Indicator selection having
> been made in the list area.

**Change** Will present the WSF Indicator Maintenance page in *Change*
mode.

> A double-click in the list box will react as if a single-click
> highlight and this button was selected.
>
> This item will be enabled only when an Indicator selection has been
> made in the list area.

**Delete** Will present the Delete Indicator confirmation dialog box.

> This item will be enabled only when an Indicator selection has been
> made in the list area.

*Comments* A free-form text field to enter comments about the well. May
be used to indicate the principal current use of the well or the
original purpose for its construction if the well is not currently in
use.

Well uses vary depending on several factors such as geographic location
and the regional economy. For example, agricultural states may need to
include several specific well uses in their database (e.g., irrigation,
livestock, irrigation return flow, and agricultural drainage wells) that
a regional authority dominated by heavy industry might not.

> Comments will be an optional field.

[Buttons:]{.underline}

**OK** The following edits will be performed:

> *Add mode* When edits are successful, a new row will be added to
> TINWELL. The d_initial_timestamp, d_last_update_timestamp, and
> d_userid_code for TINWELL will be set to the current values. The
> d_last_inventory_update_timestamp on the water system will be set to
> the current timestamp.
>
> *Change mode* When edits are successful, the row will be updated with
> the modifications. The d_last_update_timestamp, and d_userid_code for
> TINWELL will be set to the current values. The
> d_last_inventory_update_timestamp on the water system will be set to
> the current timestamp.

**Cancel** If no changes have been made to the enterable fields, the
page will close and return the user to the Water System Facility
Modification page.

> **Note:** If the user added, modified, or deleted data via the Water
> System Facility Flow Rates, Measures, Indicators Maintenance pages or
> the Well Screens or Well Casings Maintenance, using the **Cancel**
> button on this page will not reverse those changes.
>
> If changes have been made, the standard Cancel Confirm dialog box will
> be presented.

**Help** Will invoke online Help for this page.

#### Model Changes for Well Casing

No Model changes are intended for this release.

#### Well Casing Maintenance

The Well Casing Maintenance (Exhibit 4-58) page is described below. This
page will be accessed via the \[Casings\] **Add** or **Change** buttons
on the Well Detail Maintenance page in *Add* or *Change* mode - the
title of the page will display *Add* or *Change* for clarity.

[Protected Fields:]{.underline}

Record updated

By/on The User ID and the timestamp from the last time the record was
updated.

Record created

By/on The initial User ID and timestamp when the record was initially
added to the database.

[Water System Group Box:]{.underline}

\[Water System\] No., Name, Federal Type, State Type, Federal Primary
Source.

[Water System Facility Group Box:]{.underline}

State Asgn ID, Facility Name, Well ID, Local Name.

[Well Casing Group Box Entry Fields:]{.underline}

Note that the tab order is left to right, top to bottom, and includes
all entry fields and buttons unless otherwise noted.

*Casing ID* The unique ID code of the casing.

> Casing ID will be a mandatory field.

  ----------------------------------------------------- ------------------------------------------------------
  ![](media/image45.png){width="1.7486111111111111in"   ![](media/image63.png){width="5.220833333333333in"
  height="4.41875in"}                                   height="4.461111111111111in"}

  ----------------------------------------------------- ------------------------------------------------------

[]{#__RefHeading___Toc139687382 .anchor}**Exhibit 4-58.** Well Casing
Maintenance

*Casing Type* The type of casing material, such as brick,
asbestos‑cement, concrete, galvanized iron, wrought iron, other metal,
PVC or plastic, rock or stone, steel, tile, coated steel, wood, or
other.

> Casing Type will be an optional field.

*Casing Diameter*

*in Inches* The diameter of the casing interior, measured in inches.

> Casing Diameter in Inches will be an optional field.

*Top Measure* The depth of the casing top from the surface.

Top Measure will be an optional field.

*UOM* Field to enter the unit of measure type for the Top Measure. The
selections available via the dropdown list will be:

> **Value Description**

\<Spaces\>

IN Inches (Default)

FT Feet

Top Measure UOM will be a mandatory field if Top Measure is valued.

*Top Measure*

*Relativity* Field to indicate if top measure value is from above or
below the ground surface. The selections available via the dropdown list
will be:

> **Value Description**
>
> \<Spaces\>
>
> AB Above Surface (Default)
>
> BL Below Surface
>
> AS At Surface
>
> Top Measure Relativity will be a mandatory field if Top Measure is
> valued.

*Bottom*

*Measure* The depth of the casing bottom from the ground surface.

> Bottom Measure will be an optional field.

*UOM* Field to enter the unit of measure type for Bottom Measure. The
selections available via the dropdown list will be:

> **Value Description**

\<Spaces\>

FT Feet (Default)

IN Inches

Bottom Measure UOM will be a mandatory field if Bottom Measure is
valued.

[Buttons:]{.underline}

**OK** The following edits will be performed:

> If Casing ID is not valued, the following error message will be
> presented: **Well Casing ID is mandatory.**
>
> The Well Casing ID must be unique within other Well Casings for this
> Well. When it is not, the following error message will be presented:
> **Duplicate Casing with same Casing ID found.**
>
> If Top Measure is valued, and Top Measure Relativity is not, the
> following error message will be presented: **Relativity must be valued
> with Top Measure.**
>
> If Top Measure is valued, and \[Top Measure\] UOM is not, the
> following error message will be presented: **UOM must be valued with
> Top Measure.**
>
> If Bottom \[Depth\] Measure is valued, and \[Bottom \[Depth\]
> Measure\] UOM is not, the following error message will be presented:
> **UOM must be valued with Bottom Measure.**
>
> *Add mode*

When edits are successful, a new row will be added to Well Casing
(TINWLCASE). The d_initial_timestamp, d_last_update_timestamp, and
d_userid_code will be set to the current values.

> *Change mode*
>
> When edits are successful, all modifications to the value will be
> updated. The d_last_update_timestamp, and d_userid_code for Well
> Casing will be set to the current values.
>
> The page will close and return the user to the Well Detail Maintenance
> page.

**Cancel** If no changes have been made to the enterable fields, the
page will close and return the user to the Well Detail Maintenance page.

> If changes have been made, the standard Cancel Confirm dialog box will
> be presented.

**Help** Will invoke online Help for this page.

#### Model Changes for Well Screens

No Model changes are intended for this release.

#### Well Screen Maintenance

Exhibit 4-59 depicts the Well Screen Maintenance page. This page will be
accessed via the \[Screens\] **Add** or **Change** buttons on the Well
Detail Maintenance page in *Add* or *Change* mode - the title of the
page will display *Add* or *Change* for clarity.

[Protected Fields:]{.underline}

Record updated

By/on The User ID and the timestamp from the last time the record was
updated.

Record created

By/on The initial User ID and timestamp when the record was initially
added to the database.

  ----------------------------------------------------- -----------------------------------------------------
  ![](media/image45.png){width="1.8756944444444446in"   ![](media/image64.png){width="5.223611111111111in"
  height="5.127083333333333in"}                         height="5.129861111111111in"}

  ----------------------------------------------------- -----------------------------------------------------

[]{#__RefHeading___Toc139687383 .anchor}**Exhibit 4-59.** Well Screen
Maintenance

[Water System Group Box:]{.underline}

\[Water System\] No., Name, Federal Type, State Type, Federal Primary
Source.

[Water System Facility Group Box:]{.underline}

State Asgn ID, Facility Name, Well ID, Local Name.

[Well Screen Group Box Entry Fields:]{.underline}

*Well Screen ID* The unique ID code of the screen.

> Well Screen ID will be a mandatory field, but may be system generated.
> If left blank, a dialog box (Exhibit 4-60) with the following advisory
> message will be invoked when the user tabs off the field: **The
> 'Screen ID' is mandatory.**
>
> ![](media/image65.png){width="5.84375in"
> height="2.3645833333333335in"}

[]{#__RefHeading___Toc139687384 .anchor}**Exhibit 4-60.** Assign Well
Screen ID

[Assign Well Screen ID Buttons:]{.underline}

> **OK** Pressing this button will signal the software to generate a
> unique well screen ID by generating the next numerically higher ID
> number from the existing screens for this Well. Once the software has
> generated a number, the user will be returned to the Well Screen
> Maintenance page with the system-generated Well Screen ID displayed.
>
> **Cancel** Pressing this button will return the user to Well Screen
> Maintenance page where the user will be able to manually enter a value
> for the Well Screen ID.
>
> The Well Screen ID must be unique within other Well Screens for this
> Well.

*State Aquifer Code* A code value, assigned by the state or responsible
organization, which uniquely identifies an aquifer.

> State Aquifer Code will be an optional field.

*Aquifer Type* A code value categorizing the aquifer. The first seven
choices displayed in the dropdown list are the choices delivered with
the software. Any options after the first six are state-defined choices
controlled by the System Administrator. All options (seven delivered
with the software and any state-defined options) will be retrieved from
the TINPVALS table with table_name of "AQUIFTYPE." The following are
descriptions of the preset system choices.

> **Value Description**

\<Spaces\>

> A Artesian
>
> C Confined
>
> F Flowing artesian
>
> U Not identified
>
> P Perched
>
> UC Unconfined

Aquifer Type will be an optional field.

> When the Aquifer Type is valued with Confined, the software will
> "check" the Confinement Indicator checkbox and protect the entry from
> change.
>
> When the Aquifer Type is valued with Unconfined, the software will
> "uncheck" the Confinement Indicator checkbox and protect it from
> entry.
>
> Aquifer Type will be an optional field.

*USGS Aquifer Code* The standard USGS identification code for the
aquifer.

USGS Aquifer Code will be an optional field.

*USGS Aquifer Name* The standard name assigned by the USGS.

USGS Aquifer Name will be an optional field.

*Depth to Screen*

*Top in Ft* The depth in feet from the measuring point to the top of the
screen. The measuring point will be recorded as the WSF Altitude.

Depth to Screen Top in Ft will be an optional field. When this field is
valued, it must be less than or equal to the Depth to Screen Bottom in
Ft value.

*Screen Type* A free-form text field to specify the type of covering
used to filter the water flowing through the well opening (e.g., sand
point, slotted, none).

> Screen Type will be an optional field.

*Depth to Screen*

*Bottom in Ft* The depth in feet from the measuring point to the bottom
of the screen. The measuring point will be recorded as the WSF Altitude.

Depth to Screen Bottom in Ft will be an optional field.

*Lithology Type* The description of the aquifer lithology, such as
limestone, gravel, sand, or sandstone.

Lithology Type will be an optional field.

*Depth To Top*

*of Aquifer in Ft* The depth in feet to the top of the water-bearing
formation from which the well draws water.

> Depth To Top of Aquifer in Ft will be an optional field.

*Confinement*

*Indicator* When checked, this box will indicate that the well screen is
confined. This checkbox will be default valued (checked), and protected
from change when Aquifer Type field is valued with Confined.

> Confinement Indicator will be an optional field.

*Aquifer Thickness*

*in Ft* The estimated thickness in feet of the water-bearing formation,
even if the entire formation is not saturated.

> Aquifer Thickness in Ft will be an optional field.

[Buttons:]{.underline}

**OK** The following edits will be performed:

> The Well Screen ID must be unique within other Well Screens for this
> Well. When it is not, the following error message will be presented:
> **Duplicate Screen with same Screen ID found.**
>
> If Depth to Screen Top in Ft is not less than or equal to the Depth to
> Screen Bottom in Ft value, the following error message will be
> presented: **Depth to Screen Bottom must be greater than Depth to
> Screen Top.**
>
> *Add mode* When edits are successful, a new row will be added to Well
> Screen (TINSCRN). The d_initial_timestamp, d_initial_userid,
> d_last_update_timestamp, and d_userid_code for TINSCRN will be set to
> the current values.
>
> *Change mode* When edits are successful, the values modified will be
> changed. The d_last_update_timestamp, and d_userid_code for TINSCRN
> will be set to the current values.

**Cancel** If no changes have been made to the enterable fields, the
page will close and return the user to the Well Detail Maintenance page.

> If changes have been made, the standard Cancel Confirm dialog box will
> be presented.

**Help** Will invoke online Help for this page.

[Tab Sequence:]{.underline}

Well Screen ID, State Aquifer Code, USGS Aquifer Code, Depth To Screen
Top in Ft, Depth To Screen Bottom in Ft, Depth To Top of Aquifer in Ft.
Aquifer Thickness in Ft, Aquifer Type, USGS Aquifer Name, Screen Type,
Lithology Type, Confinement Indicator, **OK**, **Cancel**, **Help**.

#### Other Water System Facility Maintenance

The Other Water System Facility Maintenance page (Exhibit 4-61) will
allow the user to add, delete, review, and update detailed information
for a specific WSF that is not a Well, Storage, Treatment Plant,
Consecutive Connection, and Non-Piped facility. The user will flow to
this page via the **More\>\>** button on the Water System Facility
Modification page. If the WSF exists in the database, entry fields with
existing data will be pre-filled, but will be modifiable.

[Protected Fields:]{.underline}

Record updated

By/on The User ID and the timestamp from the last time the record was
updated.

Record created

By/on The initial User ID and timestamp when the record was initially
added to the database.

  ----------------------------------------------------- ----------------------------------------------------
  ![](media/image45.png){width="1.7486111111111111in"   ![](media/image66.png){width="4.274305555555555in"
  height="7.125in"}                                     height="7.120138888888889in"}

  ----------------------------------------------------- ----------------------------------------------------

[]{#__RefHeading___Toc139687385 .anchor}**Exhibit 4-61.** Other Water
System Facility Maintenance

[Water System Group Box:]{.underline}

\[Water System\] No., Name, Federal Type, State Type, Federal Primary
Source.

[Water System Facility Group Box:]{.underline}

State Asgn ID, Type, Facility Name, Water Type, Local Name.

[Entry Fields:]{.underline}

Note that the tab order is left to right, top to bottom, and includes
all entry fields and buttons unless otherwise noted.

> [Water System Facility Group Box Entry Fields:]{.underline}
>
> *FINDS No.* The number used by the EPA Facility Index System (FINDS)
> to identify the facility.
>
> FINDS No. will be an optional field.

*Constructed Date* The date the water system facility construction was
completed.

> Constructed Date will be an optional field. It may contain a future
> date.

*Physical Modification*

*Date* The user may value this field to indicate when physical changes
were made to the WSF. Upon pressing the **OK** button, a new record will
be created in the Water System Facility History table to save any
changes to the facility data. Subsequent changes to this field will
trigger creation of another history record.

> Physical Modification Date will be an optional field. Date cannot be
> in the future. If it is, the following error message will be presented
> when the user tabs off the field: **Date may not be after today's
> date.**

*Directions* A free-form text field to provide directions or further
information about the WSF.

> Directions will be an optional field.

[SWAP Report Group Box Entry Fields:]{.underline}

*Status* User will be able to value this field to indicate status of the
Source Water Assessment Program (SWAP) Report. This program requires all
water systems to create an assessment of each untreated water source
(wells, intakes, springs, etc.). The selections available via the
dropdown list will be:

> **Value Description**
>
> \<Spaces\> (Default)
>
> Y Yes, completed.

N No, not completed.

> N/A Not required to be completed.
>
> REQ Requested
>
> REC Received
>
> UR Under Review
>
> DEN Denied
>
> DUE

SWAP Report Status will be an optional field.

*Status Date* Will allow the user to enter the current SWAP report
status date. Future dates will not be allowed. If it is, the following
error message will be presented when the user tabs off the field: **Date
may not be after today's date.**

> SWAP Report Status Date will be an optional field.

[Pumps Group Box Entry Fields:]{.underline}

*Pump Type* Will indicate the type of pump. The first seven choices
displayed in the dropdown list are the choices delivered with the
software. Any options after the first seven are state-defined choices
controlled by the System Administrator. All options (seven delivered
with the software and any state-defined options) will be retrieved from
the TINPVALS table with table_name of "PUMPTYPE" Listed below are
descriptions of the preset system choices. The selections available via
the dropdown list will be:

> **Value Description**
>
> \<Spaces\>
>
> CF Centrifugal
>
> HP Hand pump
>
> JT Jet
>
> PD Positive displacement
>
> SC Screw
>
> SU Submersible
>
> VT Vertical turbine
>
> Pump Type will be an optional field.

*Description* A free-form text field where the user may enter additional
information regarding the type of pump used at the Water System
Facility.

> Description will be an optional field.

[Flow Rates List Box]{.underline}

Will display the Flow Rates for the Water System Facility retrieved from
the WSF_FLOW_RATE table associated to the displayed Storage Facility.
The list box will display four rows of data, will display up to 50 rows
of data via the vertical scroll bar and there will be a statement
underneath the list box indicating how many rows are displayed from the
number available.

[Flow Rates List Columns:]{.underline}

Type, Qty, UOM.

[Flow Rates Default Sort:]{.underline}

Type, ascending.

[Flow Rates Buttons:]{.underline}

**Add** Will present the WSF Flow Rate Maintenance page in *Add* mode.

> This item will be enabled regardless of a Flow Rate selection having
> been made in the list area.

**Change** Will present the WSF Flow Rate Maintenance page in *Change*
mode.

> A double-click in the list box will react as if a single-click
> highlight and this button was selected.
>
> This button will be enabled only when a Flow Rate selection has been
> made in the list area.

**Delete** Will present the Delete Flow Rate confirmation dialog box.

[Measures List Box:]{.underline}

Will contain a scrollable list of Measures for the Water System Facility
retrieved from the WSF_MEASURES table associated to the displayed Water
System Facility. The list box will display four rows of data, will
display up to 50 rows of data via the vertical scroll bar and there will
be a statement underneath the list box indicating how many rows are
displayed from the number available.

[Measures List Columns:]{.underline}

Type, Qty, UOM.

[Measures Default Sort:]{.underline}

Type, ascending.

[Measures Buttons:]{.underline}

**Add** Will present the WSF Measures Maintenance page in *Add* mode.

This item will be enabled regardless of a Measure selection having been
made in the list area.

**Change** Will present the WSF Measure Maintenance page in *Change*
mode.

> A double-click in the list box will react as if a single-click
> highlight and this button was selected.

This item will be enabled only when a Measure selection has been made in
the list area.

**Delete** Will present the Delete Measures confirmation dialog box.

This item will be enabled only when a Measure selection has been made in
the list area.

[Indicators List Box:]{.underline}

Will contain a scrollable list of Indicators for the Water System
Facility retrieved from the WSF_INDICATORS table associated to the
displayed Water System Facility. The list box will display four rows of
data, will display up to 50 rows of data via the vertical scroll bar and
there will be a statement underneath the list box indicating how many
rows are displayed from the number available.

[Indicators List Columns:]{.underline}

Type, Value, Date.

[Indicators Default Sort:]{.underline}

Type, ascending.

[Indicators Buttons:]{.underline}

**Add** Will present the WSF Indicators Maintenance page in *Add* mode.

> This item will be enabled regardless of an Indicator selection having
> been made in the list area.

**Change** Will present the WSF Indicator Maintenance page in *Change*
mode.

> A double-click in the list box will react as if a single-click
> highlight and this button was selected.
>
> This item will be enabled only when an Indicator selection has been
> made in the list area.

**Delete** Will present the Delete Indicator confirmation dialog box.

[Buttons:]{.underline}

**OK** When edits are successful, the TINWSF row will be modified. The
d_last_update_timestamp, and d_userid_code for water system facility
will be set to the current values

The page will close and return the user to the Water System Facility
Modification page.

**Cance**l If no changes have been made to the enterable fields, the
page will close and return the user to the Water System Facility
Modification page. If changes have been made, the standard Cancel
Confirm dialog box will be presented.

> **Note:** If the user added, modified, or deleted data via the Water
> System Facility Flow Rates, Measures, or Indicators Maintenance pages,
> using the **Cancel** button on this page will not reverse those
> changes.

**Help** Will invoke online Help for this page.

**Scroll**

**Buttons** Will scroll the list box in the direction of the arrow
displayed on the button.

#### Model Changes for Water System Facility Flow Rates

No Model changes are intended for this release.

#### Water System Facility Flow Rates Maintenance

The Water System Facility Flow Rates Maintenance page (Exhibit 4-62) is
described below. This page will allow the user to add or modify flow
rate information for the water system facility. The user will access
this page via the **Add** or **Change** buttons on the Water System
Facility Flow Rates List box. Users will be presented this page in
either *Add* or *Change* mode - the title of the page will display *Add*
or *Change* for clarity. In *Add* mode, the user will value the fields.
In *Change* mode, the fields will be populated with the information from
the selected row. In *Change* mode, some fields will be modifiable;
others will be protected from change. See description below for details.

[Protected Fields:]{.underline}

Record updated

By/on The User ID and the timestamp from the last time the record was
updated.

Record created

By/on The initial User ID and timestamp when the record was initially
added to the database.

[Water System Group Box:]{.underline}

\[Water System\] No., Name, Federal Type, State Type, Federal Primary
Source.

[Water System Facility Group Box:]{.underline}

State Asgn ID, Type, \[Facility\] Name, Water Type, Local Name.

  ----------------------------------------------------- -----------------------------------------------------
  ![](media/image24.png){width="1.7020833333333334in"   ![](media/image67.png){width="5.31875in"
  height="4.907638888888889in"}                         height="3.365972222222222in"}

  ----------------------------------------------------- -----------------------------------------------------

[]{#__RefHeading___Toc139687386 .anchor}**Exhibit 4-62.** Water System
Facility Flow Rate Maintenance

[Entry Fields]{.underline}:

Note that the tab order is left to right, top to bottom, and includes
all entry fields and buttons unless otherwise noted.

*Type* A type code describing the Flow Rate. The permitted values
available in the dropdown list are retrieved from the permitted values
table.

> When the page is access from the Other Water System Facility
> Maintenance page, the list is retrieved from the permitted value table
> where code_name = "WSFFLORTYP".
>
> When the page is access from the Well Maintenance page, the list is
> retrieved from the permitted value table where code_name =
> "WSFFLORTYP" concatenated with the permitted values where code_name =
> "WELFLORTYP".
>
> When the page is access from the Storage Facility Maintenance page,
> the list is retrieved from the permitted value table where code_name =
> "WSFFLORTYP" concatenated with the permitted values where code_name =
> "STGFLORTYP".
>
> When the page is access from the Treatment Plant Maintenance page, the
> list is retrieved from the permitted value table where code_name =
> "WSFFLORTYP" concatenated with the permitted values where code_name =
> "TPFLORTYP".
>
> When the page is access from the Receiving Facility/Water Purchase
> Maintenance page, the list is retrieved from the permitted value table
> where code_name = "WSFFLORTYP" concatenated with the permitted values
> where code_name = "PURFLORTYP".
>
> Flow Rate Type will be a mandatory field. It will be protected from
> modification in change mode.

*Quantity* The numeric quantification of the Flow Rate.

> Flow Rate Quantity will be an optional field.

*UOM* The unit of measure for the Flow Rate Quantity. Permitted values
available in the dropdown are:

> **Value Description**
>
> ACF Acres feet
>
> GAL Gallons
>
> GPD Gallons per Day
>
> GPM Gallons per Min
>
> MGL Million Gallons
>
> MGD Million Gallons per Day
>
> MGM Million Gallons per Min
>
> GPMPF Gallons per Minute per Foot
>
> MGDPF2 Million Gallons per Day per Square Feet
>
> LBPF2 pounds (LB) per Square Feet
>
> RPM Revolutions per Minute
>
> LBPMG pounds (LB) per Million Gallons
>
> Flow Rate UOM will be an optional field.

[Buttons]{.underline}:

**OK** If Flow Rate Type is not valued, the following error message will
be presented: **Flow Rate Type may not be left blank.**

If a Quantity is provided, the UOM may not be left blank. If it is the
error message will be **UOM is required with provided Quantity.**

*Duplicate Check* If the water system facility already has a Flow Rate
with a matching Type value, the following error message will be
presented: **Flow Rate of this type already exists for this Water System
Facility.**

Add Mode Will create a WSF_FLOW_RATE record associated to the water
system facility. The page will close and return to the invoking
maintenance page.

Change Mode Will update the existing WSF_FLOW_RATE record. The page will
close and return to the invoking maintenance page.

**Cancel** If changes have been made the standard cancel confirmation
dialog will be presented. If no changes were made the page will close
and return to the invoking page.

**Help** Will invoke online help for this page.

#### Model Changes for Water System Facility Measures

No Model changes are intended for this release.

#### Water System Facility Measures Maintenance

The Water System Facility Measures Maintenance page (Exhibit 4-63) is
described below. This page will allow the user to add or modify measure
information for the water system facility. The user will access this
page via the **Add** or **Change** buttons on the Water System Facility
Measures List box. Users will be presented this page in either *Add* or
*Change* mode - the title of the page will display *Add* or *Change* for
clarity. In *Add* mode, the user will value the fields. In *Change*
mode, the fields will be populated with the information from the
selected row. In *Change* mode, some fields will be modifiable; others
will be protected from change. See description below for details.

[Protected Fields:]{.underline}

Record updated

By/on The User ID and the timestamp from the last time the record was
updated.

Record created

By/on The initial User ID and timestamp when the record was initially
added to the database.

[Water System Group Box:]{.underline}

\[Water System\] No., Name, Federal Type, State Type, Federal Primary
Source.

[Water System Facility Group Box:]{.underline}

State Asgn ID, Type, \[Facility\] Name, Water Type, Local Name.

  ---------------------------------------------------- --------------------------------------------------------
  ![](media/image24.png){width="1.479861111111111in"   ![](media/image68.png){width="5.991666666666666in"
  height="4.489583333333333in"}                        height="4.0125in"}

  ---------------------------------------------------- --------------------------------------------------------

[]{#__RefHeading___Toc139687387 .anchor}**Exhibit 4-63.** Water System
Facility Measures Maintenance

[Entry Fields]{.underline}:

Note that the tab order is left to right, top to bottom, and includes
all entry fields and buttons unless otherwise noted.

*Type* A type code describing the Measure. The permitted values
available in the dropdown list are retrieved from the permitted values
table.

> When the page is access from the Other Water System Facility
> Maintenance page, the list is retrieved from the permitted value table
> where code_name = "WSFMSRTYP".
>
> When the page is access from the Well Maintenance page, the list is
> retrieved from the permitted value table where code_name = "WSFMSRTYP"
> concatenated with the permitted values where code_name = "WELMSRTYP".
>
> When the page is access from the Storage Facility Maintenance page,
> the list is retrieved from the permitted value table where code_name =
> "WSFMSRTYP" concatenated with the permitted values where code_name =
> "STGMSRTYP".
>
> When the page is access from the Treatment Plant Maintenance page, the
> list is retrieved from the permitted value table where code_name =
> "WSFMSRTYP" concatenated with the permitted values where code_name =
> "TPMSRTYP".
>
> When the page is access from the Receiving Facility/Water Purchase
> Maintenance page, the list is retrieved from the permitted value table
> where code_name = "WSFMSRTYP" concatenated with the permitted values
> where code_name = "PURMSRTYP".
>
> Water System Facility Measure Type will be a mandatory field. It will
> be protected from modification in change mode.

*Quantity* The numeric quantification of the Measure.

Water System Facility Measure Quantity will be an optional field.

*UOM* The unit of measure for the Measure quantity. Permitted values
available in the dropdown are:

> **Value Description**
>
> IN Inches
>
> FT Feet
>
> YD Yards
>
> MIL Miles
>
> CC Cubic Centimeters
>
> CFT Cubic Feet
>
> GAL Gallons
>
> ACF Acre Feet
>
> HRS Hours
>
> MIN Minutes
>
> SEC Seconds
>
> MML Mg\*Min/L
>
> Water System Facility Measure Quantity UOM will be an optional field.

[Buttons:]{.underline}

**OK** If Water System Facility Measure Type is not valued, the
following error message will be presented: **Measure Type may not be
left blank.**

If a Quantity is provided, the UOM may not be left blank. If it is the
error message will be **UOM is required with provided Quantity.**

*Duplicate Check* If the water system facility already has a WSF_MEASURE
with a matching Type value, the following error message will be
presented: **Measure of this type already exists for this Water System
Facility.**

> *Add Mode* Will create a WSF_MEASURE record associated to the water
> system facility. The page will close and return to the invoking
> maintenance page.
>
> *Change*
>
> *Mode* Will update the existing WSF_MEASURE record. The page will
> close and return to the invoking maintenance page.

**Cancel** If changes have been made the standard cancel confirmation
dialog will be presented. If no changes were made the page will close
and return to the invoking page.

**Help** Will invoke online help for this page.

#### Model Changes for Water System Facility Indicators

> No Model changes are intended for this release.

#### Water System Facility Indicators Maintenance

Exhibit 4-64 depicts the Water System Facility Indicators Maintenance
page. This page will allow the user to add or modify indicators for the
water system facility. The user will access this page via the **Add** or
**Change** buttons on the Water System Facility Indicators List box.
Users will be presented this page in either *Add* or *Change* mode - the
title of the page will display *Add* or *Change* for clarity. In *Add*
mode, the user will value the fields. In *Change* mode, the fields will
be populated with the information from the selected row. In *Change*
mode, some fields will be modifiable; others will be protected from
change. See description below for details.

[Protected Fields:]{.underline}

Record updated

By/on The User ID and the timestamp from the last time the record was
updated.

Record created

By/on The initial User ID and timestamp when the record was initially
added to the database.

[Water System Group Box:]{.underline}

\[Water System\] No., Name, Federal Type, State Type, Federal Primary
Source.

[Water System Facility Group Box:]{.underline}

State Asgn ID, Type, Facility Name, Water Type, Local Name.

  ----------------------------------------------------- --------------------------------------------------------
  ![](media/image24.png){width="1.3770833333333334in"   ![](media/image69.png){width="5.375in"
  height="3.984027777777778in"}                         height="3.513888888888889in"}

  ----------------------------------------------------- --------------------------------------------------------

[]{#__RefHeading___Toc139687388 .anchor}**Exhibit 4-64.** Water System
Facility Indicator Maintenance

[Entry Fields]{.underline}:

Note that the tab order is left to right, top to bottom, and includes
all entry fields and buttons unless otherwise noted.

*Type* A type code describing the Indicator. The permitted values
available in the dropdown list are retrieved from the permitted values
table.

> When the page is access from the Other Water System Facility
> Maintenance page, the list is retrieved from the permitted value table
> where code_name = "WSFINDTYP".
>
> When the page is access from the Well Maintenance page, the list is
> retrieved from the permitted value table where code_name = "WSFINDTYP"
> concatenated with the permitted values where code_name = "WELINDTYP".
>
> When the page is access from the Storage Facility Maintenance page,
> the list is retrieved from the permitted value table where code_name =
> "WSFINDTYP" concatenated with the permitted values where code_name =
> "STGINDTYP".
>
> When the page is access from the Treatment Plant Maintenance page, the
> list is retrieved from the permitted value table where code_name =
> "WSFINDTYP" concatenated with the permitted values where code_name =
> "TPINDTYP".
>
> When the page is access from the Receiving Facility/Water Purchase
> Maintenance page, the list is retrieved from the permitted value table
> where code_name = "WSFINDTYP" concatenated with the permitted values
> where code_name = "PURINDTYP".
>
> Water System Facility Indicator Type will be a mandatory field. It
> will be protected from modification in *Change* mode.

*Value* The value of the Indicator. Permitted values available in the
dropdown are:

> **Value Description**

YES

> NO
>
> UNK Unknown
>
> AVBL Available
>
> NOABL Not Available
>
> POOR
>
> AVG Average
>
> SUPR Superior
>
> PRFCT Perfect
>
> ADQTE Adequate
>
> INSFT Insufficient
>
> Water System Facility Indicator Value will be an optional field.

*Date* The date associated to the indicator.

> Date will be an optional field.

[Buttons]{.underline}:

**OK** If neither Water System Facility Indicator Type nor Water System
Facility Indicator Date has a value, the following error message will be
presented: **Indicator requires either a Value or a Date.**

*Duplicate Check* If the water system facility already has a
WSF_INDICATOR with a matching Type value, the error message will be
**Indicator of this type already exists for this Water System
Facility.**

> *Add Mode* Will create a WSF_INDICATOR record associated to the water
> system facility. The page will close and return to the invoking
> maintenance page.
>
> *Change*
>
> *Mode* Will update the existing WSF_INDICATOR record. The page will
> close and return to the invoking maintenance page.

**Cancel** If changes have been made the standard cancel confirmation
dialog will be presented. If no changes were made the page will close
and return to the invoking page.

**Help** Will invoke online help for this page.

#### Model Changes for Water System Facility Security

> No Model changes are intended for this release.

#### Water System Facility Security Maintenance List

The Water System Facility Security Maintenance List page (Exhibit 4-65)
will display a list of security assessments made of the selected
facility. Users can add a new assessment or modify an existing one. This
page is accessed via the **Facility Security** button on the Water
System Facility Modification page. In addition, this page will serve as
a Selection List page in single-select mode when accessed from other
pages.

One hundred (100) security assessments will be presented without
subsequent user action. More results can be viewed by using the
**View/Next** menu item. A security assessment may be selected in the
list box by highlighting it.

  ----------------------------------------------------- -----------------------------------------------------
  ![](media/image45.png){width="1.8756944444444446in"   ![](media/image70.png){width="4.7243055555555555in"
  height="4.811111111111111in"}                         height="4.352777777777778in"}

  ----------------------------------------------------- -----------------------------------------------------

[]{#__RefHeading___Toc139687389 .anchor}**Exhibit 4-65.** Water System
Facility Security Maintenance List

[Protected Fields:]{.underline}

*Number of rows*

*resulting from search*

*criteria entered:* The value in this protected field will show the
number of Water System Security records that are associated to the
selected Water System Facility.

*Number of rows*

*displayed*: The value in this protected field will indicate the number
of security assessment records available for viewing in the list box via
the vertical scroll bar. The list will display the first 100 security
assessments. If the user wants to view more security assessments than
are available via the vertical scroll bar, the user will need to use the
**View/Next**, **View/Previous** menu items discussed later in this
section.

[Water System Group Box:]{.underline}

\[Water System\] No., Name, Federal Type, State Type, Federal Primary
Source.

[Water System Facility Group Box:]{.underline}

State Asgn ID, Type, Facility Name, Water Type, Local Name.

[List Columns:]{.underline}

Security Status, Security Status Date.

[Default Sort Order:]{.underline}

Security Status Date, descending.

[Menu Items:]{.underline}

**File**

*Exit* Will return the user to the invoking page.

**Edit**

*Add* Will present the Water System Facility Security Maintenance page
in *Add* mode.

> This option will be available even if a row in the Water System
> Facility Security Maintenance List page is selected.
>
> *Change* Will present the Water System Facility Security Maintenance
> page in *Change* mode.

This option will be available only if a row in the Water System Facility
Security Maintenance List page is selected.

A double-click on a list box row will react like **Edit/Change**.

> *Select* Will return user to the previous page (from which the Water
> System Facility Security Maintenance List page was invoked), with the
> Water System Facility Security information from the selected row
> populated on the invoking page.
>
> This option will be enabled only if the Water System Facility Security
> Maintenance List was invoked as a selection page and only when one or
> more rows are selected in the list box.

*Delete* Will present the Delete Security Status Record confirmation
dialog box (Exhibit 4-66), requiring the selection of **OK** or
**Cancel**.

![](media/image71.png){width="4.875694444444444in"
height="3.6694444444444443in"}

[]{#__RefHeading___Toc139687390 .anchor}**Exhibit 4-66.** Delete
Security Status Record

> [Delete Security Status Record Buttons:]{.underline}
>
> **OK** Will remove the Water System Facility Security record from the
> database, close the confirmation dialog box, and return the user to
> the maintenance list.
>
> **Cancel** Will close the confirmation dialog box and return the user
> to the maintenance list.
>
> This option will be available only if a row in the Water System
> Facility Security Maintenance List box is selected.

**View**

> *Filter by*
>
> This option will open the Standard Filter Parameter dialog box
> described in Chapter 1, allowing the user to filter out some of the
> records displayed on the list page by specifying a specific value for
> the filtering fields. Only rows that match the filtering criteria
> value will be displayed in the list

**Note:** The number of rows displayed on the maintenance list page will
change to show the count of records resulting from the filter. Using
**View/Filter by** will enable **View/Refresh**.

> [Filter by Options:]{.underline}
>
> Security Status, Security Status Date.
>
> *Next* If more than 100 Water System Security records exist for the
> Water System Facility, the next group of 100 will be loaded into the
> list box when the **View/Next** menu item is selected.
>
> This option will be available only if more rows are available for
> display. Selecting this menu item will enable the **View/Previous**
> menu item.

*Previous* If more than 100 Water System Security records were found and
the user has requested to view the next 100 via the **View/Next** menu
item, the **View/Previous** menu item will re-populate the list box with
prior group of 100.

Once the initial 100 Water System Security records are displayed, the
**View/Previous** menu item will be disabled.

*Refresh* Selecting **View/Refresh** will retrieve the unfiltered list
(original search criteria).

> *Sort* Selecting this option will open the Standard Sort dialog box
> described in Chapter 1, allowing the user to modify the order of the
> displayed Water System Security records. Two levels of sort will be
> supported.
>
> [Sort Order Selections:]{.underline}

Security Status, Security Status Date

**Help** Will invoke online Help for this page.

#### Water System Facility Security Maintenance

Exhibit 4-67 depicts the Water System Facility Security Maintenance.
This page will allow the user to add, delete, or modify security
information for the water system facility. The user will access this
page via the **Edit/Add or Change** menu item on the Water System
Facility Security Maintenance List page. Users will be presented this
page in either *Add* or *Change* mode - the title of the page will
display *Add* or *Change* for clarity. In *Add* mode, the user will
value the fields. In *Change* mode, the fields will be populated with
the information from the selected row, but the user will be able to
modify the information.

  ----------------------------------------------------- ----------------------------------------------------
  ![](media/image45.png){width="1.8756944444444446in"   ![](media/image72.png){width="4.717361111111111in"
  height="4.811111111111111in"}                         height="3.829861111111111in"}

  ----------------------------------------------------- ----------------------------------------------------

[]{#__RefHeading___Toc139687391 .anchor}**Exhibit 4-67.** Water System
Facility Security Maintenance

[Protected Fields:]{.underline}

Record updated

By/on The User ID and the timestamp from the last time the record was
updated.

Record created

By/on The initial User ID and timestamp when the record was initially
added to the database.

[Water System Group Box:]{.underline}

\[Water System\] No., Name, Federal Type, State Type, Federal Primary
Source.

[Water System Facility Group Box:]{.underline}

State Asgn ID, Type, Facility Name, Water Type, Local Name.

[Entry Fields:]{.underline}

Note that the tab order is left to right, top to bottom, and includes
all entry fields and buttons unless otherwise noted.

*Security Status* Entry field to select the status of the security for
the WSF. The selections available via the dropdown list will be:

> **Value Description**

\<Spaces\> (Default)

A Assessed

U Unassessed

S Secure

NS Not Secure

> Security Status will be an optional field.

*Security Status*

*Date* The date on which the security status was determined.

> Security Status Date will be a mandatory field if Security Status is
> valued. Security Status Date cannot be in the future.

*Assessor* The name of the person who completed the assessment. The user
will be able to value this field by manually entering a name in the
field. The software will not verify that the name exists in the database
as a legal entity. The software will accept the value and associate it
to the WSF in the Water System Facility Security table (TINWSFSC),
field: Assessor.

Assessor will be an optional field.

*Assessment Date* The date the security assessment was made.

> Assessment Date will be an optional field. Assessment date cannot be
> in the future.

*Comment* A free-form text field to enter comments or other information
about the security record.

[Buttons:]{.underline}

**OK** All field edits mentioned will be performed.

If Security Status is valued, but Security Status Date is blank, the
following error message will be presented: **Security Status Date must
be valued.**

If the Security Status Date is valued with a future date, the following
error message will be presented: **Security Status Date may not be after
today's date.**

If the Assessment Date is valued with a future date, the following error
message will be presented: **Assessed Date may not be after today's
date.**

*Add mode* If no fields are valued, the following error message will be
presented: **At least one Security field should contain data, use CANCEL
button to close page.**

> When edits are successful, a new Facility Security row will be created
> with the d_initial_timestamp, d_last_updated_timestamp,
> d_initial_userid, and d_userid_code set to current values. The page
> will close and the user will be returned to the Water System Facility
> Security Maintenance List page with the new Water System Facility
> Security record displayed in the list box.

*Change Mode* When edits are successful, a Facility Security row will be
updated and the d_last_update_timestamp and d_userid_code attributes
will be updated with the current values. The page will close, the user
will be returned to the Water System Facility Security Maintenance List
page with updated Facility Security information displayed the list box.

> The d_last_update_timestamp, and d_userid_code of the Water System
> will be not updated in either mode. The d_last_update_timestamp, and
> d_userid_code of the Water System Facility will not be updated.

**Cancel** If no changes have been made to the enterable fields, the
page will close and return the user to the Water System Facility
Security Maintenance List page. If changes have been made, the standard
Cancel Confirm dialog box will be presented.

**Help** Will invoke online Help for this page.

#### Model Changes for Water System Facility Flows

No Model changes are intended for this release.

#### Water System Facility Flows Maintenance List

The Water System Facility Flows Maintenance List (Exhibit 4-68) will
allow the user to maintain information on WSF flows. The list box will
display all existing flows between WSFs for the selected water system.
This page will be accessed via the **Flow** button on the Water System
Modification page. One thousand (1000) WSF Flows are presented without
subsequent user action. More results can be viewed by using the
**View/Next** menu item. A WSF Flow may be selected in the list box by
highlighting it.

[Protected Fields:]{.underline}

*Number of rows*

*resulting from search*

*criteria entered:* The value in this protected field will show the
number of WSF flows that are associated to the selected water system.

*Number of rows*

*displayed*: The value in this protected field will indicate the number
of WSF flows available for viewing in the list box via the vertical
scroll bar. The list will display the first 1000 WSF flows. If the user
chooses to view more WSF flows than are available via the vertical
scroll bar, this will be allowed via the **View/Next**,
**View/Previous** menu items discussed later in this section.

  -------------------------------------- ----------------------------------------------------
  ![](media/image24.png){width="2.3in"   ![](media/image73.png){width="4.530555555555556in"
  height="6.6402777777777775in"}         height="3.770138888888889in"}

  -------------------------------------- ----------------------------------------------------

[]{#__RefHeading___Toc139687392 .anchor}**Exhibit 4-68.** Water System
Facility Flows Maintenance List

[Water System Group Box Protected Fields:]{.underline}

\[Water System\] No., Name, Federal Type, State Type, Federal Primary
Source.

List Columns:

Train \[ID\], Sequence \[ID\], Process, \[Supplying Facility\] Type,
\[Supplying Facility\] WSF State Asgn ID, \[Supplying Facility\] Name,
\[Receiving Facility\] Type, \[Receiving Facility\] WSF State Asgn ID,
\[Receiving Facility\] Name, Quantity.

[Default Sort Order:]{.underline}

Train ID, ascending; Sequence ID, ascending; Supplying Facility WSF
State Asgn ID, ascending; Receiving Facility WSF State Asgn ID,
ascending.

[Menu Items]{.underline}

**File**

*Exit* Will return the user to the invoking page.

**Edit**

*Add* Will present the Water System Facility Flows Maintenance page.
This option will be available even if a row in the list box area is
selected.

*Change* Will present the Water System Facility Flows Maintenance page.
A double-click on a list box item will respond as the **Edit/Change**
menu item.

> This option will only be available if a row in the list is
> highlighted.
>
> *Delete* Will present the Delete WSF Flow confirmation dialog box
>
> (Exhibit 4-69) requiring a selection of **OK** or **Cancel**.
>
> [Delete WSF Flow Buttons:]{.underline}
>
> **OK** Will remove the WSF Flow from the database, close the
> confirmation dialog box and return the user to the maintenance list.
> The flow list will be refreshed.
>
> **Cancel** Will close the confirmation dialog box and return the user
> to the maintenance list.
>
> This option will be available only if a row in the list is selected.

![](media/image74.png){width="5.71875in" height="5.145833333333333in"}

[]{#__RefHeading___Toc139687393 .anchor}**Exhibit 4-69.** Delete WSF
Flow

**View**

> *Filter by*
>
> This option will open the standard filter parameter dialog box
> described in Chapter 1, allowing the user to filter out some of the
> records displayed on the list page by specifying a specific value for
> the filtering fields. Only rows that match the filtering criteria
> value will be displayed in the list.

**Note:** The number of rows displayed on the maintenance list page will
change to show the count of records resulting from the filter. Using
**View/Filter by** will enable **View/Refresh**.

> [Filter by Options:]{.underline}
>
> Train ID, Sequence ID, Supplying Facility Type, Supplying Facility WSF
> State Asgn ID, Supplying Facility Name, Receiving Facility Type,
> Receiving Facility WSF State Asgn ID, Receiving Facility Name
>
> *Next* If more than 1000 WSF flows exist for the water system, the
> next group of 1000 will be loaded into the list box when the
> **View/Next** menu item is selected.
>
> This option will be available only if more rows are available for
> display. Selecting this menu item will enable the **View/Previous**
> menu item.

*Previous* If more than 1000 WSF flows were found and the user has
requested to view the next 1000 via the **View/Next** menu item, the
**View/Previous** menu item will re-populate the list box with prior
group of 1000.

Once the initial 1000 WSF flows are displayed, the **View/Previous**
menu item will be disabled.

*Refresh* Will return the unfiltered list. It will only be enabled when
the **View/Filter** **by** has been applied to the list area.

> *Sort* Selecting this option will open the standard sort dialog box
> described in Chapter 1. Three levels of sort will be supported.
>
> [Sort Order Selections:]{.underline}

Train ID, Sequence ID, Supplying Facility Type, Supplying Facility WSF
State Asgn ID, Supplying Facility Name, Receiving Facility Type,
Receiving Facility WSF State Asgn ID, Receiving Facility Name

**Help** Will invoke online Help for this page.

[Buttons]{.underline}:

**Menu Items** Will present the standard menu items dialog box.

**Scroll Buttons** Will scroll the list box in the direction of the
arrow displayed on the button.

#### Water System Facility Flows Maintenance

The Water System Facility Flows Maintenance page (Exhibit 4-70) will
allow the user to enter flow train, sequence, volume, and connection
information with the intent of establishing a flow between two selected
water system facilities. The user will flow to this page via the Water
System Facility Flows Maintenance List page. Users will be presented
this page in either *Add* or *Change* mode - the title of the page will
display *Add* or *Change* for clarity. In *Add* mode, the user will
value the fields. In *Change* mode, the fields will be populated with
the information from the selected row but the user will be able to
modify the information unless designated otherwise in the design below.

![](media/image75.png){width="4.895138888888889in"
height="3.7284722222222224in"}

[]{#__RefHeading___Toc139687394 .anchor}**Exhibit 4-70.** Water System
Facility Flows Maintenance

[Protected Fields:]{.underline}

Record updated

By/on The User ID and the timestamp from the last time the record was
updated.

Record created

By/on The initial User ID and timestamp when the record was initially
added to the database.

[Water System Group Box:]{.underline}

\[Water System\] No., Name, Federal Type, State Type, Federal Primary
Source.

[Supplying Facility Group Box:]{.underline}

In *Add* mode, this box will display the Facility Type, State Asgn ID
and Name of all facilities of the selected Water System in ascending
State Asgn ID order. One facility can be highlighted in this group box
as the supplying facility.

In *Change* mode, this box will display Facility Type, State Asgn ID,
and Name of the supplying facility. In *Change* mode, this box will be
protected.

[Receiving Facility Group Box:]{.underline}

In *Add* mode, this box will display the Facility Type, State Asgn ID,
and Name of all facilities of the selected Water System in ascending
State Asgn ID order. One facility can be highlighted in this group box
as the receiving facility.

In *Change* mode, this box will display Facility Type, State Asgn ID,
and Name of the receiving facility. In *Change* mode, this box will be
protected.

[Entry Fields:]{.underline}

Note that the tab order is left to right, top to bottom, and includes
all entry fields and buttons unless otherwise noted.

*Train ID* A user may manually enter up to a five -character
alphanumeric value into this field to identify a flow. For example,
Train ID *T1* could be the name for four WSF flows that are part of the
same train.

> Train ID will be an optional field.

*Sequence*

*ID* A user may manually enter up to a five -character alphanumeric
value in this field to identify the sequence of the flow in a Train.
Expanding the above example, Train ID *T1* could consist of three WSF
Flows involving four WSFs: WSFa, WSFb, WSFc, and WSFd. The sequence
could be: Sequence 1: WSFa flows to WSFb, Sequence 2: WSFb flows to
WSFc, and Sequence 3: WSFc flows to WSFd.

Sequence ID will be an optional field.

In the listed example, the Train ID and Sequence ID would be saved to
the database in the Facility Flow Table (TINWSFF). The Train ID/Sequence
ID attributes would be populated with T1/1, T1/2, T1/3, and T1/4,
respectively.

*Process Water*

*Type* A System Administrator-controlled value for the description of
the water flowing between units or facilities. For example, a user could
use this to indicate "raw" water in one flow and "treated" water in the
next or "potable" water in one flow and "backwash" in another. The
selections will be available using a dropdown field showing values
stored in the TINPVALS table with Code name = "WSFFPWTYPE."

> Process Water Type will be an optional field.

*Quantity* A whole number (up to 11 integers) that when combined with
UOM, records the amount of water that flows through the WSF connections.

> Quantity will be an optional field.

*UOM* Will specify the unit of measurement that represents the Quantity
field. The selections available via the dropdown list will be:

> **Value Description**
>
> \<Spaces\>(Default)
>
> G Gallons
>
> GPD Gallons per Day
>
> GPM Gallons per Minute
>
> UOM will be a mandatory field if Quantity is valued.

*Connection*

*Date* The date of connection of one WSF to another.

> Connection Date will be an optional field. The date may be a future
> date.

*Connection*

*Type* Will indicate the type of connection between the WSFs.
Connections will be either direct or indirect. The selections available
via the dropdown list will be:

> **Value Description**
>
> \<Spaces\> (Default)
>
> I Direct - A direct physical connection between two water system
>
> facilities.
>
> D Indirect - An indirect connection between two WSFs (e.g., water is
> trucked from one WSF to another).
>
> Connection Type will be an optional field.

*Disconnection*

*Date* The date one WSF was disconnected from another.

> Disconnection Date will be an optional field, but when provided, it
> must not be earlier than the Connection Date.

[Buttons:]{.underline}

**OK** The software will perform the following edits:

> The WSF selected as the supplying facility and the receiving facility
> cannot be the same. If they are, the following error message will be
> presented: **Water System Facility cannot flow to itself.**
>
> The flow cannot match an existing flow from one facility to another
> with the same process water type unless the Connection Date of the
> proposed matching flow is after the Disconnection Date (which must be
> valued) of the existing flow or the Disconnection Date of the proposed
> matching flow is earlier than the Connection Date of the existing
> flow. If it does, the following error message will be presented: **A
> Water System Facility Flow with the same to and from facilities and
> the same process water type with overlapping connection periods
> already exists.** Note that a user can have two flows between the same
> WSF with the same process water type and effective period if they are
> in opposite directions.
>
> Disconnection Date must not be earlier than the Connection Date. If it
> is, the following error message will be presented: **Disconnection
> Date must be on or after the Connection date.**
>
> *Duplicate Check* If a flow already exists with the same From WSF and
> To WSF the error message will be **Duplicate Water System Facility
> flow found.**

*Add mode* When edits are successful, a new row will be added to the
TINWSFF table. The d_initial_userid, d_initial_timestamp, d_userid_code
and d_last_update_timestamp will be set to current values. A WSF flow
will be created and associated to each WSF. However, the
d_last_updated_timestamp, d_initial_userid of each WSF will
[not]{.underline} be updated. The page will close and the user will be
returned to the Water System Facility Flow Maintenance page with the new
flow displayed in the list box.

*Change Mode* When edits are successful, a row will be updated in the
TINWSFF table. The d_last_update_timestamp and d_userid_code for the
flow record will be set to the current values. The page will close and
the user will be returned to the Water System Facility Flow Maintenance
page with the updated flow information displayed in the list box.

**Cancel** If no changes have been made to the enterable fields, the
page will close and the user will be returned to user to the Water
System Facility Flows Maintenance List page.

> If changes have been made, the standard Cancel Confirm dialog box will
> be presented.

**Help** Will invoke online Help for this page.

**Scroll**

**Buttons** Will scroll the list box in the direction of the arrow
displayed on the button.

Tab sequence: Train ID, Sequence ID, process Water Type, Quantity, UOM,
Connection Date, Connection Type, Disconnection Date, **OK** Button,
**Cancel** Button and **Help** Button.

#### Model Changes for WSF Related POC Maintenance

No Model changes are intended for this release.

#### Water System Facility Related POC Maintenance List

The Water System Facility Related POC Maintenance List (Exhibit 4-71)
displays all legal entities associated to the WSF. This page is invoked
from the **Points of Contact** button on the WSF Modification page. The
user may use this list to maintain POCs for a Water System Facility.

Two Hundred (200) POCs are presented without subsequent user action.
More results can be viewed by using the **View/Next** menu item. A POC
may be selected in the list box by highlighting it.

[Protected Fields:]{.underline}

Number of Rows displayed:

[Water System Group Box:]{.underline}

\[Water System\] No., Name, Federal Type, State Type, Federal Primary
Source.

  ----------------------------------------------------- ----------------------------------------------------
  ![](media/image24.png){width="1.7020833333333334in"   ![](media/image76.png){width="4.801388888888889in"
  height="4.907638888888889in"}                         height="3.888888888888889in"}

  ----------------------------------------------------- ----------------------------------------------------

[]{#__RefHeading___Toc139687395 .anchor}**Exhibit 4-71.** Water System
Facility Related POC Maintenance List

[Water System Facility Group Box:]{.underline}

State Asgn ID, Facility Name, Water Type, Local Name.

[List Columns:]{.underline}

POC Type, Contact Name, \[Contact Activity\] Status, \[Activity Status\]
Begin Date, \[Activity Status\] End Date, Organization, Mailstop, FedRep
ID.

[Default Sort Order:]{.underline}

Contact Activity Status, POC Type, alpha ascending, Contact Name
ascending, End Date descending.

[Menu Items:]{.underline}

**File**

> *Exit* Will close the page and return the user to the invoking page.

**Edit**

> *Add* Will display the Legal Entity Search page where criteria may be
> entered to retrieve a list of Legal Entities. Upon pressing the
> **Search** button, the Legal Entity Maintenance List page will be
> presented in single-select mode for selection of a legal entity to use
> as a POC. The *Select* menu item will be made available on the Legal
> Entity Maintenance page after a selection is highlighted in the list
> box.
>
> Once a legal entity has been selected, the Water System Facility
> Related POC Maintenance page will be presented. If the selected legal
> entity has already been designated as a POC for the WSF and any of
> those associations are still active, they will be displayed on the
> Water System Facility Related POC Maintenance page.

This item will be enabled regardless of a selection having been made in
the list box.

> *Change* Will display the Water System Facility Related POC
> Maintenance page where the details about the contact can be viewed and
> all contact types between the legal entity and Water System Facility
> maintained.
>
> This option will be available only when a contact is selected in the
> list.

*Delete* Will present the Delete Point of Contact dialog box (Exhibit
4--73) requiring selection of either the **OK** or **Cancel** button.

> This option will be available only when a contact is selected in the
> list.
>
> [Delete Point of Contact Buttons:]{.underline}

**OK** Will remove the association linking the legal entity to the water
system facility via the water system facility contact table represented
by the contact type selected (TINWSFC).

**Cancel** Will cancel the delete request and return the user to the
Water System Facility Related POC Maintenance List page. The association
will still exist in the database.

![](media/image77.png){width="5.916666666666667in"
height="4.364583333333333in"}

[]{#__RefHeading___Toc139687396 .anchor}**Exhibit 4-72.** Delete Point
of Contact

**View**

> *Filter by* This option will open the standard filter parameter dialog
> box described in Chapter 1, allowing the user to filter which POCs to
> be displayed on the Water System Facility Related POC Maintenance List
> page. Only rows that match the filtering criteria value will be
> displayed in the list. Using the **View/Filter by** menu item will
> enable the **View/Refresh** menu item.
>
> [Filter by Options:]{.underline}

POC Type, Contact Name, Contact Activity Status, Activity Status Begin
Date, Activity Status End Date, Organization, Mailstop, FedRep ID.

> *Next* The list box will list 200 Points of Contact (POC) at a time.
> If more than 200 POCs exist for the Water System Facility, the next
> group of 200 will be loaded into the list box when the **View/Next**
> menu item is selected.
>
> This option will be available only if more rows are available for
> display. Selecting this menu item will enable the **View/Previous**
> menu item.
>
> *Previous* If more than 200 POCs exist for the Water System Facility
> and the user has requested to view the next 200 via the **View/Next**
> menu item, the **View/Previous** menu item will re-populate the list
> box with prior group of 200.
>
> Once the initial 200 POCs are displayed, the **View/Previous** menu
> item will be disabled.
>
> *Sort* Selecting this option will open the standard sort dialog box
> described in Chapter 1, allowing the user to modify the order of the
> POCs for the Water System Facility. Three levels of sort will be
> supported.
>
> [Sort Order Selections:]{.underline}

POC Type, Contact Name, Contact Activity Status, Activity Status Begin
Date, Activity Status End Date, Organization, Mailstop, FedRep ID.

*Refresh* Selecting **View/Refresh** will retrieve the unfiltered list
(before filtering).

**Help** Will invoke online Help for this page.

#### Water System Facility Related POC Maintenance

The Water System Facility Related POC Maintenance page (Exhibit 4-73)
will be invoked from the Water System Facility Related POC Maintenance
List and the Point of Contact Assignments List. (R0059:A.4.2.2.32.a)
From an **Edit/Add** selection on the maintenance list, the page flow
will be via Legal Entity Search and Legal Entity Maintenance List where
a selection will be made and brought forward into this page. If the user
chooses **Edit/Change** on the maintenance list, the user will be able
to maintain POC information and the physical address/location for a
water system facility.

Prior to display, the selected legal entity will be used to search all
existing associations via the Water_System_Facility_Contact. Any
contacts in active status (active_ind_cd = "A") will be presented on the
page. The Select Type will be marked and protected, Active indicator set
and both radio buttons unprotected, Begin Date populated and
unprotected, End date set to null and protected.

**Note:** If a physical address/location for a Treatment Plant is
provided (by creating a Legal Entity Contact record for the Treatment
Plant and assigning it to the water system facility as a Physical
Location (PL) contact, the information will be federally reported in the
Legal Entity affiliation object with a "TP" (Water Treatment Plant
Facility) Affiliation Type.

[Protected Fields:]{.underline}

[Water System Group Box:]{.underline}

\[Water System\] No., Name, Federal Type, State Type, Federal Primary
Source.

[Water System Facility Group Box:]{.underline}

State Asgn ID, Type, Facility Name, Water Type, Local Name.

[\[Legal Entity Identity\] Group Box:]{.underline}

Salutation The salutation or greeting for the contact.

Contact

Name The contact's first and last name.

Alias Name The alias, common name, or acronym for the contact.

Prof Qual The professional qualification of the contact.

Job Title The professional job title of the contact.

Organization Identifies the contact's organization.

Legal Entity

Type The contact's legal entity type, e.g., IN (individual), CM
(company), NP (Non-Profit).

GA Type If the Legal Entity type is GA (Government Agency), this field
will display the "Type" of Government Agency, (e.g., State, Town, City,
County).

ID No. The Legal Entity's identification number. May be provided by an
external source such as employer or IRS.

FedRep ID The concatenation of the Legal Entity's internal system number
and State Code.

  ----------------------------------------------------- ----------------------------------------------------
  ![](media/image78.png){width="1.8652777777777778in"   ![](media/image79.png){width="4.797916666666667in"
  height="7.25in"}                                      height="6.513888888888889in"}

  ----------------------------------------------------- ----------------------------------------------------

[]{#__RefHeading___Toc139687397 .anchor}**Exhibit 4-73.** Water System
Facility Related POC Maintenance

[Address Group Box:]{.underline}

Address Line One, Address Line Two, City, State, Zip, County,
International Postal Code.

[Phone Numbers Group Box:]{.underline}

Purpose Indicates for what purpose the phone number could be used.

Phone

Number The telephone number including area code.

Extension The office extension of the phone number.

[Electronic Addresses Group Box:]{.underline}

Purpose The purpose of the electronic address indicates for what purpose
the address could be used.

Address The electronic address for the contact.

[Entry Fields:]{.underline}

Note that the tab order is left to right, top to bottom, and includes
all entry fields and buttons unless otherwise noted.

*Select* This will be a checkbox to indicate POC Type selection.

> Marking the Select Type with a check will indicate that the legal
> entity is being designated as a new POC for the WSF. When marked, the
> following actions will occur:

-   Active/Inactive radio buttons will become unprotected and Active
    will be set.

-   Begin Date will become unprotected and set to the current date.

-   End Date will remain protected and null.

> If the Select Type is unmarked, all fields on the row will be reset to
> null values and become protected. This is only allowed prior to the
> creation of the contact type.
>
> If the POC designation already exists and is displayed as active, the
> Select Type will be marked and protected from change. The
> Active/Inactive radio buttons will be unprotected.

*Type of POC* In addition to the *Select Type* checkboxes, these fields
indicate the type of contact the selected legal entity provides for the
WSF. The first nine choices are displayed directly on the page for the
user, as they are choices delivered with the software. Descriptions of
the preset system choices are listed below:

[Displayed Contact Types:]{.underline}

**Value Description**

AC Administrative Contact - Contact who handles administrative matters.

> OW Owner - Owner of a water system.
>
> DO Designated OP In Charge - Person who serves as the principal
> operator for a water system (especially in the situation where a
> system has more than one operator.

OP Operator - Operator of the water system.

EC Emergency Contact - Person to contact in an emergency.

> SA Sampler - Contact responsible for collecting or otherwise dealing
> with sampling information.

FC Financial - Contact who handles financial matters.

LC Legal - Contact who handles legal matters.

PL Physical Location - Contact at the Physical Location.

> **Note:** If a physical address/location for a Treatment Plant is
> provided (by creating a Legal Entity Contact record for the Treatment
> Plant and assigning it to the water system facility as a Physical
> Location (PL) contact, the information will be federally reported in
> the Legal Entity affiliation object with a "TP" (Water Treatment Plant
> Facility) Affiliation Type.
>
> The next two choices allow the user to select the Type of POC using a
> dropdown list. The choices available on the dropdown list are
> controlled by the System Administrator and will be retrieved from the
> TINPVALS code name = "POCTYPE" and ownership_code = "ST" (The "HQ"
> rows will not be presented in the dropdown list.) If no choices are
> available, the field will display -- None.
>
> For administrator-defined types, a selection will be required if the
> Select Type box is marked. This field will be protected from change on
> displayed, active contacts.

*Active/*

*Inactive* Radio buttons to indicate activity status of POC Type.

> When the Select Type is marked, the radio buttons are available for
> change. Choosing Active will set the Begin Date field to current date.
> Choosing Inactive will set the End Date field to current date and
> unprotect it.
>
> Active/Inactive is mandatory when the select type has been marked.

*Begin Date* The begin date for the contact's current Activity Status.
This field will be defaulted to the current date when the contact is
added and is modifiable. The date can be changed to a date prior to the
current date If Begin Date is blank, the error message will be **Begin
Date cannot be blank.** If Begin Date is greater than current date, the
error message will be **Begin Date cannot be in the future.**

*End Date* The date on which the contact's status became inactive. This
field will be defaulted to the current date when the Inactive radio
button is selected. The date can be changed to a date prior to the
current date. If Inactive is selected and End Date is blank, the error
message will be **End Date cannot be blank.** If End Date is greater
than current date, the error message will be **End Date cannot be in the
future.** If End Date has a value and is less than the Begin Date, the
error message will be **End Date cannot be prior to Begin Date.**

[Buttons:]{.underline}

**Email/**

**Url Launch** This button will open the Email/Web Launch page. The page
will display a list of all Electronic addresses for the Contact
displayed. See Chapter 1 for further discussion and description of this
functionality.

This button will become enabled when a selection has been made in the
list area.

> **OK** The user must select at least one Contact Type for the Legal
> Entity for the user-controlled contact types. If no type is selected
> in the drop down when the select indicator is checked, the following
> error message will be presented: **Contact Type selection is required
> for First user-controlled contact type.** This message will be unique
> for each of the user-controlled contact type drop downs.

Will perform the following edits for each checked Select Type
sequentially on both this page and the **MORE** page. In some cases, the
field in error may be on the **MORE** page. When this occurs the
**MORE** page will be presented. It must be closed after taking
corrective action and the **OK** button selected to resume processing.
Some contacts may have been processed prior to an error begin
identified.

Dates:

-   If Begin Date is blank, the error message will be **Begin Date
    cannot be blank.**

-   If Begin Date is greater than current date, the error message will
    be **Begin Date cannot be in the future.**

-   If Inactive is selected and End Date is blank, the error message
    will be **End Date cannot be blank.**

-   If End Date is greater than current date, the error message will be
    **End Date cannot be in the future.**

-   If End Date has a value and is less than the Begin Date, the error
    message will be **End Date cannot be prior to Begin Date.**

-   If Active is selected and End Date has a value, it will be ignored
    and set to null.

-   If Active or Inactive has not been selected, the following error
    message will be presented: **Activity Status cannot be blank.**

*Duplicate Check* For each choice selected, a duplicate check will be
performed to ensure that the legal entity being associated to the WSF to
perform the selected contact type does not already exist in an active
status. If a Water_System_Facility_Contact of the same type exists for
the supplied water system and legal entity with an active_ind_cd = "A,"
the following error message will be presented: **This type of Water
System Facility Point of Contact already exists.** Pressing **OK** on
this error message will close the dialog box and ignore the request to
add the contact of this type. Processing will have been interrupted. The
duplicate situation must be resolved and the **OK** button pressed again
to resume processing.

*Overlap Check* In addition to the duplicate check, an overlap check
will be applied. For each selection, an overlap check will ensure that
the legal entity being associated/updated to the WSF does not already
exist with Begin and End Dates that overlap the new Begin and End Dates.
If a Water_System_Facility_Contact row exists for the same WSF and legal
entity, with new begin dates equal to or less than the existing end date
AND new end date either null, or equal to or greater than any existing
begin date the following error message will be presented: **An overlap
exists with the new contact and an existing contact.** For example, John
Doe is associated to the WSF as an Inactive LE contact, Begin Status
Date = 1/1/02 and End Status Date = 1/31/02. If the user attempts to add
John Doe as an LE contact with Begin Status Date of 1/15/02, this begin
date overlaps the previous LE contact period and the error message will
be invoked. Pressing **OK** on this error message will close the dialog
box and interrupt the processing. The overlap situation must be resolved
and the **OK** button pressed again to resume processing.

> *Add Selected*
>
> *Contact* When editing is complete on a new selection, a
> Water_System_Facility_Contact row will be added and associated to the
> WSF and the Legal Entity. The type_code will be set to the appropriate
> contact type, active_ind_cd will be set to the "A" when the Active
> radio button is selected and to "I" when the Inactive radio button is
> selected, the Begin Date to the Begin Date value, End Date to the
> value specified or null, d_last_update_timestamp and
> d_initial_timestamp to current timestamp, d_userid_code and
> d_initial_userid to the current users ID, and the TINWSFC_is_number to
> the next sequential number utilizing the TINEISN row for table name
> TINWSFC.
>
> When successful, the processing will commit changes to this selection
> and protect the select type and type of POC. If the selection was
> added as inactive, all fields for the selection will be protected.
> Processing will proceed to editing the next selection.
>
> *Change Selected*
>
> *Contact* When editing is complete on an existing selection, the
> WATER_SYSTEM_FACILITY_CONTACT row is updated with the new values for
> active_ind_cd, Begin Date, and End Date. The type cannot be changed.
> The d_last_update_timestamp and d_userid_code will be set to current
> values.
>
> When successful, the processing will commit changes to this selection.
> If the selection was changed to inactive, all fields for the selection
> will be protected. Processing will proceed to editing the next
> selection.
>
> After all contact type additions and changes have been processed, the
> page will close and return to the Water System Facility Related POC
> Maintenance list page with a refreshed list of contacts.

**Cancel** If changes have been made, the standard Cancel Confirm dialog
box will be presented. If no changes are detected, the page will close
and return the user to the Water System Facility Related POC Maintenance
list page.

**Help** Will invoke online Help for this page.

**\<More\>** Will present the More POC Types page (Exhibit 4-74).

This page will function in the same manner as the primary page. The
first 12 choices displayed on the page are displayed directly on the
page for the user, as they are choices delivered with the software.
Descriptions of the preset system choices are listed below.

> [Displayed Contact Types:]{.underline}
>
> **Value Description**
>
> LE Lead Engineer - Contact who serves as lead engineer
>
> OT Other - Other contact type
>
> BI Bureau of Indian Affairs Representative

HC Health Clinic Representative

> IE Indian Health Service Engineer
>
> IS Indian Health Service Sanitarian
>
> TC Tribal Chairman
>
> TE Tribal Environment Dept Representative
>
> TG Tribal Government Representative

TH Tribal Health Dept Representative

> UN Utility Representative (Non-Tribal)
>
> UT Utility Representative (Tribal)

![](media/image80.png){width="5.992361111111111in"
height="6.500694444444444in"}

[]{#__RefHeading___Toc139687398 .anchor}**Exhibit 4-74.** More POC Types

The next four choices allow the user to select the Type of POC using a
dropdown list. The choices available on the dropdown list are controlled
by the System Administrator and will be retrieved from the TINPVALS code
name = "POCTYPE" and ownership_code = "ST" (The "HQ" permitted values
rows will not be presented in the dropdown.)

[More POC Types Buttons:]{.underline}

**Close** The **MORE** page will close and return to the Water System
Facility Related POC Maintenance page. No processing or editing is done
until the **OK** button is selected.

#### Model Changes for Water System Facility Locational Data

-   Remove column Vertical_measure_sign. (Ev13788:B.4.2.2.33.a)

Locational "unknown" MAD codes to be removed from SDWIS/STATE -- Table
Content Changes and Schema Migration: (R0080:A.4.2.2.33.a)

-   Remove row in TINPVALS (with code_name = TINLOC1 and text_value =
    '027').

> Schema migration: Update TINLOC Set hz_collect_meth_cd to spaces where
> hz_collect_meth_cd = '027'.

-   Remove row in TINPVALS (with code_name = TINLOC3 and text_value =
    'U').

Schema migration: Update TINLOC Set source_map_scale to spaces where
source_map_scale = 'U'.

-   Remove row in TINPVALS (with code_name = TINLOC4 and text_value =
    '001').

Schema migration: Update TINLOC Set reference_point_cd to spaces where
reference_point_cd = '001'.

-   Remove row in TINPVALS (with code_name = TINLOC4 and text_value =
    '003').

Schema migration: Update TINLOC Set reference_point_cd to spaces where
reference_point_cd = '003'.

-   Remove row in TINPVALS (with code_name = TINLOC7 and text_value =
    '010').

Schema migration: Update TINLOC Set verif_method_cd to spaces where
verif_method_cd = '010'.

-   Remove row in TINPVALS (with code_name = TINLOC8 and text_value =
    '008').

Schema migration: Update TINLOC Set ver_col_meth_cd to spaces where
ver_col_meth_cd = '008'.

-   Remove row in TINPVALS (with code_name = TINLOC9 and text_value =
    'U').

> Schema migration: Update TINLOC Set vert_ref_datum_cd to spaces where
> vert_ref_datum_cd = 'U'.

#### Water System Facility Locational Data Maintenance

The WSF Locational Data Maintenance page (Exhibit 4-75) captures
latitude, longitude, and vertical (altitude) data for the selected WSF.
This group of data is known as locational data and includes not only
these three items, but also a number of other data called "method,
accuracy, and description (MAD) codes". The ability to enter this data
will serve two primacy agency needs: the need to be able to store
locational data as it is obtained and the need to meet the locational
reporting requirements established by EPA.

To create a location detail record for a Water System Facility, a user
must, at a minimum, enter latitude and longitude values in degrees,
minutes, and seconds (DMS) or in decimal degrees. In addition, the
following specifications apply:

-   Latitude and longitude in degrees, minutes and seconds (DMS) are
    mutually required (i.e., if one is present, then the other will be
    required).

-   Latitude and longitude in decimal degrees (called Latitude Measure
    and Longitude Measure in EPA's Latitude/Longitude Data Standard) are
    mutually required (i.e., if one is present, then the other will be
    required).

-   Latitude and longitude in either DMS or decimal degrees are
    mandatory fields.

```{=html}
<!-- -->
```
-   If any one of the following is valued: Vertical Collection Method
    Code, Vertical Accuracy Measure, or Vertical Reference Datum Code,
    then Vertical Measure will be required.

[Protected Fields:]{.underline}

\[Locational Data\]

Record updated by/on

The User ID and the timestamp from the last time the record was updated.

\[Locational Data\]

Record created by/on

The initial User ID and timestamp when the record was initially added to
the database.

\[Cadastral Data\]

Record updated by/on

The User ID and the timestamp from the last time the record was updated.

\[Cadastral Data\]

Record created by/on

The initial User ID and timestamp when the record was initially added to
the database.

[Water System Group Box:]{.underline}

\[Water System\] No., Name, Federal Type, State Type, Federal Primary
Source.

[Water System Facility Group Box]{.underline}

State Asgn ID, Type, Facility Name, Water Type, Local Name.

[Horizontal Data Group Box Entry Fields:]{.underline}

Note that the tab order is left to right, top to bottom, and includes
all entry fields and buttons unless otherwise noted

*Latitude DMS* Latitude DMS will be for entry of the latitude in
degrees, minutes, and seconds (DMS). The user will be able to enter
Latitude DMS manually or have the software calculate the values from the
value entered in the *Latitude Measure* field by using the **Calculate
Using Measure** button.

Latitude is a coordinate representation indicating a location on the
surface of the Earth, using the Earth's equator as the latitude origin.
Note that all three are stored in a single field with degrees, minutes
and whole number seconds stored as whole numbers and decimal seconds as
a decimal (e.g., 42 degrees, 1 minute, and 12 seconds is recorded as
420112; 42 degrees, 5 minutes and 5.55 seconds recorded as 420505.55).

  ----------------------------------------------------- ----------------------------------------------------
  ![](media/image45.png){width="1.7201388888888889in"   ![](media/image81.png){width="4.104166666666667in"
  height="7.004861111111111in"}                         height="6.997222222222222in"}

  ----------------------------------------------------- ----------------------------------------------------

[]{#__RefHeading___Toc139687399 .anchor}**Exhibit 4-75.** Water System
Facility Locational Data Maintenance

> Latitude Degrees will accept positive (+) and negative (-) numbers
> between --90 and +90. If the entry for Latitude Degrees is not between
> --90 and 90, the following error message will be presented when the
> user tabs off the field: **Latitude Degree must be between --90 and
> +90.**
>
> If the value for Latitude Degrees equals 90 or -90, Latitude Minutes
> and Latitude Seconds fields are set to zero ("0") and protected from
> change
>
> Latitude Minutes cannot contain a numeric value greater than 59. If
> entry for Latitude Minutes is not between 0 and 59, the following
> error message will be presented when the user tabs off the field:
> **Latitude Minute must be between 0 and 59.**
>
> Latitude Seconds cannot contain a numeric value greater than 59.9999.
> If the entry for Latitude Seconds is not between 0 and 59.9999, the
> following error message will be presented when the user tabs off the
> field: **Latitude Seconds must be between 0 and 59.9999.**
>
> Trailing zeros will not be displayed

Latitude DMS will be optional fields default valued to zero

*Longitude DMS* Longitude DMS will be for entry of the longitude
degrees, minutes, and seconds. The user will be able to enter Longitude
DMS manually or have the software calculate the values from the value
entered in the *Longitude Measure* field by using the **Calculate Using
Measure** button.

Longitude is a coordinate representation indicating a location on the
surface of the Earth, using the Prime Meridian (Greenwich, England) as
the Longitude origin. Note that all three are stored in a single field
with degrees, minutes, and whole number seconds stored as whole numbers
and decimal seconds as a decimal (see above examples for Latitude DMS).

> Longitude Degrees will accept positive (+) and negative (-) numbers
> between --179 and +180. If entry for Longitude Degrees is not between
> -179 and +180, the following error message will be presented when the
> user tabs off the field: **Longitude Degree must be between -179 and
> +180.**
>
> If the value for Longitude Degrees equals 180, the Longitude Minutes
> and Longitude Seconds fields are set to zero "0" and protected from
> change.
>
> Longitude Minutes cannot contain a numeric value greater than 59. If
> entry for Longitude Minutes is not between 0 and 59, the following
> error message will be presented when the user tabs off the field:
> **Longitude Minute must be between 0 and 59.**
>
> Longitude Seconds cannot contain a numeric value greater than 59.9999.
> If entry for Longitude Seconds is not between 0 and 59.9999, the
> following error message will be presented when the user tabs off the
> field: **Longitude Second must be between 0 and 59.9999.**
>
> Trailing zeros will not be displayed
>
> Longitude DMS will be optional fields, default valued to zero.

*Latitude Measure* Latitude Measure will be for the entry of the
latitude in decimal degrees. The user will be able to enter Latitude
Measure manually or have the software calculate the value from the
values entered in the *Latitude DMS* fields by using the **Calculate
Using DMS** button.

> Latitude Measure will accept positive (+) and negative (-) numbers
> between --90.00000 and +90.00000. If the entry for Latitude Measure is
> not between --90.00000 and +90.00000, the following error message will
> be presented when the user tabs off the field: **Latitude Measure must
> be between --90.00000 and +90.00000.**
>
> Trailing zeros will not be displayed
>
> Latitude Measure will be an optional field.

*Longitude Measure* Longitude Measure will be for the entry of the
longitude in decimal degrees. The user will be able to enter Longitude
Measure manually or have the software calculate the value from the
values entered in the *Longitude DMS* fields by using the **Calculate
Using DMS** button.

> Longitude Measure will accept positive (+) and negative (-) numbers
> between --179.99999 and +180.00000. If the entry for Longitude Measure
> is not between --179.99999 and +180.00000, the following error message
> will be presented when the user tabs off the field: **Longitude
> Measure must be between --179.99999 and +180.00000.**
>
> Trailing zeros will not be displayed.

Longitude Measure will be an optional field.

*Data Collection*

*Date* This field will be for entry of the calendar date when the
locational data were collected. This date cannot be in the future.

Data Collection Date will be an optional field.

*Horizontal Accuracy*

*Measure* This field will be for entry of the measure of the accuracy
(in meters) of the latitude and longitude coordinates.

> Accuracy should be represented as a range within which there is
> confidence that the true latitude/longitude value falls. The format
> for presentation of accuracy will be plus or minus the number of units
> (+/‑ x units), where units are meter(s).
>
> Horizontal Accuracy Measure (+/-) will be an optional field.

*Horizontal Collection*

*Method Code* This field will be for entry of the code representing the
method used to determine the latitude and longitude coordinates for a
point on the Earth. Any options after the preset options listed below
are state-defined choices controlled by the System Administrator. All
options, (delivered with the software and any state-defined options),
will be retrieved from the TINPVALS table with code name = "TINLOC1."
Listed below are descriptions of the preset system choices.

> **Value Description**
>
> \<Spaces\> (Default)
>
> 001 Address Matching - House Number
>
> 002 Address Matching -- Block Face
>
> 003 Address Matching -- Street Centerline
>
> 004 Address Matching -- Nearest Intersection
>
> 005 Address Matching -- Primary Name
>
> 006 Address Matching - Digitized
>
> 007 Address Matching -- Other
>
> 008 Census Block -- 1990 - Centroid
>
> 009 Census Block/Group - 1990 - Centroid
>
> 010 Census Block/Tract - 1990 - Centroid
>
> 011 Census - Other
>
> 012 Global Positioning System (GPS) Carrier Phase Static Relative
> Positioning Technique
>
> 013 GPS - Carrier Phase Kinematic Relative Positioning Technique
>
> 014 GPS Code Measurements (Pseudo Range) Differentially Corrected
>
> 015 GPS Code Measurements (Pseudo Range) Precise Positioning Service
>
> 016 GPS Code Measurements (Pseudo Range) Standard Positioning Service
> SA Off
>
> 017 GPS Code Measurements (Pseudo Range) Standard Positioning Service
> SA On
>
> 018 Interpolation - Map
>
> 019 Interpolation - Photo
>
> 020 Interpolation - Satellite
>
> 021 Interpolation - Other
>
> 022 Loran C
>
> 023 Public Land Survey -- Quarter Section
>
> 024 Public Land Survey -- Section
>
> 025 Classical Surveying Techniques
>
> 026 Zip Code - Centroid
>
> (R0080:A.4.2.2.34.a)
>
> 028 GPS - Unspecified
>
> 029 GPS Code Measurements (Pseudo Range) Standard Positioning Service
> Corrected Using Canadian Active Control System
>
> 030 Interpolation -- Digital Map Source (TIGER)
>
> 031 Interpolation - Spot
>
> 032 Interpolation -- MSS (Multi-Spectral Scanner)
>
> 033 Interpolation -- TM (Thematic Mapper)
>
> 034 Public Land Survey -- Eighth Section
>
> 035 Public Land Survey -- Sixteenth Section
>
> 036 Public Land Survey -- Footing
>
> 037 Zip + 4 Code - Centroid
>
> 038 Zip + 2 Code - Centroid
>
> Horizontal Collection Method Code will be an optional field.

*Coordinate Data*

*Source Code* This field will be for entry of the code representing the
party responsible for providing the latitude and longitude coordinates.
In SDWIS/STATE 8.0, the label for this field was "Source." Any options
after the preset options listed below are state-defined choices
controlled by the System Administrator. All options, (delivered with the
software and any state-defined options), will be retrieved from the
TINPVALS table with code name = "TINLOC2." Listed below are descriptions
of the preset system choices.

> **Value Description**
>
> \<Spaces\> (Default)
>
> 001 Alabama
>
> 002 Alaska
>
> 004 Arizona
>
> 005 Arkansas
>
> 006 California
>
> 008 Colorado
>
> 009 Connecticut
>
> 010 Delaware
>
> 011 District of Columbia
>
> 012 Florida
>
> 013 Georgia
>
> 015 Hawaii
>
> 016 Idaho
>
> 017 Illinois
>
> 018 Indiana
>
> 019 Iowa
>
> 020 Kansas
>
> 021 Kentucky
>
> 022 Louisiana
>
> 023 Maine
>
> 024 Maryland
>
> 025 Massachusetts
>
> 026 Michigan
>
> 027 Minnesota
>
> 028 Mississippi
>
> 029 Missouri
>
> 030 Montana
>
> 031 Nebraska
>
> 032 Nevada
>
> 033 New Hampshire
>
> 034 New Jersey
>
> 035 New Mexico
>
> 036 New York
>
> 037 North Carolina
>
> 038 North Dakota
>
> 039 Ohio
>
> 040 Oklahoma
>
> 041 Oregon
>
> 042 Pennsylvania
>
> 044 Rhode Island
>
> 045 South Carolina
>
> 046 South Dakota
>
> 047 Tennessee
>
> 048 Texas
>
> 049 Utah
>
> 050 Vermont
>
> 051 Virginia
>
> 053 Washington
>
> 054 West Virginia
>
> 055 Wisconsin
>
> 056 Wyoming
>
> 060 American Samoa
>
> 064 Federated States of Micronesia
>
> 068 Marshall Islands
>
> 069 Northern Mariana Islands
>
> 086 Tribe
>
> 072 Puerto Rico
>
> 081 Dunn & Bradstreet
>
> 074 U.S. Minor Outlying Islands
>
> 084 Other Federal Agency
>
> 087 Unknown
>
> 083 Other
>
> 078 Virgin Islands of the United States
>
> 090 EPA Region 2
>
> 080 Contractor
>
> 092 EPA Region 4
>
> 082 EPA Headquarters
>
> 094 EPA Region 6
>
> 095 EPA Region 7
>
> 085 Private
>
> 097 EPA Region 9
>
> 089 EPA Region 10
>
> NN Navajo Nation
>
> 070 Palau
>
> 088 EPA Region 1
>
> 091 EPA Region 3
>
> 093 EPA Region 5
>
> 096 EPA Region 8

Coordinate Data Source will be an optional field.

*Source Map Scale* This field will be for entry of the code value that
represents the map scale used to determine the latitude and longitude
coordinates of the WSF. Any options after the preset options listed
below are state-defined choices controlled by the System Administrator.
All options, (delivered with the software and any state-defined
options), will be retrieved from the TINPVALS table with code name =
"TINLOC3." Listed below are descriptions of the preset system choices.

> **Value Description**
>
> \<Spaces\> (Default)
>
> 1 \>=1:500
>
> 2 Between 1:500 and 1:5,000
>
> 3 Between 1:5000 and 1:10,000
>
> 4 Between 1:10,000 and 1:15,000
>
> 5 Between 1:15,000 and 1:20,000
>
> 6 Between 1:20,000 and 1:25,000
>
> 7 Between 1:25,000 and 1:50,000
>
> 8 Between 1:50,000 and 1:100,000
>
> 9 \<1:100,000
>
> A 1:10,000
>
> B 1:12,000
>
> C 1:15,840
>
> D 1:20,000
>
> E 1:24,000
>
> F 1:25,000
>
> G 1:50,000
>
> H 1:62,500
>
> I 1:63,360
>
> J 1:100,000
>
> K 1:125,000
>
> L 1:250,000
>
> M 1:500,000
>
> NA Scale Not Applicable to Collection Method (Default)
>
> (R0080:A.4.2.2.34.b)
>
> Source Map Scale will be an optional field.

*Source Map*

*Scale Number* The number that represents the proportional distance on
the ground for one unit of measure on the map or photo, displayed with
comas (example: 125,000). EPA has replaced the Source Map Scale data
element with this one. Source Map Scale values of A -- M will be schema
migrated into this field with the value that follows "1:"

> Source Map Scale Number will be an optional field. The Source Map
> Scale field will be retained.

*Reference Point*

*Code* This field will be for entry of the code representing the place
for which geographic coordinates were established. **Note:** EPA has
replaced the old list with a new list. Both the old codes and the new
codes will be available to users but only the 100-series codes will be
accepted by EPA. Any options after the preset options listed below are
state-defined choices controlled by the System Administrator. All
options, (delivered with the software and any state-defined options),
will be retrieved from the TINPVALS table with code name = "TINLOC4."
Listed below are descriptions of the preset system choices.

> **Value Description**
>
> \<Spaces\> (Default)
>
> (R0080:A.4.2.2.34.c)
>
> 002 Plant Entrance (General)
>
> (R0080:A.4.2.2.34.d)
>
> 004 Plant Entrance (Personnel)
>
> 005 Plant Entrance (Freight)
>
> 006 Air Release Stack
>
> 007 Air Release Vent
>
> 008 Storage Tank
>
> 009 Pipe Release to Water
>
> 010 Lagoon or Settling Pond
>
> 011 Liquid Water Treatment Unit
>
> 012 Atmospheric Emissions Treatment Unit
>
> 013 Solid Water Treatment/Disposal Unit
>
> 014 Solid Waste Storage Area
>
> 015 Loading Facility
>
> 016 Loading Area Centroid
>
> 017 Process Unit
>
> 018 Process Unit Area Centroid
>
> 019 Administrative Building
>
> 020 Facility Centroid
>
> 021 NE Corner of Land Parcel
>
> 022 SE Corner of Land Parcel
>
> 023 NW Corner of Land Parcel
>
> 024 SW Corner of Land Parcel
>
> 025 Center of Facility
>
> 026 Well
>
> 027 Well Protection Area
>
> 028 Water Monitoring Station
>
> 029 Air Monitoring Station
>
> 030 Intake Pipe
>
> 101 [Facility/Station Building Entrance or Street
> Address](http://oaspub.epa.gov/edr/edr_proc_qry.navigate?P_LIST_OPTION_CD=VMDIS&P_VALUE_MEANING_IDENTIFIER=12710)
>
> 102 [Facility
> Center/Centroid](http://oaspub.epa.gov/edr/edr_proc_qry.navigate?P_LIST_OPTION_CD=VMDIS&P_VALUE_MEANING_IDENTIFIER=8611)
>
> 103 [Boundary
> Point](http://oaspub.epa.gov/edr/edr_proc_qry.navigate?P_LIST_OPTION_CD=VMDIS&P_VALUE_MEANING_IDENTIFIER=14360)
>
> 104 [Intake
> Point](http://oaspub.epa.gov/edr/edr_proc_qry.navigate?P_LIST_OPTION_CD=VMDIS&P_VALUE_MEANING_IDENTIFIER=27696)
>
> 105 [Treatment/Storage
> Point](http://oaspub.epa.gov/edr/edr_proc_qry.navigate?P_LIST_OPTION_CD=VMDIS&P_VALUE_MEANING_IDENTIFIER=27697)
>
> 106 [Release
> Point](http://oaspub.epa.gov/edr/edr_proc_qry.navigate?P_LIST_OPTION_CD=VMDIS&P_VALUE_MEANING_IDENTIFIER=27695)
>
> 107 [Monitoring
> Point](http://oaspub.epa.gov/edr/edr_proc_qry.navigate?P_LIST_OPTION_CD=VMDIS&P_VALUE_MEANING_IDENTIFIER=27694)
>
> 108 Other

Reference Point Code will be an optional field.

*Horizontal Reference*

*Datum Code* This field will be for entry of the code representing the
reference datum used in determining latitude and longitude coordinates.
**Note:** the permitted value "004 -- Unknown" will no longer be
available. Any records with this value will have it replaced by null
(spaces). Any options after the preset options listed below are
state-defined choices controlled by the System Administrator. All
options, (delivered with the software and any state-defined options),
will be retrieved from the TINPVALS table with code name = "TINLOC5."
Listed below are descriptions of the preset system choices.

> **Value Description**
>
> \<Spaces\> (Default)
>
> 001 NAD 27
>
> 002 NAD 83
>
> 003 WGS 84
>
> Horizontal Reference Datum Code will be an optional field.

*Geometric Type Code* This field will be for entry of the code
representing the geometric entity represented by one point or a sequence
of latitude and longitude points. Any options after the preset options
listed below are state-defined choices controlled by the System
Administrator. All options, (delivered with the software and any
state-defined options), will be retrieved from the TINPVALS table with
code name = "TINLOC6." Listed below are descriptions of the preset
system choices.

> **Value Description**
>
> \<Spaces\>
>
> 001 Point (Default)
>
> 002 Line
>
> 003 Area
>
> 004 Region
>
> 005 Route
>
> Geometric Type Code will be an optional field.

*Verification Method*

*Code* This field will be for entry of the code representing the process
used to verify the latitude and longitude coordinates. **Note:** The
permitted value "015 -- Not Verified" will no longer be available. Any
records with this value will be schema migrated to null. Any options
after the preset options listed below are state-defined choices
controlled by the System Administrator. All options, (delivered with the
software and any state-defined options), will be retrieved from the
TINPVALS table with code name = "TINLOC7." Listed below are descriptions
of the preset system choices.

> **Value Description**
>
> \<Spaces\> (Default)
>
> 001 Proximity to Polygon Centroid (County)
>
> 002 Proximity to Alternative Facility Coordinate
>
> 003 Proximity to Polygon Centroid (Other)
>
> 004 Point in Polygon (Other)
>
> 005 Point in Polygon (County)
>
> 006 Point in Polygon (Zip)
>
> 007 Verified Relative to Map Features (1:24,000)
>
> 008 Verified Relative to Map Features (1:1000,000 or TIGER)
>
> 009 Verified Relative to Map Features (Other)
>
> (R0080:A.4.2.2.34.e)
>
> 011 Ground Truth Conducted
>
> 012 Proximity to Polygon Centroid (Zip Code)
>
> 013 Point in Bounding Box (Zip)
>
> 014 Point in Bounding Box (County)
>
> Verification Method Code will be an optional field.

[Vertical Data Group Box Entry Fields:]{.underline}

*Vertical Measure* This field will be for entry of the measure of
elevation (i.e., the altitude), in meters, above or below a reference
datum.

> Vertical Measure will accept positive (+) and negative (-) numbers. A
> positive value indicates the Vertical Measure is above the Vertical
> Reference Datum Code. A negative value indicates the Vertical Measure
> is below the Vertical Reference Datum Code.
>
> Vertical Measure will be an optional field.

*Vertical Accuracy*

*Measure* This field will be for entry of the measure of the accuracy
(in meters) of the vertical measure (i.e., the altitude) of a reference
point.

> Vertical Accuracy Measure will be an optional field.

*Vertical Collection*

*Method Code* This field will be for entry of the code representing the
method used to collect the vertical measure (i.e., the altitude) of a
reference point. **Note:** the permitted value "015 -- Unspecified" will
no longer be available. Any records with this value will be schema
migrated to null. Any options after the preset options listed below are
state-defined choices controlled by the System Administrator. All
options, (delivered with the software and any state-defined options),
will be retrieved from the TINPVALS table with code name = "TINLOC8."
Listed below are descriptions of the preset system choices.

> **Value Description**
>
> \<Spaces\> (Default)
>
> 001 GPS Carrier Phase Static Relative Positioning Technique
>
> 002 GPS Carrier Phase Kinematic Relative Positioning Technique
>
> 003 GPS Code Measurements (Pseudo Range) Differentially Corrected
>
> 004 GPS Code Measurements (Pseudo Range) Precise Positioning Service
>
> 005 GPS Code Measurements (Pseudo Range) Standard Positioning Service
> (SA Off)
>
> 006 GPS Code Measurements (Pseudo Range) Standard Positioning Service
> (SA On)
>
> 007 Classical Surveying Techniques
>
> (R0080:A.4.2.2.34.f)
>
> 009 Altimetry
>
> 010 Precise Leveling From a Benchmark
>
> 011 Leveling Between Non Benchmark Control Points
>
> 012 Trigonometric Leveling
>
> 013 Photogrammetric
>
> 014 Topographic Map Interpolation
>
> Knowing the method used provides some indication of the reliability of
> the vertical measure. For example, the user may choose to place more
> confidence in a vertical measure determined from a GPS method rather
> than a vertical measure manually interpolated from a map or photo. In
> addition, the user may want to check all vertical measures
> interpolated from a map or photo since a chance for gross error exists
> if an incorrect interpolation was made.
>
> Vertical Collection Method Code will be an optional field.

*Vertical Reference*

*Datum Code* This field is for entry of the code representing the
reference datum used to determine the vertical measure (i.e., the
altitude). The vertical reference datum code will be necessary for
others to correctly interpret the data. Any options after the preset
options listed below are state-defined choices controlled by the System
Administrator. All options, (delivered with the software and any
state-defined options), will be retrieved from the TINPVALS table with
code name = "TINLOC9." Listed below are descriptions of the preset
system choices.

> **Value Description**
>
> \<Spaces\> (Default)
>
> 001 NAVD 88
>
> 002 NGVD 29
>
> 003 Elevation from Mean Sea-Level
>
> 004 Local Tidal Datum
>
> (R0080:A.4.2.2.34.g)

Vertical Reference Datum Code will be an optional field.

*Comment Text* A free-form text field where information can be entered
to further document information about the water system facility
locational data.

> Comment Text will be an optional field.

[Cadastral Legal Description Entry Fields:]{.underline}

Cadastral Legal Description will allow the maintenance of location
information gathered by cadastral methods, including range, township,
section, and quarters information.

*Meridian Name* The name of a north/south line from which an exact
measurement of longitude can be made in order to locate a specific
range. Meridian name helps define a cadastral measurement.

Meridian Name will be a mandatory field if any of the Cadastral Legal
Description fields is valued.

*Range* An alphanumeric value that represents the physical location of
an area of land in relationship to a known principal meridian. The
format includes a three-digit number for the location in relation to a
principal meridian and "E" or "W" for the direction from the principal
meridian. Range helps define a cadastral measurement.

> Range number is of the format: **TTTD** where **TTT** = a number which
> represents the physical location of a township in relationship to a
> known Principal Meridian and **D** = the direction (E for East, W for
> West) from a known Principal Meridian. All three digits of the number
> **TTT** are required. The fourth character can only be "E" for East,
> or "W" for West.

Range will be a mandatory field if Township is provided.

*Township* The physical location of an area of land in relationship to a
known baseline, i.e., the meridian. In conjunction with the range
number, this value identifies the township in which a WSF is located.
The format will include a three-digit number for the physical location
in relation to the baseline and an "N" or "S" for direction. Township
helps define a cadastral measurement.

> Township number is of the format: **TTTD** where **TTT** = a number
> which represents the physical location of a township in relationship
> to a known Base Line and **D** = the direction (N for North, S for
> South) from a known Base Line. All three digits of the number **TTT**
> are required. The fourth character can only be "N" for North, or "S"
> for South.

Township will be a mandatory field if Section is provided.

*Section* The section of the range and township in which a water system
facility is located. The 36 sections in a cadastral measurement are
numbered in a zigzag fashion beginning with 01 in the northeast corner
and ending with 36 in the southeast corner. Section cannot contain a
numeric value greater than 36.

Section will be a mandatory field if Qtr is provided.

Qtr

Qtr Qtr

Qtr Qtr Qtr

Qtr Qtr Qtr Qtr Will identify the increasingly specific quarters of a
range‑township‑section in a cadastral measurement for a WSF, moving from
most specific (Qtr Qtr Qtr Qtr) to least specific (Qtr) of a given
section. The cadastral description follows the following example:

> NE (quarter of the) SW (quarter of the) NE (quarter of the) NW
> (quarter of) Section XX of Township XXXX of Range YYYY.
>
> Permitted entries for the any of the four quarters will be:
>
> NE Northeast quarter
>
> NW Northwest quarter
>
> SE Southeast quarter
>
> SW Southwest quarter
>
> Qtr will be a mandatory field if Qtr Qtr is provided.
>
> Qtr Qtr will be a mandatory field if Qtr Qtr Qtr is provided.
>
> Qtr Qtr Qtr will be a mandatory field if Qtr Qtr Qtr Qtr is provided.

[Buttons:]{.underline}

**Calculate Using**

**Measure** When a user clicks on this button, the software will use the
Latitude Measure to calculate the Latitude DMS and the Longitude Measure
to calculate the Longitude DMS overwriting the values currently in the
DMS fields.

> This button will be enabled only when Lat/Long DMS have been valued.

The formula for calculating the Latitude DMS is: Degrees = whole number
recorded in Latitude Measure; Minutes = whole number portion of the
product obtained when you multiply the decimal portion of Latitude
Measure by 60; Seconds = the decimal portion of the following: (60 x the
decimal portion of Latitude Measure) times 60. For example:

> Latitude Measure = 42.084875
>
> Latitude Degrees = 42
>
> Latitude Minutes = whole number resulting from 0.084875 x 60 = 5.0925
>
> = 5 minutes
>
> Latitude Seconds = (decimal portion resulting from 0.084875 x 60) x 60
>
> = 0.084875 x 60 = 5.0925
>
> = 0.0925 x 60 = 5.55 seconds
>
> Which would be stored as 420505.55 in the latitude dms msr field.
>
> The formula for calculating the Longitude DMS is: Degrees = whole
> number recorded in Longitude Measure; Minutes = whole number portion
> of the product obtained when you multiply the decimal portion of
> Longitude Measure by 60; Seconds = the decimal portion of the
> following: (60 x the decimal portion of Longitude Measure) times 60.
> For example:
>
> Longitude Measure = -73.320242
>
> Longitude Degrees = -73
>
> Longitude Minutes = whole number resulting from 0.320242x60= 19.21452
>
> = 19 minutes
>
> Longitude Seconds = (decimal portion resulting from 0.320242 x 60) x
> 60
>
> = 0.320242 x 60 = 19.21452
>
> = 0.21452 x 60 = 12.8712 seconds
>
> Which would be stored as --731912.8712 in the longitude dms msr field.

**Calculate Using**

**DMS** When a user clicks on this button, the software will use the
Latitude DMS to calculate the Latitude Measure and the Longitude DMS to
calculate the Longitude Measure overwriting the values currently in the
Measure fields.

This button will be enabled only when Lat/Long Measures have been
valued.

The formula for calculating the Latitude Measure is: Latitude degrees +
Latitude minutes/60 + Latitude seconds/3600. If the Latitude DMS is
valued with a negative number, the calculated Measure will be a negative
number.

The formula for calculating the Longitude Measure is: Longitude
degrees + Longitude minutes/60 + Longitude seconds/3600. If the
Longitude DMS is valued with a negative number, the calculated Measure
will be a negative number.

**OK** If any of the entry fields in the Locational group box contain a
value, the following edits will be enforced:

-   If any of the three Latitude DMS fields are supplied, all three
    fields must contain a numeric value. If not, the error message will
    be **Latitude DMS requires a value for degrees, minutes, and
    seconds.**

-   If any of the three Longitude DMS fields are supplied, all three
    fields must contain a numeric value. If not, the error message will
    be **Longitude DMS requires a value for degrees, minutes, and
    seconds.**

-   If Latitude DMS has a value, Longitude DMS must also have a value.
    If not, the error message will be **Longitude DMS is required when
    Latitude DMS is provided.**

-   If Longitude DMS has a value, Latitude DMS must also have a value.
    If not, the error message will be **Latitude DMS is required when
    Longitude DMS is provided.**

-   If Latitude Measure has a value, Longitude Measure must also have a
    value. If not, the error message will be **Longitude Measure is
    required when Latitude Measure is provided.**

-   If Longitude Measure has a value, Latitude Measure must also have a
    value. If not, the error message will be **Latitude Measure is
    required when Longitude Measure is provided.**

-   If no latitude is provided in any of the three Latitude DMS fields
    nor in the Latitude Measure field, the error message will be
    **Latitude is required in either DMS or Measure.**

-   If no longitude is provided in any of the three Longitude DMS fields
    nor in the Longitude Measure field, the error message will be
    **Longitude** **is required in either DMS or Measure.**

-   If Data Collection Date is after the current date, the following
    error message will be presented: **Date cannot be after today's
    date.**

-   Vertical Measure is required if any of the other entry fields are
    provided in the Vertical Data group box. If other fields are
    provided and Vertical Measure is blank, the error message will be
    **Vertical Measure is required when other Vertical Data is
    provided.**

> If any of the cadastral description fields are populated and Meridian
> Name is not, the following error message will be presented: **Meridian
> Name is required when any Cadastral description field is supplied.**
>
> If a value for Township is provided and there is no entry in the Range
> field, the following error message will be presented: **Range Number
> is required when Township Number is entered.**

If the first three characters of Range are not numeric, the following
error message will be presented: **Range Number is Invalid**.

If the fourth character of Range is not "E" or "W," the following error
message will be presented: **Range Number is Invalid.**

If the first three characters of Township are not numeric, the following
error message will be presented: **Township Number is Invalid.**

If the fourth character of Township is not "N" or "S," the following
error message will be presented: **Township Number is Invalid.**

> If a value for Section is provided and there is no entry in the
> Township field, the following error message will be presented:
> **Township Number is required when Section Number is entered.**
>
> If entry for Section is not between 01 and 36, the following error
> message will be presented: **Valid Values are '01\' through '36\'.**
>
> If a value for Qtr is provided and there is no entry in the Section
> field, the following error message will be presented: **Section Number
> is required when Quarter is entered.**
>
> If a value for Qtr Qtr is provided and there is no entry in the Qtr
> field, the following error message will be presented: **Qtr Section
> Code is required when Qtr Qtr Section Code is entered.**
>
> If a value for Qtr Qtr Qtr is provided and there is no entry in the
> Qtr Qtr field, the following error message will be presented: **Qtr
> Qtr Section Code is required when Qtr Qtr Qtr Section Code is
> entered.**
>
> If a value for Qtr Qtr Qtr Qtr is provided and there is no entry in
> the Qtr Qtr Qtr field, the following error message will be presented:
> **Qtr Qtr Qtr Section Code is required when Qtr Qtr Qtr Qtr Section
> Code is entered.**
>
> *Add mode* If locational detail information has been entered, a
> Locational_Detail row will be created and associated to the water
> system facility. The d_initial_userid, d_initial_timestamp,
> d_last_update_timestamp, and d_userid_code will be set to the current
> values on Locational Detail (TINLOC).

If cadastral data has been entered, a Cadastral Legal Description row
will be created and associated to the water system facility. The
d_initial_userid, d_initial_timestamp, d_last_update_timestamp, and
d_userid_code will be set to the current values on Cadastral Legal
Description (TINCLD).

> *Change mode* If locational detail information has been entered for
> the first time, a Locational_Detail row will be created and associated
> to the water system facility. The d_initial_userid,
> d_initial_timestamp, d_last_update_timestamp, and d_userid_code will
> be set to the current values on Locational Detail (TINLOC).

If changes were made to the locational detail, the Locational_Detail row
will be modified. The d_last_update_timestamp, and d_userid_code will be
set to the current values on Locational Detail (TINLOC)

If cadastral data has been entered for the first time, a Cadastral Legal
Description row will be created and associated to the water system
facility. The d_initial_userid, d_initial_timestamp,
d_last_update_timestamp, and d_userid_code will be set to the current
values on Cadastral Legal Description (TINCLD).

If changes were made to the cadastral data, the Cadastral Legal
Description row will be modified. The d_last_update_timestamp, and
d_userid_code will be set to the current values on Cadastral Legal
Description (TINCLD).

> If all the Locational Detail information was removed (including the
> comment text), the software will assume a delete request. The
> Locational Data Info Delete Confirm dialog box (Exhibit 4-76) will be
> invoked.
>
> ![](media/image82.png){width="4.877083333333333in" height="2.93125in"}

[]{#__RefHeading___Toc139687400 .anchor}**Exhibit 4-76.** Locational
Data Info Delete Confirm

> [Locational Data Info Delete Confirm Buttons:]{.underline}
>
> **OK** Will delete the Locational Data, close the confirmation dialog
> box, and return the user to the WSF Locational Data Maintenance page.
>
> **Note:** If Cadastral Legal Description information exists, it will
> not be deleted.
>
> **Cancel** Will close the Locational Data Info Delete dialog box and
> return the user to the WSF Locational Data Maintenance page.
>
> If all Cadastral Legal Description values are removed, the software
> will assume a delete request. The Cadastral Info Delete Confirm dialog
> box (Exhibit 4-77) will be invoked.
>
> ![](media/image83.png){width="4.875in" height="3.102777777777778in"}

[]{#__RefHeading___Toc139687401 .anchor}**Exhibit 4-77.** Cadastral Info
Delete Confirm

> [Cadastral Info Delete Confirm Buttons:]{.underline}
>
> **OK** Will delete the Cadastral Legal Description, close the
> confirmation dialog box, and return the user to the WSF Locational
> Data Maintenance page.
>
> **Cancel** Will close the Cadastral Info Delete dialog box and return
> the user to the WSF Locational Data Maintenance page.

**Cancel** If no changes have been made to the enterable fields, the
page will close and return the user to the invoking page.

> If changes have been made, the standard Cancel Confirm dialog box will
> be presented.

**Help** Will invoke online Help for this page.

#### Water System Sampling Point Maintenance List

The Sampling Point Maintenance List (Exhibit 4-78) is described below.
This Sampling Point Maintenance List will serve as both a maintenance
list and a selection. In addition, it will list all sampling points for
the selected Water System and will be accessed via the **Sampling
Point** button on the Water System Modification page and various **Go
To** buttons on list and modification pages.

![](media/image84.png){width="5.992361111111111in"
height="3.9506944444444443in"}

[]{#__RefHeading___Toc139687402 .anchor}**Exhibit 4-78.** Sampling Point
Maintenance List

One thousand (1000) Sampling Points will be presented without subsequent
user action. More results can be viewed by using the **View/Next** menu
item. A Sampling Point may be selected in the list box by highlighting
it.

[Protected Fields:]{.underline}

*Number of rows*

*resulting from search*

*criteria entered:* The value in this protected field will show the
number of sampling points that are associated to the selected Water
System.

*Number of rows*

*displayed*: The value in this protected field will indicate the number
of sampling points available for viewing in the list box via the
vertical scroll bar. The list will be display the first 1000 sampling
points that met the search criteria. If the user chooses to view more
sampling points, this will be allowed via the **View/Next**,
**View/Previous** menu items discussed later in this section.

*Number*

*of rows*

*selected:* If the Sampling Point Maintenance List page was invoked as a
multi-select mode Selection page, this will display how many rows
(sampling points) have been selected.

[Water System Group Box:]{.underline}

\[Water System\] No., Name, Federal Type, State Type, Federal Primary
Source.

[Sampling Point List Columns:]{.underline}

Status, WSF State Asgn ID, Facility Name, WSF Type, Sampling Point,
Sampling Point Type, Location, Local Name, Water Type, LCR Tier Level,
LCR Tier Type.

[Default Sort Order:]{.underline}

Activity Status, ascending; WSF State Asgn ID, ascending; Sampling
Point, ascending.

[Menu Items:]{.underline}

**File**

> *Exit* Will close the page and return to the user to the invoking
> page.

**Edit**

*Add* Will present the WSF Maintenance page in single-select mode. After
making a Water System Facility selection, the Sampling Point Maintenance
page will be presented in *Add* mode.

> This option will be available even if a row in the Sampling Point
> Maintenance List box is selected.
>
> *Change* Will present the Sampling Point Maintenance page in *Change*
> mode.

This option will be available only if a row in the Sampling Point
Maintenance List box is selected.

> A double-click on a list box row will react like **Edit/Change**.
>
> *Delete* Will present the Delete Sampling Point confirmation dialog
> box (Exhibit 4-79) requiring the selection of **OK** or **Cancel**.
> This option will be available only if a row in the Sampling Point
> Maintenance List box is selected.
>
> [Delete Sampling Point Buttons:]{.underline}
>
> **OK** Will request delete of the sampling point. The following edit
> checks will be made prior to the deletion:

-   If the Sampling Point is associated to a Waiver, the following error
    message will be presented: **This sampling point is associated with
    a Waiver and cannot be deleted.**

-   If the Sampling Point is associated to a Sample Summary, the
    following error message will be presented: **This sampling point is
    associated with a Sample Summary and cannot be deleted.**

![](media/image85.png){width="5.996527777777778in"
height="4.284027777777778in"}

[]{#__RefHeading___Toc139687403 .anchor}**Exhibit 4-79.** Delete
Sampling Point

-   If the Sampling Point is associated to a Violation, the following
    error message will be presented: **This sampling point is associated
    with a Violation and cannot be deleted.**

-   If the Sampling Point is associated to a Sample, the following error
    message will be presented: **This sampling point is associated a
    Sample, and cannot be deleted.**

-   If the Sampling Point is associated to a Sample Schedule
    Subschedule, the following error message will be presented: **This
    sampling point is associated with a Sample Schedule and cannot be
    deleted.**

-   If the Sampling Point is associated to an MDBP Summary, the
    following error message will be presented: **This sampling point is
    associated with an MDBP Summary and cannot be deleted.**

-   If the Sampling Point is associated to a Sample Plan, the following
    error message will be presented: **This sampling point is associated
    with a Sample Plan and cannot be deleted.**

> Pressing **OK** on any of the error messages will close the dialog box
> and ignore the request to delete the Sampling Point. Processing will
> be interrupted. The Sampling Point association must be resolved before
> the user will be able to delete the Sampling Point.
>
> Once the edit checks have been successfully performed, the software
> will delete the sampling point. The confirmation page will close and
> return the user to the Sampling Point Maintenance List page with this
> sampling point removed from the list.
>
> **Cancel** Will abort the delete request and return the user to the
> Sampling Point Maintenance List page with no modification.
>
> *Select* Will return the user to the previous page (from which the
> Sampling Point Maintenance List page was invoked), with the Sampling
> Point information from the selected row populated on the invoking
> page.

This option will be enabled only if the Sampling Point Maintenance List
was invoked as a selection page and only when one or more rows are
selected in the list box.

**View**

> *Filter by* This option will open the standard filter parameter dialog
> box described in Chapter 1, allowing the user to filter out some of
> the records displayed on the list page by specifying a specific value
> for the filtering fields. Only rows that match the filtering criteria
> value will be displayed in the list.

**Note:** The number of rows displayed on the maintenance list page will
change to show the count of records resulting from the filter. Using
**View/Filter by** will enable **View/Refresh**.

> [Filter by Options:]{.underline}

Activity Status, WSF State Asgn ID, WSF Name, WSF Type, Sampling Point,
Sampling Point Type, Location, LCR Tier Level, and LCR Tier Type.

> *Next* The list box will list only 1000 sampling points at a time. If
> more than 1000 sampling points exist for the Water System, the next
> group of 1000 will be loaded into the list box when the **View/Next**
> menu item is selected.
>
> This option will be available only if more rows are available for
> display. Selecting this menu item will enable the **View/Previous**
> menu item.
>
> *Previous* If more than 1000 sampling points were found and the user
> has requested to view the next 1000 via the **View/Next** menu item,
> the **View/Previous** menu item will re-populate the list box with
> prior group of 1000.
>
> Once the initial 1000 sampling points are displayed, the
> **View/Previous** menu item will be disabled.
>
> *Refresh* Selecting **View/Refresh** will retrieve the unfiltered list
> (original search criteria).
>
> *Sort* Selecting this option will open the standard sort dialog box
> described in Chapter 1, allowing the user to modify the order of the
> displayed sampling points. Three levels of sort will be supported.
>
> [Sort Order Selections:]{.underline}

Activity Status, WSF State Asgn ID, WSF Name, WSF Type, Sampling Point,
Sampling Point Type, Sample Location, LCR Tier Level, and LCR Tier Type.

#### Model Changes for Treatment Plant

No Model changes are intended for this release.

#### Treatment Plant Page Flows

Treatment Plant Modification window of SDWIS/STATE 8.0 is being replaced
with two maintenance pages: the WSF Modification page (Exhibit 4-43) and
the Treatment Plant Maintenance page (Exhibit 4-80). The Treatment Plant
Maintenance page allows users to review or update information specific
to Treatment Plants. The Treatment Unit Maintenance List and Treatment
Unit Flows Maintenance List are being incorporated into the Treatment
Plant Maintenance page, thus eliminating the two separate list pages.
When users press the **More** button on the WSF Modification page and
the WSF is a treatment plant type, the Treatment Plant Maintenance Page
will be presented.

The following changes to treatment plant pages will be implemented in
SSWR1.

-   Users will access the Treatment Plant Maintenance page and
    subsequent pages by pressing the **More** button on the Water System
    Facility (WSF) Maintenance page.

-   The Treatment Plant Maintenance page will contain a list of
    treatment units, treatment unit flows and treatment objectives and
    processes, and a summary of status data from the Microbial Removal
    page.

-   Treatment objectives and processes may now be associated directly to
    a treatment plant WSF record in addition to or in place of the
    existing association to a treatment unit.

-   The Treatment Unit Maintenance page will contain a list of treatment
    objectives and processes associated to the treatment unit.

-   The Microbial Removal page has been expanded to include data for the
    upcoming Filter Backwash Recycling Rule (FBRR), Long Term 2 Surface
    Water Treatment Rule (LT2), and Stage 2 Disinfectant/Disinfection
    By-Products Rule.

-   Treatment Objective and Process Association page has been expanded
    to include an association with an analyte.

-   Treatment Unit Flows have been expanded similar to Water System
    Facility (WSF) Flows to include train and sequence identifiers.

-   New treatment unit child tables can be used to record flow rates,
    measures and indicators.

#### Treatment Plant Maintenance

Exhibit 4-80 depicts the Treatment Plant Maintenance page.

[Protected Fields:]{.underline}

Record updated by/on The User ID and the timestamp from the last time
the record was updated.

Record created by/on The initial User ID and timestamp when the record
was initially added to the database.

![](media/image86.png){width="6.493055555555555in"
height="8.056944444444444in"}

[]{#__RefHeading___Toc139687404 .anchor}**Exhibit 4-80.** Treatment
Plant Maintenance

[Water System Group Box:]{.underline}

The Water System group box will contain the following protected fields:
\[Water System\] No., \[Water System\] Name, Federal Type, State Type,
and Federal Primary Source.

[Water System Facility Group Box:]{.underline}

The Water System Facility group box will contain the following protected
fields: State Asgn ID, Name, Water Type, and Local Name.

[Treatment Objective/Process Associations Group Box:]{.underline}

The Treatment Objective/Process Associations Group Box will contain the
following protected fields: "Records displayed" and "of." The first will
indicate the number Treatment Objective/Process Association rows that
the user can view using the vertical scroll bar while the second will
indicate the total number of Treatment Objective/Process Associations
for the Treatment Plant.

[Microbial Removal Summary Box:]{.underline}

The Microbial Removal Summary group box will contain the following
protected fields: Contact Time Status, Filter Backwash Recycling Rule
Schematic Status, Disinfection Benchmark for Giardia, Disinfection
Benchmark for Viruses, BIN Determination Status, and BIN \[Number.\]

[Entry fields:]{.underline}

Note that the tab order is left to right, top to bottom, and includes
all entry fields and buttons unless otherwise noted.

[Water System Facility Group Box]{.underline}

> *FINDS No.* The number used by the EPA Facility Index System (FINDS)
> to identify the facility.

FINDS No. will be optional*.*

> *Constructed Date* The date the facility construction was completed.
>
> Constructed Date will be optional. It may contain a future date.
>
> *Physical*
>
> *Modified Date* The date the facility was last physically modified.
>
> Modified Date will be optional. The date cannot be in the future. If
> it is, the following error message will be presented when the user
> tabs off the field: **Date may not be after today's date.**

*Directions* An optional free-form text field to provide directions or
further information about the treatment plant.

[Treatment Plant Group Box:]{.underline}

*Filter Type* The user may add/change the filter type by selecting a
value from the dropdown list of values from the TINPVALS table where
TINCODE code_name is "TINTRPLT1". The permanent permitted values for
this field are:

> **Text Value Description**
>
> \<Spaces\>
>
> UF Unfiltered
>
> CF Conventional Filtration
>
> DF Direct Filtration
>
> DE Diatomaceous Earth
>
> OT Other
>
> Additional filter types can be added by the System Administrator.

[Pumps Group Box Entry Fields:]{.underline}

*Pump Type* Will indicate the type of pump. The first seven choices
displayed in the dropdown list are the choices delivered with the
software. Any options after the first seven are state-defined choices,
controlled by the System Administrator. All options (seven delivered
with the software and any state-defined options) will be retrieved from
the TINPVALS table where TINCODE code_name is "PUMPTYPE." Listed below
are descriptions of the preset system choices. The selections available
via the dropdown list will be:

> **Text Value Description**
>
> \<Spaces\>
>
> CF Centrifugal
>
> HP Hand Pump
>
> JT Jet
>
> PD Positive Displacement
>
> SC Screw
>
> SU Submersible
>
> VT Vertical Turbine
>
> Pump Type will be an optional field.

*Description* A free-form text field where the user may enter additional
information regarding the type of pump used at the well.

> Description will be an optional field.

[\[WSF\] Flow Rates Sub-Group Box:]{.underline}

A variety of Flow Rates may be appropriate for a water system facility
(e.g., Approved Design Capacity, Average Production). The list box in
this group box will display the flow rates for the treatment plant
retrieved from the WSF_FLOW_RATE table associated to the displayed
Treatment Plant. The list box will present 4 rows of data at a time and
will display up to 50 rows of flow rates via the vertical scroll bar.
Using the buttons in this group box, a user can add, modify, and delete.
A maximum of 50 flow rates can be added and maintained per treatment
plant. That is to say, this design assumes that there will never be more
than 50 flow rates per Treatment Plant.

[Flow Rates List Columns:]{.underline}

Type, Qty, UOM.

[Flow Rates Default Sort:]{.underline}

Type, ascending.

[Flow Rates Buttons]{.underline}:

**Add** Selecting **Add** will display the WSF Flow Rate Maintenance
page in Add mode. This button will be enabled regardless of a selection
in the list box.

**Change** Selecting **Change** displays the WSF Flow Rate Maintenance
page with the selected record available for change. This button will be
enabled only when a record has been highlighted.

A double-click on a highlighted row will react as a **Change** request.

> **Delete** The **Delete** menu item will be enabled only when a record
> has been highlighted. When selected, the software will display the
> Delete Flow Rate confirmation dialog box (Exhibit 4-52).

[\[WSF\] Measures Sub-Group Box:]{.underline}

[]{.mark}

A variety of Measures may be appropriate for a water system facility.
This group box will contain a scrollable list of Measures for the
Treatment Plant retrieved from the WSF_MEASURES table associated to the
displayed Treatment Plant. The list box will present 4 rows of data at a
time and will display up to 50 rows of measures via the vertical scroll
bar. This design assumes that there will never be more than 50 measures
per Treatment Plant. The list in this group box will display any
measures that have been entered. Using the buttons in this group box, a
user can add, modify, and delete.

[Measures List Columns:]{.underline}

Type, Qty, UOM.

[Measures Default Sort:]{.underline}

Type, ascending.

[Measures Buttons:]{.underline}

[Buttons:]{.underline}

**Add** Selecting **Add** will display the WSF Measure Maintenance page
in Add mode. This button will be enabled regardless of a selection in
the list box.

**Change** Selecting **Change** will display the WSF Measure Maintenance
page with the selected record available for change. This button will be
enabled only when a record has been highlighted.

A double-click on a highlighted row will react as a Change request.

> **Delete** The **Delete** menu item will be enabled only when a record
> has been highlighted. When selected, the software will display the
> Delete Measures confirmation dialog box (Exhibit 4-53).

[]{.mark}

[\[WSF\] Indicators Sub-Group Box:]{.underline}

A variety of Indicators may be appropriate for a water system facility
(e.g., emergency power available, pump conditions). This group box will
contain a scrollable list of Indicators for the Treatment Plant
retrieved from the WSF_INDICATORS table associated to the displayed
Treatment Plant. The list box will present 4 rows of data at a time and
will display up to 50 rows of indicators via the vertical scroll bar.
This design assumes that there will never be more than 50 indicators per
Treatment Plant. Using the buttons in this group box, a user can add,
modify, and delete.

[Indicators List Columns:]{.underline}

Type, Value, Date.

[Indicators Default Sort:]{.underline}

Type, ascending.

[Indicators Buttons:]{.underline}

**Add** Selecting **Add** will display the WSF Indicator Maintenance
page in Add mode. This button will be enabled regardless of a selection
in the list box.

**Change** Selecting **Change** will display the WSF Indicator
Maintenance page with the selected record available for change. This
button will be enabled only when a record has been highlighted.

A double-click on a highlighted row will react as a Change request.

> **Delete** The **Delete** menu item will be enabled only when a record
> has been highlighted. When selected, the software will display the
> Delete Indicator confirmation dialog box (Exhibit 4-54).

[Treatment Units Group Box:]{.underline}

If desired, users can record each piece of equipment (treatment unit)
used in a treatment plant and, if desired, what treatment objective(s)
and process(es) the unit achieves. The list box in the group box will
display the list of existing treatment units for the treatment plant in
single-select mode. Treatment Units can be added, deleted, or
information for existing treatment units can be modified on the page
launched from this list. The list box will display up to 150 Treatment
Units, showing 4 at a time. If more than four records exist, the
vertical scroll bar will be enabled. This design assumes that a
treatment plant will never have more than 150 Treatment Units.

[List Columns:]{.underline}

Name, Type*,* and Subtype

[Default Sort Order:]{.underline}

Name ascending.

[Buttons]{.underline}:

**Add** Selecting **Add** will display the Treatment Unit Maintenance
page in Add mode. This button will be enabled regardless of a selection
in the list box.

**Change** Selecting **Change** will display the Treatment Unit
Maintenance page with the selected record available for change. This
button will be enabled only when a record has been highlighted.

A double-click on a highlighted row will react as a Change request.

**Delete** The **Delete** button will be enabled only when a record has
been highlighted. When selected, the software will display the Delete
Treatment Unit dialog box (Exhibit 4-81), for the selected record and
requiring selection of **OK** or **Cancel**.

> [Delete Treatment Unit Buttons:]{.underline}
>
> **OK** Will delete the Treatment Unit record and all associated
> Treatment Unit Flows (TINUPF), Treatment Objective Process Asgmnt
> (TINTROPA) and Treatment Objective Analyte Association (TINTRUNA)
> records. The confirmation page will close and return the user to the
> Treatment Plant Maintenance page with this record removed from the
> Treatment Unit list.

**Cancel** Will abort the delete request and return the user to the
Treatment Plant Maintenance page with no modifications to the Treatment
Unit list.

![](media/image87.png){width="5.333333333333333in"
height="4.020833333333333in"}

[]{#__RefHeading___Toc139687405 .anchor}**Exhibit 4-81.** Delete
Treatment Unit

[Treatment Unit Flows Group Box:]{.underline}

If desired, users can record how water flows from treatment unit to
treatment unit throughout a treatment plant. The Treatment Unit Flows
group box displays the flows that have been entered and enables the user
to maintain them. The list box will present 4 rows of data at a time and
will display up to 150 rows of Unit Flows via the vertical scroll bar.
This design assumes that there will never be more than 150 Unit Flows
per Treatment Plant. Using the buttons in this group box a user can add,
modify, and delete.

[List Columns:]{.underline}

Train, Seq, Supplying Unit Name, and Receiving Unit Name.

The default Sort order for this list box will be Train \[ID\] ascending,
Seq\[uence ID\] ascending.

[Buttons]{.underline}:

**Add** Selecting **Add** will display the Treatment Unit Flow
Maintenance page in Add mode. This option will be enabled regardless of
a selection in the list box.

**Change** Selecting **Change** will display the Treatment Unit Flow
Maintenance page with the selected record available for change. This
menu item will be enabled only when a record has been highlighted.

A double-click on a highlighted row will react as a Change request.

**Delete** The **Delete** button will be enabled only when a record has
been highlighted. If selected, the software will display the Delete
Treatment Unit Flow dialog box (Exhibit 4-82) for the selected record
and requiring selection of **OK** or **Cancel**.

> [Delete Treatment Unit Flow Buttons:]{.underline}
>
> **OK** Will delete the Treatment Unit Flow (TINUPF) record. The
> confirmation page will close and return the user to the Treatment
> Plant Maintenance page with this record removed from the Treatment
> Unit Flows list.
>
> **Cancel** Will abort the delete request and return the user to the
> Treatment Plant Maintenance page with no modifications to the
> Treatment Unit Flows list.

![](media/image88.png){width="5.333333333333333in"
height="5.208333333333333in"}

[]{#__RefHeading___Toc139687406 .anchor}**Exhibit 4-82.** Delete
Treatment Unit Flow

[Treatment Objective/Process Associations Group Box:]{.underline}

This list will display records of treatment objective/process that are
associated to the plant's treatment units (via the Treatment Objective
Process Assignment (TINTROPA)). The list box will present 4 rows of data
at a time and will display up to 150 rows of Treatment Objective/Process
Associations via the vertical scroll bar. If there are more than 150
Treatment Objective/Process Associations per Treatment Plant the user
must press the expand button to view the Treatment Objective/Process
Association Maintenance List.

[List Columns:]{.underline}

Unit Name, Pri\[mary\] Ind\[icator\], Objective Code, Objective Name,
Process Code, and Process Name

The default Sort order for this list box will be Unit Name ascending,
Objective Code ascending, Process Code ascending.

[Buttons:]{.underline}

**Expand** Will process the Treatment Plant Maintenance page with all
edit checks as if the OK button were pressed and if there are existing
treatment pairing records, the software will present the Unit Treatment
Objective/Process Association Maintenance List, listing all associated
treatment pairing records associated for the Treatment Objective Process
Asgmnt (TINTROPA) for all Treatment Units installed at the Treatment
Plant.

If the list box is empty, the software will present the Unit Treatment
Plant Objective/Process Association Maintenance page in Add mode.

**Microbial Removal** Will process the Treatment Plant Maintenance page
with all edit checks and present the Microbial Removal Maintenance page.

**OK** Will update the Water System Facility record (TINWSF) with
changes made to FINDS No., Constructed Date, Pump Type, Physical
Modification Date, and Directions and update the WSF User ID and
timestamp.

*Add Mode* If the Filter Type has a value a new Treatment Plant
(TINTRPLT) row will be created and associated to the Water System
Facility. The treatment plant's initial User ID, initial timestamp, last
update User ID and last update timestamp will be set to current values.

If the Filter Type does not have a value, no Treatment Plant will be
created.

*Change Mode* The Filter Type will be updated on the Treatment Plant
(TINTRPLT) record and the User ID and last update timestamp will be set
to current values.

**Cancel** If no changes have been made to the enterable fields, the
page will close and return the user to the WSF Modification page.

If changes have been made, the standard Cancel Confirm dialog box will
be presented where a selection of **Yes**, **No**, or **Cancel** will be
required.

**Help** Will invoke online Help for this page.

**Scroll Buttons** Will scroll the list box in the direction of the
arrow displayed on the button.

#### Unit Process Flow Maintenance List

This list has been incorporated into the Treatment Maintenance and will
not be a component of SSWr1.

#### WSF Unit Process Assignment List

This list has been incorporated into the Treatment Maintenance and will
not be a component of SSWr1.

#### Treatment Unit Flow Maintenance

Exhibit 4-83 depicts the Treatment Unit Flow Maintenance page.

![](media/image89.png){width="6.493055555555555in" height="4.45in"}

[]{#__RefHeading___Toc139687407 .anchor}**Exhibit 4-83.** Treatment Unit
Flow Maintenance

[Protected Fields:]{.underline}

Record updated by/on The User ID and the timestamp from the last time
the record was updated.

Record created by/on The initial User ID and timestamp when the record
was initially added to the database.

[Water System Group Box:]{.underline}

The Water System group box will contain the following protected fields:
\[Water System\] No. and Name, Federal Type, State Type, and Federal
Primary Source.

[Water System Facility Group Box:]{.underline}

The Water System Facility group box will contain the following protected
fields: State Asgn ID, Name, Water Type, and Local Name.

[Treatment Plant Group Box:]{.underline}

The Treatment Plant group box will contain the following protected
fields: Filter Type.

[Entry fields:]{.underline}

Note that the tab order is left to right, top to bottom, and includes
all entry fields and buttons unless otherwise noted.

[Treatment Unit Flow Group Box:]{.underline}

*Train ID* An optional five-character code to identify the train or flow
of water through treatment units within the treatment plant.

*Sequence ID* An optional five-character code to identify the sequence
of this treatment unit flow within the train. Sequence ID will follow
Train ID in the tab sequence.

*Connection Type* The user can indicate whether the Treatment Units are
directly connected (e.g., piped with no air gap) or indirectly connected
(e.g., with an air gap). This field is mandatory. If a user does not
specify, the default "Not Specified" will be recorded. The permitted
values are:

> *Direct* A direct physical connection between two Treatment Units.
>
> *Indirect* An indirect connection between two Treatment Units.
>
> *Not Specified* The connection between two Treatment Units is not
> specified.

*Comments* An optional free-form text field where the user may enter
additional information about the Treatment Unit Flow.

[Supplying Unit Group Box:]{.underline}

The Supplying Unit Process group box will contain the Name and Type of
the supplying unit process. Users may enter a Treatment Unit name. When
tabbing off this field after supplying a value, the treatment unit with
a matching name for the same Treatment Plant will be retrieved and the
name and type displayed. If the supplied value is invalid, the Treatment
Unit Selection List (Exhibit 4-100) will be presented in single-select
mode.

A user must select a Supplying Unit. If it is left blank, the error
message will be **Supplying Treatment Unit must not be blank.**

Supplying Unit will be protected in change mode.

[Receiving Unit Group Box:]{.underline}

The Receiving Unit Process group box will contain the Name and Type of
the receiving unit process. Users may enter a Treatment Unit name. When
tabbing off this field after supplying a value, the treatment unit with
a matching name for the same Treatment Plant will be retrieved and the
name and type displayed. If the supplied value is invalid, the Treatment
Unit Selection List will be presented in single-select mode.

A user must select a Receiving Unit. If it is left blank, the error
message will be **Recieving Treatment Unit must not be blank.**

Receiving Unit will be protected in change mode.

[Buttons:]{.underline}

*\[Supplying Treatment Unit\]*

**Go To** Will present the Treatment Unit Selection List.

*\[Receiving Treatment Unit\]*

**Go To** Will present the Treatment Unit Selection List.

**OK**

If the Supplying Treatment Unit and the Receiving Treatment Unit are the
same, the error message will be **Treatment Unit may not flow to
itself.**

*Duplicate Check* If a flow in the same direction already exists between
the two Treatment Units indicated in the supplying and receiving group
boxes, the error message will be **Duplicate Treatment Unit Flow found
between Supplier and Receiver**. For example, Supplying Treatment Unit A
is already flowing to Receiving Treatment Unit B so this would result in
a duplicate. Treatment Unit B could be the supplier with Treatment Unit
A being the receiving and would not result in a duplicate where
Treatment Unit A is supplying to Treatment Unit B.

*Add Mode* The Treatment Unit Flow will be created and associated to the
WATER_SYSTEM_FACILITY and both treatment units. The initial User ID
initial timestamp, last update User ID and last update timestamp will be
set to current values.

*Change Mode* The Treatment Unit Flow will be updated along with the
User ID and timestamp.

> When completed, the Treatment Unit Flow Maintenance page will be
> closed and the Treatment Maintenance page will be will presented.

**Cancel** If no changes have been made to the contact type, the page
will close and return the user to the Treatment Plant Maintenance Page.

> If changes have been made, the standard Cancel confirm dialog box will
> be presented where a selection of **Yes**, **No**, or **Cancel** will
> be required.

**Help** Will invoke online Help for this page.

#### Microbial Removal Maintenance

The Surface Water Treatment Rule, Interim Enhanced Surface Water
Treatment Rule, Long Term 1 and Long Term 2 Surface Water Treatment
Rule, Filter Backwash Recycling Rule, and proposed Groundwater Rule
require water systems to provide specific levels of microbial protection
and/or removal. The Microbial Removal Maintenance page (Exhibit 4-84)
has been expanded to provide a place for users to store information on
microbial removal needed and/or provided at each specific Treatment
Plant.

[Protected Fields:]{.underline}

[Water System Group Box:]{.underline}

The Water System group box will contain the following protected fields:
\[Water System\] No., \[Water System\] Name, Federal Type, State Type,
and Federal Primary Source.

[Water System Facility Group Box:]{.underline}

The Water System Facility group box will contain the following protected
fields: State Asgn ID, Name, Water Type, and Local Name.

[Analyte Removal/Inactivation Group Box]{.underline}

*Rows displayed*

*XX of XX:* This field will show the total number of rows that are
displayed in the list, which may be less than the number of rows that
met the search criteria.

![](media/image90.png){width="6.493055555555555in"
height="6.235416666666667in"}

[]{#__RefHeading___Toc139687408 .anchor}**Exhibit 4-84.** Microbial
Removal Maintenance

Record updated

By/on The User ID and the timestamp from the last time the record was
updated.

Record created

By/on The initial User ID and timestamp when the record was initially
added to the database.

[Entry fields:]{.underline}

Note that the tab order is left to right, top to bottom, and includes
all entry fields and buttons unless otherwise noted.

[Treatment Plant Group Box:]{.underline}

*Filter Type* The user may add/change the filter type by entering a
two-character value or may select from the dropdown list. The permitted
values are retrieved from TINPVALS where code_name = "TINTRPLT1" and are
listed below

> **Text Value Description**
>
> \<Spaces\>

UF Unfiltered

CF Conventional Filtration

> DF Direct Filtration
>
> DE Diatomaceous Earth

OT Other

The filter type field will be optional.

[Contact Time Group Box:]{.underline}

*\[Contact Time\]*

*Status* The status of the contact time determination. The following
permitted values will be available from a dropdown list.

> \<Spaces\>
>
> Required
>
> Not Required
>
> Requested
>
> Received
>
> Under Review
>
> Reviewed
>
> Approved
>
> Determined
>
> Denied
>
> Resubmitted
>
> The Contact Time Status field will be optional.

*\[Contact Time\]*

*Status Date* The date that the contact time status was established. A
calendar function will be provided to aid in selection of a valid date.

In SDWIS/STATE 8.0, Contact Time Date could not be valued with a future
date. In this release these fields will be used to record status, which
could be a future date. Therefore, the edit check to preclude a future
date will be removed.

> The Contact Time Status Date field will be optional.

*Contact Time* The number of minutes the water is in contact with the
disinfectant prior to distribution to consumers; used to calculate the
overall microbial inactivation provided by a treatment plant. Usually
this should include the total contact time for all the process in the
treatment plant.

> The Contact Time field will be optional.

*Disinfectant*

*Concentration*

*\...mg/L* The disinfectant concentration in mg/L.

> The Disinfectant Concentration field will be optional.

*CT Value* The CT value in milligrams per minute per liter
(mg\*min/liter).

The CT value will be optional.

*\[Contact Time\]*

*Comments* A memo field into which a user may enter comments about the
contact time.

The \[Contact Time\] Comments field will be optional.

[Disinfection Profiling Benchmark Group Box]{.underline}:

*\[Giardia Inactivation\]*

*Status* The status of disinfection profile benchmark for Giardia
inactivation.

> \<Spaces\>
>
> Required
>
> Not Required
>
> Requested
>
> Received
>
> Under Review
>
> Reviewed
>
> Approved
>
> Determined
>
> Denied
>
> Resubmitted

Disinfection Benchmark Giardia Inactivation Status field will be
optional.

*\[Giardia\]*

*Inactivation Log* The disinfection profile benchmark for Giardia
inactivation in log format.

The existing attribute, Disinfection Benchmark Giardia Inactivation
field will be optional.

*\[Giardia\]*

*Inactivation %* The disinfection profile benchmark for Giardia
inactivation measured as percent inactivation.

The Disinfection Benchmark Giardia Inactivation Percent field will be
optional.

*\[Giardia\]*

*Status Date* The status date of the Giardia disinfection benchmark. A
calendar function will be provided to aid in selection of a valid date.

In SDWIS/STATE 8.0 Disinfection Benchmark Date could not be valued with
a future date. In this release these fields will be used to record
status (could be a future date). Therefore, the edit check to preclude a
future date will be removed.

> The Disinfection Benchmark Giardia Determination Date field will be
> optional.

*\[Viruses Inactivation\]*

*Status* The status of disinfection profile benchmark for virus
inactivation.

> \<Spaces\>
>
> Required
>
> Not Required
>
> Requested
>
> Received
>
> Under Review
>
> Reviewed
>
> Approved
>
> Determined
>
> Denied
>
> Resubmitted

Disinfection Benchmark Viruses Inactivation Status field will be
optional.

*\[Viruses\]*

*Inactivation Log* The disinfection profile benchmark for virus
inactivation in log format.

The existing attribute, Disinfection Benchmark virus Inactivation field
will be optional.

*\[Viruses\]*

*Inactivation %* A new attribute to store the disinfection profile
benchmark for virus inactivation recorded in percent.

The Disinfection Benchmark virus Inactivation Percent field will be
optional.

*\[Viruses\] Status*

*Date* The status date of the disinfection virus benchmark. A calendar
function will be provided to aid in selection of a valid date.

The Disinfection Benchmark Giardia Determination Date field will be
optional and can be a future date.

*\[Disinfectant*

*Benchmark\]*

*Comments* A memo field into which a user may enter comments about the
Disinfectant Benchmark.

The Disinfectant Benchmark Comments field will be optional.

[Analyte Removal/Inactivation Group Box:]{.underline}

The list box in this group box lists the microbial analytes removed or
inactivated by the treatment plant and information about the amount
removed and/or inactivated. The list will display 3 rows at one time and
will allow the entry and display of up to 10 rows via the vertical
scroll bar. This design assumes that there will never be more than 10
analytes removed associations per Treatment Plant. Using the buttons in
this group box, a user can add, modify, and delete. The default sort
order for the list box will be by analyte name ascending.

[List Columns:]{.underline}

Analyte Name, Removal Credited (concatenation of Removal Credited value
and UOM with a space in between), Removal Achieved (concatenation of
Removal Achieved value and UOM with a space in between), Removal &
Inactivation Required (concatenation of Removal & Inactivation Required
value and UOM with a space in between), and Inactivation Need Count
(concatenation of Inactivation Needed value and UOM with a space in
between).

[BIN Determination Group Box:]{.underline}

*Status* The status of the BIN determination for the Long Term 2 Surface
Water Treatment Rule.

> \<Spaces\>
>
> Required
>
> Not Required
>
> Requested
>
> Received
>
> Under Review
>
> Reviewed
>
> Approved
>
> Determined
>
> Denied
>
> Resubmitted

The BIN Determination status is optional.

*BIN* The BIN number. This field is optional

*\[BIN\] Status*

*Date* The date the status of the BIN Determination. This field is
optional.

[Filter Backwash Recycle Rule Group Box:]{.underline}

*Recycle Schematic*

*Status* If a PWS recycles spent filter backwash water, thickener
supernatant, or liquids from dewatering processes, the PWS owner must,
as part of its notification to the primacy agency, include a \"plant
schematic showing the origin of all flows which are recycled (including,
but not limited to, spent filter backwash water, thickener supernatant,
and liquids from dewatering processes), the hydraulic conveyance used to
transport them, and the location where they are reintroduced back into
the treatment plant.\" (141.76(b)(1)) The status of this submittal for
the treatment plant could be recorded in the Recycle Schematic Status
field.

> \<Spaces\>
>
> Required
>
> Not Required
>
> Requested
>
> Received
>
> Under Review
>
> Reviewed
>
> Approved
>
> Determined
>
> Denied
>
> Resubmitted

This field will be optional.

*Schematic*

*Received* The date that the FBRR schematic was received. A calendar
function will be provided to aid in selection of a valid date.

The \[FBRR\] Schematic Received field will be optional.

*\[Schematic\]*

*Reviewed* The date that the FBRR schematic was reviewed. A calendar
function will be provided to aid in selection of a valid date.

The \[FBRR Schematic\] Reviewed will be optional.

*Alternate Return*

*Location*

*Request Status* The status of a water system's to request for an
alternate location for return of the filter backwash.

> \<Spaces\>
>
> Required
>
> Not Required
>
> Requested
>
> Received
>
> Under Review
>
> Reviewed
>
> Approved
>
> Determined
>
> Denied
>
> Resubmitted

The \[FBRR\] Alternate Return Location Request will be optional.

*Alternate Return*

*Location*

*Request Status Date* The status date for a request to use an alternate
location for return of the filter backwash. A calendar function will be
provided to aid in selection of a valid date.

This field will be optional.

*Corrective*

*Action Required*

*Status* The status of corrective action by the water system as required
by the primacy agency after review of the schematic of the filter
backwash flow in the treatment plant.

> \<Spaces\>
>
> Required
>
> Not Required
>
> Requested
>
> Received
>
> Under Review
>
> Reviewed
>
> Approved
>
> Determined
>
> Denied
>
> Resubmitted

The \[FBRR\] Corrective Action Required Status will be optional.

*Corrective*

*Action Status*

*Date* The status date for the corrective action status. A calendar
function will be provided to aid in selection of a valid date.

The \[FBRR\] Corrective Action Status Date will be optional.

*Comments* A memo field into which a user may enter comments about the
Filter Backwash Recycled Rule.

The \[FBRR\] Comments field will be optional.

[Buttons:]{.underline}

**\[Analyte**

**Removal/Inactivation\]**

**Add** Selecting **Add** will process the Microbial Removal Maintenance
page with all edit checks as if **OK** button was pressed and then
display the TP Analyte Removal/Inactivation Maintenance page in Add
mode. This button will be enabled regardless of a selection in the list
box.

**\[Analyte**

**Removal/Inactivation\]**

**Change** Selecting **Change** will process the Microbial Removal
Maintenance page with all edit checks as if **OK** button was pressed
and then display the TP Analyte Removal Maintenance page with the
selected record available for change. This button will be enabled only
when a record has been highlighted.

A double-click on a highlighted row will react as a Change request.

**\[Analyte**

**Removal/Inactivation\]**

**Delete** Selecting **Delete** will process the Microbial Removal
Maintenance page with all edit checks as if **OK** button was pressed
and then display the Delete Analyte Removal/Inactivation dialog box
shown in Exhibit 4-85 for the selected record, requiring the user to
select **OK** or **Cancel**.

![](media/image91.png){width="4.4375in" height="2.6458333333333335in"}

[]{#__RefHeading___Toc139687409 .anchor}**Exhibit 4-85.** Delete Analyte
Removal/Inactivation

[Buttons:]{.underline}

> **OK** The button will delete the selected Treatment Plant Analyte
> Removal (TINTPAR) record.
>
> **Cancel** The button will abort the delete request and return the
> user to the Microbial Removal Maintenance page with no modification.

**OK** The following edit checks will apply to the **OK** button:

In SDWIS/STATE 8.0, Contact Time Determination Date and Disinfection
Benchmark Determination Date cannot be valued with dates after the date
the record is being added to the database. In this release these fields
will be used to record status, which could be a future date. Therefore,
this edit check will be removed.

If a Treatment Plant (TINTRPLT) record does not exist for this water
system facility:

-   If any entry field on the page contains a value, create a new
    Treatment Plant (TINTRPLT) record as associated to the water system
    facility. The initial User ID, initial timestamp, last update User
    ID and last update timestamp will be set to current values. If ADD
    was clicked on the Analyte Removal/Inactivation list box, proceed to
    the presentation of the TP Analyte Removal/Inactivation Maintenance
    page; otherwise return to the Treatment Plant Maintenance page.

-   If no entry fields on the page contain a value but the Add button
    was clicked on the Analyte Removal/Inactivation list box, create a
    new Treatment Plant (TINTRPLT) record as associated to the water
    system facility. The initial User ID, initial timestamp, last update
    User ID and last update timestamp will be set to current values.
    Proceed to the presentation of the TP Analyte Removal/Inactivation
    Maintenance page.

-   If no entry fields on the page contain a value and the OK button was
    clicked , do not create a new Treatment Plant (TINTRPLT) record.
    Return to the Treatment Plant Maintenance page.

If a Treatment Plant does exist, update the record with the changed
information and set the User ID and lastupdate timestamp to current
values. If Add or Change was clicked on the Analyte Removal/Inactivation
list box, proceed to the presentation of the TP Analyte
Removal/Inactivation Maintenance page; otherwise return to the Treatment
Plant Maintenance page.

**Cancel** If no changes have been made to Microbial Removal, the page
will close and return the user to the Treatment Plant Maintenance page.

> If changes have been made, the standard Cancel Confirm dialog box will
> be presented where a selection of **Yes**, **No**, or **Cancel** will
> be required.

**Help** Will invoke online Help for this page.

#### TP Analyte Removal/Inactivation Maintenance

The Surface Water Treatment Rule, Interim Enhanced Surface Water
Treatment Rule, Long Term 1 and Long Term 2 Surface Water Treatment
Rule, Filter Backwash Recycling Rule, and proposed Groundwater Rule
require water systems to provide specific levels of microbial protection
and/or removal. Primacy agencies need to record the amount of removal
credited to the plant, achieved by the plant, required of the plant, and
the inactivation needed. The TP Analyte Removal/Inactivation Maintenance
page (Exhibit 4-86) will be provided as a place for users to store this
information for each specific Treatment Plant. It is accessed from the
Microbial Removal Maintenance page by selecting either Add or Change in
the Analyte Removal/Inactivation group box.

![](media/image92.png){width="6.493055555555555in" height="4.45in"}

[]{#__RefHeading___Toc139687410 .anchor}**Exhibit 4-86.** TP Analyte
Removal/Inactivation Maintenance

[Protected Fields:]{.underline}

[Water System Group Box:]{.underline}

The Water System group box will contain the following protected fields:
\[Water System\] No, \[Water System\] Name, Federal Type, State Type,
and Federal Primary Source.

[Water System Facility Group Box:]{.underline}

The Water System Facility group box will contain the following protected
fields: State Asgn ID, Name, Water Type, and Local Name.

[Treatment Plant Group Box:]{.underline}

The Treatment Plant group box will contain the following protected
fields: Filter Type.

[Treatment Plant Analyte Removal Group Box:]{.underline}

*\[Analyte\] Name* The name of the analyte code selected.

*\[Removal Achieved*

*Unit of Measure\]* The unit of measure (UOM) code for the amount of
analyte removal achieved by the treatment plant. The unit of measure is
maintained in one field, Removal Credited \[UOM\], but is displayed
three additional times with Removal Achieved, Removal and Inactivation
Required, and Inactivation Needed for clarity.

*\[Removal and*

*Inactivation Required*

*Unit of Measure\]* The unit of measure (UOM) code for the amount of
analyte removed and inactivated by the treatment plant. The unit of
measure is maintained in one field, Removal Credited \[UOM\], but is
displayed three additional times with Removal Achieved, Removal and
Inactivation Required, and Inactivation Needed for clarity.

*\[Inactivation Needed*

*Unit of Measure\]* The unit of measure (UOM) code for the amount of
analyte inactivation needed. The unit of measure is maintained in one
field, Removal Credited \[UOM\], but is displayed three additional times
with Removal Achieved, Removal and Inactivation Required, and
Inactivation Needed for clarity.

*Record updated*

*By/on* The User ID and the timestamp from the last time the record was
updated.

*Record created*

*By/on* The initial User ID and timestamp when the record was initially
added to the database.

[Entry fields:]{.underline}

Note that the tab order is left to right, top to bottom, and includes
all entry fields and buttons unless otherwise noted.

[Treatment Plant Analyte Removal Group Box:]{.underline}

*Analyte Code* The analyte code for which the result is going to be
entered. If the value input is not a valid analyte, the analyte
maintenance list will be displayed in single-select mode. The analyte
maintenance list will display only analyte codes where

For federal analyte codes (ownership of "HQ") display type codes of (OC,
IOC, WQ, RA, MOR). For state analyte codes display type codes of (OC,
IOC, WQ, RA, MOR, OT).

When the valid analyte code is found, the analyte name will be
populated.

This is a required field. If it is left blank, the error message will be
**Analyte Code is required field.**

This field will be protected in change-mode.

*Removal Credited* The amount of analyte removal credited to the
treatment plant.

The Removal Credited is optional.

*\[Removal Credited*

*UOM\]* The unit of measure (UOM) code for the amount of analyte removal
credited to the treatment plant. The unit of measure is maintained in
one field, Removal Credited \[UOM\], but is displayed three additional
times with Removal Achieved, Removal and Inactivation Required, and
Inactivation Needed for clarity.

The Removal Credited Unit of Measure is required.

*Removal Achieved* The amount of analyte removal achieved by the
treatment plant.

The Removal Achieved is optional.

*Removal and*

*Inactivation Required* The amount of analyte removal credited to the
treatment plant

The Removal and Inactivation Required is optional.

*Inactivation Needed* The amount of Inactivation Needed by the treatment
plant.

The Inactivation Needed is optional.

*Comments* A memo field into which a user may enter comments about the
Analyte Removal/Inactivation.

The comments field is optional.

[Buttons:]{.underline}

*\[Analyte\]*

**Go To** Will present the Analyte Maintenance List in single-select
mode. The analyte maintenance list will display only analyte codes where
the type_code equals "OC," "IOC," or "WQ" or where the State Code for
the Analyte is not equal to HQ and its type_code is "OT."

**OK** The following edit checks will apply to the **OK** button.

*Duplicate Check* If the Treatment Plant already has a Treatment Plant
Analyte Removal (TINTPAR) for the specified analyte code, the error
message will be **A Removal association already exists between this
Treatment Plant and Analyte.**

*Add Mode* If the analyte is not valued, provide an exit error
statement: **Analyte code is required.**

If the unit of measure is not valued, provide an exit error statement:
**Unit of Measure is required.**

If none of the Removal Credited, Removal Achieved, Removal and
Inactivation Required or Inactivation Needed are valued, provide an exit
error statement: **At least one of the Removal or Inactivation counts is
required.**

If analyte, unit of measure and one of the removal fields are valued,
create a record in the Treatment Plant Analyte Removal (TINPAR) table
associating to the treatment plant and to the analyte and store the four
removal values, unit of measure, and comments.

*Change Mode* Perform all edit checks as Add mode and update the last
update timestamp and User ID.

**Cancel** If no changes have been made on the TP Analyte
Removal/Inactivation Maintenance page, it will close and return the user
to the Microbial Removal Maintenance page.

> If changes have been made, the standard Cancel Confirm dialog box will
> be presented where a selection of **Yes**, **No**, or **Cancel** will
> be required.

**Help** Will invoke online Help for this page.

#### Treatment Unit Process Maintenance List

This list has been incorporated into the Treatment Maintenance page and
will not be a component of SSWr1.

#### Treatment Unit Maintenance

Exhibit 4-87 depicts the Treatment Unit Maintenance page.

[Protected Fields:]{.underline}

[Water System Group Box:]{.underline}

The Water System group box will contain the following protected fields:
\[Water System\] No., \[Water System\] Name, Federal Type, State Type,
and Federal Primary Source.

[Water System Facility Group Box:]{.underline}

The Water System Facility group box will contain the following protected
fields: State Asgn ID, Name, Water Type, and Local Name.

[Treatment Plant Group Box:]{.underline}

The Treatment Plant group box will contain the following protected
fields: Filter Type.

[Treatment Unit Flow Rates Group Box:]{.underline}

*Records displayed*

*XX of XX:* This field will show the total number of rows that are
displayed in the list.

[Treatment Unit Measures Group Box:]{.underline}

*Records displayed*

*XX of XX:* This field will show the total number of rows that are
displayed in the list.

[Treatment Unit Indicators Group Box:]{.underline}

*Records displayed*

*XX of XX:* This field will show the total number of rows that are
displayed in the list.

[Treatment Objective Process Associations Group Box:]{.underline}

*Records displayed*

*XX of XX:* This field will show the total number of rows that are
displayed in the list, which may be less than the number of rows that
met the search criteria.

[Treatment Objective Process Associated Analytes Group Box:]{.underline}

*Records displayed*

*XX of XX:* This field will show the total number of rows that are
displayed in the list, which may be less than the number of rows that
met the search criteria.

*Record updated*

*By/on* The User ID and the timestamp from the last time the record was
updated.

*Record created*

*By/on* The initial User ID and timestamp when the record was initially
added to the database.

![](media/image93.png){width="6.493055555555555in"
height="8.20138888888889in"}\'

[]{#__RefHeading___Toc139687411 .anchor}**Exhibit 4-87.** Treatment Unit
Maintenance

[Entry fields:]{.underline}

Note that the tab order is left to right, top to bottom, and includes
all entry fields and buttons unless otherwise noted.

*Type* Will describe the type of treatment unit. User will be able to
choose from a drop-down list of permitted values displaying the
three-character code and name. Permitted entries retrieved from the
TINPVAL table where TINCODE code_name = "UNITTYPE".

> Type will be a required field. If it is not valued, the following
> error message will be presented: **Treatment Unit** **Type must not be
> blank.**

*\[Treatment*

*Unit\] Name* The name of the treatment unit for the treatment plant
facility.

> Treatment Unit Name will be a required field. If it is not valued, the
> following error message will be presented: **Treatment Unit Name must
> not be blank.** The name will also be used to ensure uniqueness within
> the Treatment Plant WSF. If a treatment unit already exists for this
> treatment plant with the same name, the following error message will
> be presented: **Duplicate Treatment Facility Unit Name was found.**

*Subtype* A second classification of the Treatment Unit. User will
choose from a drop-down list of permitted values displaying the
three-character code and name. Permitted entries will be retrieved from
the TINPVALs table where TINCODE code_name = "UNITSUBTYP".

The Subtype field will be optional.

*Continuous*

*Disinfection* The type of continuous disinfectant monitor used in the
treatment process.

> The Continuous Disinfection field will be optional.

*Filter Media Type* The type of media used in the filtration process.
User will choose from a drop-down list of permitted values displaying
the two-character code and name. Permitted entries will retrieved from
the TINPVALs table where TINCODE code_name = "FILTER_MED".

Filter Media Type will be an optional field.

*Aerator Type* A code that indicates the type of aerator used in the
treatment unit. User will choose from a drop-down list of permitted
values displaying the two-character code and name. Permitted entries
will be retrieved from the TINPVALs table where TINCODE code_name =
"AERATOR_CD".

> The Aerator Type field will be optional.

*Sludge Removal*

*Type* Will indicate the type of sludge‑removing equipment used in the
treatment unit. User will choose from a drop-down list of permitted
values displaying the two-character code and name. Permitted entries
will be retrieved from the TINPVALs table where TINCODE code_name =
"SLUDGE_CD".

The Sludge Removal Type field will be optional.

*Basin Count* The actual number of basins (units) in a treatment unit.

> The Basin Count field will be optional.

*Subunit Count* The number of subunits within the treatment unit.

> The Subunit Count field will be optional.

*Description* The comments or detailed description of the treatment
unit.

The Description field will be optional.

[List Boxes:]{.underline}

[Treatment Unit Flow Rates Sub-Group Box:]{.underline}

A variety of flow rates may be appropriate for a treatment unit (e.g.,).
The list box in this group box will display the flow rates for the
Treatment Unit retrieved from the TREATMENT_UNIT_FLOW_RATE table
associated to the displayed Treatment Unit. The list box will present 7
rows of data at a time and will display up to 50 rows of measures via
the vertical scroll bar. Using the buttons in this group box, a user can
add, modify, and delete. A maximum of 50 flow rates can be added and
maintained per Treatment Unit. That is to say, that this design assumes
that there will never be more than 50 flow rates per Treatment Unit.

[Treatment Unit Flow Rates List Columns:]{.underline}

Type, Qty, UOM.

[Treatment Unit Flow Rates Default Sort:]{.underline}

Type, ascending.

[Treatment Unit Flow Rates Buttons]{.underline}:

**Add** Selecting **Add** will process the Treatment Unit Maintenance
page with all edit checks as if **OK** button was pressed and then
display the Treatment Unit Flow Rate Maintenance page in Add mode. This
button will be enabled regardless of a selection in the list box.

**Change** Selecting **Change** display the Treatment Unit Flow Rate
Maintenance page with the selected record available for change. This
button will be enabled only when a record has been highlighted.

A double-click on a highlighted row will react as a **Change** request.

**Delete** The **Delete** menu item will be enabled only when a record
has been highlighted. When selected, the software will display the
Delete Treatment Unit Flow Rate confirmation dialog box (Exhibit 4-88),
for the selected record and require selection of **OK** or **Cancel**.

> ![](media/image94.png){width="4.0in" height="3.0625in"}

[]{#__RefHeading___Toc139687412 .anchor}**Exhibit 4-88.** Delete
Treatment Unit Flow Rate

[Delete Unit Treatment Unit Flow Rate Buttons:]{.underline}

> **OK** Delete the requested Treatment Unit Flow Rate record. The
> confirmation page will close and return the user to the Treatment Unit
> Maintenance page with this record removed from the Treatment Unit Flow
> Rate list.

**Cancel** Will abort the delete request and return the user to the
Treatment Unit Maintenance page with no modifications to the Treatment
Unit Flow Rate list.

[Treatment Unit Measures Sub-Group Box:]{.underline}

[]{.mark}

A variety of Measures may be appropriate for a treatment unit. This
group box will contain a scrollable list of Measures for the Treatment
Unit retrieved from the TREATMENT_UNIT_MEASURES table associated to the
displayed Treatment Unit. The list box will present 7 rows of data at a
time and will display up to 50 rows of measures via the vertical scroll
bar. This design assumes that there will never be more than 50 measures
per Treatment Unit. The list in this group box will display any measures
that have been entered. Using the buttons in this group box, a user can
add, modify, and delete.

[Treatment Unit Measures List Columns:]{.underline}

Type, Qty, UOM.

[Treatment Unit Measures Default Sort:]{.underline}

Type, ascending.

[Treatment Unit Measures Buttons:]{.underline}

**Add** Selecting **Add** will process the Treatment Unit Maintenance
page with all edit checks as if **OK** button was pressed and then
display the Treatment Unit Measure Maintenance page in Add mode. This
button will be enabled regardless of a selection in the list box.

**Change** Selecting **Change** will display the Treatment Unit Measure
Maintenance page with the selected record available for change. This
button will be enabled only when a record has been highlighted.

A double-click on a highlighted row will react as a Change request.

**Delete** The **Delete** menu item will be enabled only when a record
has been highlighted. When selected, the software will display the
Delete Treatment Unit Measure confirmation dialog box (Exhibit 4-89),
for the selected record and require selection of **OK** or **Cancel**.

> ![](media/image95.png){width="3.9791666666666665in" height="3.0625in"}

[]{#__RefHeading___Toc139687413 .anchor}**Exhibit 4-89.** Delete
Treatment Unit Measure

[Delete Unit Treatment Unit Measure Buttons:]{.underline}

> **OK** Delete the requested Treatment Unit Measure record. The
> confirmation page will close and return the user to the Treatment Unit
> Maintenance page with this record removed from the Treatment Unit
> Measure list.

**Cancel** Will abort the delete request and return the user to the
Treatment Unit Maintenance page with no modifications to the Treatment
Unit Measure list.

[]{.mark}

[Treatment Unit Indicators Sub-Group Box:]{.underline}

A variety of Indicators may be appropriate for a treatment unit (e.g.,
emergency power available, pump conditions). This group box will contain
a scrollable list of Indicators for the Treatment Unit retrieved from
the TREATMENT_UNIT_INDICATORS table associated to the displayed
Treatment Unit. The list box will present 7 rows of data at a time and
will display up to 50 rows of indicators via the vertical scroll bar.
This design assumes that there will never be more than 50 indicators per
Treatment Unit. Using the buttons in this group box, a user can add,
modify, and delete.

[Treatment Unit Indicators List Columns:]{.underline}

Type, Value, Date.

[Treatment Unit Indicators Default Sort:]{.underline}

Type, ascending.

[Treatment Unit Indicators Buttons:]{.underline}

**Add** Selecting **Add** will process the Treatment Unit Maintenance
page with all edit checks as if **OK** button was pressed and then
display the Treatment Unit Indicator Maintenance page in Add mode. This
button will be enabled regardless of a selection in the list box.

**Change** Selecting **Change** will display the Treatment Unit
Indicator Maintenance page with the selected record available for
change. This button will be enabled only when a record has been
highlighted.

A double-click on a highlighted row will react as a Change request.

**Delete** The **Delete** menu item will be enabled only when a record
has been highlighted. When selected, the software will display the
Delete Treatment Unit Indicator confirmation dialog box (Exhibit 4-90),
for the selected record and require selection of **OK** or **Cancel**.

> ![](media/image96.png){width="4.0in" height="3.0625in"}

[]{#__RefHeading___Toc139687414 .anchor}**Exhibit 4-90.** Delete
Treatment Unit Indicator

[Delete Treatment Unit Indicator Buttons:]{.underline}

> **OK** Delete the requested Treatment Unit Indicator record. The
> confirmation page will close and return the user to the Treatment Unit
> Maintenance page with this record removed from the Treatment Unit
> Indicator list.
>
> **Cancel** Will abort the delete request and return the user to the
> Treatment Unit Maintenance page with no modifications to the Treatment
> Unit Indicator list.

[Treatment Objective/Process Association List Box]{.underline}

In this list box, only Valid Treatment Objective/Process pairings that
have been associated to the current Treatment Unit (via the Treatment
Objective Process Asgmnt (TINTROPA) will be displayed. The list box will
present 4 rows of data at a time and will display up to 150 rows of
Treatment Objective/Process Associations via the vertical scroll bar. If
there are more than 150 Treatment Objective/Process Associations per
Treatment Unit the user must press the expand button to view the
Treatment Objective/Process Association Maintenance List.

[List Columns:]{.underline}

Primary, Obj\[ective\] Code, Objective Name, Process Code, and Process
Name.

[Default Sort Order]{.underline}

Obj Code ascending, Process Code ascending

[Treatment Objective Process Associated Analyte List Box]{.underline}

When an objective/process pair is highlighted in the Treatment
Objective/Process Association List box the analytes associated to the
pair (via the Treatment Objective Analyte Association (TINTRUNA) table)
will be displayed in this list box. The maximum number of associations
between analytes and a single Objective/Process pairing is ten.

[List Columns:]{.underline}

\[Analyte\] Code, \[Analyte\] Name, Removed/Added Ind, Measure \[of
amount removed/inactivated or added\], and UOM.

If the Removed/Added Indicator equals "R" display "Removed", if equals
"A" display "Added."

[Default Sort Order]{.underline}

Analyte Code ascending

[Buttons:]{.underline}

**Expand** Will present the Treatment Objective/Process Maintenance List
with only Treatment Objective/Processes associated to this Treatment
Unit listed.

**OK**

*Duplicate Check* The duplicate check will look for an existing record
with matching Name associated to the same Water System Facility. If one
is found, the following error message will be presented: **Duplicate
Treatment Unit was found**.

*Add Mode* The Treatment Unit will be created and associated to the
WATER_SYSTEM_FACILITY.

*Change Mode* The Treatment Unit will be updated.

> When completed, the Treatment Unit Maintenance page will be closed and
> the Treatment Plant Maintenance page will be will presented.

**Cancel** If no changes have been made to the enterable fields, the
page will close and return the user to the Treatment Plant Maintenance
page.

> If changes have been made, the standard Cancel Confirm dialog box will
> be presented where a selection of **Yes, No**, or **Cancel** will be
> required.

**Help** Will invoke online Help for this page.

#### Treatment Unit Flow Rate Maintenance

Exhibit 4-91 depicts the Treatment Unit Flow Rate Maintenance page which
is accessed from the Treatment Unit Maintenance page. This page will
allow the user to add or modify flow rate information for the Treatment
Unit. The user will access this page via the **Add** or **Change**
buttons on the Treatment Unit Flow Rate List box. Users will be
presented this page in either *Add* or *Change* mode - the title of the
page will display *Add* or *Change* for clarity. In *Add* mode, the user
will value the fields. In *Change* mode, the fields will be populated
with the information from the selected row. In *Change* mode, some
fields will be modifiable; others will be protected from change.

![](media/image97.png){width="6.493055555555555in" height="4.45in"}

[]{#__RefHeading___Toc139687415 .anchor}**Exhibit 4-91.** Treatment Unit
Flow Rate Maintenance

[Protected Fields:]{.underline}

[Water System Group Box:]{.underline}

The Water System group box will contain the following protected fields:
\[Water System\] No., \[Water System\] Name, Federal Type, State Type,
and Primary Federal Source.

[Water System Facility Group Box:]{.underline}

The Water System Facility group box will contain the following protected
fields: State Asgn ID, Name, Water Type, and Local Name.

[Treatment Plant Group Box:]{.underline}

The Treatment Plant group box will contain the following protected
fields: Filter Type.

[Treatment Unit Group Box:]{.underline}

The Treatment Unit group box will contain the following protected
fields: \[Treatment Unit\] Name, \[Treatment Unit\] Type \[Name\], and
\[Treatment Unit\] Subtype \[Name\]

*Record updated*

*By/on* The User ID and the timestamp from the last time the record was
updated.

*Record created*

*By/on* The initial User ID and timestamp when the record was initially
added to the database.

[Entry Fields:]{.underline}

Note that the tab order is left to right, top to bottom, and includes
all entry fields and buttons unless otherwise noted.

*\[Flow Rate\]*

*Type* The type of flow rate. The user may add/change the flow rate type
by selecting a value from the drop down list. The values will be
retrieved from the TINPVALs table where code_name = "UNT_FLW_RT".

This is a required field. If it is left blank, the error message will be
**Flow Rate Type may not be left blank.**

This field will be protected in change mode.

*\[Flow Rate\]*

*Quantity* The numeric quantification of the Flow Rate.

> This is an optional field.

*\[Flow Rate\]*

*UOM* The unit of measure (UOM) code for the flow rate quantity. The
permitted values will be:

> **Text Value Description**
>
> ACF Acre Feet
>
> GAL Gallons
>
> GPD Gallons per Day
>
> GPM Gallons per Min
>
> MGL Million Gallons
>
> MGD Million Gallons per Day
>
> MGM Million Gallons per Min
>
> GPMPF Gallons per Minute per Foot
>
> MGDPF2 Million Gallons per Day per Square Feet
>
> LBPF2 Pounds (LB) per Square Feet
>
> RPM Revolutions per Minute
>
> LBPMG pounds (LB) per Million Gallons
>
> FPM Feet per Minute
>
> Flow Rate UOM will be an optional field.

[Buttons:]{.underline}

**OK** The following edit checks will apply to the **OK** button.

If a Quantity is provided, the UOM may not be left blank. If it is the
error message will be **UOM is required with provided Quantity.**

*Duplicate Check* If an association already exists for this Treatment
Unit with the same flow rate type, the following error message will be
presented: **Duplicate Treatment Unit and Flow Rate Type Association was
found.**

*Add Mode* If the Flow Rate Type is not valued, the following error
message will be presented: **Flow Rate Type must not be blank.** The
flow rate type will also be used to ensure uniqueness within the
Treatment Unit.

Create a record in the Treatment Unit Flow Rate table (TINTUFR)
associating to the treatment unit. Return to the Treatment Unit
Maintenance page.

*Change Mode* Perform all edit checks as Add mode and update the last
update timestamp and User ID in addition to the modified Treatment Unit
Flow Rate values.

**Cancel** If no changes have been made the page will close and return
the user to the Treatment Unit Maintenance page.

> If changes have been made, the standard Cancel Confirm dialog box will
> be presented where a selection of **Yes, No**, or **Cancel** will be
> required.

**Help** Will invoke online Help for this page.

#### Treatment Unit Measure Maintenance

Exhibit 4-92 depicts the Treatment Unit Measure Maintenance page. This
page will allow the user to add or modify measure information for the
Treatment Unit. The user will access this page via the **Add** or
**Change** buttons on the Treatment Unit Measures List box. Users will
be presented this page in either *Add* or *Change* mode - the title of
the page will display *Add* or *Change* for clarity. In *Add* mode, the
user will value the fields. In *Change* mode, the fields will be
populated with the information from the selected row. In *Change* mode,
some fields will be modifiable; others will be protected from change.
See description below for details. The treatment unit Measure
Maintenance, which is accessed from the treatment unit Maintenance page.

![](media/image98.png){width="6.493055555555555in" height="4.45in"}

[]{#__RefHeading___Toc139687416 .anchor}**Exhibit 4-92.** Treatment Unit
Measure Maintenance

[Protected Fields:]{.underline}

[Water System Group Box:]{.underline}

The Water System group box will contain the following protected fields:
\[Water System\] No., \[Water System\] Name, Federal Type, State Type,
and Primary Federal Source.

[Water System Group Box:]{.underline}

The Treatment Plant group box will contain the following protected
fields: State Asgn ID, Name, Water Type, and Local Name.

[Treatment Plant Group Box:]{.underline}

The Treatment Plant group box will contain the following protected
fields: Filter Type.

[Treatment Unit Group Box:]{.underline}

The Treatment Unit group box will contain the following protected
fields: Name, Type, and Subtype.

*Record updated*

*By/on* The User ID and the timestamp from the last time the record was
updated.

*Record created*

*By/on* The initial User ID and timestamp when the record was initially
added to the database.

[Entry Fields:]{.underline}

Note that the tab order is left to right, top to bottom, and includes
all entry fields and buttons unless otherwise noted.

*\[Measure\]*

*Type* The type of measure. The user may add/change the measure type by
selecting a value from the drop down list. The values will be retrieved
from the TINPVALs table where TINCODE code_name = "UNT_MEASUR".

This is a required field. If it is left blank, the error message will be
**Measure Type may not be left blank.**

This field will be protected in change mode.

*\[Measure\]*

*Quantity* The numeric quantification of the Measure.

> This is an optional field.

*\[Measure\]*

*UOM* The unit of measure (UOM) code for the measure. Permitted values:

> **Text Value Description**
>
> IN Inches
>
> FT Feet
>
> YD Yards
>
> MIL Miles
>
> CC Cubic Centimeters
>
> CFT Cubic Feet
>
> GAL Gallons
>
> ACF Acre Feet
>
> HRS Hours
>
> MIN Minutes
>
> SEC Seconds

MML Mg\*Min/L

The unit of measure is optional.

[Buttons:]{.underline}

**OK** The following edit checks will apply to the **OK** button.

If a Quantity is provided, the UOM may not be left blank. If it is the
error message will be **UOM is required with provided Quantity.**

*Duplicate Check* If an association already exists for this treatment
unit with the same measure type, the following error message will be
presented: **Duplicate Treatment Unit and Measure Type Association was
found.**

*Add Mode* If the Measure Type is not valued, the following error
message will be presented: **Measure Type may not be blank.** The
measure type will also be used to ensure uniqueness within the treatment
unit.

Create a record in the Treatment Unit Measure (TINTUMSR) table
associating to the treatment unit. Return to the Treatment Unit
Maintenance page.

*Change Mode* Perform all edit checks as Add mode and update the last
update timestamp and User ID in addition to the modified Treatment Unit
Measure fields.

**Cancel** If no changes have been made the page will close and return
the user to the Treatment Unit Maintenance page.

> If changes have been made, the standard Cancel Confirm dialog box will
> be presented where a selection of **Yes, No**, or **Cancel** will be
> required.

**Help** Will invoke online Help for this page.

#### Treatment Unit Indicator Maintenance

The Treatment Unit Indicator Maintenance page (Exhibit 4-93) will allow
the user to add or modify indicators for the Treatment Unit. The user
will access this page via the **Add** or **Change** buttons on the
Treatment Unit Indicators List box. Users will be presented this page in
either *Add* or *Change* mode - the title of the page will display *Add*
or *Change* for clarity. In *Add* mode, the user will value the fields.
In *Change* mode, the fields will be populated with the information from
the selected row. In *Change* mode, some fields will be modifiable;
others will be protected from change. See description below for details.
The Treatment Unit Indicator Maintenance page is accessed from the
Treatment Unit Maintenance page.

[Protected Fields:]{.underline}

[Water System Group Box:]{.underline}

The Water System group box will contain the following protected fields:
\[Water System\] No., \[Water System\] Name, Federal Type, State Type,
and Primary Federal Source.

[Water System Facility Group Box:]{.underline}

The Water System Facility group box will contain the following protected
fields: State Asgn ID, Name, Water Type, and Local Name.

![](media/image99.png){width="6.493055555555555in" height="4.45in"}

[]{#__RefHeading___Toc139687417 .anchor}**Exhibit 4-93.** Treatment Unit
Indicator Maintenance

[Treatment Plant Group Box:]{.underline}

The Treatment Plant group box will contain the following protected
fields: Filter Type.

[Treatment Unit Group Box:]{.underline}

The Treatment Unit group box will contain the following protected
fields: Name, Type, and Subtype.

*Record updated*

*By/on* The User ID and the timestamp from the last time the record was
updated.

*Record created*

*By/on* The initial User ID and timestamp when the record was initially
added to the database.

[Entry Fields:]{.underline}

Note that the tab order is left to right, top to bottom, and includes
all entry fields and buttons unless otherwise noted.

*\[Indicator\]*

*Type* The type of indicator. The user may add the indicator type by
selecting a value from the drop down list. The values will be retrieved
from the TINPVALs table where TINCODE code_name = "UNT_IND".

> This is a required field. If it is left blank, the error message will
> be **Indicator Type may not be left blank.**
>
> This field will be protected in change mode.

*Value* The value of the Indicator. Permitted values available in the
dropdown are:

> **Text Value Description**
>
> YES
>
> NO
>
> UNK Unknown
>
> AVBL Available
>
> NOABL Not Available
>
> POOR
>
> AVG Average
>
> SUPR Superior
>
> PRFCT Perfect
>
> ADQTE Adequate
>
> INSFT Insufficient
>
> Treatment Unit Indicator Value will be an optional field.

*Date* The date associated to the indicator.

> Date will be an optional field.

[Buttons:]{.underline}

**OK** The following edit checks will apply to the **OK** button.

*Duplicate Check* If an association already exists for this treatment
unit with the same indicator type, the following error message will be
presented: **Duplicate Treatment Unit and Indicator Type Association was
found.**

*Add Mode* If the Indicator Type is not valued, the following error
message will be presented: **Indicator Type must not be blank.** The
indicator type will also be used to ensure uniqueness within the
treatment unit.

Create a record in the Treatment Unit Indicator table (TINTUIND)
associating to the treatment unit. Return to the Treatment Unit
Maintenance page.

*Change Mode* Perform all edit checks as Add mode and update the last
update timestamp and User ID in addition to the modified Treatment Unit
Indicator fields.

**Cancel** If no changes have been made the page will close and return
the user to the Treatment Unit Maintenance page.

> If changes have been made, the standard Cancel Confirm dialog box will
> be presented where a selection of **Yes**, **No**, or **Cancel** will
> be required.

**Help** Will invoke online Help for this page.

#### Unit Treatment Obj/Process Association Maintenance List

The Unit Treatment Obj/Process Association Maintenance List (Exhibit
4-94) will be accessed by pressing the **Expand** button in the
Treatment Objective Associations List box page on either the Treatment
Plant Maintenance page or the Treatment Unit Maintenance page. If
accessed from the Treatment Plant Maintenance page, all Treatment
Objective/Process Association for all treatment units associated to the
Treatment Plant will be listed. If accessed from the Treatment Unit
Maintenance page, will display a list of treatment objective and process
associated only to this treatment unit.

![](media/image100.png){width="6.493055555555555in" height="4.45in"}

[]{#__RefHeading___Toc139687418 .anchor}**Exhibit 4-94.** Unit Treatment
Objective/Process Association Maintenance List

If no records are found for the treatment unit provide an exit error
statement "No Treatment Objective/Process associated to Unit found."

[Protected Fields]{.underline}

[Water System Group Box:]{.underline}

The Water System group box will contain the following protected fields:
\[Water System\] No, \[Water System\] Name, Federal Type, State Type,
and Federal Primary Source.

[Water System Facility Group Box:]{.underline}

The Water System Facility group box will contain the following protected
fields: State Asgn ID, Name, Local Name, and Water Type.

[Treatment Plant Group Box:]{.underline}

The Treatment Plant group box will contain the following protected
fields: Filter Type.

[Treatment Objective/Process Associations Group Box:]{.underline}

The list box in this group box will present all the valid treatment
objective/process pairings that have been assigned to the treatment unit
via the Treatment Objective Process Asgmnt (TINTROPA) and will enable a
user to add, change or delete. This design assumes that there will never
be more than 150 pairings per treatment unit.

[Protected Fields:]{.underline}

*Number of rows*

*resulting from search*

*criteria used:* The value in this protected field will show the number
of records that met the search criteria.

*Number of rows*

*Displayed*: The value in this protected field will indicate the number
of treatment objective/process associations available for viewing in the
list box via the vertical scroll bar. The list will be display up to 150
associations.

[List Columns]{.underline}:

Unit Type, Unit Name, Pri\[mary\] Ind, Objective Code, Objective Name,
Process Code, and Process Name.

The default Sort order for this list box will be Objective Code
ascending, Process Code ascending.

[Treatment Objective/Process Associated Analytes Group Box]{.underline}:

Items will only be shown in this list if a row is highlighted in the
Objective/Process List. The records listed will be those associated to
the highlighted objective/process pair via the Treatment Objective
Analyte Association (TINTRUNA.) Default sort analyte code ascending,
display 5 rows, maximum number of records 50.

[Protected Fields]{.underline}

*Records displayed*

*XX of XX:* This field will show the total number of rows that are
displayed in the list, which may be less than the number of rows that
met the search criteria.

[List Columns]{.underline}

\[Analyte\] Code, \[Analyte\] Name, Removed/Added Indicator, \[Analyte
Removed\] Measure, \[Analyte Removed Measure\] UOM

If the Removed/Added Indicator equals "R" display "Removed", if equals
"A" display "Added."

[Menu Items:]{.underline}

**File**

*Exit* Selecting **File/Exit** will return the user to the home page*.*

**Edit**

*Add* Selecting **Edit/Add** will display the Unit Treatment
Objective/Process Association Maintenance page in Add mode. This option
will be enabled regardless of a selection in the list box.

*Change* Selecting **Edit/Change** will display the Unit Treatment
Objective/Process Association Maintenance page with the selected record
available for change. This menu item will be enabled only when a record
has been highlighted.

A double-click on a highlighted row will react as an **Edit/Change**
request.

*Delete* The **Edit/Delete** menu item will be enabled only when a
record has been highlighted. If the selected, the software will display
a protected delete confirmation dialog box shown in Exhibit 4-95 for the
selected record.

![](media/image101.png){width="6.104166666666667in"
height="5.416666666666667in"}

[]{#__RefHeading___Toc139687419 .anchor}**Exhibit 4-95.** Delete
Unit-Treatment Objective/Process Association

> When OK is selected the Treatment Objective Process Asgmnt (TINTROPA)
> and all associated Treatment Objective Analyte Association (TINTRUNA)
> records will be deleted. The user will be returned to the
> Unit-Treatment Objective/Process Association Maintenance List with the
> Objective/Process List updated.
>
> When Cancel is pressed no changes will be made and the user will be
> returned to the Unit Treatment Objective/Process Association
> Maintenance List with no updates to the Objective/Process List.

**View**

> *Filter by* Selecting **View/Filter by** will allow the user to filter
> by Unit Type, Unit Name, Primary Indicator, Objective Code, Objective
> Name, Process Code, Process Name. Use of this item will enable the
> **View/Refresh** item.

*Refresh* Selecting **View/Refresh** will retrieve the unfiltered list
(original search criteria). Disabled if list is unfiltered.

> *Sort* Selecting **View/Sort** will invoke the standard Sort window.
> Sorting will be allowed by Unit Type, Unit Name, Primary Indicator,
> Objective Code, Objective Name, Process Code, Process Name.

Three sort levels will be supported.

**Help** Will invoke online Help for this page.

#### Treatment Objective/Process Association Maintenance

Exhibit 4-96 depicts the Treatment Objective/Process Association
Maintenance page.

![](media/image102.png){width="6.493055555555555in" height="4.45in"}

[]{#__RefHeading___Toc139687420 .anchor}**Exhibit 4-96.** Unit Treatment
Objective/Process Association Maintenance

[Protected Fields:]{.underline}

[Water System Group Box:]{.underline}

The Water System group box will contain the following protected fields:
\[Water System\] No., \[Water System\] Name, Federal Type, State Type,
and Federal Primary Source.

[Water System Facility Group Box:]{.underline}

The Water System Facility group box will contain the following protected
fields: State Asgn ID, Name, Water Type, and Local Name.

[Treatment Plant Group Box:]{.underline}

The Treatment Plant group box will contain the following protected
fields: Filter Type.

[Treatment Unit Group Box:]{.underline}

The Treatment Unit group box will contain the following protected
fields: Name, Type, and Subtype. When this page is accessed from the
Treatment Unit Maintenance page the treatment unit will be valued with
the Treatment Unit on the maintenance page and the Go To button will be
disabled.

[Treatment Objective/Process Pairing Group Box:]{.underline}

The Treatment Objective/Process Pairings group box will contain the
following protected fields: Objective Code, Objective Name, Process
Code, Process Name

[Entry fields:]{.underline}

Note that the tab order is left to right, top to bottom, and includes
all entry fields and buttons unless otherwise noted.

*Primary Treatment*

*Indicator Code* A checkbox denoting that this treatment
objective/process pair is the primary treatment process of this unit.

The primary treatment indicator code is optional.

When this indicator is checked the software will determine if another
treatment objective/process is marked as primary for this unit. If
another unit is marked as primary the Primary Confirm dialog box shown
in Exhibit 4-97 will be displayed.

![](media/image103.png){width="4.447916666666667in"
height="1.5833333333333333in"}

[]{#__RefHeading___Toc139687421 .anchor}**Exhibit 4-97.** Primary
Confirm Dialog Box

[Primary Confirm Buttons:]{.underline}

**Continue** Will mark this record as primary and unmark the other
record. This update will occur when the **OK** functionality is invoked.

**Cancel** Will return the user to the Unit Treatment Objective/Process
Association Maintenance page with the primary treatment indicator not
checked.

[Treatment Objective/Process Associated Analytes List
Columns:]{.underline}

The list box in this group box will display associations between
analytes and treatment objective and process pairing (via Treatment
Objective Analyte Association (TINTRUNA)) displayed on the page. Default
sort analyte code, ascending. The list box will display 5 rows at a time
and will display a maximum of 50. This design assumes that there will
never be more than 50 analytes either removed or added associated to a
single treatment objective and process pairing.

[Protected Fields]{.underline}

*Records displayed*

*XX of XX:* This field will show the total number of rows that are
displayed in the list, which may be less than the number of rows that
met the search criteria.

[List Columns:]{.underline}

\[Analtye\] Code, \[Analyte\] Name, Removed/Added Ind, \[Analyte
Removed/Added\] Measure, and \[Analyte Removed/Added Measure\] UOM

[Protected Fields:]{.underline}

*Record updated*

*By/on* The User ID and the timestamp from the last time the record was
updated.

*Record created*

*By/on* The initial User ID and timestamp when the record was initially
added to the database.

[Buttons:]{.underline}

**\[Treatment**

**Unit\] Go To** Will present the Treatment Unit Selection List. When
selected and returned, the software will value the Treatment Unit Name,
Type and Subtype fields. This button will be disabled in change-mode.

**\[Treatment**

**Objective/Process**

**Pairing\] Go To** Will present the Treatment Objective/Process Pairing
Maintenance List in single-select mode. When selected and returned, the
software will value the Objective and Process Codes and Names. This
button will be disabled in change-mode.

**\[Treatment Objective/Process**

**Associated Analyte\]**

**Add**

All functionality of the OK button will be processed. Will display the
Unit Treatment Objective/Process Association Maintenance page in Add
mode. This button will be enabled regardless of a selection in the list
box.

**\[Treatment Objective/Process**

**Associated Analyte\]**

**Change** All functionality of the OK button will be processed. Will
display the Unit Treatment Objective/Process Association Maintenance
page with the selected record available for change. This button will be
enabled only when a record has been highlighted.

A double-click on a highlighted row will react as a Change request.

**\[Treatment Objective/Process**

**Associated Analyte\]**

**Delete** Will be enabled only when a record has been highlighted. When
selected, the software will display a protected delete confirmation
dialog box shown in Exhibit 4-98 for the selected record.

![](media/image104.png){width="5.53125in" height="2.5416666666666665in"}

[]{#__RefHeading___Toc139687422 .anchor}**Exhibit 4-98.** Delete
Treatment Objective/Process Associated Analyte

[Delete Treatment Objective/Process Associated Analyte
Buttons:]{.underline}

> **OK** Delete the requested Unit Treatment Objective/Process
> Associated Analyte record from the Treatment Objective Analyte
> Association (TINTRUNA) table. Will return the user to the Unit
> Treatment Objective/Process Maintenance page with the Associated
> Analytes list updated.

**Cancel** Will abort the delete request and return the user to the Unit
Treatment Objective/Process Association Maintenance page with no
modification.

**OK** The following edit checks will apply to the **OK** button.

*Duplicate Check* If a unit already exists for this treatment plant with
the same objective and process code, the following error message will be
presented: **Duplicate Unit Treatment Objective/Process Association was
found.**

*Add Mode* The Treatment objective/process pairing is required. If it is
not valued, the following error message will be presented: **Treatment
Objective/Process must not be blank.** The objective and process will
also be used to ensure uniqueness within the unit.

If the Treatment Unit Name is blank, the error message will be
**Treatment Unit Name must not be blank.**

Create a record in the Treatment Objective Process Asgmnt (TINTROPA)
table associating to the treatment plant unit and to the valid treatment
objective and process (TINVTOPA).

If the primary indicator is marked an existing association had already
been marked as primary, update the existing association to remove the
primary indicator.

Return to the invoking page.

*Change Mode* Perform all edit checks as Add mode and update the
Treatment Objective Process Asgmnt (TINTROPA) table including last
update timestamp and User ID.

**Cancel** If no changes have been made the page will close and return
the user to the invoking page

> If changes have been made, the standard Cancel Confirm dialog box will
> be presented where a selection of **Yes**, **No**, or **Cancel** will
> be required.

**Help** Will invoke online Help for this page.

#### Analyte-Unit Treatment Objective/Process Maintenance

The Analyte-Unit Treatment Objective/Process Maintenance is accessed by
from the Analyte Treatment Objective/Process List on the Unit Treatment
Objective/Process Maintenance page (Exhibit 4-99).

[Protected Fields:]{.underline}

[Water System Group Box:]{.underline}

The Water System group box will contain the following protected fields:
\[Water System\] No., \[Water System\] Name, Federal Type, State Type,
and Federal Primary Source.

[Water System Facility Group Box:]{.underline}

The Water System Facility group box will contain the following protected
fields: State Asgn ID, Name, Water Type, and Local Name.

[Treatment Plant Group Box:]{.underline}

The Treatment Plant group box will contain the following protected
fields: Filter Type.

[Treatment Unit Group Box:]{.underline}

The Treatment Unit group box will contain the following protected
fields: Name, Type, and Subtype.

[Treatment Objective/Process Group Box:]{.underline}

The Treatment Objective/Process group box will contain the following
protected fields: Objective Code, Objective Name, Process Code, Process
Name.

![](media/image105.png){width="6.493055555555555in" height="4.45in"}

[]{#__RefHeading___Toc139687423 .anchor}**Exhibit 4-99.** Analyte Unit
Treatment Objective/Process Maintenance

[Protected Fields:]{.underline}

*\[Analyte\] Name* The name of the analyte code selected.

*Record updated*

*By/on* The User ID and the timestamp from the last time the record was
updated.

*Record created*

*By/on* The initial User ID and timestamp when the record was initially
added to the database.

[Entry Fields:]{.underline}

Note that the tab order is left to right, top to bottom, and includes
all entry fields and buttons unless otherwise noted.

[Treatment Unit Objective Analyte Association Group Box:]{.underline}

*Analyte* The analyte code for which the result is going to be entered.
If the value input is not a valid analyte, the analyte maintenance list
will be displayed in single-select mode. The analyte maintenance list
will display only analyte codes where the type_code equals "OC," "IOC,"
or "WQ" or where the State Code for the Analyte is not equal to HQ and
its type_code is "OT." When the valid analyte code is found, the analyte
name will be populated.

This is a required field. If it is left blank, the error message will be
**Analyte Code is required field.**

*Removed/Added* This dropdown field will indicate whether the analyte
associated is being removed/inactivated or is being added. The permitted
values are:

\<Spaces\> (default)

R -- Removed/inactivated

A -- Added

This field is optional.

*Measure* The measure associated with the amount of removal or addition
of the analyte for the selected objective/process pairing.

Measure is optional.

*\[Measure\]*

*UOM* The unit of measure (UOM) code for the amount of analyte removal
credited to the treatment unit.

> The unit of measure is optional unless a Measure is supplied. When
> Measure is supplied and UOM is blank, error message will be **UOM is
> required when Measure is provided.**

[Buttons:]{.underline}

**OK** The following edit checks will apply to the **OK** button.

*Duplicate Check* If the Treatment Objective Process is already
associated to the specified Analyte, the error message will be
**Duplicate Analyte Treatment Unit Objective/Process Association was
found.**

*Add Mode* The Analyte is required. If it is not valued, the following
error message will be presented: **Analyte Code is required field.**

Create a record in the Treatment Objective Analyte Association
(TINTRUNA) table associating to the treatment plant unit and the
treatment objective and process and to the analyte. Return to the Unit
Treatment Objective/Process Maintenance page.

*Change Mode* Perform all edit checks as Add mode and update the last
update timestamp and User ID.

**Cancel** If no changes have been made the page will close and return
the user to the Unit Treatment Objective/Process Maintenance page.

> If changes have been made, the standard Cancel Confirm dialog box will
> be presented where a selection of **Yes**, **No**, or **Cancel** will
> be required.

**Help** Will invoke online Help for this page.

#### Treatment Unit Selection List

The Treatment Unit Selection List (Exhibit 4-100) provides a list of
Treatment Units from which a single Treatment Plant can be selected and
returned to the invoking page.

[Treatment Units List Box:]{.underline}

[List Columns:]{.underline}

The page will list the Treatment Unit Name, Type, and Subtype for a
particular Treatment Plant in ascending Name order.

[Protected Fields:]{.underline}

[Water System Group Box:]{.underline}

The Water System group box will contain the following protected fields:
\[Water System\] No., \[Water System\] Name, Federal Type, State Type,
and Federal Primary Source.

![](media/image106.png){width="6.493055555555555in" height="4.45in"}

[]{#__RefHeading___Toc139687424 .anchor}**Exhibit 4-100.** Treatment
Unit Selection List

[Water System Facility Group Box:]{.underline}

The Water System Facility group box will contain the following protected
fields: State Asgn ID, Name, Water Type, and Local Name.

[Treatment Plant Group Box:]{.underline}

The Treatment Plant group box will contain the following protected
fields: Filter Type.

*Number of rows resulting from the search*

*Criteria used:* Will display a count of the number of Treatment Units
defined for the Treatment Plant.

*Number of rows*

*displayed:* Will display the count of rows displayed in the list box
area.

[Menu Items:]{.underline}

**File**

*Exit* Will return to the invoking page with no Treatment Unit returned.

**Edit**

> *Select* Will return to the invoking page with the selected Treatment
> Unit returned. This option will only be available if a selection has
> been made in the list box area.

## Processed Triggered by Changes to Inventory Information

### Federal Type Code Reclassification

When information about a Water System is modified, the Federal Type code
of the water system is evaluated for changes in classification. Triggers
for this process are changes in the following areas:

-   Changes to Population Served such as:

> \-- Addition of new population served.
>
> \-- Change to an existing population served.
>
> \-- Deletion of a population served.
>
> \-- Change to an existing Annual Operating Period.
>
> \-- Deletion of an Annual Operating Period.

-   Changes to Service Connections such as:

> \-- Addition of new Service Connection.
>
> \-- Changes to the number of connections count of an existing service
> connection.
>
> \-- Deletion of an existing Service Connection.

-   Changes to the existing of source-type\* Water System Facilities
    such as:

> \-- The addition of a new Water System Facility that is a source
> type\*.
>
> \-- The deletion or inactivation of a Water System Facility that is a
> source type\*.
>
> \-- A change in the type of a source\* Water System Facility that
> causes it to no longer be a source type\*.
>
> \*Source types are Water System Facilities type codes of (WL, CC, IG,
> IN, NP, NN, RC, RS, SP)

-   Change in status of the Water System to Active status.

-   Change in the Water System Days-Serving-count.

The algorithm for determining the Federal Type Code consists of the
following logic.

*Determine the number of days the water system serves each type of
population.*

A Daily Population Matrix will be built that is 365 X 6. The 365
dimension represents each day of the calendar year (February always has
28 days). The six dimensions represent a total count for each population
type: Residential (daily_total_residential_population count), Transient
(daily_total_transient_population count), Non Transient
(daily_total_nontransient_population count) and Wholesale
(daily_total_wholesale_population count), a daily
total_nonwholesale_population_count (totaling the residential,
transient, and nontransient population counts for each day) and a
daily_total_population count aggregating all four population types for
each day.

For Each AOP that is effective on the current date:

-   Determine the sequential calendar days covered by the AOP start
    month/day through the end month/day. This determines the rows in the
    matrix to be updated with the population served values associated to
    the AOP.

-   For each Population Served associated to the AOP, add the
    average_daily_count to all corresponding sequential calendar days in
    the matrix based upon the population served type where:

> \-- When type = R, add population served average daily count to the
> daily_total_residential_population count,
> daily_total_nonwholesale_population count and the
> daily_total_population count.
>
> \-- When type = NT, add population served average daily count to the
> daily_total_nontransient_population count,
> daily_total_nonwholesale_population count and the
> daily_total_population count.
>
> \-- When type = T, add population served average daily count to the
> daily_total_transient_population count,
> daily_total_nonwholesale_population count and the
> daily_total_population count.
>
> \-- When type = W, add population served average daily count to the
> daily_total_wholesale_population count and the daily_total_population
> count.

-   Determine the highest_60_day_nonwholesale_population count by
    analyzing the daily_nonwholesale_population counts in the matrix.
    Count the number of days each discreet daily_nonwholesale_population
    count appears in the matrix. Set the
    highest_60_day_nonwholesale_population count to the
    daily_nonwholesale_population count associated with the highest
    counted days \> 59. If none appear in the matrix more than 59 days,
    set the value to 0.

Determine Average Daily Population Served for Each Population Type and
Aggregate

To determine the average daily population served for each population
type and for each population aggregate, the software first records the
number of days a given population is served over the year and sums the
number of people in the population type over the year. Then, by dividing
the second by the first, the software will determine the average daily
populations served. The details are as follows:

Using the Daily Population Matrix, determine the calculated days
operating for each population type and number of days operating where
the daily_nonwholesale_population count is \> 24.

-   For each day in the Daily Population Matrix:

> \-- If daily_total_residential_population count \> 0, add +1 to
> residential_days_serving count and add
> daily_total_residential_population count to
> annual_total_residential_population count.
>
> \-- If daily_total_nontransient_population count \> 0, add +1 to
> nontransient_days_serving count and add
> daily_total_nontransient_population count to
> annual_total_nontransient_population count.
>
> \-- If daily_total_transient_population count \> 0, add +1 to
> transient_days_serving count and add daily_total_transient_population
> count to annual_total_transient_population count.
>
> \-- If daily_total_wholesale_population count \> 0, add +1 to
> wholesale_days_serving count and add daily_total_wholesale_population
> count to annual_total_wholesale_population count.
>
> \-- If daily_total_nonwholesale_population count \> 0, add +1 to
> nonwholesale_days_serving count and add
> daily_total_nonwholesale_population count to
> annual_total_nonwholesale_population count.
>
> \-- If daily_total_population count \> 0, add +1 to
> consumer_days_serving count and add daily_total_population_count to
> annual_total_population count.

Calculate daily average populations counts by dividing each annual total
population count by the corresponding days serving count.

Set the water system's d_population_count to the largest of the average
daily population served for nonwholesale populations or the
highest_60_day_nonwholesale_population_count (calculated previously).

*start Service Connection Aggregation*

For Each Service Connection

-   Add Service Connection Category Count to Total Service Connection
    Count

*end Service Connection Aggregation*

*start Regulating Agency Assignment*

Check for existing active association to a Regulating Agency.

*end Regulating Agency Assignment*

Start Source-type Water System Facility Identification

For Each Water System Facility with status code = A and type_code in
(WL, IN, CC, NP, NN IG, RS, RC, SP) (daily_total_residential_population
count)

-   Increment wsf source type count by +1

*End Source-type Water System Facility Identification*

Start of federal type determination

Set to Non Public (NP) when:

-   No Regulating Agency Assignment is found OR

-   No source-type water system facility was found OR

-   Consumer_days_serving count[^1] \< 60 OR

-   Consumer_days_serving count[^2] \> 59 AND total_service_connections
    count \< 15 AND water system's d_population_count \< 25 AND
    daily_average_wholesale_population count = 0).

Set to Community (C) when:

-   If total service connections is \> 0 AND

-   Consumer_days_serving count[^3]= 365 AND

-   Daily_average_residential_population count \> 24.

Set to Non Transient Non Community (NTNC) when:

-   If total service connections is \> 0 AND

-   Consumer_days_serving count[^4] \> 181 AND

-   Daily_average_residential_population count = 0 AND

-   Daily_average_nontransient_population count \> 24 AND

-   Daily_average_wholesale_population count = 0.

Set to Transient Non Community (NC) when any one scenarios is met:

Scenario One

-   Consumer_days_serving count[^5] \> 181 AND

-   Total service connections is \> 14 AND

-   Daily_average_residential_population count = 0 AND

-   Daily_average_nontransient_population count = 0 AND

-   Daily_average_transient_population count \> 0 AND

-   Daily_average_wholesale_population count = 0.

Scenario Two

-   Consumer_days_serving count[^6] \> 181 AND

-   Total service connections is \> 0 but \< 15 AND

-   Daily_average_residential_population count = 0 AND

-   Daily_average_nontransient_population count = 0 AND

-   Daily_average_transient_population count \> 24 AND

-   Daily_average_wholesale_population count = 0.

Scenario Three

-   Consumer_days_serving count[^7] \> 59 but \<182 AND

-   If total service connections is \> 14 AND

-   Daily_average_nonwholesale_population count \> 0 AND

-   Daily_average_wholesale_population count = 0.

Scenario Four

-   Consumer_days_serving count[^8] \> 59 but \<182 AND

-   If total service connections is \> 0 but \< 15 AND

-   Daily_average_nonwholesale_population count \> 24 AND

-   Daily_average_wholesale_population count = 0.

*start of de-minimus trigger conditions executed when type code could
not be determined from above rules.*

If Consumer_days_serving count[^9] = 365

-   If total service connection count = 0

> \-- If wholesale_days_serving count \< 365

-   If residential_days_serving count = 365 and
    daily_average_residential_population count \> 24

    -   Default type code to C, but mark possibility of NTNC, NC, and
        NP.

-   If residential_days_serving count = 365 and
    (daily_average_residential_population count \> 0 but \< 25) AND
    (nontransient_days_serving count = 365 and
    (daily_average_residential_population count +
    daily_average_nontransient_population count)\> 24)

    -   Default type code to NTNC, but mark possibility of C, NC, and
        NP.

-   If residential_days_serving count \< 365 and

> (nontransient_days_serving count = 365 and
> daily_average_nontransient_population count \> 24)

-   Default type code to NTNC, but mark possibility of NC, and NP.

```{=html}
<!-- -->
```
-   If residential_days_serving count \< 365 AND
    (nontransient_days_serving count = 365 and
    daily_average_nontransient_population count \> 0 but \< 25) AND
    (transient_days_serving count = 365 and
    (daily_average_nontransient_population count +
    daily_average_transient_population count) \> 24)

    -   Default type code to NC, but mark possibility of NTNC, and NP.

-   If (residential_days_serving count = 365 and
    daily_average_residential count \> 0 but \< 25) AND
    (nontransient_days_serving count = 365 and
    (daily_average_residential_population count +
    daily_average_nontransient_population count) \< 25) AND
    (transient_days_serving count = 365
    (daily_average_residential_population count +
    daily_average_nontransient_population count +
    daily_average_transient_population count) \> 24

    -   Default type code to NC, but mark possibility of C, NTNC, and
        NP.

    -   If residential_days_serving count \< 365 AND
        (((nontransient_days_serving count = 365 and
        (transient_days_serving count = 365) and
        (daily_average_transient_population count +
        daily_average_nontransient_population count) \> 24) OR
        (nontransient_days_serving count = 365 and
        daily_average_nontransient_population count \> 24) OR
        (transient_days_serving count = 365 and
        daily_average_transient_population count \> 24). Default type
        code to NC, but mark possibility of NP.

> \-- If wholesale_days_serving count = 365

-   Default type code to C, but mark possibility of NTNC, NC, and NP

```{=html}
<!-- -->
```
-   If total service connection count \> 0 and \< 15

> \-- If wholesale_days_serving count \<365

-   If (residential_days_serving count = 365 and
    daily_average_residential_population count \> 0 but \< 25) AND
    (nontransient_days_serving count = 365 and
    (daily_average_residential_population count +
    daily_average_nontransient_population count) \> 24)

    -   Default type code to NTNC, but mark possibility of C.

-   If residential_days_serving count \< 365 AND
    (nontransient_days_serving count = 365 and
    daily_average_nontransient_population \> 0 but \< 25) AND
    (transient_days_serving count = 365 and
    (daily_average_nontransient_population count +
    daily_average_transient_population count) \> 24)

    -   Default type code to NC, but mark possibility of NTNC.

-   If (residential_days_serving_count = 365 and
    daily_average_residential_population count \> 0 but \< 25) AND
    (nontransient_days_serving count = 365 and
    (daily_average_residential_population count +
    daily_average_nontransient_population count \< 25) AND
    (transient_days_serving count = 365 and
    (daily_average_residential_population count +
    daily_average_nontransient_population count+
    daily_average_transient_population count) \> 24)

    -   Default type code to NC, but mark possibility of C, and NTNC.

> \-- If wholesale_days_serving count = 365

-   Default type code to C, but mark possibility of NTNC, NC, and NP.

```{=html}
<!-- -->
```
-   If service connections is \> 14

> \-- If wholesale_days_serving count \< 365
>
> \-- If (residential_days_serving count = 365 and
> nontransient_days_serving count = 365 and transient_days_serving count
> = 365) AND (daily_average_residential_population_count +
> daily_average_nontransient_population count +
> daily_average_transient_population count \< 25)

-   mark possibility of C, NC, NTNC, and NP.

```{=html}
<!-- -->
```
-   End if.

    -   If daily_average_transient_population count \> 0

        -   Default type code to NC.

    -   Else

        -   If daily_average_nontransient_population count \> 0

            -   Default type code to NTNC

        -   else

            -   Default type code to C.

End-if.

End-if.

If Consumer_days_serving count[^10] \> 181

-   If wholesale_days_serving count \< 182

> \-- If total service connection count = 0

-   If (residential_days_serving \> 181) AND nontransient_days_serving
    count \> 181 AND (daily_average_residential_population count +
    daily_average_nontransient_population) count \> 24

    -   Mark possibility of C, NC, NTNC, and NP

    -   If default type code is = C

        -   Make no change

    -   Otherwise

        -   Change default to NTNC

-   If residential_days_serving count \< 182 AND
    nontransient_days_serving count \> 181 AND
    daily_average_nontransient_population count \> 24

    -   Mark possibility of C, NC, NTNC, and NP

    -   If default type code is = C

        -   Make no change

    -   Otherwise

        -   Change default to NTNC

-   If residential_days_serving count \< 182 AND
    nontransient_days_serving count \> 181 AND
    daily_average_nontransient_population count \< 25 AND
    transient_days_serving count \> 181 AND
    (daily_average_nontransient_population count +
    daily_average_transient_population count) \> 24

    -   Mark possibility of NC, NTNC, and NP

    -   If default type code is = spaces or NP or NC

        -   Set default to NC

    -   Else

        -   Set default to NTNC.

-   If (days_serving_residential count \> 181 and
    average_daily_residential_population count \< 25) AND
    (days_serving_nontransient count \> 181 and
    (average_daily_residential_population count +
    average_daily_nontransient_population count) \< 25) AND
    (days_serving_transient_population count \> 181 and
    (average_daily_residential_population count +
    average_daily_nontransient_population_count +
    average_daily_transient_population count) \> 24)

    -   Mark possibility of C, NC, NTNC, and NP

    -   If default type code is = spaces or NP or NC

        -   Set default to NC

    -   Else

        -   Set default to NTNC.

> \-- If total service connection count \> 0

-   If (days_serving_residential count \> 181 AND
    daily_average_residential_population count \> 24) OR
    (days_serving_residential_population count \> 181 AND
    days_serving_nontransient count \> 181 AND
    (daily_average_residential_population count +
    daily_average_nontransient_population count) \> 24)

    -   Mark possibility of C, and NTNC.

    -   If default type code = C

        -   Make no change

    -   otherwise

        -   Change default to NTNC

-   If (days_serving_residential count \< 182) AND
    (days_serving_nontransient count \> 181 and
    daily_average_nontransient_population count \< 25) AND
    (days_serving_transient count \> 181 AND
    (daily_average_nontransient_population count +
    daily_average_transient_population count) \> 24)

    -   Mark possibility of NC, and NTNC.

    -   If default type code is = spaces or NP or NC

        -   Set default to NC.

    -   Else

        -   Set default to NTNC

-   If (days_serving_residential count\> 181 and
    daily_average_residential_population count \< 25) AND
    (days_serving_nontransient count \> 181 and
    (daily_average_residential_population count + daily_average
    nontransient_population count) \< 25) AND
    (days_serving_transient_count \> 181 and
    (daily_average_residential_population count +
    daily_average_nontransient_population_count +
    daily_average_transient_count) \> 24)

    -   Mark possibility of C, NC, and NTNC.

    -   If default type code is = spaces or NP

        -   Change default to NC.

    -   Else

        -   No change.

> \-- If total service connection count \> 14

-   If (days_serving_residential count \> 181 and
    days_serving_nontransient count \> 181 and
    days_serving_transient_count \> 181 and
    (daily_average_residential_population count +
    daily_average_nontransient_population count +
    daily_average_transient population count) \< 25)

    -   Mark possibility of C, NC, NTNC, and NP.

    -   If daily_average_residential_population count \> 0

        -   Set default to C

    -   If daily_average_nontransient_population count \> 0

        -   Mark possibility of NTNC.

    -   Else

        -   Set default to NC

        -   

```{=html}
<!-- -->
```
-   If wholesale_days_serving_count \> 0

> \-- Mark possibility of C, NC, NTNC, and NP.
>
> \-- If default type code = C

-   Make no change

> \-- otherwise

-   Change default to NTNC

If daily_average_wholesale_population count = 0

-   If (days_serving_residential count \> 181 and
    days_serving_nontransient count \> 181 and
    (daily_average_residential_population count +
    daily_average_nontransient_population count) \> 24

> \-- If total service connection count = 0

-   Mark possibility of C, NC, NTNC and NP.

-   If default type code = C

    -   Make no change

-   otherwise

    -   Change default to NTNC

> \-- If total service connection count \> 0

-   Mark possibility of C, and NTNC.

-   If default type code = C

    -   Make no change

-   otherwise

    -   Change default to NTNC

```{=html}
<!-- -->
```
-   If (days_serving_residential count \< 182) AND
    (days_serving_nontransient count \> 181 and
    daily_average_nontransient_population count \< 25) and water system
    d_population_served_count \> 24

> \-- If total service connection count = 0

-   Mark possibility of NC, NTNC, and NP.

-   If default type code = spaces or NP or NC

    -   Change default to NC

-   Else

    -   Change default to NTNC

> \-- If total service connection count \> 0

-   Mark possibility of NC, and NTNC.

-   If default type code = space of NP

    -   Change default to NC

-   ELSE

    -   No change.

```{=html}
<!-- -->
```
-   If total more than 181 residential population count = 0 AND total
    more than 181 non transient population count \> 24 AND total service
    connection count = 0

    -   Mark possibility of NC, NTNC, and NP.

    -   If default type code = C

        -   Make no change

    -   otherwise

        -   Change default to NTNC

-   If (days_serving_residential count \> 181 and
    daily_average_residential_population count \< 25) AND
    (days_serving_nontransient count \> 181 and
    daily_average_nontransient_population count \< 25) AND
    ((daily_average_residential_population count +
    daily_average_nontransient_population count) \< 25) AND water
    system's d_population_served_count \> 25

    -   If total service connection count = 0

        -   Mark possibility of NC, NTNC, and NP.

        -   If default type code = space or NP

            -   Change default to NC

    -   If total service connection count \> 0

        -   Mark possibility of C, NC, and NTNC.

        -   If default type code = space of NP

            -   Change default to NC

*End \> 181 evaluation*

*Start \> 59 evaluation*

-   If days_serving_wholesale count \< 60

    -   If total service connection count = 0 AND
        (days_serving_residential count \> 59 and
        daily_average_residential_population count \> 24) OR
        ((days_serving_residential_count \> 59 and
        days_serving_nontransient count \> 59) and
        (daily_average_residential_population count +
        daily_average_nontransient_population count) \> 25)) OR
        (days_serving_residential count \> 59 and
        days_serving_nontransient count \> 59 and days_serving_transient
        count \> 59 and (daily_average_residential_population count +
        daily_average_nontransient_population count +
        daily_average_transient_population count) \> 24) OR
        (days_serving_nontransient count \> 59 and
        daily_average_nontransient_population count \> 24) OR
        (days_serving_transient count \> 59 and
        daily_average_transient_population count \> 24) OR
        (days_serving_nontransient count \> 59 and
        days_serving_transient count \> 59 and
        (daily_average_transient_population count +
        daiy_average_nontransient_population count) \> 24) OR
        (days_serving_residential count \> 59 and days_serving_transient
        count \> 59 and (daiy_average_residential_population count +
        daiy_average_transient_population count) \> 24) more than 59
        combined residential, transient and non transient count \> 24

        -   Mark possibility of NC, and NP

            -   Change default to NC

-   If days_serving_wholesale count \> 59

    -   Mark possibility of NC, and NP

    -   -   Change default to NC

*End \> 59 evaluation*

If at the completion of the De Minimus evaluation, no federal type
possibilities have been marked, turn them all on as possibilities so
that the user can make the best selection. (C.4.3.1.g)

*End of De Minimus evaluations.*

If the federal type was determined (not defaulted using De Minimums
rules), the water system is updated as follows:

-   A new water system history record is created

-   The d_pws_federal_type_code is set to the determined value

-   The d_population_served_count is set to the value as indicated above

-   The d_userid_code, d_lastupdate_timestamp, and d_last
    inventory_update_timestamp are set to current values

If, after performing the above process, a change to the Federal Type
Code is determined, the results are presented on the Water System Type
Maintenance page (Exhibit 4-101).

[Protected Fields]{.underline}:

*Water System Group Box* The No., Name, Activity Status, and Number of
Active Source of Water (total active water system facilities of type
(IN, CC, NP, SP, RS, WL, IG, RC), Days Serving, Population Served, Total
Service Connections.

[Water System Parameters]{.underline}

*Total Residential*

*Population Count* The calculated days serving a residential population
and the average daily residential population count.

*Total Non Transient*

*Population Count* The calculated days serving a nontransient population
and the average daily nontransient population count.

*Total Transient*

*Population Count* The calculated days serving a transient population
and the average daily transient population count.

*Total Wholesale*

*Population Count* The calculated days serving a wholesale population
and the average daily wholesale population count.

*Total Population Count* The calculated days serving any population and
the average daily total population count (sum of all four population
types.)

*Federal Water System*

*Type* The type of water system based on federal statute and regulation.

*State Water System*

*Type* The type of water system assigned to the current system by the
primacy agency.

  ----------------------------------------------------- -----------------------------------------------------
  ![](media/image78.png){width="2.3027777777777776in"   ![](media/image107.png){width="4.896527777777778in"
  height="6.248611111111111in"}                         height="6.127083333333333in"}

  ----------------------------------------------------- -----------------------------------------------------

[]{#__RefHeading___Toc139687425 .anchor}**Exhibit 4-101.** Water System
Type Maintenance

[Buttons:]{.underline}

**Change State Type** Will present the Water System State Type dialog
(Exhibit 4-102) where a new State Water System Type can be selected. The
current value will be presented.

The drop-down list will present the values defined by the System
Administrator in the permitted values table with code name =
"STPWSTYPCD".

> ![](media/image108.png){width="4.947916666666667in"
> height="1.8229166666666667in"}

[]{#__RefHeading___Toc139687426 .anchor}**Exhibit 4-102.** Water System
State Type

> [Buttons:]{.underline}
>
> **OK** Will close the dialog and update the water system as follows:

-   The pws_state_type_code is set to the selected value.

-   The d_userid_code, and_lastupdate_timestamp, are set to current
    values

> The page will return to the Water System Type Maintenance page with
> the State Water System Type updated to the newly selected value.
>
> **Cancel** Will close the dialog and have no changes on the water
> system's state water system type code. The page will return to the
> Water System Type Maintenance page.

**OK** Will close the page and return to the Water System Modification
page. This button should have focus when the page is presented.

**Help** Will invoke the online system Help facility.

If the federal type code was defaulted using the De Minimus rules, the
results are presented on the Water System Type Selection dialog box
(Exhibit 4-103**)**.

> ![](media/image109.png){width="4.291666666666667in"
> height="3.6770833333333335in"}

[]{#__RefHeading___Toc139687427 .anchor}**Exhibit 4-103.** Water System
Type Selection

> The default type will be pre-selected for the Federal PWS Type. The
> State Type will present its current value and can be changed. The
> Federal PWS Type radio buttons of Community, Non Transient Non
> Community, Transient Non Community, and Non Public are only available
> if the De Minimus processing rules identified that type code as being
> a possible valid value for this water system. If the possibility flag
> was not marked "On" for the type code, the radio button will be
> disabled.
>
> [Buttons:]{.underline}
>
> **OK** If the Federal PWS Type is not selected, the error message will
> be **The Federal Type cannot be blank.** Otherwise both values will be
> updated to the water system as follows:

-   A new water system history record is created.

-   The d_pws_federal_type_code is set to the selected value.

-   The pws_state_type_code is set to the selected value.

-   The d_userid_code, d_lastupdate_timestamp, and d_last
    inventory_update_timestamp are set to current values.

> The dialog will close and return to the Water System Type Maintenance
> page.

### TCR Sample Schedule Evaluation

When information about a Water System is modified, it may trigger a
change in the TCR monitoring requirement that drives the TCR sample
scheduling. The change triggers are:

-   Changes in annual operating period or population that cause the
    WATER SYSTEM d_population_served_count to change.

-   Changes in the total count of service connection categories.

-   Changes in the water system's federal PWS type.

-   Change in the water system's federal primary source code.

-   Change in the water system's status code.

-   Change in the water system's all groundwater protected
    (d_protectd_gw_indctr_code)

-   Change in the water system's days_serving_count (which may cause the
    WATER SYSTEM d_population_served_count to change).

-   Change in any of the following fields of the water system. The
    values in the fields are state-defined.

> \-- D_last_tcr_mcl_violation_date.
>
> \-- D_disinfected_gw_indctr_code.
>
> \-- D_sw_or_gudi_filtered_indctr_code.
>
> \-- Last_sanitary_survey_date.

If such a change has occurred significant enough to warrant a change in
the TCR sample schedule monitoring, the TCR Sample Schedule Modification
page (Exhibit 4-104**)** will be presented so that the user may make a
decision to accept or reject the proposed system changes to TCR Sample
Scheduling.

  ----------------------------------------------------- -------------------------------------------------------
  ![](media/image78.png){width="1.6868055555555554in"   ![](media/image110.png){width="5.928472222222222in"
  height="5.254166666666666in"}                         height="5.2875in"}

  ----------------------------------------------------- -------------------------------------------------------

[]{#__RefHeading___Toc139687428 .anchor}**Exhibit 4-104.** TCR Sample
Schedule Modification

The following text appears at the top of the page:

*Inventory changes indicate that the current, routine TCR schedule for
this water system, which is shown in the first group box below, should
be changed. (If there is no data in the first group box, there is no
current, routine TCR schedule for the system. The proposed new, routine
TCR schedule is shown in the second group box. (If there is no data, the
software is proposing that the system no longer needs a TCR schedule.)*

*If you do not want to close the current schedule and/or create a new
one, click on the "Make No Changes" button.*

*If you do want to close the current schedule and create a new one,
change any of the following default values you want and then click on
the Make Changes Indicated button:*

-   *the End Date for the current schedule.*

-   *the Begin Date and End Date for the new schedule.*

-   *the routine TCR monitoring requirement for the new schedule.*

-   *the Seasonal Period for the new schedule.*

Current Routine TCR Schedule - Desired Changes Group Box:

When the software flows to this page after a user has inactivated a PWS
or a PWS has been reclassified from a PWS to a Non-public or after the
user has made sufficient changes that suggest a different monitoring
requirement is appropriate, this group box will be populated with the
TCR schedule that is current for the water system, but will provide a
suggested End date for the schedule in accordance with the following
rules:

-   The day prior to the begin date of the proposed schedule, if one
    present.

-   The last day of the current monitoring period.

-   The day prior to the begin date if this is a future schedule.

All fields in this group box except for Effective Period End date will
be protected.

When the software flows to this page after a user has added a new water
system, this group box will probably be empty because there will not be
a current routine TCR schedule for the water system. (It is possible
that a water system could go from PWS to Non-public and then back to a
PWS in a matter of a few days or even on the same day, in which case
there may be a current, routine schedule.)

[Protected Fields:]{.underline}

*Samples Required* All four of the Samples Required fields will be
protected, displaying the current TCR routine monitoring requirement for
the current water system if one exists.

*Seasonal Period* All four of the Seasonal Period fields will be
protected, displaying the seasonal period values for the current TCR,
routine schedule for the current water system if one exists.

*\[Effective Period\]*

*Begin* The \[Effective Period\] Begin date field also will be
protected, displaying the Begin date for current TCR routine schedule
for the current water system if one exists.

Comments The comments field from the current TCR Sample Schedule
remarks_text field.

Viewing Schedule

xx of xx This line displays the number of schedules to be presented for
review and which schedule change in the sequence it currently presented.

[Entry Fields:]{.underline}

*\[Effective Period\]*

*End* Optional field for the current, routine, TCR schedule end date.
The default for this field will be the End date determined as documented
in text above.

> If this field is changed, as the user tabs off this field, check that
> this date is not prior to the Effective Period Begin date for the
> current schedule. If the Effective Period End date is prior to the
> Effective Period Begin date, provide exit state error message: **The
> End date must be the same as or after the Begin date for this same
> schedule.** (Return the cursor to the \[Effective Period\] End date
> field.)
>
> If there is no current, routine, TCR schedule for the water system,
> protect this field.

Desired New TCR Schedule Group Box:

When the software flows to the TCR Sample Schedule Modification page
after a user has inactivated a PWS, no new, routine, TCR schedule is
proposed (i.e., all the fields in this group box will be blank).
However, a user can optionally enter data to create a new, TCR schedule
in the same way a user can create a new schedule from the existing TCR
Sample Schedule Maintenance page. If a user desires to create a new
schedule, the following fields must be supplied: all four Samples
Required fields (i.e., a monitoring requirement record), Start
Month/Day, End Month/Day and \[Effective Period\] Begin.

When the software flows to this page after a user has added a new Water
System (public or non public) for which TCR Monitoring has been
determined, this group box will be populated with the TCR schedule that
the software currently determines is appropriate except that the
proposed \[Effective Period\] Begin date will be determined by the
following rules:

-   The first day of the following monitoring period rather than
    1/1/1991.

-   The day following the end of an existing temporary routine (TR) TCR
    schedule.

When the software flows to this page after the user has made an
inventory change that indicates a different monitoring requirement is
appropriate, this group box will be populated with the TCR schedule that
the software currently determines is appropriate.

[Entry Fields:]{.underline}

*Samples Required* To create a new schedule, the user must supply data
in all four fields (two enterable field and two selectable lists) or
select a monitoring requirement directly by clicking on the **Go To**
button. The fields allow entry of a sample count, sample type, and
periodicity (the last two fields together define periodicity). Clicking
on the **Go To** button will display the Monitoring Requirement
Maintenance List to allow the selection or addition of a total Coliform
monitoring requirement.

*\[Sample Count\]* An enterable numeric field.

*\[Sample Type\]* A selectable list with the following permitted values:

> RT Routine
>
> TR Temporary Routine
>
> SP Special
>
> OT Other

*\[Number of Periods\]* An enterable numeric field.

*\[Periodicity\]* A selectable list with the following permitted values
in the order listed:

> MN Monthly
>
> QT Quarterly
>
> YR Yearly
>
> As the user tabs off the last Samples Required field, an exit state
> error message will indicate if the specified Monitoring Requirement
> does not exist for total Coliform. Clicking **OK** on the exit state
> error message will display the Monitoring Requirement Maintenance
> List, which will only display monitoring requirements for total
> Coliform. From this list page, the user can select an existing
> monitoring requirement for total Coliform. (Do not allow the user to
> create new monitoring requirements from this page.) Total Coliform
> monitoring requirements also can be listed by pressing on the **Go
> To** button.

*Seasonal Period* The four seasonal period enterable fields are all
optional unless any one is provided a value. If a value is supplied for
any field, then all four fields become required. End Month/Day can be
earlier than Start Month/Day, which indicates the seasonal period
crosses over the calendar year (e.g., October 1 to 31 March).

*Seasonal Period*

*Start Month* An optional, enterable numeric field indicating the
starting month of the seasonal period. Valid values are 1-12.

*Seasonal Period*

*Start Day* An optional, enterable numeric field indicating the starting
day of the starting month seasonal period. Valid values are 1-31,
dependent upon the seasonal period starting month.

*Seasonal Period*

*End Month* An optional, enterable numeric field indicating the ending
month of the seasonal period. Valid values are 1-12. Month less than
start month indicates seasonal period crossing over the year.

*Seasonal Period*

*End Day* An optional, enterable numeric field indicating the ending day
of the end month seasonal period. Valid values are 1-31, dependent upon
the seasonal period end month.

All four of the Seasonal Period fields are to function the same way they
function on the TCR Sample Schedule Maintenance page in ADD mode.

Effective Period Group Box:

*\[Effective Period\]*

*Begin* Specifies the begin date for the new TCR schedule. Edit checks
for date will be done later when the user clicks the **Make Changes
Indicated** button. A calendar function will allow the user to more
easily enter a date for this field.

*\[Effective Period\]*

*End* Optional field for the Sample Schedule end date. A calendar
function will allow the user to more easily enter a date for this field.

> This field may be changed. If this field is changed, as the user tabs
> off this field, check that this date is not prior to the Effective
> Period Begin date. If the Effective Period Begin date is not valued,
> provide exit state error message: **The Effective Period Begin date
> must be specified to create a Schedule.** (Return the cursor to the
> Effective Period Begin date.) If the Effective Period End date is
> prior to the Effective Period Begin date, provide this exit state
> error message: **The Effective Period End date must be the same as or
> after the Effective Period Begin date.** (Return the cursor to the
> Effective Period End date.)

[Menu Icons:]{.underline}

![](media/image111.png){width="0.22361111111111112in"
height="0.22361111111111112in"} Clicking on this icon will invoke the
Water System Information page, which will display basic inventory
information for the water system.

![](media/image112.png){width="0.22361111111111112in"
height="0.22361111111111112in"} Clicking on this icon will invoke the
Display Points of Contact page, which will display a protected list of
legal entities and individuals (such as operators, engineers, etc.)
associated with the water system.

![](media/image113.png){width="0.22361111111111112in"
height="0.22361111111111112in"} Clicking on this icon will invoke the
Historical Sampling Information page, which will display protected
information on samples collected for the current water system.

[Tab Sequence:]{.underline}

\[Sample Count\], \[Sample Type\], \[Number of Periods\],
\[Periodicity\], Monitoring Requirement **Go To** button, \[Start
Month\], \[Start Day\], \[End Month\], \[End Day\], \[Effective Period\]
Begin, \[Effective Period\] End, **Prev** button**, Next** button**,
Make NO Changes** button, **Make Changes Indicated** button, **Help**
button.

[Buttons:]{.underline}

\[Monitoring

Requirement\] **Go To** Pressing this button will invoke the Monitoring
Requirement Maintenance List displaying only monitoring requirements for
Analyte Code 3100 and whose Sample Type is "RT."

**Prev** If multiple schedule changes were identified by the automatic
process, usually in the case of multiple annual operating periods, the
**PREV** button will allow the user to scroll backward and see the
previous Water System Schedule suggestion. This button will only be
enabled if there is more than one schedule suggestion to review and if
the user has already scrolled forward at least one selection. The
suggestion number will decrement to show the schedule suggestion being
viewed. Once the action of **Make No Changes** or **Make Changes
Indicated** has been made for the suggested schedule, it will no longer
be available for display.

**Next** If multiple schedule changes were identified by the automatic
process, usually in the case of multiple annual operating periods, the
**Next** button will allow the user to scroll forward and see the next
system suggestion. This button will only be enabled if there is more
than one schedule suggestion to review and if the user is not currently
viewing the last selection. The suggestion number will increment to show
the schedule suggestion being viewed. Once the action of **Make No
Changes** or **Make Changes Indicated** has been made for the suggested
schedule, it will no longer be available for display.

**Make No Changes** The software will make no changes to the current,
TCR, routine schedule (if one exists) nor will it create the indicated
new TCR schedule. If this is the only schedule change suggestion or the
last schedule change suggestion, it will then flow to the next page in
the current process flow. If there is another schedule change suggestion
it will be presented for review. Once this button is selected for the
suggested schedule change, that schedule change will no longer be
available for scrolling and the number of items to be reviewed will be
decremented by one.

**Make Changes**

**Indicated** When the Effective Period End date of the current routine
TCR Schedule is set to the day prior to the Effective Period Begin date
because the begin date is in the future, the future schedule will be
deleted from the database.

When there is a current, routine schedule displayed as well as a new,
routine schedule (routine means Sample Type RT or TR), the software will
perform a routine overlap check between the two schedules on the page as
well as between the new proposed schedule and other, existing, routine
schedules for the water system.

> *(Developer's Note: routine means Sample Type RT or TR---be sure to
> omit the existing schedule displayed on the page from this second
> check.)*
>
> If the new, proposed schedule overlaps the displayed, current,
> schedule (using the TCR Schedule overlap criteria specified in Chapter
> 7), present exit state information message: **The proposed new
> schedule will overlap the changed current schedule. Either change the
> End date of the current schedule or the Begin date of the new schedule
> and/or adjust the Seasonal Period of the new schedule.** On pressing
> **OK**, return the cursor to the \[Effective Period\] Begin date field
> for the new, proposed schedule.

If the new, proposed schedule overlaps another routine schedule for the
same water system, present exit state information message: **The
proposed new schedule will overlap another routine schedule for this
water system. Use Monitoring to review the TCR schedules for this water
system to determine appropriate actions.** On pressing **OK**, return
the cursor to the \[Effective Period\] Begin date field for the new,
proposed schedule. In this situation, the user can either select the
**Make No Changes** button or make the necessary changes to the proposed
sample schedule and try the **Make Changes Indicated** button again. If
further investigation is needed into the conflicting TCR sample
schedule, the user should investigate existing TCR sample schedules
using the Monitoring menu item from the *SDWIS/STATE Home Page*, leaving
this page available for return. After making changes utilizing the TCR
Sample Schedule Maintenance Page, the user can return to this page and
try the **Make Changes Indicated** button again.

> If this is the only schedule change selection or the last schedule
> change selection, the system will flow to the next page. If there is
> another schedule change suggestion, it will be presented for review.
> Once this button is selected for the suggested schedule change, that
> schedule change will no longer be available for scrolling and the
> number of items to be reviewed will be decremented by one.
>
> *(Developer's Note: When creating a new TCR Sample Schedule, the
> Initial MP Begin Date should be set to null if no value is provided.)
> (R0085:A.4.3.2.a)*

**Help** Will invoke the system online Help facility.

### Water System Information

The Water System Information page (Exhibit 4-105) is a display-only
synopsis of water system information.

[Protected Fields:]{.underline}

*Water System No.* The Water System No.

*Name* The Water System name.

*Local Name* The Water System local name.

*Alt State No.* The Water System alternate state number.

*Op Cat Code* The Water System operating category code.

*Owner Type* The Water System owner type code.

*Fed PWS Type* The Water System Federal type code from
d_pws_federal_type_code.

*State PWS Type* The Water System State type code from
d_pws_state_type_code.

*Population Count* The highest average population for the Water System
retrieved from the d_population_count.

*Days Serving 25+* The days serving a population over 25 count retrieved
from the Water System days_serving_25_count.

  ----------------------------------------------------- -----------------------------------------------------
  ![](media/image78.png){width="2.3027777777777776in"   ![](media/image114.png){width="4.895833333333333in"
  height="5.427777777777778in"}                         height="5.413194444444445in"}

  ----------------------------------------------------- -----------------------------------------------------

[]{#__RefHeading___Toc139687429 .anchor}**Exhibit 4-105.** Water System
Information

*Fed Source Type* The Water System federal primary water source code
from d_fed_primary_source_code.

*State Source Type* The Water System state primary water source code
from d_state_primary_source_code.

*All GW Protected?* When checked, indicates that all groundwater is
protected.

*Activity Status* The current status of the Water System.

*Status Date* The date that the Water System entered the displayed
activity status.

*Extra Date 1* The use of this field will be controlled by the user.
This field date will be retrieved from the "LAST_SNTY_SRV_DT" (Last
Sanitary Survey Date with no Defects) field of the TINWSYS table. The
label for this field will be retrieved from the TINPVALS table where
TINCODE code name = "TINWSXDT1."

*Extra Indicator 1* The use of this field will be controlled by the
user. This field will be retrieved from the "D_DSNFCT_GW_IND_CD"
(Disinfected Groundwater Indicator) field of the TINWSYS table. The
label for this field will be retrieved from the TINPVALS table where
TINCODE code name = "TINWSXIN1."

*Extra Date 2* The use of this field will be controlled by the user.
This date will be retrieved from the "D_LAST_TCR_VIO_DT" (Last TCR
Violation Date) field of the TINWSYS table. The label for this field
will be retrieved from the TINPVALS table where TINCODE code name =
"TINWSXDT2."

*Extra Indicator* The use of this field will be controlled by the user.
This field will be retrieved from the "D_SW_OR_GUDI_FILTER_INDCTOR_CODE"
(Surface Water or Groundwater UDI Filtered Indicator) field of the
TINWSYS table. The label for this field from the TINPVALS table where
TINCODE code name = "TINWSXIN2."

*Comments* The comments documented with the water system.

*Principal City*

*Served* The principal city served by the Water System retrieved from
the d_principal_city_served_name.

*Populations Served* A list box of the Water System's Annual Operating
Periods and their Population Served records.

*Service Connections* A list box of the Water System's Service
Connection Categories.

*Active Sources*

*of Water* A list box of water system facilities for the Water System
that are in active status and that are a source-type facility.
(Determined when the WSF type code is one of the TINPVALS table text
values where TINCODE code_name = WSFSRCTYPE.) The list box will list the
WSF State Asgn ID, Name, and Type in ascending WSF State Asgn ID order.

*Regulating Agency*

*Assignments* A list box of Regulating Agencies to which the Water
System has an active association. The list box will display the Name of
the regulating agency in ascending order.

*History* A list box of the water system's history of changes which will
contain the following fields from entity WATER_SYSTEM_HISTORY (table
TINWASH): Name, Activity Status, Status Date, History Ind Code, Fed
Source, Fed PWS Type, Population Count, Days Serving, Owner Type,
Activity Reason Text.

> The Water System History records will be presented in descending
> Internal System No. order so that the most recent change appears first
> on the list.

[Buttons:]{.underline}

**OK** Will close the page and return to the invoking page.

[^1]: ^1^

[^2]: ^1^

[^3]: ^1^

[^4]: ^1^

[^5]: ^1^

[^6]: ^1^ When the water system's days_serving_count is not null, it
    will be used in place of the calculated consumer_days_serving_count.

[^7]: ^1^

[^8]: ^1^

[^9]: ^1^

[^10]: ^1^ When the water system's days_serving_count is not null, it
    will be used in place of the calculated consumer_days_serving_count.